Tag: AWS Lambda facts and summaries

Posted on

AWS Certification Exam Prep: DynamoDB Facts, Summaries and Questions/Answers.

DynamoDB

AWS Certification Exam Prep: DynamoDB facts and summaries, AWS DynamoDB Top 10 Questions and Answers Dump

Definition 1: Amazon DynamoDB is a fully managed proprietary NoSQL database service that supports key-value and document data structures and is offered by Amazon.com as part of the Amazon Web Services portfolio. DynamoDB exposes a similar data model to and derives its name from Dynamo, but has a different underlying implementation. Dynamo had a multi-master design requiring the client to resolve version conflicts and DynamoDB uses synchronous replication across multiple datacenters for high durability and availability.

Definition 2: DynamoDB is a fast and flexible non-relational database service for any scale. DynamoDB enables customers to offload the administrative burdens of operating and scaling distributed databases to AWS so that they don’t have to worry about hardware provisioning, setup and configuration, throughput capacity planning, replication, software patching, or cluster scaling.

Amazon DynamoDB explained

  • Fully Managed
  • Fast, consistent Performance
  • Fine-grained access control
  • Flexible
Amazon DynamoDB explained
Amazon DynamoDB explained

AWS DynamoDB Facts and Summaries

  1. Amazon DynamoDB is a low-latency NoSQL database.
  2. DynamoDB consists of Tables, Items, and Attributes
  3. DynamoDb supports both document and key-value data models
  4. DynamoDB Supported documents formats are JSON, HTML, XML
  5. DynamoDB has 2 types of Primary Keys: Partition Key and combination of Partition Key + Sort Key (Composite Key)
  6. DynamoDB has 2 consistency models: Strongly Consistent / Eventually Consistent
  7. DynamoDB Access is controlled using IAM policies.
  8. DynamoDB has fine grained access control using IAM Condition parameter dynamodb:LeadingKeys to allow users to access only the items where the partition key vakue matches their user ID.
  9. DynamoDB Indexes enable fast queries on specific data columns
  10. DynamoDB indexes give you a different view of your data based on alternative Partition / Sort Keys.
  11. DynamoDB Local Secondary indexes must be created when you create your table, they have same partition Key as your table, and they have a different Sort Key.
  12. DynamoDB Global Secondary Index Can be created at any time: at table creation or after. They have a different partition Key as your table and a different sort key as your table.
  13. A DynamoDB query operation finds items in a table using only the primary Key attribute: You provide the Primary Key name and a distinct value to search for.
  14. A DynamoDB Scan operation examines every item in the table. By default, it return data attributes.
  15. DynamoDB Query operation is generally more efficient than a Scan.
  16. With DynamoDB, you can reduce the impact of a query or scan by setting a smaller page size which uses fewer read operations.
  17. To optimize DynamoDB performance, isolate scan operations to specific tables and segregate them from your mission-critical traffic.
  18. To optimize DynamoDB performance, try Parallel scans rather than the default sequential scan.
  19. To optimize DynamoDB performance: Avoid using scan operations if you can: design tables in a way that you can use Query, Get, or BatchGetItems APIs.
  20. When you scan your table in Amazon DynamoDB, you should follow the DynamoDB best practices for avoiding sudden bursts of read activity.
  21. DynamoDb Provisioned Throughput is measured in Capacity Units.
    • 1 Write Capacity Unit = 1 x 1KB Write per second.
    • 1 Read Capacity Unit = 1 x 4KB Strongly Consistent Read Or 2 x 4KB Eventually Consistent Reads per second. Eventual consistent reads give us the maximum performance with the read operation.
  22. What is the maximum throughput that can be provisioned for a single DynamoDB table?
    DynamoDB is designed to scale without limits. However, if you want to exceed throughput rates of 10,000 write capacity units or 10,000 read capacity units for an individual table, you must Contact AWS to increase it.
    If you want to provision more than 20,000 write capacity units or 20,000 read capacity units from a single subscriber account, you must first contact AWS to request a limit increase.
  23. Dynamo Db Performance: DAX is a DynamoDB-compatible caching service that enables you to benefit from fast in-memory performance for demanding applications.
    • As an in-memory cache, DAX reduces the response times of eventually-consistent read workloads by an order of magnitude, from single-digit milliseconds to microseconds
    • DAX improves response times for Eventually Consistent reads only.
    • With DAX, you point your API calls to the DAX cluster instead of your table.
    • If the item you are querying is on the cache, DAX will return it; otherwise, it will perform and Eventually Consistent GetItem operation to your DynamoDB table.
    • DAX reduces operational and application complexity by providing a managed service that is API compatible with Amazon DynamoDB, and thus requires only minimal functional changes to use with an existing application.
    • DAX is not suitable for write-intensive applications or applications that require Strongly Consistent reads.
    • For read-heavy or bursty workloads, DAX provides increased throughput and potential operational cost savings by reducing the need to over-provision read capacity units. This is especially beneficial for applications that require repeated reads for individual keys.
  24. Dynamo Db Performance: ElastiCache
    • In-memory cache sits between your application and database
    • 2 different caching strategies: Lazy loading and Write Through: Lazy loading only caches the data when it is requested
    • Elasticache Node failures are not fatal, just lots of cache misses
    • Avoid stale data by implementing a TTL.
    • Write-Through strategy writes data into cache whenever there is a change to the database. Data is never stale
    • Write-Through penalty: Each write involves a write to the cache. Elasticache node failure means that data is missing until added or updated in the database.
    • Elasticache is wasted resources if most of the data is never used.
  25. Time To Live (TTL) for DynamoDB allows you to define when items in a table expire so that they can be automatically deleted from the database. TTL is provided at no extra cost as a way to reduce storage usage and reduce the cost of storing irrelevant data without using provisioned throughput. With TTL enabled on a table, you can set a timestamp for deletion on a per-item basis, allowing you to limit storage usage to only those records that are relevant.
  26. DynamoDB Security: DynamoDB uses the CMK to generate and encrypt a unique data key for the table, known as the table key. With DynamoDB, AWS Owned, or AWS Managed CMK can be used to generate & encrypt keys. AWS Owned CMK is free of charge while AWS Managed CMK is chargeable. Customer managed CMK’s are not supported with encryption at rest.
  27. Amazon DynamoDB offers fully managed encryption at rest. DynamoDB encryption at rest provides enhanced security by encrypting your data at rest using an AWS Key Management Service (AWS KMS) managed encryption key for DynamoDB. This functionality eliminates the operational burden and complexity involved in protecting sensitive data.
  28. DynamoDB is a alternative solution which can be used for storage of session management. The latency of access to data is less , hence this can be used as a data store for session management
  29. DynamoDB Streams Use Cases and Design Patterns:
    How do you set up a relationship across multiple tables in which, based on the value of an item from one table, you update the item in a second table?
    How do you trigger an event based on a particular transaction?
    How do you audit or archive transactions?
    How do you replicate data across multiple tables (similar to that of materialized views/streams/replication in relational data stores)?
    As a NoSQL database, DynamoDB is not designed to support transactions. Although client-side libraries are available to mimic the transaction capabilities, they are not scalable and cost-effective. For example, the Java Transaction Library for DynamoDB creates 7N+4 additional writes for every write operation. This is partly because the library holds metadata to manage the transactions to ensure that it’s consistent and can be rolled back before commit.

    You can use DynamoDB Streams to address all these use cases. DynamoDB Streams is a powerful service that you can combine with other AWS services to solve many similar problems. When enabled, DynamoDB Streams captures a time-ordered sequence of item-level modifications in a DynamoDB table and durably stores the information for up to 24 hours. Applications can access a series of stream records, which contain an item change, from a DynamoDB stream in near real time.

    AWS maintains separate endpoints for DynamoDB and DynamoDB Streams. To work with database tables and indexes, your application must access a DynamoDB endpoint. To read and process DynamoDB Streams records, your application must access a DynamoDB Streams endpoint in the same Region

  30. 20 global secondary indexes are allowed per table? (by default)
  31. What is one key difference between a global secondary index and a local secondary index?
    A local secondary index must have the same partition key as the main table
  32. How many tables can an AWS account have per region? 256
  33. How many secondary indexes (global and local combined) are allowed per table? (by default): 25
    You can define up to 5 local secondary indexes and 20 global secondary indexes per table (by default) – for a total of 25.
  34. How can you increase your DynamoDB table limit in a region?
    By contacting AWS and requesting a limit increase
  35. For any AWS account, there is an initial limit of 256 tables per region.
  36. The minimum length of a partition key value is 1 byte. The maximum length is 2048 bytes.
  37. The minimum length of a sort key value is 1 byte. The maximum length is 1024 bytes.
  38. For tables with local secondary indexes, there is a 10 GB size limit per partition key value. A table with local secondary indexes can store any number of items, as long as the total size for any one partition key value does not exceed 10 GB.
  39. The following diagram shows a local secondary index named LastPostIndex. Note that the partition key is the same as that of the Thread table, but the sort key is LastPostDateTime.

    DynamoDB secondary indexes example
    AWS DynamoDB secondary indexes example
  40. Relational vs Non Relational (SQL vs NoSQL)
Relational vs Non Relational
Relational vs Non Relational
SQL vs NOSQL
SQL vs NOSQL
SQL vs NoSQL in AWS
SQL vs NoSQL in AWS

Top
Reference: AWS DynamoDB

AWS DynamoDB Questions and Answers Dumps

Q0: What should the Developer enable on the DynamoDB table to optimize performance and minimize costs?

  • A. Amazon DynamoDB auto scaling
  • B. Amazon DynamoDB cross-region replication
  • C. Amazon DynamoDB Streams
  • D. Amazon DynamoDB Accelerator


D. DAX is a DynamoDB-compatible caching service that enables you to benefit from fast in-memory performance for demanding applications. DAX addresses three core scenarios:

  1. As an in-memory cache, DAX reduces the response times of eventually-consistent read workloads by an order of magnitude, from single-digit milliseconds to microseconds.
  2. DAX reduces operational and application complexity by providing a managed service that is API-compatible with Amazon DynamoDB, and thus requires only minimal functional changes to use with an existing application.
  3. For read-heavy or bursty workloads, DAX provides increased throughput and potential operational cost savings by reducing the need to over-provision read capacity units. This is especially beneficial for applications that require repeated reads for individual keys.

Reference: AWS DAX


Top

Q2: A security system monitors 600 cameras, saving image metadata every 1 minute to an Amazon DynamoDb table. Each sample involves 1kb of data, and the data writes are evenly distributed over time. How much write throughput is required for the target table?

  • A. 6000
  • B. 10
  • C. 3600
  • D. 600

B. When you mention the write capacity of a table in Dynamo DB, you mention it as the number of 1KB writes per second. So in the above question, since the write is happening every minute, we need to divide the value of 600 by 60, to get the number of KB writes per second. This gives a value of 10.


Custom AI Chatbot

Imagine a 24/7 virtual assistant that never sleeps, always ready to serve customers with instant, accurate responses.

Contact us here to book a demo and receive a personalized value proposition



GeoVision AI

We combine the power of GIS and AI to deliver instant, actionable intelligence for organizations that rely on real-time data gathering. Our unique solution leverages 🍇 GIS best practices and 🍉 Power Automate for GIS integration to collect field data—texts, photos, and geolocation—seamlessly. Then, through 🍊 Generative AI for image analysis, we deliver immediate insights and recommendations right to your team’s inbox and chat tools.

Contact us here to book a demo and receive a personalized value proposition


You can specify the Write capacity in the Capacity tab of the DynamoDB table.

Reference: AWS working with tables

Q3: You are developing an application that will interact with a DynamoDB table. The table is going to take in a lot of read and write operations. Which of the following would be the ideal partition key for the DynamoDB table to ensure ideal performance?

  • A. CustomerID
  • B. CustomerName
  • C. Location
  • D. Age


Answer- A
Use high-cardinality attributes. These are attributes that have distinct values for each item, like e-mailid, employee_no, customerid, sessionid, orderid, and so on..
Use composite attributes. Try to combine more than one attribute to form a unique key.
Reference: Choosing the right DynamoDB Partition Key

Top

Q4: A DynamoDB table is set with a Read Throughput capacity of 5 RCU. Which of the following read configuration will provide us the maximum read throughput?

  • A. Read capacity set to 5 for 4KB reads of data at strong consistency
  • B. Read capacity set to 5 for 4KB reads of data at eventual consistency
  • C. Read capacity set to 15 for 1KB reads of data at strong consistency
  • D. Read capacity set to 5 for 1KB reads of data at eventual consistency
Answer: B.
The calculation of throughput capacity for option B would be:
Read capacity(5) * Amount of data(4) = 20.
Since its required at eventual consistency , we can double the read throughput to 20*2=40

Reference: Read/Write Capacity Mode

Top

Q5: Your team is developing a solution that will make use of DynamoDB tables. Due to the nature of the application, the data is needed across a couple of regions across the world. Which of the following would help reduce the latency of requests to DynamoDB from different regions?

  • A. Enable Multi-AZ for the DynamoDB table
  • B. Enable global tables for DynamoDB
  • C. Enable Indexes for the table
  • D. Increase the read and write throughput for the tablez
Answer: B
Amazon DynamoDB global tables provide a fully managed solution for deploying a multi-region, multimaster database, without having to build and maintain your own replication solution. When you create a global table, you specify the AWS regions where you want the table to be available. DynamoDB performs all of the necessary tasks to create identical tables in these regions, and propagate ongoing data changes to all of them.
Reference: Global Tables

Top

AI Unraveled - Master GPT-x, Gemini, Generative AI, LLMs, Prompt Engineering: A simplified Guide For Everyday Users: OpenAI, ChatGPT, Google Gemini, Anthropic Claude, Grok xAI, Generative AI, Large Language Models (LLMs), Llama, Deepmind, Explainable AI (XAI), Discriminative AI, AI Ethics, Machine Learning, Reinforcement Learning, Natural Language Processing, Neural networks, Intelligent agents, GPUs, Q*, RAG, AI Agents, AI Workflows, Vertex AI, AI Quiz, Master Prompt Engineering, Pass AI Certifications, AI Practitioner

AI- Powered Jobs Interview Warmup For Job Seekers

⚽️Comparative Analysis: Top Calgary Amateur Soccer Clubs – Outdoor 2025 Season (Kids' Programs by Age Group)

Q6: An application is currently accessing  a DynamoDB table. Currently the tables queries are performing well. Changes have been made to the application and now the performance of the application is starting to degrade. After looking at the changes , you see that the queries are making use of an attribute which is not the partition key? Which of the following would be the adequate change to make to resolve the issue?

  • A. Add an index for the DynamoDB table
  • B. Change all the queries to ensure they use the partition key
  • C. Enable global tables for DynamoDB
  • D. Change the read capacity on the table


Answer: A
Amazon DynamoDB provides fast access to items in a table by specifying primary key values. However, many applications might benefit from having one or more secondary (or alternate) keys available, to allow efficient access to data with attributes other than the primary key. To address this, you can create one or more secondary indexes on a table, and issue Query or Scan requests against these indexes.

A secondary index is a data structure that contains a subset of attributes from a table, along with an alternate key to support Query operations. You can retrieve data from the index using a Query, in much the same way as you use Query with a table. A table can have multiple secondary indexes, which gives your applications access to many different query patterns.

Reference: Improving Data Access with Secondary Indexes

Top

Q7: Company B has created an e-commerce site using DynamoDB and is designing a products table that includes items purchased and the users who purchased the item.
When creating a primary key on a table which of the following would be the best attribute for the partition key? Select the BEST possible answer.

  • A. None of these are correct.
  • B. user_id where there are many users to few products
  • C. category_id where there are few categories to many products
  • D. product_id where there are few products to many users
Answer: B.
When designing tables it is important for the data to be distributed evenly across the entire table. It is best practice for performance to set your primary key where there are many primary keys to few rows. An example would be many users to few products. An example of bad design would be a primary key of product_id where there are few products but many users.
When designing tables it is important for the data to be distributed evenly across the entire table. It is best practice for performance to set your primary key where there are many primary keys to few rows. An example would be many users to few products. An example of bad design would be a primary key of product_id where there are few products but many users.
Reference: Partition Keys and Sort Keys

Top

Invest in your future today by enrolling in this Azure Fundamentals - Pass the Azure Fundamentals Exam with Ease: Master the AZ-900 Certification with the Comprehensive Exam Preparation Guide!


Q8: Which API call can be used to retrieve up to 100 items at a time or 16 MB of data from a DynamoDB table?

  • A. BatchItem
  • B. GetItem
  • C. BatchGetItem
  • D. ChunkGetItem
Answer: C. BatchGetItem

The BatchGetItem operation returns the attributes of one or more items from one or more tables. You identify requested items by primary key.

A single operation can retrieve up to 16 MB of data, which can contain as many as 100 items. BatchGetItem will return a partial result if the response size limit is exceeded, the table’s provisioned throughput is exceeded, or an internal processing failure occurs. If a partial result is returned, the operation returns a value for UnprocessedKeys. You can use this value to retry the operation starting with the next item to get.Reference: API-Specific Limits

Top

Q9: Which DynamoDB limits can be raised by contacting AWS support?

  • A. The number of hash keys per account
  • B. The maximum storage used per account
  • C. The number of tables per account
  • D. The number of local secondary indexes per account
  • E. The number of provisioned throughput units per account


Answer: C. and E.

For any AWS account, there is an initial limit of 256 tables per region.
AWS places some default limits on the throughput you can provision.
These are the limits unless you request a higher amount.
To request a service limit increase see https://aws.amazon.com/support.


AI Unraveled: Demystifying Frequently Asked Questions on Artificial Intelligence (OpenAI, ChatGPT, Google Gemini, Generative AI, Discriminative AI, xAI, LLMs, GPUs, Machine Learning, NLP, Promp Engineering)

Reference: Limits in DynamoDB


Top

Q10: Which approach below provides the least impact to provisioned throughput on the “Product”
table?

  • A. Create an “Images” DynamoDB table to store the Image with a foreign key constraint to
    the “Product” table
  • B. Add an image data type to the “Product” table to store the images in binary format
  • C. Serialize the image and store it in multiple DynamoDB tables
  • D. Store the images in Amazon S3 and add an S3 URL pointer to the “Product” table item
    for each image


Answer: D.

Amazon DynamoDB currently limits the size of each item that you store in a table (see Limits in DynamoDB). If your application needs to store more data in an item than the DynamoDB size limit permits, you can try compressing one or more large attributes, or you can store them as an object in Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3) and store the Amazon S3 object identifier in your DynamoDB item.
Compressing large attribute values can let them fit within item limits in DynamoDB and reduce your storage costs. Compression algorithms such as GZIP or LZO produce binary output that you can then store in a Binary attribute type.
Reference: Best Practices for Storing Large Items and Attributes


Top

Q11: You’re creating a forum DynamoDB database for hosting forums. Your “thread” table contains the forum name and each “forum name” can have one or more “subjects”. What primary key type would you give the thread table in order to allow more than one subject to be tied to the forum primary key name?

  • A. Hash
  • B. Range and Hash
  • C. Primary and Range
  • D. Hash and Range

Top

Amazon Aurora explained:

  • High scalability
  • High availability and durability
  • High Performance
  • Multi Region
Amazon Aurora explained
Amazon Aurora explained

Amazon ElastiCache Explained

  • In-Memory data store
  • High availability and reliability
  • Fully managed
  • Supports two pop
  • Open source engine
Amazon ElastiCache Explained
Amazon ElastiCache Explained

Amazon Redshift explained

  • Fast, fully managed, petabyte-scale data warehouse
  • Supports wide range of open data formats
  • Allows you to run SQL queries against large unstructured data in Amazon Simple Storage Service
  • Integrates with popular Business Intelligence (BI) and extract, Transform, Load  (ETL) solutions.
Amazon Redshift explained
Amazon Redshift explained

Amazon Neptune Explained

  • Fully managed graph database
  • Supports open graph APIs
  • Used in Social Networking

  • Amazon Neptune Explained
    Amazon Neptune Explained
Posted on

AWS Certification Exam Prep: S3 Facts, Summaries, Questions and Answers

AWS Certification Exam Prep: S3 Facts, Summaries, Questions and Answers

AWS S3 Facts and summaries, AWS S3 Top 10 Questions and Answers Dump

Definition 1: Amazon S3 or Amazon Simple Storage Service is a “simple storage service” offered by Amazon Web Services that provides object storage through a web service interface. Amazon S3 uses the same scalable storage infrastructure that Amazon.com uses to run its global e-commerce network.

Definition 2: Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3) is an object storage service that offers industry-leading scalability, data availability, security, and performance.

AWS S3 Explained graphically:

Amazon S3 Explained in pictures
Amazon S3 Explained

Amazon S3 Explained in pictures
Amazon S3 Explained in pictures
Amazon S3 Explained graphically
Amazon S3 Explained graphically

AWS S3 Facts and summaries

  1. S3 is a universal namespace, meaning each S3 bucket you create must have a unique name that is not being used by anyone else in the world.
  2. S3 is object based: i.e allows you to upload files.
  3. Files can be from 0 Bytes to 5 TB
  4. What is the maximum length, in bytes, of a DynamoDB range primary key attribute value?
    The maximum length of a DynamoDB range primary key attribute value is 2048 bytes (NOT 256 bytes).
  5. S3 has unlimited storage.
  6. Files are stored in Buckets.
  7. Read after write consistency for PUTS of new Objects
  8. Eventual Consistency for overwrite PUTS and DELETES (can take some time to propagate)
  9. S3 Storage Classes/Tiers:
    • S3 Standard (durable, immediately available, frequently accesses)
    • Amazon S3 Intelligent-Tiering (S3 Intelligent-Tiering): It works by storing objects in two access tiers: one tier that is optimized for frequent access and another lower-cost tier that is optimized for infrequent access.
    • S3 Standard-Infrequent Access – S3 Standard-IA (durable, immediately available, infrequently accessed)
    • S3 – One Zone-Infrequent Access – S3 One Zone IA: Same ad IA. However, data is stored in a single Availability Zone only
    • S3 – Reduced Redundancy Storage (data that is easily reproducible, such as thumbnails, etc.)
    • Glacier – Archived data, where you can wait 3-5 hours before accessing

    You can have a bucket that has different objects stored in S3 Standard, S3 Intelligent-Tiering, S3 Standard-IA, and S3 One Zone-IA.

  10. The default URL for S3 hosted websites lists the bucket name first followed by s3-website-region.amazonaws.com . Example: enoumen.com.s3-website-us-east-1.amazonaws.com
  11. Core fundamentals of an S3 object
    • Key (name)
    • Value (data)
    • Version (ID)
    • Metadata
    • Sub-resources (used to manage bucket-specific configuration)
      • Bucket Policies, ACLs,
      • CORS
      • Transfer Acceleration
  12. Object-based storage only for files
  13. Not suitable to install OS on.
  14. Successful uploads will generate a HTTP 200 status code.
  15. S3 Security – Summary
    • By default, all newly created buckets are PRIVATE.
    • You can set up access control to your buckets using:
      • Bucket Policies – Applied at the bucket level
      • Access Control Lists – Applied at an object level.
    • S3 buckets can be configured to create access logs, which log all requests made to the S3 bucket. These logs can be written to another bucket.
  16. S3 Encryption
    • Encryption In-Transit (SSL/TLS)
    • Encryption At Rest:
      • Server side Encryption (SSE-S3, SSE-KMS, SSE-C)
      • Client Side Encryption
    • Remember that we can use a Bucket policy to prevent unencrypted files from being uploaded by creating a policy which only allows requests which include the x-amz-server-side-encryption parameter in the request header.
  17. S3 CORS (Cross Origin Resource Sharing):
    CORS defines a way for client web applications that are loaded in one domain to interact with resources in a different domain.

    • Used to enable cross origin access for your AWS resources, e.g. S3 hosted website accessing javascript or image files located in another bucket. By default, resources in one bucket cannot access resources located in another. To allow this we need to configure CORS on the bucket being accessed and enable access for the origin (bucket) attempting to access.
    • Always use the S3 website URL, not the regular bucket URL. E.g.: https://s3-eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/acloudguru
  18. S3 CloudFront:
    • Edge locations are not just READ only – you can WRITE to them too (i.e put an object on to them.)
    • Objects are cached for the life of the TTL (Time to Live)
    • You can clear cached objects, but you will be charged. (Invalidation)
  19. S3 Performance optimization – 2 main approaches to Performance Optimization for S3:
    • GET-Intensive Workloads – Use Cloudfront
    • Mixed Workload – Avoid sequencial key names for your S3 objects. Instead, add a random prefix like a hex hash to the key name to prevent multiple objects from being stored on the same partition.
      • mybucket/7eh4-2019-03-04-15-00-00/cust1234234/photo1.jpg
      • mybucket/h35d-2019-03-04-15-00-00/cust1234234/photo2.jpg
      • mybucket/o3n6-2019-03-04-15-00-00/cust1234234/photo3.jpg
  20. The best way to handle large objects uploads to the S3 service is to use the Multipart upload API. The Multipart upload API enables you to upload large objects in parts.
  21. You can enable versioning on a bucket, even if that bucket already has objects in it. The already existing objects, though, will show their versions as null. All new objects will have version IDs.
  22. Bucket names cannot start with a . or – characters. S3 bucket names can contain both the . and – characters. There can only be one . or one – between labels. E.G mybucket-com mybucket.com are valid names but mybucket–com and mybucket..com are not valid bucket names.
  23. What is the maximum number of S3 buckets allowed per AWS account (by default)? 100
  24. You successfully upload an item to the us-east-1 region. You then immediately make another API call and attempt to read the object. What will happen?
    All AWS regions now have read-after-write consistency for PUT operations of new objects. Read-after-write consistency allows you to retrieve objects immediately after creation in Amazon S3. Other actions still follow the eventual consistency model (where you will sometimes get stale results if you have recently made changes)
  25. S3 bucket policies require a Principal be defined. Review the access policy elements here
  26. What checksums does Amazon S3 employ to detect data corruption?

    Amazon S3 uses a combination of Content-MD5 checksums and cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs) to detect data corruption. Amazon S3 performs these checksums on data at rest and repairs any corruption using redundant data. In addition, the service calculates checksums on all network traffic to detect corruption of data packets when storing or retrieving data.

Top
Reference: AWS S3

AWS S3 Top 10 Questions and Answers Dump

Q0: You’ve written an application that uploads objects onto an S3 bucket. The size of the object varies between 200 – 500 MB. You’ve seen that the application sometimes takes a longer than expected time to upload the object. You want to improve the performance of the application. Which of the following would you consider?

  • A. Create multiple threads and upload the objects in the multiple threads
  • B. Write the items in batches for better performance
  • C. Use the Multipart upload API
  • D. Enable versioning on the Bucket


C. All other options are invalid since the best way to handle large object uploads to the S3 service is to use the Multipart upload API. The Multipart upload API enables you to upload large objects in parts. You can use this API to upload new large objects or make a copy of an existing object. Multipart uploading is a three-step process: You initiate the upload, you upload the object parts, and after you have uploaded all the parts, you complete the multipart upload. Upon receiving the complete multipart upload request, Amazon S3 constructs the object from the uploaded parts, and you can then access the object just as you would any other object in your bucket.

Reference: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuoverview.html


Top

Q2: You are using AWS SAM templates to deploy a serverless application. Which of the following resource will embed application from Amazon S3 buckets?

  • A. AWS::Serverless::Api
  • B. AWS::Serverless::Application
  • C. AWS::Serverless::Layerversion
  • D. AWS::Serverless::Function


Answer – B
AWS::Serverless::Application resource in AWS SAm template is used to embed application frm Amazon S3 buckets.
Reference: Declaring Serverless Resources

Top


Custom AI Chatbot

Imagine a 24/7 virtual assistant that never sleeps, always ready to serve customers with instant, accurate responses.

Contact us here to book a demo and receive a personalized value proposition



GeoVision AI

We combine the power of GIS and AI to deliver instant, actionable intelligence for organizations that rely on real-time data gathering. Our unique solution leverages 🍇 GIS best practices and 🍉 Power Automate for GIS integration to collect field data—texts, photos, and geolocation—seamlessly. Then, through 🍊 Generative AI for image analysis, we deliver immediate insights and recommendations right to your team’s inbox and chat tools.

Contact us here to book a demo and receive a personalized value proposition


Q3: A static web site has been hosted on a bucket and is now being accessed by users. One of the web pages javascript section has been changed to access data which is hosted in another S3 bucket. Now that same web page is no longer loading in the browser. Which of the following can help alleviate the error?

  • A. Enable versioning for the underlying S3 bucket.
  • B. Enable Replication so that the objects get replicated to the other bucket
  • C. Enable CORS for the bucket
  • D. Change the Bucket policy for the bucket to allow access from the other bucket


Answer – C

Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) defines a way for client web applications that are loaded in one domain to interact with resources in a different domain. With CORS support, you can build rich client-side web applications with Amazon S3 and selectively allow cross-origin access to your Amazon S3 resources.

Cross-Origin Resource Sharing: Use-case Scenarios The following are example scenarios for using CORS:

Scenario 1: Suppose that you are hosting a website in an Amazon S3 bucket named website as described in Hosting a Static Website on Amazon S3. Your users load the website endpoint http://website.s3-website-us-east-1.amazonaws.com. Now you want to use JavaScript on the webpages that are stored in this bucket to be able to make authenticated GET and PUT requests against the same bucket by using the Amazon S3 API endpoint for the bucket, website.s3.amazonaws.com. A browser would normally block JavaScript from allowing those requests, but with CORS you can congure your bucket to explicitly enable cross-origin requests from website.s3-website-us-east-1.amazonaws.com.

Scenario 2: Suppose that you want to host a web font from your S3 bucket. Again, browsers require a CORS check (also called a preight check) for loading web fonts. You would congure the bucket that is hosting the web font to allow any origin to make these requests.

AI Unraveled - Master GPT-x, Gemini, Generative AI, LLMs, Prompt Engineering: A simplified Guide For Everyday Users: OpenAI, ChatGPT, Google Gemini, Anthropic Claude, Grok xAI, Generative AI, Large Language Models (LLMs), Llama, Deepmind, Explainable AI (XAI), Discriminative AI, AI Ethics, Machine Learning, Reinforcement Learning, Natural Language Processing, Neural networks, Intelligent agents, GPUs, Q*, RAG, AI Agents, AI Workflows, Vertex AI, AI Quiz, Master Prompt Engineering, Pass AI Certifications, AI Practitioner

AI- Powered Jobs Interview Warmup For Job Seekers

⚽️Comparative Analysis: Top Calgary Amateur Soccer Clubs – Outdoor 2025 Season (Kids' Programs by Age Group)

Reference: Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)


Top

Q4: Your mobile application includes a photo-sharing service that is expecting tens of thousands of users at launch. You will leverage Amazon Simple Storage Service (S3) for storage of the user Images, and you must decide how to authenticate and authorize your users for access to these images. You also need to manage the storage of these images. Which two of the following approaches should you use? Choose two answers from the options below

  • A. Create an Amazon S3 bucket per user, and use your application to generate the S3 URL for the appropriate content.
  • B. Use AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) user accounts as your application-level user database, and offload the burden of authentication from your application code.
  • C. Authenticate your users at the application level, and use AWS Security Token Service (STS)to grant token-based authorization to S3 objects.
  • D. Authenticate your users at the application level, and send an SMS token message to the user. Create an Amazon S3 bucket with the same name as the SMS message token, and move the user’s objects to that bucket.


Answer- C
The AWS Security Token Service (STS) is a web service that enables you to request temporary, limited-privilege credentials for AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) users or for users that you authenticate (federated users). The token can then be used to grant access to the objects in S3.
You can then provides access to the objects based on the key values generated via the user id.

Reference: The AWS Security Token Service (STS)


Top

Q5: Both ACLs and Bucket Policies can be used to grant access to S3 buckets. Which of the following statements is true about ACLs and Bucket policies?

  • A. Bucket Policies are Written in JSON and ACLs are written in XML
  • B. ACLs can be attached to S3 objects or S3 Buckets
  • C. Bucket Policies and ACLs are written in JSON
  • D. Bucket policies are only attached to s3 buckets, ACLs are only attached to s3 objects
Answer: A. and B.
Only Bucket Policies are written in JSON, ACLs are written in XML.
While Bucket policies are indeed only attached to S3 buckets, ACLs can be attached to S3 Buckets OR S3 Objects.
Reference:

Top

Invest in your future today by enrolling in this Azure Fundamentals - Pass the Azure Fundamentals Exam with Ease: Master the AZ-900 Certification with the Comprehensive Exam Preparation Guide!


Q6: What are good options to improve S3 performance when you have significantly high numbers of GET requests?

  • A. Introduce random prefixes to S3 objects
  • B. Introduce random suffixes to S3 objects
  • C. Setup CloudFront for S3 objects
  • D. Migrate commonly used objects to Amazon Glacier
Answer: C
CloudFront caching is an excellent way to avoid putting extra strain on the S3 service and to improve the response times of reqeusts by caching data closer to users at CloudFront locations.
S3 Transfer Acceleration optimizes the TCP protocol and adds additional intelligence between the client and the S3 bucket, making S3 Transfer Acceleration a better choice if a higher throughput is desired. If you have objects that are smaller than 1GB or if the data set is less than 1GB in size, you should consider using Amazon CloudFront’s PUT/POST commands for optimal performance.
Reference: Amazon S3 Transfer Acceleration

Top

Q7: If an application is storing hourly log files from thousands of instances from a high traffic
web site, which naming scheme would give optimal performance on S3?

  • A. Sequential
  • B. HH-DD-MM-YYYY-log_instanceID
  • C. YYYY-MM-DD-HH-log_instanceID
  • D. instanceID_log-HH-DD-MM-YYYY
  • E. instanceID_log-YYYY-MM-DD-HH


Answer: A. B. C. D. and E.
Amazon S3 now provides increased performance to support at least 3,500 requests per second to add data and 5,500 requests per second to retrieve data, which can save significant processing time for no additional charge. Each S3 prefix can support these request rates, making it simple to increase performance significantly.
This S3 request rate performance increase removes any previous guidance to randomize object prefixes to achieve faster performance. That means you can now use logical or sequential naming patterns in S3 object naming without any performance implications.

Reference: Amazon S3 Announces Increased Request Rate Performance


Top

Q8: You are working with the S3 API and receive an error message: 409 Conflict. What is the possible cause of this error

  • A. You’re attempting to remove a bucket without emptying the contents of the bucket first.
  • B. You’re attempting to upload an object to the bucket that is greater than 5TB in size.
  • C. Your request does not contain the proper metadata.
  • D. Amazon S3 is having internal issues.


AI Unraveled: Demystifying Frequently Asked Questions on Artificial Intelligence (OpenAI, ChatGPT, Google Gemini, Generative AI, Discriminative AI, xAI, LLMs, GPUs, Machine Learning, NLP, Promp Engineering)

Answer:A.

Reference: S3 Error codes

Top

Q9: You created three S3 buckets – “mywebsite.com”, “downloads.mywebsite.com”, and “www.mywebsite.com”. You uploaded your files and enabled static website hosting. You specified both of the default documents under the “enable static website hosting” header. You also set the “Make Public” permission for the objects in each of the three buckets. You create the Route 53 Aliases for the three buckets. You are going to have your end users test your websites by browsing to http://mydomain.com/error.html, http://downloads.mydomain.com/index.html, and http://www.mydomain.com. What problems will your testers encounter?

  • A. http://mydomain.com/error.html will not work because you did not set a value for the error.html file
  • B. There will be no problems, all three sites should work.
  • C. http://www.mywebsite.com will not work because the URL does not include a file name at the end of it.
  • D. http://downloads.mywebsite.com/index.html will not work because the “downloads” prefix is not a supported prefix for S3 websites using Route 53 aliases

Answer: B.
It used to be that the only allowed domain prefix when creating Route 53 Aliases for S3 static websites was the “www” prefix. However, this is no longer the case. You can now use other subdomain.

Reference: Hosting a Static Website on Amazon S3

Top

Q10: Which of the following is NOT a common S3 API call?

  • A. UploadPart
  • B. ReadObject
  • C. PutObject
  • D. DownloadBucket

Top

Other AWS Facts and Summaries

Posted on

2022 AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam Preparation: Questions and Answers Dump

2022 AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam Preparation: Questions and Answers Dump.

Welcome to AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam Preparation:

Definition and Objectives, Top 100 Questions and Answers dump, White papers, Courses, Labs and Training Materials, Exam info and details, References, Jobs, Others AWS Certificates

2022 AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam Preparation: Questions and Answers Dump
2022 AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam Preparation: Questions and Answers Dump
 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC02 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

What is the AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam?

This AWS Certified Developer-Associate Examination is intended for individuals who perform a Developer role. It validates an examinee’s ability to:

  • Demonstrate an understanding of core AWS services, uses, and basic AWS architecture best practices
  • Demonstrate proficiency in developing, deploying, and debugging cloud-based applications by using AWS

Recommended general IT knowledge
The target candidate should have the following:
– In-depth knowledge of at least one high-level programming language
– Understanding of application lifecycle management
– The ability to write code for serverless applications
– Understanding of the use of containers in the development process

Recommended AWS knowledge
The target candidate should be able to do the following:

  • Use the AWS service APIs, CLI, and software development kits (SDKs) to write applications
  • Identify key features of AWS services
  • Understand the AWS shared responsibility model
  • Use a continuous integration and continuous delivery (CI/CD) pipeline to deploy applications on AWS
  • Use and interact with AWS services
  • Apply basic understanding of cloud-native applications to write code
  • Write code by using AWS security best practices (for example, use IAM roles instead of secret and access keys in the code)
  • Author, maintain, and debug code modules on AWS

What is considered out of scope for the target candidate?
The following is a non-exhaustive list of related job tasks that the target candidate is not expected to be able to perform. These items are considered out of scope for the exam:
– Design architectures (for example, distributed system, microservices)
– Design and implement CI/CD pipelines

  • Administer IAM users and groups
  • Administer Amazon Elastic Container Service (Amazon ECS)
  • Design AWS networking infrastructure (for example, Amazon VPC, AWS Direct Connect)
  • Understand compliance and licensing

Exam content
Response types
There are two types of questions on the exam:
– Multiple choice: Has one correct response and three incorrect responses (distractors)
– Multiple response: Has two or more correct responses out of five or more response options
Select one or more responses that best complete the statement or answer the question. Distractors, or incorrect answers, are response options that a candidate with incomplete knowledge or skill might choose.
Distractors are generally plausible responses that match the content area.
Unanswered questions are scored as incorrect; there is no penalty for guessing. The exam includes 50 questions that will affect your score.

Unscored content
The exam includes 15 unscored questions that do not affect your score. AWS collects information about candidate performance on these unscored questions to evaluate these questions for future use as scored questions. These unscored questions are not identified on the exam.

Exam results
The AWS Certified Developer – Associate (DVA-C01) exam is a pass or fail exam. The exam is scored against a minimum standard established by AWS professionals who follow certification industry best practices and guidelines.
Your results for the exam are reported as a scaled score of 100–1,000. The minimum passing score is 720.
Your score shows how you performed on the exam as a whole and whether you passed. Scaled scoring models help equate scores across multiple exam forms that might have slightly different difficulty levels.
Your score report could contain a table of classifications of your performance at each section level. This information is intended to provide general feedback about your exam performance. The exam uses a compensatory scoring model, which means that you do not need to achieve a passing score in each section. You need to pass only the overall exam.
Each section of the exam has a specific weighting, so some sections have more questions than other sections have. The table contains general information that highlights your strengths and weaknesses. Use caution when interpreting section-level feedback.

Content outline
This exam guide includes weightings, test domains, and objectives for the exam. It is not a comprehensive listing of the content on the exam. However, additional context for each of the objectives is available to help guide your preparation for the exam. The following table lists the main content domains and their weightings. The table precedes the complete exam content outline, which includes the additional context.
The percentage in each domain represents only scored content.

Domain 1: Deployment 22%
Domain 2: Security 26%
Domain 3: Development with AWS Services 30%
Domain 4: Refactoring 10%
Domain 5: Monitoring and Troubleshooting 12%


Custom AI Chatbot

Imagine a 24/7 virtual assistant that never sleeps, always ready to serve customers with instant, accurate responses.

Contact us here to book a demo and receive a personalized value proposition



GeoVision AI

We combine the power of GIS and AI to deliver instant, actionable intelligence for organizations that rely on real-time data gathering. Our unique solution leverages 🍇 GIS best practices and 🍉 Power Automate for GIS integration to collect field data—texts, photos, and geolocation—seamlessly. Then, through 🍊 Generative AI for image analysis, we deliver immediate insights and recommendations right to your team’s inbox and chat tools.

Contact us here to book a demo and receive a personalized value proposition


Domain 1: Deployment
1.1 Deploy written code in AWS using existing CI/CD pipelines, processes, and patterns.
–  Commit code to a repository and invoke build, test and/or deployment actions
–  Use labels and branches for version and release management
–  Use AWS CodePipeline to orchestrate workflows against different environments
–  Apply AWS CodeCommit, AWS CodeBuild, AWS CodePipeline, AWS CodeStar, and AWS
CodeDeploy for CI/CD purposes
–  Perform a roll back plan based on application deployment policy

1.2 Deploy applications using AWS Elastic Beanstalk.
–  Utilize existing supported environments to define a new application stack
–  Package the application
–  Introduce a new application version into the Elastic Beanstalk environment
–  Utilize a deployment policy to deploy an application version (i.e., all at once, rolling, rolling with batch, immutable)
–  Validate application health using Elastic Beanstalk dashboard
–  Use Amazon CloudWatch Logs to instrument application logging

1.3 Prepare the application deployment package to be deployed to AWS.
–  Manage the dependencies of the code module (like environment variables, config files and static image files) within the package
–  Outline the package/container directory structure and organize files appropriately
–  Translate application resource requirements to AWS infrastructure parameters (e.g., memory, cores)

1.4 Deploy serverless applications.
–  Given a use case, implement and launch an AWS Serverless Application Model (AWS SAM) template
–  Manage environments in individual AWS services (e.g., Differentiate between Development, Test, and Production in Amazon API Gateway)

Domain 2: Security
2.1 Make authenticated calls to AWS services.
–  Communicate required policy based on least privileges required by application.
–  Assume an IAM role to access a service
–  Use the software development kit (SDK) credential provider on-premises or in the cloud to access AWS services (local credentials vs. instance roles)

AI Unraveled - Master GPT-x, Gemini, Generative AI, LLMs, Prompt Engineering: A simplified Guide For Everyday Users: OpenAI, ChatGPT, Google Gemini, Anthropic Claude, Grok xAI, Generative AI, Large Language Models (LLMs), Llama, Deepmind, Explainable AI (XAI), Discriminative AI, AI Ethics, Machine Learning, Reinforcement Learning, Natural Language Processing, Neural networks, Intelligent agents, GPUs, Q*, RAG, AI Agents, AI Workflows, Vertex AI, AI Quiz, Master Prompt Engineering, Pass AI Certifications, AI Practitioner

AI- Powered Jobs Interview Warmup For Job Seekers

⚽️Comparative Analysis: Top Calgary Amateur Soccer Clubs – Outdoor 2025 Season (Kids' Programs by Age Group)

2.2 Implement encryption using AWS services.
– Encrypt data at rest (client side; server side; envelope encryption) using AWS services
–  Encrypt data in transit

2.3 Implement application authentication and authorization.
– Add user sign-up and sign-in functionality for applications with Amazon Cognito identity or user pools
–  Use Amazon Cognito-provided credentials to write code that access AWS services.
–  Use Amazon Cognito sync to synchronize user profiles and data
–  Use developer-authenticated identities to interact between end user devices, backend
authentication, and Amazon Cognito

Domain 3: Development with AWS Services
3.1 Write code for serverless applications.
– Compare and contrast server-based vs. serverless model (e.g., micro services, stateless nature of serverless applications, scaling serverless applications, and decoupling layers of serverless applications)
– Configure AWS Lambda functions by defining environment variables and parameters (e.g., memory, time out, runtime, handler)
– Create an API endpoint using Amazon API Gateway
–  Create and test appropriate API actions like GET, POST using the API endpoint
–  Apply Amazon DynamoDB concepts (e.g., tables, items, and attributes)
–  Compute read/write capacity units for Amazon DynamoDB based on application requirements
–  Associate an AWS Lambda function with an AWS event source (e.g., Amazon API Gateway, Amazon CloudWatch event, Amazon S3 events, Amazon Kinesis)
–  Invoke an AWS Lambda function synchronously and asynchronously

3.2 Translate functional requirements into application design.
– Determine real-time vs. batch processing for a given use case
– Determine use of synchronous vs. asynchronous for a given use case
– Determine use of event vs. schedule/poll for a given use case
– Account for tradeoffs for consistency models in an application design

Invest in your future today by enrolling in this Azure Fundamentals - Pass the Azure Fundamentals Exam with Ease: Master the AZ-900 Certification with the Comprehensive Exam Preparation Guide!


Domain 4: Refactoring
4.1 Optimize applications to best use AWS services and features.
 Implement AWS caching services to optimize performance (e.g., Amazon ElastiCache, Amazon API Gateway cache)
 Apply an Amazon S3 naming scheme for optimal read performance

4.2 Migrate existing application code to run on AWS.
– Isolate dependencies
– Run the application as one or more stateless processes
– Develop in order to enable horizontal scalability
– Externalize state

Domain 5: Monitoring and Troubleshooting

5.1 Write code that can be monitored.
– Create custom Amazon CloudWatch metrics
– Perform logging in a manner available to systems operators
– Instrument application source code to enable tracing in AWS X-Ray

5.2 Perform root cause analysis on faults found in testing or production.
– Interpret the outputs from the logging mechanism in AWS to identify errors in logs
– Check build and testing history in AWS services (e.g., AWS CodeBuild, AWS CodeDeploy, AWS CodePipeline) to identify issues
– Utilize AWS services (e.g., Amazon CloudWatch, VPC Flow Logs, and AWS X-Ray) to locate a specific faulty component


AI Unraveled: Demystifying Frequently Asked Questions on Artificial Intelligence (OpenAI, ChatGPT, Google Gemini, Generative AI, Discriminative AI, xAI, LLMs, GPUs, Machine Learning, NLP, Promp Engineering)

Which key tools, technologies, and concepts might be covered on the exam?

The following is a non-exhaustive list of the tools and technologies that could appear on the exam.
This list is subject to change and is provided to help you understand the general scope of services, features, or technologies on the exam.
The general tools and technologies in this list appear in no particular order.
AWS services are grouped according to their primary functions. While some of these technologies will likely be covered more than others on the exam, the order and placement of them in this list is no indication of relative weight or importance:
– Analytics
– Application Integration
– Containers
– Cost and Capacity Management
– Data Movement
– Developer Tools
– Instances (virtual machines)
– Management and Governance
– Networking and Content Delivery
– Security
– Serverless

AWS services and features

Analytics:
– Amazon Elasticsearch Service (Amazon ES)
– Amazon Kinesis
Application Integration:
– Amazon EventBridge (Amazon CloudWatch Events)
– Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS)
– Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS)
– AWS Step Functions

Compute:
– Amazon EC2
– AWS Elastic Beanstalk
– AWS Lambda

Containers:
– Amazon Elastic Container Registry (Amazon ECR)
– Amazon Elastic Container Service (Amazon ECS)
– Amazon Elastic Kubernetes Services (Amazon EKS)

Database:
– Amazon DynamoDB
– Amazon ElastiCache
– Amazon RDS

Developer Tools:
– AWS CodeArtifact
– AWS CodeBuild
– AWS CodeCommit
– AWS CodeDeploy
– Amazon CodeGuru
– AWS CodePipeline
– AWS CodeStar
– AWS Fault Injection Simulator
– AWS X-Ray

Management and Governance:
– AWS CloudFormation
– Amazon CloudWatch

Networking and Content Delivery:
– Amazon API Gateway
– Amazon CloudFront
– Elastic Load Balancing

Security, Identity, and Compliance:
– Amazon Cognito
– AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM)
– AWS Key Management Service (AWS KMS)

Storage:
– Amazon S3

Out-of-scope AWS services and features

The following is a non-exhaustive list of AWS services and features that are not covered on the exam.
These services and features do not represent every AWS offering that is excluded from the exam content.
Services or features that are entirely unrelated to the target job roles for the exam are excluded from this list because they are assumed to be irrelevant.
Out-of-scope AWS services and features include the following:
– AWS Application Discovery Service
– Amazon AppStream 2.0
– Amazon Chime
– Amazon Connect
– AWS Database Migration Service (AWS DMS)
– AWS Device Farm
– Amazon Elastic Transcoder
– Amazon GameLift
– Amazon Lex
– Amazon Machine Learning (Amazon ML)
– AWS Managed Services
– Amazon Mobile Analytics
– Amazon Polly

– Amazon QuickSight
– Amazon Rekognition
– AWS Server Migration Service (AWS SMS)
– AWS Service Catalog
– AWS Shield Advanced
– AWS Shield Standard
– AWS Snow Family
– AWS Storage Gateway
– AWS WAF
– Amazon WorkMail
– Amazon WorkSpaces

To succeed with the real exam, do not memorize the answers below. It is very important that you understand why a question is right or wrong and the concepts behind it by carefully reading the reference documents in the answers.

Top

AWS Certified Developer – Associate Practice Questions And Answers Dump

Q0: Your application reads commands from an SQS queue and sends them to web services hosted by your
partners. When a partner’s endpoint goes down, your application continually returns their commands to the queue. The repeated attempts to deliver these commands use up resources. Commands that can’t be delivered must not be lost.
How can you accommodate the partners’ broken web services without wasting your resources?

  • A. Create a delay queue and set DelaySeconds to 30 seconds
  • B. Requeue the message with a VisibilityTimeout of 30 seconds.
  • C. Create a dead letter queue and set the Maximum Receives to 3.
  • D. Requeue the message with a DelaySeconds of 30 seconds.
2022 AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam Preparation: Questions and Answers Dump
AWS Developer Associates DVA-C01 PRO
 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 


C. After a message is taken from the queue and returned for the maximum number of retries, it is
automatically sent to a dead letter queue, if one has been configured. It stays there until you retrieve it for forensic purposes.

Reference: Amazon SQS Dead-Letter Queues


Top

Q1: A developer is writing an application that will store data in a DynamoDB table. The ratio of reads operations to write operations will be 1000 to 1, with the same data being accessed frequently.
What should the Developer enable on the DynamoDB table to optimize performance and minimize costs?

  • A. Amazon DynamoDB auto scaling
  • B. Amazon DynamoDB cross-region replication
  • C. Amazon DynamoDB Streams
  • D. Amazon DynamoDB Accelerator


D. The AWS Documentation mentions the following:

DAX is a DynamoDB-compatible caching service that enables you to benefit from fast in-memory performance for demanding applications. DAX addresses three core scenarios

  1. As an in-memory cache, DAX reduces the response times of eventually-consistent read workloads by an order of magnitude, from single-digit milliseconds to microseconds.
  2. DAX reduces operational and application complexity by providing a managed service that is API-compatible with Amazon DynamoDB, and thus requires only minimal functional changes to use with an existing application.
  3. For read-heavy or bursty workloads, DAX provides increased throughput and potential operational cost savings by reducing the need to over-provision read capacity units. This is especially beneficial for applications that require repeated reads for individual keys.

Reference: AWS DAX


Top

Q2: You are creating a DynamoDB table with the following attributes:

  • PurchaseOrderNumber (partition key)
  • CustomerID
  • PurchaseDate
  • TotalPurchaseValue

One of your applications must retrieve items from the table to calculate the total value of purchases for a
particular customer over a date range. What secondary index do you need to add to the table?

  • A. Local secondary index with a partition key of CustomerID and sort key of PurchaseDate; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute
  • B. Local secondary index with a partition key of PurchaseDate and sort key of CustomerID; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute
  • C. Global secondary index with a partition key of CustomerID and sort key of PurchaseDate; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute
  • D. Global secondary index with a partition key of PurchaseDate and sort key of CustomerID; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute


C. The query is for a particular CustomerID, so a Global Secondary Index is needed for a different partition
key. To retrieve only the desired date range, the PurchaseDate must be the sort key. Projecting the
TotalPurchaseValue into the index provides all the data needed to satisfy the use case.

Reference: AWS DynamoDB Global Secondary Indexes

Difference between local and global indexes in DynamoDB

    • Global secondary index — an index with a hash and range key that can be different from those on the table. A global secondary index is considered “global” because queries on the index can span all of the data in a table, across all partitions.
    • Local secondary index — an index that has the same hash key as the table, but a different range key. A local secondary index is “local” in the sense that every partition of a local secondary index is scoped to a table partition that has the same hash key.
    • Local Secondary Indexes still rely on the original Hash Key. When you supply a table with hash+range, think about the LSI as hash+range1, hash+range2.. hash+range6. You get 5 more range attributes to query on. Also, there is only one provisioned throughput.
    • Global Secondary Indexes defines a new paradigm – different hash/range keys per index.
      This breaks the original usage of one hash key per table. This is also why when defining GSI you are required to add a provisioned throughput per index and pay for it.
    • Local Secondary Indexes can only be created when you are creating the table, there is no way to add Local Secondary Index to an existing table, also once you create the index you cannot delete it.
    • Global Secondary Indexes can be created when you create the table and added to an existing table, deleting an existing Global Secondary Index is also allowed.

Throughput :

  • Local Secondary Indexes consume throughput from the table. When you query records via the local index, the operation consumes read capacity units from the table. When you perform a write operation (create, update, delete) in a table that has a local index, there will be two write operations, one for the table another for the index. Both operations will consume write capacity units from the table.
  • Global Secondary Indexes have their own provisioned throughput, when you query the index the operation will consume read capacity from the index, when you perform a write operation (create, update, delete) in a table that has a global index, there will be two write operations, one for the table another for the index*.


Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep
AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep
 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q3: When referencing the remaining time left for a Lambda function to run within the function’s code you would use:

  • A. The event object
  • B. The timeLeft object
  • C. The remains object
  • D. The context object


D. The context object.

Ace the Microsoft Azure Fundamentals AZ-900 Certification Exam: Pass the Azure Fundamentals Exam with Ease

Reference: AWS Lambda


Top

Q4: What two arguments does a Python Lambda handler function require?

  • A. invocation, zone
  • B. event, zone
  • C. invocation, context
  • D. event, context
D. event, context
def handler_name(event, context):
…
return some_value

Reference: AWS Lambda Function Handler in Python

Top

Q5: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only via SFTP
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package

Top

Q6: A Lambda deployment package contains:

  • A. Function code, libraries, and runtime binaries
  • B. Only function code
  • C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime
  • D. Only libraries not included within the runtime

C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime

Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package in PowerShell

Top

Q7: You are attempting to SSH into an EC2 instance that is located in a public subnet. However, you are currently receiving a timeout error trying to connect. What could be a possible cause of this connection issue?

  • A. The security group associated with the EC2 instance has an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic, but does not have an outbound rule that allows SSH traffic.
  • B. The security group associated with the EC2 instance has an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic AND has an outbound rule that explicitly denies SSH traffic.
  • C. The security group associated with the EC2 instance has an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic AND the associated NACL has both an inbound and outbound rule that allows SSH traffic.
  • D. The security group associated with the EC2 instance does not have an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic AND the associated NACL does not have an outbound rule that allows SSH traffic.


D. Security groups are stateful, so you do NOT have to have an explicit outbound rule for return requests. However, NACLs are stateless so you MUST have an explicit outbound rule configured for return request.

Reference: Comparison of Security Groups and Network ACLs

AWS Security Groups and NACL


Top

Q8: You have instances inside private subnets and a properly configured bastion host instance in a public subnet. None of the instances in the private subnets have a public or Elastic IP address. How can you connect an instance in the private subnet to the open internet to download system updates?

  • A. Create and assign EIP to each instance
  • B. Create and attach a second IGW to the VPC.
  • C. Create and utilize a NAT Gateway
  • D. Connect to a VPN


C. You can use a network address translation (NAT) gateway in a public subnet in your VPC to enable instances in the private subnet to initiate outbound traffic to the Internet, but prevent the instances from receiving inbound traffic initiated by someone on the Internet.

If you are looking for an all-in-one solution to help you prepare for the AWS Cloud Practitioner Certification Exam, look no further than this AWS Cloud Practitioner CCP CLF-C02 book

Reference: AWS Network Address Translation Gateway


Top

Q9: What feature of VPC networking should you utilize if you want to create “elasticity” in your application’s architecture?

  • A. Security Groups
  • B. Route Tables
  • C. Elastic Load Balancer
  • D. Auto Scaling


D. Auto scaling is designed specifically with elasticity in mind. Auto scaling allows for the increase and decrease of compute power based on demand, thus creating elasticity in the architecture.

Reference: AWS Autoscalling


Top

Q10: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

Reference: AWS Lambda

Top

Q11: You’re writing a script with an AWS SDK that uses the AWS API Actions and want to create AMIs for non-EBS backed AMIs for you. Which API call should occurs in the final process of creating an AMI?

  • A. RegisterImage
  • B. CreateImage
  • C. ami-register-image
  • D. ami-create-image

A. It is actually – RegisterImage. All AWS API Actions will follow the capitalization like this and don’t have hyphens in them.

Reference: API RegisterImage

Top

Q12: When dealing with session state in EC2-based applications using Elastic load balancers which option is generally thought of as the best practice for managing user sessions?

  • A. Having the ELB distribute traffic to all EC2 instances and then having the instance check a caching solution like ElastiCache running Redis or Memcached for session information
  • B. Permenantly assigning users to specific instances and always routing their traffic to those instances
  • C. Using Application-generated cookies to tie a user session to a particular instance for the cookie duration
  • D. Using Elastic Load Balancer generated cookies to tie a user session to a particular instance

Top

Q13: Which API call would best be used to describe an Amazon Machine Image?

  • A. ami-describe-image
  • B. ami-describe-images
  • C. DescribeImage
  • D. DescribeImages

D. In general, API actions stick to the PascalCase style with the first letter of every word capitalized.

Reference: API DescribeImages

Top

Q14: What is one key difference between an Amazon EBS-backed and an instance-store backed instance?

  • A. Autoscaling requires using Amazon EBS-backed instances
  • B. Virtual Private Cloud requires EBS backed instances
  • C. Amazon EBS-backed instances can be stopped and restarted without losing data
  • D. Instance-store backed instances can be stopped and restarted without losing data

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

C. Instance-store backed images use “ephemeral” storage (temporary). The storage is only available during the life of an instance. Rebooting an instance will allow ephemeral data stay persistent. However, stopping and starting an instance will remove all ephemeral storage.

Reference: What is the difference between EBS and Instance Store?

Top

Q15: After having created a new Linux instance on Amazon EC2, and downloaded the .pem file (called Toto.pem) you try and SSH into your IP address (54.1.132.33) using the following command.
ssh -i my_key.pem ec2-user@52.2.222.22
However you receive the following error.
@@@@@@@@ WARNING: UNPROTECTED PRIVATE KEY FILE! @ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
What is the most probable reason for this and how can you fix it?

  • A. You do not have root access on your terminal and need to use the sudo option for this to work.
  • B. You do not have enough permissions to perform the operation.
  • C. Your key file is encrypted. You need to use the -u option for unencrypted not the -i option.
  • D. Your key file must not be publicly viewable for SSH to work. You need to modify your .pem file to limit permissions.

D. You need to run something like: chmod 400 my_key.pem

Reference:

Top

Q16: You have an EBS root device on /dev/sda1 on one of your EC2 instances. You are having trouble with this particular instance and you need to either Stop/Start, Reboot or Terminate the instance but you do NOT want to lose any data that you have stored on /dev/sda1. However, you are unsure if changing the instance state in any of the aforementioned ways will cause you to lose data stored on the EBS volume. Which of the below statements best describes the effect each change of instance state would have on the data you have stored on /dev/sda1?

  • A. Whether you stop/start, reboot or terminate the instance it does not matter because data on an EBS volume is not ephemeral and the data will not be lost regardless of what method is used.
  • B. If you stop/start the instance the data will not be lost. However if you either terminate or reboot the instance the data will be lost.
  • C. Whether you stop/start, reboot or terminate the instance it does not matter because data on an EBS volume is ephemeral and it will be lost no matter what method is used.
  • D. The data will be lost if you terminate the instance, however the data will remain on /dev/sda1 if you reboot or stop/start the instance because data on an EBS volume is not ephemeral.

D. The question states that an EBS-backed root device is mounted at /dev/sda1, and EBS volumes maintain information regardless of the instance state. If it was instance store, this would be a different answer.

Reference: AWS Root Device Storage

Top

Q17: EC2 instances are launched from Amazon Machine Images (AMIs). A given public AMI:

  • A. Can only be used to launch EC2 instances in the same AWS availability zone as the AMI is stored
  • B. Can only be used to launch EC2 instances in the same country as the AMI is stored
  • C. Can only be used to launch EC2 instances in the same AWS region as the AMI is stored
  • D. Can be used to launch EC2 instances in any AWS region

C. AMIs are only available in the region they are created. Even in the case of the AWS-provided AMIs, AWS has actually copied the AMIs for you to different regions. You cannot access an AMI from one region in another region. However, you can copy an AMI from one region to another

Reference: https://aws.amazon.com/amazon-linux-ami/

Top

Q18: Which of the following statements is true about the Elastic File System (EFS)?

  • A. EFS can scale out to meet capacity requirements and scale back down when no longer needed
  • B. EFS can be used by multiple EC2 instances simultaneously
  • C. EFS cannot be used by an instance using EBS
  • D. EFS can be configured on an instance before launch just like an IAM role or EBS volumes

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

A. and B.

Reference: https://aws.amazon.com/efs/

Top

Q19: IAM Policies, at a minimum, contain what elements?

  • A. ID
  • B. Effects
  • C. Resources
  • D. Sid
  • E. Principle
  • F. Actions

B. C. and F.

Effect – Use Allow or Deny to indicate whether the policy allows or denies access.

Resource – Specify a list of resources to which the actions apply.

Action – Include a list of actions that the policy allows or denies.

Id, Sid aren’t required fields in IAM Policies. But they are optional fields

Reference: AWS IAM Access Policies

Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q20: What are the main benefits of IAM groups?

  • A. The ability to create custom permission policies.
  • B. Assigning IAM permission policies to more than one user at a time.
  • C. Easier user/policy management.
  • D. Allowing EC2 instances to gain access to S3.

B. and C.

A. is incorrect: This is a benefit of IAM generally or a benefit of IAM policies. But IAM groups don’t create policies, they have policies attached to them.

Reference: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/IAM/latest/UserGuide/id_groups.html

 

Top

Q21: What are benefits of using AWS STS?

  • A. Grant access to AWS resources without having to create an IAM identity for them
  • B. Since credentials are temporary, you don’t have to rotate or revoke them
  • C. Temporary security credentials can be extended indefinitely
  • D. Temporary security credentials can be restricted to a specific region

Top

Q22: What should the Developer enable on the DynamoDB table to optimize performance and minimize costs?

  • A. Amazon DynamoDB auto scaling
  • B. Amazon DynamoDB cross-region replication
  • C. Amazon DynamoDB Streams
  • D. Amazon DynamoDB Accelerator


D. DAX is a DynamoDB-compatible caching service that enables you to benefit from fast in-memory performance for demanding applications. DAX addresses three core scenarios:

  1. As an in-memory cache, DAX reduces the response times of eventually-consistent read workloads by an order of magnitude, from single-digit milliseconds to microseconds.
  2. DAX reduces operational and application complexity by providing a managed service that is API-compatible with Amazon DynamoDB, and thus requires only minimal functional changes to use with an existing application.
  3. For read-heavy or bursty workloads, DAX provides increased throughput and potential operational cost savings by reducing the need to over-provision read capacity units. This is especially beneficial for applications that require repeated reads for individual keys.

Reference: AWS DAX


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q23: A Developer has been asked to create an AWS Elastic Beanstalk environment for a production web application which needs to handle thousands of requests. Currently the dev environment is running on a t1 micro instance. How can the Developer change the EC2 instance type to m4.large?

  • A. Use CloudFormation to migrate the Amazon EC2 instance type of the environment from t1 micro to m4.large.
  • B. Create a saved configuration file in Amazon S3 with the instance type as m4.large and use the same during environment creation.
  • C. Change the instance type to m4.large in the configuration details page of the Create New Environment page.
  • D. Change the instance type value for the environment to m4.large by using update autoscaling group CLI command.

B. The Elastic Beanstalk console and EB CLI set configuration options when you create an environment. You can also set configuration options in saved configurations and configuration files. If the same option is set in multiple locations, the value used is determined by the order of precedence.
Configuration option settings can be composed in text format and saved prior to environment creation, applied during environment creation using any supported client, and added, modified or removed after environment creation.
During environment creation, configuration options are applied from multiple sources with the following precedence, from highest to lowest:

  • Settings applied directly to the environment – Settings specified during a create environment or update environment operation on the Elastic Beanstalk API by any client, including the AWS Management Console, EB CLI, AWS CLI, and SDKs. The AWS Management Console and EB CLI also applyrecommended values for some options that apply at this level unless overridden.
  • Saved Configurations–
    Settings for any options that are not applied directly to the
    environment are loaded from a saved configuration, if specified.
  • Configuration Files (.ebextensions)– Settings for any options that are not applied directly to the
    environment, and also not specified in a saved configuration, are loaded from configuration files in the .ebextensions folder at the root of the application source bundle.

     

    Configuration files are executed in alphabetical order. For example,.ebextensions/01run.configis executed before.ebextensions/02do.config.

  • Default Values– If a configuration option has a default value, it only applies when the option is not set at any of the above levels.

If the same configuration option is defined in more than one location, the setting with the highest precedence is applied. When a setting is applied from a saved configuration or settings applied directly to the environment, the setting is stored as part of the environment’s configuration. These settings can be removed with the AWS CLI or with the EB CLI
.
Settings in configuration files are not applied
directly to the environment and cannot be removed without modifying the configuration files and deploying a new application version.If a setting applied with one of the other methods is removed, the same setting will be loaded from configuration files in the source bundle.

Reference: Managing ec2 features – Elastic beanstalk

Q24: What statements are true about Availability Zones (AZs) and Regions?

  • A. There is only one AZ in each AWS Region
  • B. AZs are geographically separated inside a region to help protect against natural disasters affecting more than one at a time.
  • C. AZs can be moved between AWS Regions based on your needs
  • D. There are (almost always) two or more AZs in each AWS Region

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

B and D.

Reference: AWS global infrastructure/

Top

Q25: An AWS Region contains:

  • A. Edge Locations
  • B. Data Centers
  • C. AWS Services
  • D. Availability Zones


B. C. D. Edge locations are actually distinct locations that don’t explicitly fall within AWS regions.

Reference: AWS Global Infrastructure


Top

Q26: Which read request in DynamoDB returns a response with the most up-to-date data, reflecting the updates from all prior write operations that were successful?

  • A. Eventual Consistent Reads
  • B. Conditional reads for Consistency
  • C. Strongly Consistent Reads
  • D. Not possible


C. This is provided very clearly in the AWS documentation as shown below with regards to the read consistency for DynamoDB. Only in Strong Read consistency can you be guaranteed that you get the write read value after all the writes are completed.

Reference: https://aws.amazon.com/dynamodb/faqs/


Top

Q27: You’ ve been asked to move an existing development environment on the AWS Cloud. This environment consists mainly of Docker based containers. You need to ensure that minimum effort is taken during the migration process. Which of the following step would you consider for this requirement?

  • A. Create an Opswork stack and deploy the Docker containers
  • B. Create an application and Environment for the Docker containers in the Elastic Beanstalk service
  • C. Create an EC2 Instance. Install Docker and deploy the necessary containers.
  • D. Create an EC2 Instance. Install Docker and deploy the necessary containers. Add an Autoscaling Group for scalability of the containers.


B. The Elastic Beanstalk service is the ideal service to quickly provision development environments. You can also create environments which can be used to host Docker based containers.

Reference: Create and Deploy Docker in AWS


Top

Q28: You’ve written an application that uploads objects onto an S3 bucket. The size of the object varies between 200 – 500 MB. You’ve seen that the application sometimes takes a longer than expected time to upload the object. You want to improve the performance of the application. Which of the following would you consider?

  • A. Create multiple threads and upload the objects in the multiple threads
  • B. Write the items in batches for better performance
  • C. Use the Multipart upload API
  • D. Enable versioning on the Bucket

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 


C. All other options are invalid since the best way to handle large object uploads to the S3 service is to use the Multipart upload API. The Multipart upload API enables you to upload large objects in parts. You can use this API to upload new large objects or make a copy of an existing object. Multipart uploading is a three-step process: You initiate the upload, you upload the object parts, and after you have uploaded all the parts, you complete the multipart upload. Upon receiving the complete multipart upload request, Amazon S3 constructs the object from the uploaded parts, and you can then access the object just as you would any other object in your bucket.

Reference: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuoverview.html


Top

Q29: A security system monitors 600 cameras, saving image metadata every 1 minute to an Amazon DynamoDb table. Each sample involves 1kb of data, and the data writes are evenly distributed over time. How much write throughput is required for the target table?

  • A. 6000
  • B. 10
  • C. 3600
  • D. 600

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

B. When you mention the write capacity of a table in Dynamo DB, you mention it as the number of 1KB writes per second. So in the above question, since the write is happening every minute, we need to divide the value of 600 by 60, to get the number of KB writes per second. This gives a value of 10.

You can specify the Write capacity in the Capacity tab of the DynamoDB table.

Reference: AWS working with tables

Q30: What two arguments does a Python Lambda handler function require?

  • A. invocation, zone
  • B. event, zone
  • C. invocation, context
  • D. event, context


D. event, context def handler_name(event, context):
…
return some_value
Reference: AWS Lambda Function Handler in Python

Top

Q31: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only via SFTP
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere


D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere
Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package

Top

Q32: A Lambda deployment package contains:

  • A. Function code, libraries, and runtime binaries
  • B. Only function code
  • C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime
  • D. Only libraries not included within the runtime


C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime
Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package in PowerShell

Top

Q33: You have instances inside private subnets and a properly configured bastion host instance in a public subnet. None of the instances in the private subnets have a public or Elastic IP address. How can you connect an instance in the private subnet to the open internet to download system updates?

  • A. Create and assign EIP to each instance
  • B. Create and attach a second IGW to the VPC.
  • C. Create and utilize a NAT Gateway
  • D. Connect to a VPN


C. You can use a network address translation (NAT) gateway in a public subnet in your VPC to enable instances in the private subnet to initiate outbound traffic to the Internet, but prevent the instances from receiving inbound traffic initiated by someone on the Internet.
Reference: AWS Network Address Translation Gateway

Top

Q34: What feature of VPC networking should you utilize if you want to create “elasticity” in your application’s architecture?

  • A. Security Groups
  • B. Route Tables
  • C. Elastic Load Balancer
  • D. Auto Scaling


D. Auto scaling is designed specifically with elasticity in mind. Auto scaling allows for the increase and decrease of compute power based on demand, thus creating elasticity in the architecture.
Reference: AWS Autoscalling

Top

Q30: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

Answer:


D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere
Reference: AWS Lambda

Top

Q31: An organization is using an Amazon ElastiCache cluster in front of their Amazon RDS instance. The organization would like the Developer to implement logic into the code so that the cluster only retrieves data from RDS when there is a cache miss. What strategy can the Developer implement to achieve this?

  • A. Lazy loading
  • B. Write-through
  • C. Error retries
  • D. Exponential backoff

Answer:


Answer – A
Whenever your application requests data, it first makes the request to the ElastiCache cache. If the data exists in the cache and is current, ElastiCache returns the data to your application. If the data does not exist in the cache, or the data in the cache has expired, your application requests data from your data store which returns the data to your application. Your application then writes the data received from the store to the cache so it can be more quickly retrieved next time it is requested. All other options are incorrect.
Reference: Caching Strategies

Top

Q32: A developer is writing an application that will run on Ec2 instances and read messages from SQS queue. The nessages will arrive every 15-60 seconds. How should the Developer efficiently query the queue for new messages?

  • A. Use long polling
  • B. Set a custom visibility timeout
  • C. Use short polling
  • D. Implement exponential backoff


Answer – A Long polling will help insure that the applications make less requests for messages in a shorter period of time. This is more cost effective. Since the messages are only going to be available after 15 seconds and we don’t know exacly when they would be available, it is better to use Long Polling.
Reference: Amazon SQS Long Polling

Top

Q33: You are using AWS SAM to define a Lambda function and configure CodeDeploy to manage deployment patterns. With new Lambda function working as per expectation which of the following will shift traffic from original Lambda function to new Lambda function in the shortest time frame?

  • A. Canary10Percent5Minutes
  • B. Linear10PercentEvery10Minutes
  • C. Canary10Percent15Minutes
  • D. Linear10PercentEvery1Minute


Answer – A
With Canary Deployment Preference type, Traffic is shifted in two intervals. With Canary10Percent5Minutes, 10 percent of traffic is shifted in the first interval while remaining all traffic is shifted after 5 minutes.
Reference: Gradual Code Deployment

Top

Q34: You are using AWS SAM templates to deploy a serverless application. Which of the following resource will embed application from Amazon S3 buckets?

  • A. AWS::Serverless::Api
  • B. AWS::Serverless::Application
  • C. AWS::Serverless::Layerversion
  • D. AWS::Serverless::Function


Answer – B
AWS::Serverless::Application resource in AWS SAm template is used to embed application frm Amazon S3 buckets.
Reference: Declaring Serverless Resources

Top

Q35: You are using AWS Envelope Encryption for encrypting all sensitive data. Which of the followings is True with regards to Envelope Encryption?

  • A. Data is encrypted be encrypting Data key which is further encrypted using encrypted Master Key.
  • B. Data is encrypted by plaintext Data key which is further encrypted using encrypted Master Key.
  • C. Data is encrypted by encrypted Data key which is further encrypted using plaintext Master Key.
  • D. Data is encrypted by plaintext Data key which is further encrypted using plaintext Master Key.


Answer – D
With Envelope Encryption, unencrypted data is encrypted using plaintext Data key. This Data is further encrypted using plaintext Master key. This plaintext Master key is securely stored in AWS KMS & known as Customer Master Keys.
Reference: AWS Key Management Service Concepts

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q36: You are developing an application that will be comprised of the following architecture –

  1. A set of Ec2 instances to process the videos.
  2. These (Ec2 instances) will be spun up by an autoscaling group.
  3. SQS Queues to maintain the processing messages.
  4. There will be 2 pricing tiers.

How will you ensure that the premium customers videos are given more preference?

  • A. Create 2 Autoscaling Groups, one for normal and one for premium customers
  • B. Create 2 set of Ec2 Instances, one for normal and one for premium customers
  • C. Create 2 SQS queus, one for normal and one for premium customers
  • D. Create 2 Elastic Load Balancers, one for normal and one for premium customers.


Answer – C
The ideal option would be to create 2 SQS queues. Messages can then be processed by the application from the high priority queue first.<br? The other options are not the ideal options. They would lead to extra costs and also extra maintenance.
Reference: SQS

Top

Q37: You are developing an application that will interact with a DynamoDB table. The table is going to take in a lot of read and write operations. Which of the following would be the ideal partition key for the DynamoDB table to ensure ideal performance?

  • A. CustomerID
  • B. CustomerName
  • C. Location
  • D. Age


Answer- A
Use high-cardinality attributes. These are attributes that have distinct values for each item, like e-mailid, employee_no, customerid, sessionid, orderid, and so on..
Use composite attributes. Try to combine more than one attribute to form a unique key.
Reference: Choosing the right DynamoDB Partition Key

Top

Q38: A developer is making use of AWS services to develop an application. He has been asked to develop the application in a manner to compensate any network delays. Which of the following two mechanisms should he implement in the application?

  • A. Multiple SQS queues
  • B. Exponential backoff algorithm
  • C. Retries in your application code
  • D. Consider using the Java sdk.


Answer- B. and C.
In addition to simple retries, each AWS SDK implements exponential backoff algorithm for better flow control. The idea behind exponential backoff is to use progressively longer waits between retries for consecutive error responses. You should implement a maximum delay interval, as well as a maximum number of retries. The maximum delay interval and maximum number of retries are not necessarily fixed values, and should be set based on the operation being performed, as well as other local factors, such as network latency.
Reference: Error Retries and Exponential Backoff in AWS

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q39: An application is being developed that is going to write data to a DynamoDB table. You have to setup the read and write throughput for the table. Data is going to be read at the rate of 300 items every 30 seconds. Each item is of size 6KB. The reads can be eventual consistent reads. What should be the read capacity that needs to be set on the table?

  • A. 10
  • B. 20
  • C. 6
  • D. 30


Answer – A

Since there are 300 items read every 30 seconds , that means there are (300/30) = 10 items read every second.
Since each item is 6KB in size , that means , 2 reads will be required for each item.
So we have total of 2*10 = 20 reads for the number of items per second
Since eventual consistency is required , we can divide the number of reads(20) by 2 , and in the end we get the Read Capacity of 10.

Reference: Read/Write Capacity Mode


Top

Q40: You are in charge of deploying an application that will be hosted on an EC2 Instance and sit behind an Elastic Load balancer. You have been requested to monitor the incoming connections to the Elastic Load Balancer. Which of the below options can suffice this requirement?

  • A. Use AWS CloudTrail with your load balancer
  • B. Enable access logs on the load balancer
  • C. Use a CloudWatch Logs Agent
  • D. Create a custom metric CloudWatch lter on your load balancer


Answer – B
Elastic Load Balancing provides access logs that capture detailed information about requests sent to your load balancer. Each log contains information such as the time the request was received, the client’s IP address, latencies, request paths, and server responses. You can use these access logs to analyze traffic patterns and troubleshoot issues.
Reference: Access Logs for Your Application Load Balancer

Top

Q41: A static web site has been hosted on a bucket and is now being accessed by users. One of the web pages javascript section has been changed to access data which is hosted in another S3 bucket. Now that same web page is no longer loading in the browser. Which of the following can help alleviate the error?

  • A. Enable versioning for the underlying S3 bucket.
  • B. Enable Replication so that the objects get replicated to the other bucket
  • C. Enable CORS for the bucket
  • D. Change the Bucket policy for the bucket to allow access from the other bucket


Answer – C

Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) defines a way for client web applications that are loaded in one domain to interact with resources in a different domain. With CORS support, you can build rich client-side web applications with Amazon S3 and selectively allow cross-origin access to your Amazon S3 resources.

Cross-Origin Resource Sharing: Use-case Scenarios The following are example scenarios for using CORS:

Scenario 1: Suppose that you are hosting a website in an Amazon S3 bucket named website as described in Hosting a Static Website on Amazon S3. Your users load the website endpoint http://website.s3-website-us-east-1.amazonaws.com. Now you want to use JavaScript on the webpages that are stored in this bucket to be able to make authenticated GET and PUT requests against the same bucket by using the Amazon S3 API endpoint for the bucket, website.s3.amazonaws.com. A browser would normally block JavaScript from allowing those requests, but with CORS you can configure your bucket to explicitly enable cross-origin requests from website.s3-website-us-east-1.amazonaws.com.

Scenario 2: Suppose that you want to host a web font from your S3 bucket. Again, browsers require a CORS check (also called a preight check) for loading web fonts. You would configure the bucket that is hosting the web font to allow any origin to make these requests.

Reference: Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q42: Your mobile application includes a photo-sharing service that is expecting tens of thousands of users at launch. You will leverage Amazon Simple Storage Service (S3) for storage of the user Images, and you must decide how to authenticate and authorize your users for access to these images. You also need to manage the storage of these images. Which two of the following approaches should you use? Choose two answers from the options below

  • A. Create an Amazon S3 bucket per user, and use your application to generate the S3 URL for the appropriate content.
  • B. Use AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) user accounts as your application-level user database, and offload the burden of authentication from your application code.
  • C. Authenticate your users at the application level, and use AWS Security Token Service (STS)to grant token-based authorization to S3 objects.
  • D. Authenticate your users at the application level, and send an SMS token message to the user. Create an Amazon S3 bucket with the same name as the SMS message token, and move the user’s objects to that bucket.


Answer- C
The AWS Security Token Service (STS) is a web service that enables you to request temporary, limited-privilege credentials for AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) users or for users that you authenticate (federated users). The token can then be used to grant access to the objects in S3.
You can then provides access to the objects based on the key values generated via the user id.

Reference: The AWS Security Token Service (STS)


Top

Q43: Your current log analysis application takes more than four hours to generate a report of the top 10 users of your web application. You have been asked to implement a system that can report this information in real time, ensure that the report is always up to date, and handle increases in the number of requests to your web application. Choose the option that is cost-effective and can fulfill the requirements.

  • A. Publish your data to CloudWatch Logs, and congure your application to Autoscale to handle the load on demand.
  • B. Publish your log data to an Amazon S3 bucket.  Use AWS CloudFormation to create an Auto Scaling group to scale your post-processing application which is congured to pull down your log les stored an Amazon S3
  • C. Post your log data to an Amazon Kinesis data stream, and subscribe your log-processing application so that is congured to process your logging data.
  • D. Create a multi-AZ Amazon RDS MySQL cluster, post the logging data to MySQL, and run a map reduce job to retrieve the required information on user counts.

Answer:


Answer – C
Amazon Kinesis makes it easy to collect, process, and analyze real-time, streaming data so you can get timely insights and react quickly to new information. Amazon Kinesis offers key capabilities to cost effectively process streaming data at any scale, along with the flexibility to choose the tools that best suit the requirements of your application. With Amazon Kinesis, you can ingest real-time data such as application logs, website clickstreams, IoT telemetry data, and more into your databases, data lakes and data warehouses, or build your own real-time applications using this data.
Reference: Amazon Kinesis

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q44: You’ve been instructed to develop a mobile application that will make use of AWS services. You need to decide on a data store to store the user sessions. Which of the following would be an ideal data store for session management?

  • A. AWS Simple Storage Service
  • B. AWS DynamoDB
  • C. AWS RDS
  • D. AWS Redshift

Answer:


Answer – B
DynamoDB is a alternative solution which can be used for storage of session management. The latency of access to data is less , hence this can be used as a data store for session management
Reference: Scalable Session Handling in PHP Using Amazon DynamoDB

Top

Q45: Your application currently interacts with a DynamoDB table. Records are inserted into the table via the application. There is now a requirement to ensure that whenever items are updated in the DynamoDB primary table , another record is inserted into a secondary table. Which of the below feature should be used when developing such a solution?

  • A. AWS DynamoDB Encryption
  • B. AWS DynamoDB Streams
  • C. AWS DynamoDB Accelerator
  • D. AWSTable Accelerator


Answer – B
DynamoDB Streams Use Cases and Design Patterns This post describes some common use cases you might encounter, along with their design options and solutions, when migrating data from relational data stores to Amazon DynamoDB. We will consider how to manage the following scenarios:

  • How do you set up a relationship across multiple tables in which, based on the value of an item from one table, you update the item in a second table?
  • How do you trigger an event based on a particular transaction?
  • How do you audit or archive transactions?
  • How do you replicate data across multiple tables (similar to that of materialized views/streams/replication in relational data stores)?

Relational databases provide native support for transactions, triggers, auditing, and replication. Typically, a transaction in a database refers to performing create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations against multiple tables in a block. A transaction can have only two states—success or failure. In other words, there is no partial completion. As a NoSQL database, DynamoDB is not designed to support transactions. Although client-side libraries are available to mimic the transaction capabilities, they are not scalable and cost-effective. For example, the Java Transaction Library for DynamoDB creates 7N+4 additional writes for every write operation. This is partly because the library holds metadata to manage the transactions to ensure that it’s consistent and can be rolled back before commit. You can use DynamoDB Streams to address all these use cases. DynamoDB Streams is a powerful service that you can combine with other AWS services to solve many similar problems. When enabled, DynamoDB Streams captures a time-ordered sequence of item-level modifications in a DynamoDB table and durably stores the information for up to 24 hours. Applications can access a series of stream records, which contain an item change, from a DynamoDB stream in near real time. AWS maintains separate endpoints for DynamoDB and DynamoDB Streams. To work with database tables and indexes, your application must access a DynamoDB endpoint. To read and process DynamoDB Streams records, your application must access a DynamoDB Streams endpoint in the same Region. All of the other options are incorrect since none of these would meet the core requirement.
Reference: DynamoDB Streams Use Cases and Design Patterns


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q46: An application has been making use of AWS DynamoDB for its back-end data store. The size of the table has now grown to 20 GB , and the scans on the table are causing throttling errors. Which of the following should now be implemented to avoid such errors?

  • A. Large Page size
  • B. Reduced page size
  • C. Parallel Scans
  • D. Sequential scans

Answer – B
When you scan your table in Amazon DynamoDB, you should follow the DynamoDB best practices for avoiding sudden bursts of read activity. You can use the following technique to minimize the impact of a scan on a table’s provisioned throughput. Reduce page size Because a Scan operation reads an entire page (by default, 1 MB), you can reduce the impact of the scan operation by setting a smaller page size. The Scan operation provides a Limit parameter that you can use to set the page size for your request. Each Query or Scan request that has a smaller page size uses fewer read operations and creates a “pause” between each request. For example, suppose that each item is 4 KB and you set the page size to 40 items. A Query request would then consume only 20 eventually consistent read operations or 40 strongly consistent read operations. A larger number of smaller Query or Scan operations would allow your other critical requests to succeed without throttling.
Reference1: Rate-Limited Scans in Amazon DynamoDB

Reference2: Best Practices for Querying and Scanning Data


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q47: Which of the following is correct way of passing a stage variable to an HTTP URL ? (Select TWO.)

  • A. http://example.com/${}/prod
  • B. http://example.com/${stageVariables.}/prod
  • C. http://${stageVariables.}.example.com/dev/operation
  • D. http://${stageVariables}.example.com/dev/operation
  • E. http://${}.example.com/dev/operation
  • F. http://example.com/${stageVariables}/prod


Answer – B. and C.
A stage variable can be used as part of HTTP integration URL as in following cases, ·         A full URI without protocol ·         A full domain ·         A subdomain ·         A path ·         A query string In the above case , option B & C displays stage variable as a path & sub-domain.
Reference: Amazon API Gateway Stage Variables Reference

Top

Q48: Your company is planning on creating new development environments in AWS. They want to make use of their existing Chef recipes which they use for their on-premise configuration for servers in AWS. Which of the following service would be ideal to use in this regard?

  • A. AWS Elastic Beanstalk
  • B. AWS OpsWork
  • C. AWS Cloudformation
  • D. AWS SQS


Answer – B
AWS OpsWorks is a configuration management service that provides managed instances of Chef and Puppet. Chef and Puppet are automation platforms that allow you to use code to automate the configurations of your servers. OpsWorks lets you use Chef and Puppet to automate how servers are configured, deployed, and managed across your Amazon EC2 instances or on-premises compute environments All other options are invalid since they cannot be used to work with Chef recipes for configuration management.
Reference: AWS OpsWorks

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q49: Your company has developed a web application and is hosting it in an Amazon S3 bucket configured for static website hosting. The users can log in to this app using their Google/Facebook login accounts. The application is using the AWS SDK for JavaScript in the browser to access data stored in an Amazon DynamoDB table. How can you ensure that API keys for access to your data in DynamoDB are kept secure?

  • A. Create an Amazon S3 role in IAM with access to the specific DynamoDB tables, and assign it to the bucket hosting your website
  • B. Configure S3 bucket tags with your AWS access keys for your bucket hosing your website so that the application can query them for access.
  • C. Configure a web identity federation role within IAM to enable access to the correct DynamoDB resources and retrieve temporary credentials
  • D. Store AWS keys in global variables within your application and configure the application to use these credentials when making requests.


Answer – C
With web identity federation, you don’t need to create custom sign-in code or manage your own user identities. Instead, users of your app can sign in using a well-known identity provider (IdP) —such as Login with Amazon, Facebook, Google, or any other OpenID Connect (OIDC)-compatible IdP, receive an authentication token, and then exchange that token for temporary security credentials in AWS that map to an IAM role with permissions to use the resources in your AWS account. Using an IdP helps you keep your AWS account secure, because you don’t have to embed and distribute long-term security credentials with your application. Option A is invalid since Roles cannot be assigned to S3 buckets Options B and D are invalid since the AWS Access keys should not be used
Reference: About Web Identity Federation

Top

Q50: Your application currently makes use of AWS Cognito for managing user identities. You want to analyze the information that is stored in AWS Cognito for your application. Which of the following features of AWS Cognito should you use for this purpose?

  • A. Cognito Data
  • B. Cognito Events
  • C. Cognito Streams
  • D. Cognito Callbacks


Answer – C
Amazon Cognito Streams gives developers control and insight into their data stored in Amazon Cognito. Developers can now configure a Kinesis stream to receive events as data is updated and synchronized. Amazon Cognito can push each dataset change to a Kinesis stream you own in real time. All other options are invalid since you should use Cognito Streams
Reference:

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q51: You’ve developed a set of scripts using AWS Lambda. These scripts need to access EC2 Instances in a VPC. Which of the following needs to be done to ensure that the AWS Lambda function can access the resources in the VPC. Choose 2 answers from the options given below

  • A. Ensure that the subnet ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function
  • B. Ensure that the NACL ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function
  • C. Ensure that the Security Group ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function
  • D. Ensure that the VPC Flow Log ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function


Answer: A and C.
AWS Lambda runs your function code securely within a VPC by default. However, to enable your Lambda function to access resources inside your private VPC, you must provide additional VPCspecific configuration information that includes VPC subnet IDs and security group IDs. AWS Lambda uses this information to set up elastic network interfaces (ENIs) that enable your function to connect securely to other resources within your private VPC.
Reference: Configuring a Lambda Function to Access Resources in an Amazon VPC

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q52: You’ve currently been tasked to migrate an existing on-premise environment into Elastic Beanstalk. The application does not make use of Docker containers. You also can’t see any relevant environments in the beanstalk service that would be suitable to host your application. What should you consider doing in this case?

  • A. Migrate your application to using Docker containers and then migrate the app to the Elastic Beanstalk environment.
  • B. Consider using Cloudformation to deploy your environment to Elastic Beanstalk
  • C. Consider using Packer to create a custom platform
  • D. Consider deploying your application using the Elastic Container Service


Answer – C
Elastic Beanstalk supports custom platforms. A custom platform is a more advanced customization than a Custom Image in several ways. A custom platform lets you develop an entire new platform from scratch, customizing the operating system, additional software, and scripts that Elastic Beanstalk runs on platform instances. This flexibility allows you to build a platform for an application that uses a language or other infrastructure software, for which Elastic Beanstalk doesn’t provide a platform out of the box. Compare that to custom images, where you modify an AMI for use with an existing Elastic Beanstalk platform, and Elastic Beanstalk still provides the platform scripts and controls the platform’s software stack. In addition, with custom platforms you use an automated, scripted way to create and maintain your customization, whereas with custom images you make the changes manually over a running instance. To create a custom platform, you build an Amazon Machine Image (AMI) from one of the supported operating systems—Ubuntu, RHEL, or Amazon Linux (see the flavor entry in Platform.yaml File Format for the exact version numbers)—and add further customizations. You create your own Elastic Beanstalk platform using Packer, which is an open-source tool for creating machine images for many platforms, including AMIs for use with Amazon EC2. An Elastic Beanstalk platform comprises an AMI configured to run a set of software that supports an application, and metadata that can include custom configuration options and default configuration option settings.
Reference: AWS Elastic Beanstalk Custom Platforms

Top

Q53: Company B is writing 10 items to the Dynamo DB table every second. Each item is 15.5Kb in size. What would be the required provisioned write throughput for best performance? Choose the correct answer from the options below.

  • A. 10
  • B. 160
  • C. 155
  • D. 16


Answer – B.
Company B is writing 10 items to the Dynamo DB table every second. Each item is 15.5Kb in size. What would be the required provisioned write throughput for best performance? Choose the correct answer from the options below.
Reference: Read/Write Capacity Mode

Top

Top

Q54: Which AWS Service can be used to automatically install your application code onto EC2, on premises systems and Lambda?

  • A. CodeCommit
  • B. X-Ray
  • C. CodeBuild
  • D. CodeDeploy


Answer: D

Reference: AWS CodeDeploy


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q55: Which AWS service can be used to compile source code, run tests and package code?

  • A. CodePipeline
  • B. CodeCommit
  • C. CodeBuild
  • D. CodeDeploy


Answer: D

Reference: AWS CodeDeploy Answer: B.

Reference: AWS CodeBuild


Top

Q56: How can your prevent CloudFormation from deleting your entire stack on failure? (Choose 2)

  • A. Set the Rollback on failure radio button to No in the CloudFormation console
  • B. Set Termination Protection to Enabled in the CloudFormation console
  • C. Use the –disable-rollback flag with the AWS CLI
  • D. Use the –enable-termination-protection protection flag with the AWS CLI

Answer: A. and C.

Reference: Protecting a Stack From Being Deleted

Top

Q57: Which of the following practices allows multiple developers working on the same application to merge code changes frequently, without impacting each other and enables the identification of bugs early on in the release process?

  • A. Continuous Integration
  • B. Continuous Deployment
  • C. Continuous Delivery
  • D. Continuous Development

Top

Q58: When deploying application code to EC2, the AppSpec file can be written in which language?

  • A. JSON
  • B. JSON or YAML
  • C. XML
  • D. YAML

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q59: Part of your CloudFormation deployment fails due to a mis-configuration, by defaukt what will happen?

  • A. CloudFormation will rollback only the failed components
  • B. CloudFormation will rollback the entire stack
  • C. Failed component will remain available for debugging purposes
  • D. CloudFormation will ask you if you want to continue with the deployment


Top

Q60: You want to receive an email whenever a user pushes code to CodeCommit repository, how can you configure this?

  • A. Create a new SNS topic and configure it to poll for CodeCommit eveents. Ask all users to subscribe to the topic to receive notifications
  • B. Configure a CloudWatch Events rule to send a message to SES which will trigger an email to be sent whenever a user pushes code to the repository.
  • C. Configure Notifications in the console, this will create a CloudWatch events rule to send a notification to a SNS topic which will trigger an email to be sent to the user.
  • D. Configure a CloudWatch Events rule to send a message to SQS which will trigger an email to be sent whenever a user pushes code to the repository.

Answer: C

Reference: Getting Started with Amazon SNS


Top

Q61: Which AWS service can be used to centrally store and version control your application source code, binaries and libraries

  • A. CodeCommit
  • B. CodeBuild
  • C. CodePipeline
  • D. ElasticFileSystem

Answer: A

Reference: AWS CodeCommit


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q62: You are using CloudFormation to create a new S3 bucket, which of the following sections would you use to define the properties of your bucket?

  • A. Conditions
  • B. Parameters
  • C. Outputs
  • D. Resources

Answer: D

Reference: Resources


Top

Q63: You are deploying a number of EC2 and RDS instances using CloudFormation. Which section of the CloudFormation template would you use to define these?

  • A. Transforms
  • B. Outputs
  • C. Resources
  • D. Instances

Answer: C.
The Resources section defines your resources you are provisioning. Outputs is used to output user defines data relating to the reources you have built and can also used as input to another CloudFormation stack. Transforms is used to reference code located in S3.
Reference: Resources

Top

Q64: Which AWS service can be used to fully automate your entire release process?

  • A. CodeDeploy
  • B. CodePipeline
  • C. CodeCommit
  • D. CodeBuild

Answer: B.
AWS CodePipeline is a fully managed continuous delivery service that helps you automate your release pipelines for fast and reliable application and infrastructure updates

Reference: AWS CodePipeline


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q65: You want to use the output of your CloudFormation stack as input to another CloudFormation stack. Which sections of the CloudFormation template would you use to help you configure this?

  • A. Outputs
  • B. Transforms
  • C. Resources
  • D. Exports

Answer: A.
Outputs is used to output user defines data relating to the reources you have built and can also used as input to another CloudFormation stack.
Reference: CloudFormation Outputs

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q66: You have some code located in an S3 bucket that you want to reference in your CloudFormation template. Which section of the template can you use to define this?

  • A. Inputs
  • B. Resources
  • C. Transforms
  • D. Files

Answer: C.
Transforms is used to reference code located in S3 and also specififying the use of the Serverless Application Model (SAM) for Lambda deployments.
Reference: Transforms

Top

Q67: You are deploying an application to a number of Ec2 instances using CodeDeploy. What is the name of the file
used to specify source files and lifecycle hooks?

  • A. buildspec.yml
  • B. appspec.json
  • C. appspec.yml
  • D. buildspec.json

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q68: Which of the following approaches allows you to re-use pieces of CloudFormation code in multiple templates, for common use cases like provisioning a load balancer or web server?

  • A. Share the code using an EBS volume
  • B. Copy and paste the code into the template each time you need to use it
  • C. Use a cloudformation nested stack
  • D. Store the code you want to re-use in an AMI and reference the AMI from within your CloudFormation template.

Answer: C.

Reference: Working with Nested Stacks

Top

Q69: In the CodeDeploy AppSpec file, what are hooks used for?

  • A. To reference AWS resources that will be used during the deployment
  • B. Hooks are reserved for future use
  • C. To specify files you want to copy during the deployment.
  • D. To specify, scripts or function that you want to run at set points in the deployment lifecycle

Answer: D.
The ‘hooks’ section for an EC2/On-Premises deployment contains mappings that link deployment lifecycle event hooks to one or more scripts.

Reference: AppSpec ‘hooks’ Section

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q70: Which command can you use to encrypt a plain text file using CMK?

  • A. aws kms-encrypt
  • B. aws iam encrypt
  • C. aws kms encrypt
  • D. aws encrypt

Answer: C.
aws kms encrypt –key-id 1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab –plaintext fileb://ExamplePlaintextFile –output text –query CiphertextBlob > C:\Temp\ExampleEncryptedFile.base64

Reference: AWS CLI Encrypt

Top

Q72: Which of the following is an encrypted key used by KMS to encrypt your data

  • A. Custmoer Mamaged Key
  • B. Encryption Key
  • C. Envelope Key
  • D. Customer Master Key

Answer: C.
Your Data key also known as the Enveloppe key is encrypted using the master key.This approach is known as Envelope encryption.
Envelope encryption is the practice of encrypting plaintext data with a data key, and then encrypting the data key under another key.

Reference: Envelope Encryption

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q73: Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose 2)

  • A. The Customer Master Key is used to encrypt and decrypt the Envelope Key or Data Key
  • B. The Envelope Key or Data Key is used to encrypt and decrypt plain text files.
  • C. The envelope Key or Data Key is used to encrypt and decrypt the Customer Master Key.
  • D. The Customer MasterKey is used to encrypt and decrypt plain text files.

Answer: A. and B.

Reference: AWS Key Management Service Concepts

Top

Q74: Which of the following statements is correct in relation to kMS/ (Choose 2)

  • A. KMS Encryption keys are regional
  • B. You cannot export your customer master key
  • C. You can export your customer master key.
  • D. KMS encryption Keys are global

Answer: A. and B.

Reference: AWS Key Management Service FAQs

Q75:  A developer is preparing a deployment package for a Java implementation of an AWS Lambda function. What should the developer include in the deployment package? (Select TWO.)
A. Compiled application code
B. Java runtime environment
C. References to the event sources
D. Lambda execution role
E. Application dependencies


Answer: C. E.
Notes: To create a Lambda function, you first create a Lambda function deployment package. This package is a .zip or .jar file consisting of your code and any dependencies.
Reference: Lambda deployment packages.

Q76: A developer uses AWS CodeDeploy to deploy a Python application to a fleet of Amazon EC2 instances that run behind an Application Load Balancer. The instances run in an Amazon EC2 Auto Scaling group across multiple Availability Zones. What should the developer include in the CodeDeploy deployment package?
A. A launch template for the Amazon EC2 Auto Scaling group
B. A CodeDeploy AppSpec file
C. An EC2 role that grants the application access to AWS services
D. An IAM policy that grants the application access to AWS services


Answer: B.
Notes: The CodeDeploy AppSpec (application specific) file is unique to CodeDeploy. The AppSpec file is used to manage each deployment as a series of lifecycle event hooks, which are defined in the file.
Reference: CodeDeploy application specification (AppSpec) files.
Category: Deployment

Q76: A company is working on a project to enhance its serverless application development process. The company hosts applications on AWS Lambda. The development team regularly updates the Lambda code and wants to use stable code in production. Which combination of steps should the development team take to configure Lambda functions to meet both development and production requirements? (Select TWO.)

A. Create a new Lambda version every time a new code release needs testing.
B. Create two Lambda function aliases. Name one as Production and the other as Development. Point the Production alias to a production-ready unqualified Amazon Resource Name (ARN) version. Point the Development alias to the $LATEST version.
C. Create two Lambda function aliases. Name one as Production and the other as Development. Point the Production alias to the production-ready qualified Amazon Resource Name (ARN) version. Point the Development alias to the variable LAMBDA_TASK_ROOT.
D. Create a new Lambda layer every time a new code release needs testing.
E. Create two Lambda function aliases. Name one as Production and the other as Development. Point the Production alias to a production-ready Lambda layer Amazon Resource Name (ARN). Point the Development alias to the $LATEST layer ARN.


Answer: A. B.
Notes: Lambda function versions are designed to manage deployment of functions. They can be used for code changes, without affecting the stable production version of the code. By creating separate aliases for Production and Development, systems can initiate the correct alias as needed. A Lambda function alias can be used to point to a specific Lambda function version. Using the functionality to update an alias and its linked version, the development team can update the required version as needed. The $LATEST version is the newest published version.
Reference: Lambda function versions.

For more information about Lambda layers, see Creating and sharing Lambda layers.

For more information about Lambda function aliases, see Lambda function aliases.

Category: Deployment

Q77: Each time a developer publishes a new version of an AWS Lambda function, all the dependent event source mappings need to be updated with the reference to the new version’s Amazon Resource Name (ARN). These updates are time consuming and error-prone. Which combination of actions should the developer take to avoid performing these updates when publishing a new Lambda version? (Select TWO.)
A. Update event source mappings with the ARN of the Lambda layer.
B. Point a Lambda alias to a new version of the Lambda function.
C. Create a Lambda alias for each published version of the Lambda function.
D. Point a Lambda alias to a new Lambda function alias.
E. Update the event source mappings with the Lambda alias ARN.


Answer: B. E.
Notes: A Lambda alias is a pointer to a specific Lambda function version. Instead of using ARNs for the Lambda function in event source mappings, you can use an alias ARN. You do not need to update your event source mappings when you promote a new version or roll back to a previous version.
Reference: Lambda function aliases.
Category: Deployment

Q78:  A company wants to store sensitive user data in Amazon S3 and encrypt this data at rest. The company must manage the encryption keys and use Amazon S3 to perform the encryption. How can a developer meet these requirements?
A. Enable default encryption for the S3 bucket by using the option for server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C).
B. Enable client-side encryption with an encryption key. Upload the encrypted object to the S3 bucket.
C. Enable server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed encryption keys (SSE-S3). Upload an object to the S3 bucket.
D. Enable server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C). Upload an object to the S3 bucket.


Answer: D.
Notes: When you upload an object, Amazon S3 uses the encryption key you provide to apply AES-256 encryption to your data and removes the encryption key from memory.
Reference: Protecting data using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C).

Category: Security

Q79: A company is developing a Python application that submits data to an Amazon DynamoDB table. The company requires client-side encryption of specific data items and end-to-end protection for the encrypted data in transit and at rest. Which combination of steps will meet the requirement for the encryption of specific data items? (Select TWO.)

A. Generate symmetric encryption keys with AWS Key Management Service (AWS KMS).
B. Generate asymmetric encryption keys with AWS Key Management Service (AWS KMS).
C. Use generated keys with the DynamoDB Encryption Client.
D. Use generated keys to configure DynamoDB table encryption with AWS managed customer master keys (CMKs).
E. Use generated keys to configure DynamoDB table encryption with AWS owned customer master keys (CMKs).


Answer: A. C.
Notes: When the DynamoDB Encryption Client is configured to use AWS KMS, it uses a customer master key (CMK) that is always encrypted when used outside of AWS KMS. This cryptographic materials provider returns a unique encryption key and signing key for every table item. This method of encryption uses a symmetric CMK.
Reference: Direct KMS Materials Provider.
Category: Deployment

Q80: A company is developing a REST API with Amazon API Gateway. Access to the API should be limited to users in the existing Amazon Cognito user pool. Which combination of steps should a developer perform to secure the API? (Select TWO.)
A. Create an AWS Lambda authorizer for the API.
B. Create an Amazon Cognito authorizer for the API.
C. Configure the authorizer for the API resource.
D. Configure the API methods to use the authorizer.
E. Configure the authorizer for the API stage.


Answer: B. D.
Notes: An Amazon Cognito authorizer should be used for integration with Amazon Cognito user pools. In addition to creating an authorizer, you are required to configure an API method to use that authorizer for the API.
Reference: Control access to a REST API using Amazon Cognito user pools as authorizer.
Category: Security

Q81: A developer is implementing a mobile app to provide personalized services to app users. The application code makes calls to Amazon S3 and Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS). Which options can the developer use to authenticate the app users? (Select TWO.)
A. Authenticate to the Amazon Cognito identity pool directly.
B. Authenticate to AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) directly.
C. Authenticate to the Amazon Cognito user pool directly.
D. Federate authentication by using Login with Amazon with the users managed with AWS Security Token Service (AWS STS).
E. Federate authentication by using Login with Amazon with the users managed with the Amazon Cognito user pool.


Answer: C. E.
Notes: The Amazon Cognito user pool provides direct user authentication. The Amazon Cognito user pool provides a federated authentication option with third-party identity provider (IdP), including amazon.com.
Reference: Adding User Pool Sign-in Through a Third Party.
Category: Security

Question: A company is implementing several order processing workflows. Each workflow is implemented by using AWS Lambda functions for each task. Which combination of steps should a developer follow to implement these workflows? (Select TWO.)
A. Define a AWS Step Functions task for each Lambda function.
B. Define a AWS Step Functions task for each workflow.
C. Write code that polls the AWS Step Functions invocation to coordinate each workflow.
D. Define an AWS Step Functions state machine for each workflow.
E. Define an AWS Step Functions state machine for each Lambda function.
Answer: A. D.
Notes: Step Functions is based on state machines and tasks. A state machine is a workflow. Tasks perform work by coordinating with other AWS services, such as Lambda. A state machine is a workflow. It can be used to express a workflow as a number of states, their relationships, and their input and output. You can coordinate individual tasks with Step Functions by expressing your workflow as a finite state machine, written in the Amazon States Language.
ReferenceText: Getting Started with AWS Step Functions.
ReferenceUrl: https://aws.amazon.com/step-functions/getting-started/
Category: Development

Welcome to AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam Preparation: Definition and Objectives, Top 100 Questions and Answers dump, White papers, Courses, Labs and Training Materials, Exam info and details, References, Jobs, Others AWS Certificates

AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep
AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep
 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

What is the AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam?

This AWS Certified Developer-Associate Examination is intended for individuals who perform a Developer role. It validates an examinee’s ability to:

  • Demonstrate an understanding of core AWS services, uses, and basic AWS architecture best practices
  • Demonstrate proficiency in developing, deploying, and debugging cloud-based applications by using AWS

Recommended general IT knowledge
The target candidate should have the following:
– In-depth knowledge of at least one high-level programming language
– Understanding of application lifecycle management
– The ability to write code for serverless applications
– Understanding of the use of containers in the development process

Recommended AWS knowledge
The target candidate should be able to do the following:

  • Use the AWS service APIs, CLI, and software development kits (SDKs) to write applications
  • Identify key features of AWS services
  • Understand the AWS shared responsibility model
  • Use a continuous integration and continuous delivery (CI/CD) pipeline to deploy applications on AWS
  • Use and interact with AWS services
  • Apply basic understanding of cloud-native applications to write code
  • Write code by using AWS security best practices (for example, use IAM roles instead of secret and access keys in the code)
  • Author, maintain, and debug code modules on AWS

What is considered out of scope for the target candidate?
The following is a non-exhaustive list of related job tasks that the target candidate is not expected to be able to perform. These items are considered out of scope for the exam:
– Design architectures (for example, distributed system, microservices)
– Design and implement CI/CD pipelines

  • Administer IAM users and groups
  • Administer Amazon Elastic Container Service (Amazon ECS)
  • Design AWS networking infrastructure (for example, Amazon VPC, AWS Direct Connect)
  • Understand compliance and licensing

Exam content
Response types
There are two types of questions on the exam:
– Multiple choice: Has one correct response and three incorrect responses (distractors)
– Multiple response: Has two or more correct responses out of five or more response options
Select one or more responses that best complete the statement or answer the question. Distractors, or incorrect answers, are response options that a candidate with incomplete knowledge or skill might choose.
Distractors are generally plausible responses that match the content area.
Unanswered questions are scored as incorrect; there is no penalty for guessing. The exam includes 50 questions that will affect your score.

Unscored content
The exam includes 15 unscored questions that do not affect your score. AWS collects information about candidate performance on these unscored questions to evaluate these questions for future use as scored questions. These unscored questions are not identified on the exam.

Exam results
The AWS Certified Developer – Associate (DVA-C01) exam is a pass or fail exam. The exam is scored against a minimum standard established by AWS professionals who follow certification industry best practices and guidelines.
Your results for the exam are reported as a scaled score of 100–1,000. The minimum passing score is 720.
Your score shows how you performed on the exam as a whole and whether you passed. Scaled scoring models help equate scores across multiple exam forms that might have slightly different difficulty levels.
Your score report could contain a table of classifications of your performance at each section level. This information is intended to provide general feedback about your exam performance. The exam uses a compensatory scoring model, which means that you do not need to achieve a passing score in each section. You need to pass only the overall exam.
Each section of the exam has a specific weighting, so some sections have more questions than other sections have. The table contains general information that highlights your strengths and weaknesses. Use caution when interpreting section-level feedback.

Content outline
This exam guide includes weightings, test domains, and objectives for the exam. It is not a comprehensive listing of the content on the exam. However, additional context for each of the objectives is available to help guide your preparation for the exam. The following table lists the main content domains and their weightings. The table precedes the complete exam content outline, which includes the additional context.
The percentage in each domain represents only scored content.

Domain 1: Deployment 22%
Domain 2: Security 26%
Domain 3: Development with AWS Services 30%
Domain 4: Refactoring 10%
Domain 5: Monitoring and Troubleshooting 12%

Domain 1: Deployment
1.1 Deploy written code in AWS using existing CI/CD pipelines, processes, and patterns.
–  Commit code to a repository and invoke build, test and/or deployment actions
–  Use labels and branches for version and release management
–  Use AWS CodePipeline to orchestrate workflows against different environments
–  Apply AWS CodeCommit, AWS CodeBuild, AWS CodePipeline, AWS CodeStar, and AWS
CodeDeploy for CI/CD purposes
–  Perform a roll back plan based on application deployment policy

1.2 Deploy applications using AWS Elastic Beanstalk.
–  Utilize existing supported environments to define a new application stack
–  Package the application
–  Introduce a new application version into the Elastic Beanstalk environment
–  Utilize a deployment policy to deploy an application version (i.e., all at once, rolling, rolling with batch, immutable)
–  Validate application health using Elastic Beanstalk dashboard
–  Use Amazon CloudWatch Logs to instrument application logging

1.3 Prepare the application deployment package to be deployed to AWS.
–  Manage the dependencies of the code module (like environment variables, config files and static image files) within the package
–  Outline the package/container directory structure and organize files appropriately
–  Translate application resource requirements to AWS infrastructure parameters (e.g., memory, cores)

1.4 Deploy serverless applications.
–  Given a use case, implement and launch an AWS Serverless Application Model (AWS SAM) template
–  Manage environments in individual AWS services (e.g., Differentiate between Development, Test, and Production in Amazon API Gateway)

Domain 2: Security
2.1 Make authenticated calls to AWS services.
–  Communicate required policy based on least privileges required by application.
–  Assume an IAM role to access a service
–  Use the software development kit (SDK) credential provider on-premises or in the cloud to access AWS services (local credentials vs. instance roles)

2.2 Implement encryption using AWS services.
– Encrypt data at rest (client side; server side; envelope encryption) using AWS services
–  Encrypt data in transit

2.3 Implement application authentication and authorization.
– Add user sign-up and sign-in functionality for applications with Amazon Cognito identity or user pools
–  Use Amazon Cognito-provided credentials to write code that access AWS services.
–  Use Amazon Cognito sync to synchronize user profiles and data
–  Use developer-authenticated identities to interact between end user devices, backend
authentication, and Amazon Cognito

Domain 3: Development with AWS Services
3.1 Write code for serverless applications.
– Compare and contrast server-based vs. serverless model (e.g., micro services, stateless nature of serverless applications, scaling serverless applications, and decoupling layers of serverless applications)
– Configure AWS Lambda functions by defining environment variables and parameters (e.g., memory, time out, runtime, handler)
– Create an API endpoint using Amazon API Gateway
–  Create and test appropriate API actions like GET, POST using the API endpoint
–  Apply Amazon DynamoDB concepts (e.g., tables, items, and attributes)
–  Compute read/write capacity units for Amazon DynamoDB based on application requirements
–  Associate an AWS Lambda function with an AWS event source (e.g., Amazon API Gateway, Amazon CloudWatch event, Amazon S3 events, Amazon Kinesis)
–  Invoke an AWS Lambda function synchronously and asynchronously

3.2 Translate functional requirements into application design.
– Determine real-time vs. batch processing for a given use case
– Determine use of synchronous vs. asynchronous for a given use case
– Determine use of event vs. schedule/poll for a given use case
– Account for tradeoffs for consistency models in an application design

Domain 4: Refactoring
4.1 Optimize applications to best use AWS services and features.
 Implement AWS caching services to optimize performance (e.g., Amazon ElastiCache, Amazon API Gateway cache)
 Apply an Amazon S3 naming scheme for optimal read performance

4.2 Migrate existing application code to run on AWS.
– Isolate dependencies
– Run the application as one or more stateless processes
– Develop in order to enable horizontal scalability
– Externalize state

Domain 5: Monitoring and Troubleshooting

5.1 Write code that can be monitored.
– Create custom Amazon CloudWatch metrics
– Perform logging in a manner available to systems operators
– Instrument application source code to enable tracing in AWS X-Ray

5.2 Perform root cause analysis on faults found in testing or production.
– Interpret the outputs from the logging mechanism in AWS to identify errors in logs
– Check build and testing history in AWS services (e.g., AWS CodeBuild, AWS CodeDeploy, AWS CodePipeline) to identify issues
– Utilize AWS services (e.g., Amazon CloudWatch, VPC Flow Logs, and AWS X-Ray) to locate a specific faulty component

Which key tools, technologies, and concepts might be covered on the exam?

The following is a non-exhaustive list of the tools and technologies that could appear on the exam.
This list is subject to change and is provided to help you understand the general scope of services, features, or technologies on the exam.
The general tools and technologies in this list appear in no particular order.
AWS services are grouped according to their primary functions. While some of these technologies will likely be covered more than others on the exam, the order and placement of them in this list is no indication of relative weight or importance:
– Analytics
– Application Integration
– Containers
– Cost and Capacity Management
– Data Movement
– Developer Tools
– Instances (virtual machines)
– Management and Governance
– Networking and Content Delivery
– Security
– Serverless

AWS services and features

Analytics:
– Amazon Elasticsearch Service (Amazon ES)
– Amazon Kinesis
Application Integration:
– Amazon EventBridge (Amazon CloudWatch Events)
– Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS)
– Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS)
– AWS Step Functions

Compute:
– Amazon EC2
– AWS Elastic Beanstalk
– AWS Lambda

Containers:
– Amazon Elastic Container Registry (Amazon ECR)
– Amazon Elastic Container Service (Amazon ECS)
– Amazon Elastic Kubernetes Services (Amazon EKS)

Database:
– Amazon DynamoDB
– Amazon ElastiCache
– Amazon RDS

Developer Tools:
– AWS CodeArtifact
– AWS CodeBuild
– AWS CodeCommit
– AWS CodeDeploy
– Amazon CodeGuru
– AWS CodePipeline
– AWS CodeStar
– AWS Fault Injection Simulator
– AWS X-Ray

Management and Governance:
– AWS CloudFormation
– Amazon CloudWatch

Networking and Content Delivery:
– Amazon API Gateway
– Amazon CloudFront
– Elastic Load Balancing

Security, Identity, and Compliance:
– Amazon Cognito
– AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM)
– AWS Key Management Service (AWS KMS)

Storage:
– Amazon S3

Out-of-scope AWS services and features

The following is a non-exhaustive list of AWS services and features that are not covered on the exam.
These services and features do not represent every AWS offering that is excluded from the exam content.
Services or features that are entirely unrelated to the target job roles for the exam are excluded from this list because they are assumed to be irrelevant.
Out-of-scope AWS services and features include the following:
– AWS Application Discovery Service
– Amazon AppStream 2.0
– Amazon Chime
– Amazon Connect
– AWS Database Migration Service (AWS DMS)
– AWS Device Farm
– Amazon Elastic Transcoder
– Amazon GameLift
– Amazon Lex
– Amazon Machine Learning (Amazon ML)
– AWS Managed Services
– Amazon Mobile Analytics
– Amazon Polly

– Amazon QuickSight
– Amazon Rekognition
– AWS Server Migration Service (AWS SMS)
– AWS Service Catalog
– AWS Shield Advanced
– AWS Shield Standard
– AWS Snow Family
– AWS Storage Gateway
– AWS WAF
– Amazon WorkMail
– Amazon WorkSpaces

To succeed with the real exam, do not memorize the answers below. It is very important that you understand why a question is right or wrong and the concepts behind it by carefully reading the reference documents in the answers.

Top

AWS Certified Developer – Associate Practice Questions And Answers Dump

Q0: Your application reads commands from an SQS queue and sends them to web services hosted by your
partners. When a partner’s endpoint goes down, your application continually returns their commands to the queue. The repeated attempts to deliver these commands use up resources. Commands that can’t be delivered must not be lost.
How can you accommodate the partners’ broken web services without wasting your resources?

  • A. Create a delay queue and set DelaySeconds to 30 seconds
  • B. Requeue the message with a VisibilityTimeout of 30 seconds.
  • C. Create a dead letter queue and set the Maximum Receives to 3.
  • D. Requeue the message with a DelaySeconds of 30 seconds.
AWS Developer Associates DVA-C01 PRO
AWS Developer Associates DVA-C01 PRO
 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 


C. After a message is taken from the queue and returned for the maximum number of retries, it is
automatically sent to a dead letter queue, if one has been configured. It stays there until you retrieve it for forensic purposes.

Reference: Amazon SQS Dead-Letter Queues


Top

Q1: A developer is writing an application that will store data in a DynamoDB table. The ratio of reads operations to write operations will be 1000 to 1, with the same data being accessed frequently.
What should the Developer enable on the DynamoDB table to optimize performance and minimize costs?

  • A. Amazon DynamoDB auto scaling
  • B. Amazon DynamoDB cross-region replication
  • C. Amazon DynamoDB Streams
  • D. Amazon DynamoDB Accelerator


D. The AWS Documentation mentions the following:

DAX is a DynamoDB-compatible caching service that enables you to benefit from fast in-memory performance for demanding applications. DAX addresses three core scenarios

  1. As an in-memory cache, DAX reduces the response times of eventually-consistent read workloads by an order of magnitude, from single-digit milliseconds to microseconds.
  2. DAX reduces operational and application complexity by providing a managed service that is API-compatible with Amazon DynamoDB, and thus requires only minimal functional changes to use with an existing application.
  3. For read-heavy or bursty workloads, DAX provides increased throughput and potential operational cost savings by reducing the need to over-provision read capacity units. This is especially beneficial for applications that require repeated reads for individual keys.

Reference: AWS DAX


Top

Q2: You are creating a DynamoDB table with the following attributes:

  • PurchaseOrderNumber (partition key)
  • CustomerID
  • PurchaseDate
  • TotalPurchaseValue

One of your applications must retrieve items from the table to calculate the total value of purchases for a
particular customer over a date range. What secondary index do you need to add to the table?

  • A. Local secondary index with a partition key of CustomerID and sort key of PurchaseDate; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute
  • B. Local secondary index with a partition key of PurchaseDate and sort key of CustomerID; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute
  • C. Global secondary index with a partition key of CustomerID and sort key of PurchaseDate; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute
  • D. Global secondary index with a partition key of PurchaseDate and sort key of CustomerID; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute


C. The query is for a particular CustomerID, so a Global Secondary Index is needed for a different partition
key. To retrieve only the desired date range, the PurchaseDate must be the sort key. Projecting the
TotalPurchaseValue into the index provides all the data needed to satisfy the use case.

Reference: AWS DynamoDB Global Secondary Indexes

Difference between local and global indexes in DynamoDB

    • Global secondary index — an index with a hash and range key that can be different from those on the table. A global secondary index is considered “global” because queries on the index can span all of the data in a table, across all partitions.
    • Local secondary index — an index that has the same hash key as the table, but a different range key. A local secondary index is “local” in the sense that every partition of a local secondary index is scoped to a table partition that has the same hash key.
    • Local Secondary Indexes still rely on the original Hash Key. When you supply a table with hash+range, think about the LSI as hash+range1, hash+range2.. hash+range6. You get 5 more range attributes to query on. Also, there is only one provisioned throughput.
    • Global Secondary Indexes defines a new paradigm – different hash/range keys per index.
      This breaks the original usage of one hash key per table. This is also why when defining GSI you are required to add a provisioned throughput per index and pay for it.
    • Local Secondary Indexes can only be created when you are creating the table, there is no way to add Local Secondary Index to an existing table, also once you create the index you cannot delete it.
    • Global Secondary Indexes can be created when you create the table and added to an existing table, deleting an existing Global Secondary Index is also allowed.

Throughput :

  • Local Secondary Indexes consume throughput from the table. When you query records via the local index, the operation consumes read capacity units from the table. When you perform a write operation (create, update, delete) in a table that has a local index, there will be two write operations, one for the table another for the index. Both operations will consume write capacity units from the table.
  • Global Secondary Indexes have their own provisioned throughput, when you query the index the operation will consume read capacity from the index, when you perform a write operation (create, update, delete) in a table that has a global index, there will be two write operations, one for the table another for the index*.


Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep
AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep
 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q3: When referencing the remaining time left for a Lambda function to run within the function’s code you would use:

  • A. The event object
  • B. The timeLeft object
  • C. The remains object
  • D. The context object


D. The context object.

Reference: AWS Lambda


Top

Q4: What two arguments does a Python Lambda handler function require?

  • A. invocation, zone
  • B. event, zone
  • C. invocation, context
  • D. event, context
D. event, context
def handler_name(event, context):
…
return some_value

Reference: AWS Lambda Function Handler in Python

Top

Q5: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only via SFTP
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package

Top

Q6: A Lambda deployment package contains:

  • A. Function code, libraries, and runtime binaries
  • B. Only function code
  • C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime
  • D. Only libraries not included within the runtime

C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime

Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package in PowerShell

Top

Q7: You are attempting to SSH into an EC2 instance that is located in a public subnet. However, you are currently receiving a timeout error trying to connect. What could be a possible cause of this connection issue?

  • A. The security group associated with the EC2 instance has an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic, but does not have an outbound rule that allows SSH traffic.
  • B. The security group associated with the EC2 instance has an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic AND has an outbound rule that explicitly denies SSH traffic.
  • C. The security group associated with the EC2 instance has an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic AND the associated NACL has both an inbound and outbound rule that allows SSH traffic.
  • D. The security group associated with the EC2 instance does not have an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic AND the associated NACL does not have an outbound rule that allows SSH traffic.


D. Security groups are stateful, so you do NOT have to have an explicit outbound rule for return requests. However, NACLs are stateless so you MUST have an explicit outbound rule configured for return request.

Reference: Comparison of Security Groups and Network ACLs

AWS Security Groups and NACL


Top

Q8: You have instances inside private subnets and a properly configured bastion host instance in a public subnet. None of the instances in the private subnets have a public or Elastic IP address. How can you connect an instance in the private subnet to the open internet to download system updates?

  • A. Create and assign EIP to each instance
  • B. Create and attach a second IGW to the VPC.
  • C. Create and utilize a NAT Gateway
  • D. Connect to a VPN


C. You can use a network address translation (NAT) gateway in a public subnet in your VPC to enable instances in the private subnet to initiate outbound traffic to the Internet, but prevent the instances from receiving inbound traffic initiated by someone on the Internet.

Reference: AWS Network Address Translation Gateway


Top

Q9: What feature of VPC networking should you utilize if you want to create “elasticity” in your application’s architecture?

  • A. Security Groups
  • B. Route Tables
  • C. Elastic Load Balancer
  • D. Auto Scaling


D. Auto scaling is designed specifically with elasticity in mind. Auto scaling allows for the increase and decrease of compute power based on demand, thus creating elasticity in the architecture.

Reference: AWS Autoscalling


Top

Q10: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

Reference: AWS Lambda

Top

Q11: You’re writing a script with an AWS SDK that uses the AWS API Actions and want to create AMIs for non-EBS backed AMIs for you. Which API call should occurs in the final process of creating an AMI?

  • A. RegisterImage
  • B. CreateImage
  • C. ami-register-image
  • D. ami-create-image

A. It is actually – RegisterImage. All AWS API Actions will follow the capitalization like this and don’t have hyphens in them.

Reference: API RegisterImage

Top

Q12: When dealing with session state in EC2-based applications using Elastic load balancers which option is generally thought of as the best practice for managing user sessions?

  • A. Having the ELB distribute traffic to all EC2 instances and then having the instance check a caching solution like ElastiCache running Redis or Memcached for session information
  • B. Permenantly assigning users to specific instances and always routing their traffic to those instances
  • C. Using Application-generated cookies to tie a user session to a particular instance for the cookie duration
  • D. Using Elastic Load Balancer generated cookies to tie a user session to a particular instance

Top

Q13: Which API call would best be used to describe an Amazon Machine Image?

  • A. ami-describe-image
  • B. ami-describe-images
  • C. DescribeImage
  • D. DescribeImages

D. In general, API actions stick to the PascalCase style with the first letter of every word capitalized.

Reference: API DescribeImages

Top

Q14: What is one key difference between an Amazon EBS-backed and an instance-store backed instance?

  • A. Autoscaling requires using Amazon EBS-backed instances
  • B. Virtual Private Cloud requires EBS backed instances
  • C. Amazon EBS-backed instances can be stopped and restarted without losing data
  • D. Instance-store backed instances can be stopped and restarted without losing data

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

C. Instance-store backed images use “ephemeral” storage (temporary). The storage is only available during the life of an instance. Rebooting an instance will allow ephemeral data stay persistent. However, stopping and starting an instance will remove all ephemeral storage.

Reference: What is the difference between EBS and Instance Store?

Top

Q15: After having created a new Linux instance on Amazon EC2, and downloaded the .pem file (called Toto.pem) you try and SSH into your IP address (54.1.132.33) using the following command.
ssh -i my_key.pem ec2-user@52.2.222.22
However you receive the following error.
@@@@@@@@ WARNING: UNPROTECTED PRIVATE KEY FILE! @ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
What is the most probable reason for this and how can you fix it?

  • A. You do not have root access on your terminal and need to use the sudo option for this to work.
  • B. You do not have enough permissions to perform the operation.
  • C. Your key file is encrypted. You need to use the -u option for unencrypted not the -i option.
  • D. Your key file must not be publicly viewable for SSH to work. You need to modify your .pem file to limit permissions.

D. You need to run something like: chmod 400 my_key.pem

Reference:

Top

Q16: You have an EBS root device on /dev/sda1 on one of your EC2 instances. You are having trouble with this particular instance and you need to either Stop/Start, Reboot or Terminate the instance but you do NOT want to lose any data that you have stored on /dev/sda1. However, you are unsure if changing the instance state in any of the aforementioned ways will cause you to lose data stored on the EBS volume. Which of the below statements best describes the effect each change of instance state would have on the data you have stored on /dev/sda1?

  • A. Whether you stop/start, reboot or terminate the instance it does not matter because data on an EBS volume is not ephemeral and the data will not be lost regardless of what method is used.
  • B. If you stop/start the instance the data will not be lost. However if you either terminate or reboot the instance the data will be lost.
  • C. Whether you stop/start, reboot or terminate the instance it does not matter because data on an EBS volume is ephemeral and it will be lost no matter what method is used.
  • D. The data will be lost if you terminate the instance, however the data will remain on /dev/sda1 if you reboot or stop/start the instance because data on an EBS volume is not ephemeral.

D. The question states that an EBS-backed root device is mounted at /dev/sda1, and EBS volumes maintain information regardless of the instance state. If it was instance store, this would be a different answer.

Reference: AWS Root Device Storage

Top

Q17: EC2 instances are launched from Amazon Machine Images (AMIs). A given public AMI:

  • A. Can only be used to launch EC2 instances in the same AWS availability zone as the AMI is stored
  • B. Can only be used to launch EC2 instances in the same country as the AMI is stored
  • C. Can only be used to launch EC2 instances in the same AWS region as the AMI is stored
  • D. Can be used to launch EC2 instances in any AWS region

C. AMIs are only available in the region they are created. Even in the case of the AWS-provided AMIs, AWS has actually copied the AMIs for you to different regions. You cannot access an AMI from one region in another region. However, you can copy an AMI from one region to another

Reference: https://aws.amazon.com/amazon-linux-ami/

Top

Q18: Which of the following statements is true about the Elastic File System (EFS)?

  • A. EFS can scale out to meet capacity requirements and scale back down when no longer needed
  • B. EFS can be used by multiple EC2 instances simultaneously
  • C. EFS cannot be used by an instance using EBS
  • D. EFS can be configured on an instance before launch just like an IAM role or EBS volumes

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

A. and B.

Reference: https://aws.amazon.com/efs/

Top

Q19: IAM Policies, at a minimum, contain what elements?

  • A. ID
  • B. Effects
  • C. Resources
  • D. Sid
  • E. Principle
  • F. Actions

B. C. and F.

Effect – Use Allow or Deny to indicate whether the policy allows or denies access.

Resource – Specify a list of resources to which the actions apply.

Action – Include a list of actions that the policy allows or denies.

Id, Sid aren’t required fields in IAM Policies. But they are optional fields

Reference: AWS IAM Access Policies

Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q20: What are the main benefits of IAM groups?

  • A. The ability to create custom permission policies.
  • B. Assigning IAM permission policies to more than one user at a time.
  • C. Easier user/policy management.
  • D. Allowing EC2 instances to gain access to S3.

B. and C.

A. is incorrect: This is a benefit of IAM generally or a benefit of IAM policies. But IAM groups don’t create policies, they have policies attached to them.

Reference: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/IAM/latest/UserGuide/id_groups.html

 

Top

Q21: What are benefits of using AWS STS?

  • A. Grant access to AWS resources without having to create an IAM identity for them
  • B. Since credentials are temporary, you don’t have to rotate or revoke them
  • C. Temporary security credentials can be extended indefinitely
  • D. Temporary security credentials can be restricted to a specific region

Top

Q22: What should the Developer enable on the DynamoDB table to optimize performance and minimize costs?

  • A. Amazon DynamoDB auto scaling
  • B. Amazon DynamoDB cross-region replication
  • C. Amazon DynamoDB Streams
  • D. Amazon DynamoDB Accelerator


D. DAX is a DynamoDB-compatible caching service that enables you to benefit from fast in-memory performance for demanding applications. DAX addresses three core scenarios:

  1. As an in-memory cache, DAX reduces the response times of eventually-consistent read workloads by an order of magnitude, from single-digit milliseconds to microseconds.
  2. DAX reduces operational and application complexity by providing a managed service that is API-compatible with Amazon DynamoDB, and thus requires only minimal functional changes to use with an existing application.
  3. For read-heavy or bursty workloads, DAX provides increased throughput and potential operational cost savings by reducing the need to over-provision read capacity units. This is especially beneficial for applications that require repeated reads for individual keys.

Reference: AWS DAX


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q23: A Developer has been asked to create an AWS Elastic Beanstalk environment for a production web application which needs to handle thousands of requests. Currently the dev environment is running on a t1 micro instance. How can the Developer change the EC2 instance type to m4.large?

  • A. Use CloudFormation to migrate the Amazon EC2 instance type of the environment from t1 micro to m4.large.
  • B. Create a saved configuration file in Amazon S3 with the instance type as m4.large and use the same during environment creation.
  • C. Change the instance type to m4.large in the configuration details page of the Create New Environment page.
  • D. Change the instance type value for the environment to m4.large by using update autoscaling group CLI command.

B. The Elastic Beanstalk console and EB CLI set configuration options when you create an environment. You can also set configuration options in saved configurations and configuration files. If the same option is set in multiple locations, the value used is determined by the order of precedence.
Configuration option settings can be composed in text format and saved prior to environment creation, applied during environment creation using any supported client, and added, modified or removed after environment creation.
During environment creation, configuration options are applied from multiple sources with the following precedence, from highest to lowest:

  • Settings applied directly to the environment – Settings specified during a create environment or update environment operation on the Elastic Beanstalk API by any client, including the AWS Management Console, EB CLI, AWS CLI, and SDKs. The AWS Management Console and EB CLI also applyrecommended values for some options that apply at this level unless overridden.
  • Saved Configurations–
    Settings for any options that are not applied directly to the
    environment are loaded from a saved configuration, if specified.
  • Configuration Files (.ebextensions)– Settings for any options that are not applied directly to the
    environment, and also not specified in a saved configuration, are loaded from configuration files in the .ebextensions folder at the root of the application source bundle.

     

    Configuration files are executed in alphabetical order. For example,.ebextensions/01run.configis executed before.ebextensions/02do.config.

  • Default Values– If a configuration option has a default value, it only applies when the option is not set at any of the above levels.

If the same configuration option is defined in more than one location, the setting with the highest precedence is applied. When a setting is applied from a saved configuration or settings applied directly to the environment, the setting is stored as part of the environment’s configuration. These settings can be removed with the AWS CLI or with the EB CLI
.
Settings in configuration files are not applied
directly to the environment and cannot be removed without modifying the configuration files and deploying a new application version.If a setting applied with one of the other methods is removed, the same setting will be loaded from configuration files in the source bundle.

Reference: Managing ec2 features – Elastic beanstalk

Q24: What statements are true about Availability Zones (AZs) and Regions?

  • A. There is only one AZ in each AWS Region
  • B. AZs are geographically separated inside a region to help protect against natural disasters affecting more than one at a time.
  • C. AZs can be moved between AWS Regions based on your needs
  • D. There are (almost always) two or more AZs in each AWS Region

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

B and D.

Reference: AWS global infrastructure/

Top

Q25: An AWS Region contains:

  • A. Edge Locations
  • B. Data Centers
  • C. AWS Services
  • D. Availability Zones


B. C. D. Edge locations are actually distinct locations that don’t explicitly fall within AWS regions.

Reference: AWS Global Infrastructure


Top

Q26: Which read request in DynamoDB returns a response with the most up-to-date data, reflecting the updates from all prior write operations that were successful?

  • A. Eventual Consistent Reads
  • B. Conditional reads for Consistency
  • C. Strongly Consistent Reads
  • D. Not possible


C. This is provided very clearly in the AWS documentation as shown below with regards to the read consistency for DynamoDB. Only in Strong Read consistency can you be guaranteed that you get the write read value after all the writes are completed.

Reference: https://aws.amazon.com/dynamodb/faqs/


Top

Q27: You’ ve been asked to move an existing development environment on the AWS Cloud. This environment consists mainly of Docker based containers. You need to ensure that minimum effort is taken during the migration process. Which of the following step would you consider for this requirement?

  • A. Create an Opswork stack and deploy the Docker containers
  • B. Create an application and Environment for the Docker containers in the Elastic Beanstalk service
  • C. Create an EC2 Instance. Install Docker and deploy the necessary containers.
  • D. Create an EC2 Instance. Install Docker and deploy the necessary containers. Add an Autoscaling Group for scalability of the containers.


B. The Elastic Beanstalk service is the ideal service to quickly provision development environments. You can also create environments which can be used to host Docker based containers.

Reference: Create and Deploy Docker in AWS


Top

Q28: You’ve written an application that uploads objects onto an S3 bucket. The size of the object varies between 200 – 500 MB. You’ve seen that the application sometimes takes a longer than expected time to upload the object. You want to improve the performance of the application. Which of the following would you consider?

  • A. Create multiple threads and upload the objects in the multiple threads
  • B. Write the items in batches for better performance
  • C. Use the Multipart upload API
  • D. Enable versioning on the Bucket

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 


C. All other options are invalid since the best way to handle large object uploads to the S3 service is to use the Multipart upload API. The Multipart upload API enables you to upload large objects in parts. You can use this API to upload new large objects or make a copy of an existing object. Multipart uploading is a three-step process: You initiate the upload, you upload the object parts, and after you have uploaded all the parts, you complete the multipart upload. Upon receiving the complete multipart upload request, Amazon S3 constructs the object from the uploaded parts, and you can then access the object just as you would any other object in your bucket.

Reference: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuoverview.html


Top

Q29: A security system monitors 600 cameras, saving image metadata every 1 minute to an Amazon DynamoDb table. Each sample involves 1kb of data, and the data writes are evenly distributed over time. How much write throughput is required for the target table?

  • A. 6000
  • B. 10
  • C. 3600
  • D. 600

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

B. When you mention the write capacity of a table in Dynamo DB, you mention it as the number of 1KB writes per second. So in the above question, since the write is happening every minute, we need to divide the value of 600 by 60, to get the number of KB writes per second. This gives a value of 10.

You can specify the Write capacity in the Capacity tab of the DynamoDB table.

Reference: AWS working with tables

Q30: What two arguments does a Python Lambda handler function require?

  • A. invocation, zone
  • B. event, zone
  • C. invocation, context
  • D. event, context


D. event, context def handler_name(event, context):
…
return some_value
Reference: AWS Lambda Function Handler in Python

Top

Q31: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only via SFTP
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere


D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere
Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package

Top

Q32: A Lambda deployment package contains:

  • A. Function code, libraries, and runtime binaries
  • B. Only function code
  • C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime
  • D. Only libraries not included within the runtime


C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime
Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package in PowerShell

Top

Q33: You have instances inside private subnets and a properly configured bastion host instance in a public subnet. None of the instances in the private subnets have a public or Elastic IP address. How can you connect an instance in the private subnet to the open internet to download system updates?

  • A. Create and assign EIP to each instance
  • B. Create and attach a second IGW to the VPC.
  • C. Create and utilize a NAT Gateway
  • D. Connect to a VPN


C. You can use a network address translation (NAT) gateway in a public subnet in your VPC to enable instances in the private subnet to initiate outbound traffic to the Internet, but prevent the instances from receiving inbound traffic initiated by someone on the Internet.
Reference: AWS Network Address Translation Gateway

Top

Q34: What feature of VPC networking should you utilize if you want to create “elasticity” in your application’s architecture?

  • A. Security Groups
  • B. Route Tables
  • C. Elastic Load Balancer
  • D. Auto Scaling


D. Auto scaling is designed specifically with elasticity in mind. Auto scaling allows for the increase and decrease of compute power based on demand, thus creating elasticity in the architecture.
Reference: AWS Autoscalling

Top

Q30: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

Answer:


D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere
Reference: AWS Lambda

Top

Q31: An organization is using an Amazon ElastiCache cluster in front of their Amazon RDS instance. The organization would like the Developer to implement logic into the code so that the cluster only retrieves data from RDS when there is a cache miss. What strategy can the Developer implement to achieve this?

  • A. Lazy loading
  • B. Write-through
  • C. Error retries
  • D. Exponential backoff

Answer:


Answer – A
Whenever your application requests data, it first makes the request to the ElastiCache cache. If the data exists in the cache and is current, ElastiCache returns the data to your application. If the data does not exist in the cache, or the data in the cache has expired, your application requests data from your data store which returns the data to your application. Your application then writes the data received from the store to the cache so it can be more quickly retrieved next time it is requested. All other options are incorrect.
Reference: Caching Strategies

Top

Q32: A developer is writing an application that will run on Ec2 instances and read messages from SQS queue. The nessages will arrive every 15-60 seconds. How should the Developer efficiently query the queue for new messages?

  • A. Use long polling
  • B. Set a custom visibility timeout
  • C. Use short polling
  • D. Implement exponential backoff


Answer – A Long polling will help insure that the applications make less requests for messages in a shorter period of time. This is more cost effective. Since the messages are only going to be available after 15 seconds and we don’t know exacly when they would be available, it is better to use Long Polling.
Reference: Amazon SQS Long Polling

Top

Q33: You are using AWS SAM to define a Lambda function and configure CodeDeploy to manage deployment patterns. With new Lambda function working as per expectation which of the following will shift traffic from original Lambda function to new Lambda function in the shortest time frame?

  • A. Canary10Percent5Minutes
  • B. Linear10PercentEvery10Minutes
  • C. Canary10Percent15Minutes
  • D. Linear10PercentEvery1Minute


Answer – A
With Canary Deployment Preference type, Traffic is shifted in two intervals. With Canary10Percent5Minutes, 10 percent of traffic is shifted in the first interval while remaining all traffic is shifted after 5 minutes.
Reference: Gradual Code Deployment

Top

Q34: You are using AWS SAM templates to deploy a serverless application. Which of the following resource will embed application from Amazon S3 buckets?

  • A. AWS::Serverless::Api
  • B. AWS::Serverless::Application
  • C. AWS::Serverless::Layerversion
  • D. AWS::Serverless::Function


Answer – B
AWS::Serverless::Application resource in AWS SAm template is used to embed application frm Amazon S3 buckets.
Reference: Declaring Serverless Resources

Top

Q35: You are using AWS Envelope Encryption for encrypting all sensitive data. Which of the followings is True with regards to Envelope Encryption?

  • A. Data is encrypted be encrypting Data key which is further encrypted using encrypted Master Key.
  • B. Data is encrypted by plaintext Data key which is further encrypted using encrypted Master Key.
  • C. Data is encrypted by encrypted Data key which is further encrypted using plaintext Master Key.
  • D. Data is encrypted by plaintext Data key which is further encrypted using plaintext Master Key.


Answer – D
With Envelope Encryption, unencrypted data is encrypted using plaintext Data key. This Data is further encrypted using plaintext Master key. This plaintext Master key is securely stored in AWS KMS & known as Customer Master Keys.
Reference: AWS Key Management Service Concepts

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q36: You are developing an application that will be comprised of the following architecture –

  1. A set of Ec2 instances to process the videos.
  2. These (Ec2 instances) will be spun up by an autoscaling group.
  3. SQS Queues to maintain the processing messages.
  4. There will be 2 pricing tiers.

How will you ensure that the premium customers videos are given more preference?

  • A. Create 2 Autoscaling Groups, one for normal and one for premium customers
  • B. Create 2 set of Ec2 Instances, one for normal and one for premium customers
  • C. Create 2 SQS queus, one for normal and one for premium customers
  • D. Create 2 Elastic Load Balancers, one for normal and one for premium customers.


Answer – C
The ideal option would be to create 2 SQS queues. Messages can then be processed by the application from the high priority queue first.<br? The other options are not the ideal options. They would lead to extra costs and also extra maintenance.
Reference: SQS

Top

Q37: You are developing an application that will interact with a DynamoDB table. The table is going to take in a lot of read and write operations. Which of the following would be the ideal partition key for the DynamoDB table to ensure ideal performance?

  • A. CustomerID
  • B. CustomerName
  • C. Location
  • D. Age


Answer- A
Use high-cardinality attributes. These are attributes that have distinct values for each item, like e-mailid, employee_no, customerid, sessionid, orderid, and so on..
Use composite attributes. Try to combine more than one attribute to form a unique key.
Reference: Choosing the right DynamoDB Partition Key

Top

Q38: A developer is making use of AWS services to develop an application. He has been asked to develop the application in a manner to compensate any network delays. Which of the following two mechanisms should he implement in the application?

  • A. Multiple SQS queues
  • B. Exponential backoff algorithm
  • C. Retries in your application code
  • D. Consider using the Java sdk.


Answer- B. and C.
In addition to simple retries, each AWS SDK implements exponential backoff algorithm for better flow control. The idea behind exponential backoff is to use progressively longer waits between retries for consecutive error responses. You should implement a maximum delay interval, as well as a maximum number of retries. The maximum delay interval and maximum number of retries are not necessarily fixed values, and should be set based on the operation being performed, as well as other local factors, such as network latency.
Reference: Error Retries and Exponential Backoff in AWS

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q39: An application is being developed that is going to write data to a DynamoDB table. You have to setup the read and write throughput for the table. Data is going to be read at the rate of 300 items every 30 seconds. Each item is of size 6KB. The reads can be eventual consistent reads. What should be the read capacity that needs to be set on the table?

  • A. 10
  • B. 20
  • C. 6
  • D. 30


Answer – A

Since there are 300 items read every 30 seconds , that means there are (300/30) = 10 items read every second.
Since each item is 6KB in size , that means , 2 reads will be required for each item.
So we have total of 2*10 = 20 reads for the number of items per second
Since eventual consistency is required , we can divide the number of reads(20) by 2 , and in the end we get the Read Capacity of 10.

Reference: Read/Write Capacity Mode


Top

Q40: You are in charge of deploying an application that will be hosted on an EC2 Instance and sit behind an Elastic Load balancer. You have been requested to monitor the incoming connections to the Elastic Load Balancer. Which of the below options can suffice this requirement?

  • A. Use AWS CloudTrail with your load balancer
  • B. Enable access logs on the load balancer
  • C. Use a CloudWatch Logs Agent
  • D. Create a custom metric CloudWatch lter on your load balancer


Answer – B
Elastic Load Balancing provides access logs that capture detailed information about requests sent to your load balancer. Each log contains information such as the time the request was received, the client’s IP address, latencies, request paths, and server responses. You can use these access logs to analyze traffic patterns and troubleshoot issues.
Reference: Access Logs for Your Application Load Balancer

Top

Q41: A static web site has been hosted on a bucket and is now being accessed by users. One of the web pages javascript section has been changed to access data which is hosted in another S3 bucket. Now that same web page is no longer loading in the browser. Which of the following can help alleviate the error?

  • A. Enable versioning for the underlying S3 bucket.
  • B. Enable Replication so that the objects get replicated to the other bucket
  • C. Enable CORS for the bucket
  • D. Change the Bucket policy for the bucket to allow access from the other bucket


Answer – C

Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) defines a way for client web applications that are loaded in one domain to interact with resources in a different domain. With CORS support, you can build rich client-side web applications with Amazon S3 and selectively allow cross-origin access to your Amazon S3 resources.

Cross-Origin Resource Sharing: Use-case Scenarios The following are example scenarios for using CORS:

Scenario 1: Suppose that you are hosting a website in an Amazon S3 bucket named website as described in Hosting a Static Website on Amazon S3. Your users load the website endpoint http://website.s3-website-us-east-1.amazonaws.com. Now you want to use JavaScript on the webpages that are stored in this bucket to be able to make authenticated GET and PUT requests against the same bucket by using the Amazon S3 API endpoint for the bucket, website.s3.amazonaws.com. A browser would normally block JavaScript from allowing those requests, but with CORS you can configure your bucket to explicitly enable cross-origin requests from website.s3-website-us-east-1.amazonaws.com.

Scenario 2: Suppose that you want to host a web font from your S3 bucket. Again, browsers require a CORS check (also called a preight check) for loading web fonts. You would configure the bucket that is hosting the web font to allow any origin to make these requests.

Reference: Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q42: Your mobile application includes a photo-sharing service that is expecting tens of thousands of users at launch. You will leverage Amazon Simple Storage Service (S3) for storage of the user Images, and you must decide how to authenticate and authorize your users for access to these images. You also need to manage the storage of these images. Which two of the following approaches should you use? Choose two answers from the options below

  • A. Create an Amazon S3 bucket per user, and use your application to generate the S3 URL for the appropriate content.
  • B. Use AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) user accounts as your application-level user database, and offload the burden of authentication from your application code.
  • C. Authenticate your users at the application level, and use AWS Security Token Service (STS)to grant token-based authorization to S3 objects.
  • D. Authenticate your users at the application level, and send an SMS token message to the user. Create an Amazon S3 bucket with the same name as the SMS message token, and move the user’s objects to that bucket.


Answer- C
The AWS Security Token Service (STS) is a web service that enables you to request temporary, limited-privilege credentials for AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) users or for users that you authenticate (federated users). The token can then be used to grant access to the objects in S3.
You can then provides access to the objects based on the key values generated via the user id.

Reference: The AWS Security Token Service (STS)


Top

Q43: Your current log analysis application takes more than four hours to generate a report of the top 10 users of your web application. You have been asked to implement a system that can report this information in real time, ensure that the report is always up to date, and handle increases in the number of requests to your web application. Choose the option that is cost-effective and can fulfill the requirements.

  • A. Publish your data to CloudWatch Logs, and congure your application to Autoscale to handle the load on demand.
  • B. Publish your log data to an Amazon S3 bucket.  Use AWS CloudFormation to create an Auto Scaling group to scale your post-processing application which is congured to pull down your log les stored an Amazon S3
  • C. Post your log data to an Amazon Kinesis data stream, and subscribe your log-processing application so that is congured to process your logging data.
  • D. Create a multi-AZ Amazon RDS MySQL cluster, post the logging data to MySQL, and run a map reduce job to retrieve the required information on user counts.

Answer:


Answer – C
Amazon Kinesis makes it easy to collect, process, and analyze real-time, streaming data so you can get timely insights and react quickly to new information. Amazon Kinesis offers key capabilities to cost effectively process streaming data at any scale, along with the flexibility to choose the tools that best suit the requirements of your application. With Amazon Kinesis, you can ingest real-time data such as application logs, website clickstreams, IoT telemetry data, and more into your databases, data lakes and data warehouses, or build your own real-time applications using this data.
Reference: Amazon Kinesis

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q44: You’ve been instructed to develop a mobile application that will make use of AWS services. You need to decide on a data store to store the user sessions. Which of the following would be an ideal data store for session management?

  • A. AWS Simple Storage Service
  • B. AWS DynamoDB
  • C. AWS RDS
  • D. AWS Redshift

Answer:


Answer – B
DynamoDB is a alternative solution which can be used for storage of session management. The latency of access to data is less , hence this can be used as a data store for session management
Reference: Scalable Session Handling in PHP Using Amazon DynamoDB

Top

Q45: Your application currently interacts with a DynamoDB table. Records are inserted into the table via the application. There is now a requirement to ensure that whenever items are updated in the DynamoDB primary table , another record is inserted into a secondary table. Which of the below feature should be used when developing such a solution?

  • A. AWS DynamoDB Encryption
  • B. AWS DynamoDB Streams
  • C. AWS DynamoDB Accelerator
  • D. AWSTable Accelerator


Answer – B
DynamoDB Streams Use Cases and Design Patterns This post describes some common use cases you might encounter, along with their design options and solutions, when migrating data from relational data stores to Amazon DynamoDB. We will consider how to manage the following scenarios:

  • How do you set up a relationship across multiple tables in which, based on the value of an item from one table, you update the item in a second table?
  • How do you trigger an event based on a particular transaction?
  • How do you audit or archive transactions?
  • How do you replicate data across multiple tables (similar to that of materialized views/streams/replication in relational data stores)?

Relational databases provide native support for transactions, triggers, auditing, and replication. Typically, a transaction in a database refers to performing create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations against multiple tables in a block. A transaction can have only two states—success or failure. In other words, there is no partial completion. As a NoSQL database, DynamoDB is not designed to support transactions. Although client-side libraries are available to mimic the transaction capabilities, they are not scalable and cost-effective. For example, the Java Transaction Library for DynamoDB creates 7N+4 additional writes for every write operation. This is partly because the library holds metadata to manage the transactions to ensure that it’s consistent and can be rolled back before commit. You can use DynamoDB Streams to address all these use cases. DynamoDB Streams is a powerful service that you can combine with other AWS services to solve many similar problems. When enabled, DynamoDB Streams captures a time-ordered sequence of item-level modifications in a DynamoDB table and durably stores the information for up to 24 hours. Applications can access a series of stream records, which contain an item change, from a DynamoDB stream in near real time. AWS maintains separate endpoints for DynamoDB and DynamoDB Streams. To work with database tables and indexes, your application must access a DynamoDB endpoint. To read and process DynamoDB Streams records, your application must access a DynamoDB Streams endpoint in the same Region. All of the other options are incorrect since none of these would meet the core requirement.
Reference: DynamoDB Streams Use Cases and Design Patterns


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q46: An application has been making use of AWS DynamoDB for its back-end data store. The size of the table has now grown to 20 GB , and the scans on the table are causing throttling errors. Which of the following should now be implemented to avoid such errors?

  • A. Large Page size
  • B. Reduced page size
  • C. Parallel Scans
  • D. Sequential scans

Answer – B
When you scan your table in Amazon DynamoDB, you should follow the DynamoDB best practices for avoiding sudden bursts of read activity. You can use the following technique to minimize the impact of a scan on a table’s provisioned throughput. Reduce page size Because a Scan operation reads an entire page (by default, 1 MB), you can reduce the impact of the scan operation by setting a smaller page size. The Scan operation provides a Limit parameter that you can use to set the page size for your request. Each Query or Scan request that has a smaller page size uses fewer read operations and creates a “pause” between each request. For example, suppose that each item is 4 KB and you set the page size to 40 items. A Query request would then consume only 20 eventually consistent read operations or 40 strongly consistent read operations. A larger number of smaller Query or Scan operations would allow your other critical requests to succeed without throttling.
Reference1: Rate-Limited Scans in Amazon DynamoDB

Reference2: Best Practices for Querying and Scanning Data


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q47: Which of the following is correct way of passing a stage variable to an HTTP URL ? (Select TWO.)

  • A. http://example.com/${}/prod
  • B. http://example.com/${stageVariables.}/prod
  • C. http://${stageVariables.}.example.com/dev/operation
  • D. http://${stageVariables}.example.com/dev/operation
  • E. http://${}.example.com/dev/operation
  • F. http://example.com/${stageVariables}/prod


Answer – B. and C.
A stage variable can be used as part of HTTP integration URL as in following cases, ·         A full URI without protocol ·         A full domain ·         A subdomain ·         A path ·         A query string In the above case , option B & C displays stage variable as a path & sub-domain.
Reference: Amazon API Gateway Stage Variables Reference

Top

Q48: Your company is planning on creating new development environments in AWS. They want to make use of their existing Chef recipes which they use for their on-premise configuration for servers in AWS. Which of the following service would be ideal to use in this regard?

  • A. AWS Elastic Beanstalk
  • B. AWS OpsWork
  • C. AWS Cloudformation
  • D. AWS SQS


Answer – B
AWS OpsWorks is a configuration management service that provides managed instances of Chef and Puppet. Chef and Puppet are automation platforms that allow you to use code to automate the configurations of your servers. OpsWorks lets you use Chef and Puppet to automate how servers are configured, deployed, and managed across your Amazon EC2 instances or on-premises compute environments All other options are invalid since they cannot be used to work with Chef recipes for configuration management.
Reference: AWS OpsWorks

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q49: Your company has developed a web application and is hosting it in an Amazon S3 bucket configured for static website hosting. The users can log in to this app using their Google/Facebook login accounts. The application is using the AWS SDK for JavaScript in the browser to access data stored in an Amazon DynamoDB table. How can you ensure that API keys for access to your data in DynamoDB are kept secure?

  • A. Create an Amazon S3 role in IAM with access to the specific DynamoDB tables, and assign it to the bucket hosting your website
  • B. Configure S3 bucket tags with your AWS access keys for your bucket hosing your website so that the application can query them for access.
  • C. Configure a web identity federation role within IAM to enable access to the correct DynamoDB resources and retrieve temporary credentials
  • D. Store AWS keys in global variables within your application and configure the application to use these credentials when making requests.


Answer – C
With web identity federation, you don’t need to create custom sign-in code or manage your own user identities. Instead, users of your app can sign in using a well-known identity provider (IdP) —such as Login with Amazon, Facebook, Google, or any other OpenID Connect (OIDC)-compatible IdP, receive an authentication token, and then exchange that token for temporary security credentials in AWS that map to an IAM role with permissions to use the resources in your AWS account. Using an IdP helps you keep your AWS account secure, because you don’t have to embed and distribute long-term security credentials with your application. Option A is invalid since Roles cannot be assigned to S3 buckets Options B and D are invalid since the AWS Access keys should not be used
Reference: About Web Identity Federation

Top

Q50: Your application currently makes use of AWS Cognito for managing user identities. You want to analyze the information that is stored in AWS Cognito for your application. Which of the following features of AWS Cognito should you use for this purpose?

  • A. Cognito Data
  • B. Cognito Events
  • C. Cognito Streams
  • D. Cognito Callbacks


Answer – C
Amazon Cognito Streams gives developers control and insight into their data stored in Amazon Cognito. Developers can now configure a Kinesis stream to receive events as data is updated and synchronized. Amazon Cognito can push each dataset change to a Kinesis stream you own in real time. All other options are invalid since you should use Cognito Streams
Reference:

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q51: You’ve developed a set of scripts using AWS Lambda. These scripts need to access EC2 Instances in a VPC. Which of the following needs to be done to ensure that the AWS Lambda function can access the resources in the VPC. Choose 2 answers from the options given below

  • A. Ensure that the subnet ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function
  • B. Ensure that the NACL ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function
  • C. Ensure that the Security Group ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function
  • D. Ensure that the VPC Flow Log ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function


Answer: A and C.
AWS Lambda runs your function code securely within a VPC by default. However, to enable your Lambda function to access resources inside your private VPC, you must provide additional VPCspecific configuration information that includes VPC subnet IDs and security group IDs. AWS Lambda uses this information to set up elastic network interfaces (ENIs) that enable your function to connect securely to other resources within your private VPC.
Reference: Configuring a Lambda Function to Access Resources in an Amazon VPC

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q52: You’ve currently been tasked to migrate an existing on-premise environment into Elastic Beanstalk. The application does not make use of Docker containers. You also can’t see any relevant environments in the beanstalk service that would be suitable to host your application. What should you consider doing in this case?

  • A. Migrate your application to using Docker containers and then migrate the app to the Elastic Beanstalk environment.
  • B. Consider using Cloudformation to deploy your environment to Elastic Beanstalk
  • C. Consider using Packer to create a custom platform
  • D. Consider deploying your application using the Elastic Container Service


Answer – C
Elastic Beanstalk supports custom platforms. A custom platform is a more advanced customization than a Custom Image in several ways. A custom platform lets you develop an entire new platform from scratch, customizing the operating system, additional software, and scripts that Elastic Beanstalk runs on platform instances. This flexibility allows you to build a platform for an application that uses a language or other infrastructure software, for which Elastic Beanstalk doesn’t provide a platform out of the box. Compare that to custom images, where you modify an AMI for use with an existing Elastic Beanstalk platform, and Elastic Beanstalk still provides the platform scripts and controls the platform’s software stack. In addition, with custom platforms you use an automated, scripted way to create and maintain your customization, whereas with custom images you make the changes manually over a running instance. To create a custom platform, you build an Amazon Machine Image (AMI) from one of the supported operating systems—Ubuntu, RHEL, or Amazon Linux (see the flavor entry in Platform.yaml File Format for the exact version numbers)—and add further customizations. You create your own Elastic Beanstalk platform using Packer, which is an open-source tool for creating machine images for many platforms, including AMIs for use with Amazon EC2. An Elastic Beanstalk platform comprises an AMI configured to run a set of software that supports an application, and metadata that can include custom configuration options and default configuration option settings.
Reference: AWS Elastic Beanstalk Custom Platforms

Top

Q53: Company B is writing 10 items to the Dynamo DB table every second. Each item is 15.5Kb in size. What would be the required provisioned write throughput for best performance? Choose the correct answer from the options below.

  • A. 10
  • B. 160
  • C. 155
  • D. 16


Answer – B.
Company B is writing 10 items to the Dynamo DB table every second. Each item is 15.5Kb in size. What would be the required provisioned write throughput for best performance? Choose the correct answer from the options below.
Reference: Read/Write Capacity Mode

Top

Top

Q54: Which AWS Service can be used to automatically install your application code onto EC2, on premises systems and Lambda?

  • A. CodeCommit
  • B. X-Ray
  • C. CodeBuild
  • D. CodeDeploy


Answer: D

Reference: AWS CodeDeploy


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q55: Which AWS service can be used to compile source code, run tests and package code?

  • A. CodePipeline
  • B. CodeCommit
  • C. CodeBuild
  • D. CodeDeploy


Answer: D

Reference: AWS CodeDeploy Answer: B.

Reference: AWS CodeBuild


Top

Q56: How can your prevent CloudFormation from deleting your entire stack on failure? (Choose 2)

  • A. Set the Rollback on failure radio button to No in the CloudFormation console
  • B. Set Termination Protection to Enabled in the CloudFormation console
  • C. Use the –disable-rollback flag with the AWS CLI
  • D. Use the –enable-termination-protection protection flag with the AWS CLI

Answer: A. and C.

Reference: Protecting a Stack From Being Deleted

Top

Q57: Which of the following practices allows multiple developers working on the same application to merge code changes frequently, without impacting each other and enables the identification of bugs early on in the release process?

  • A. Continuous Integration
  • B. Continuous Deployment
  • C. Continuous Delivery
  • D. Continuous Development

Top

Q58: When deploying application code to EC2, the AppSpec file can be written in which language?

  • A. JSON
  • B. JSON or YAML
  • C. XML
  • D. YAML

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q59: Part of your CloudFormation deployment fails due to a mis-configuration, by defaukt what will happen?

  • A. CloudFormation will rollback only the failed components
  • B. CloudFormation will rollback the entire stack
  • C. Failed component will remain available for debugging purposes
  • D. CloudFormation will ask you if you want to continue with the deployment


Top

Q60: You want to receive an email whenever a user pushes code to CodeCommit repository, how can you configure this?

  • A. Create a new SNS topic and configure it to poll for CodeCommit eveents. Ask all users to subscribe to the topic to receive notifications
  • B. Configure a CloudWatch Events rule to send a message to SES which will trigger an email to be sent whenever a user pushes code to the repository.
  • C. Configure Notifications in the console, this will create a CloudWatch events rule to send a notification to a SNS topic which will trigger an email to be sent to the user.
  • D. Configure a CloudWatch Events rule to send a message to SQS which will trigger an email to be sent whenever a user pushes code to the repository.

Answer: C

Reference: Getting Started with Amazon SNS


Top

Q61: Which AWS service can be used to centrally store and version control your application source code, binaries and libraries

  • A. CodeCommit
  • B. CodeBuild
  • C. CodePipeline
  • D. ElasticFileSystem

Answer: A

Reference: AWS CodeCommit


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q62: You are using CloudFormation to create a new S3 bucket, which of the following sections would you use to define the properties of your bucket?

  • A. Conditions
  • B. Parameters
  • C. Outputs
  • D. Resources

Answer: D

Reference: Resources


Top

Q63: You are deploying a number of EC2 and RDS instances using CloudFormation. Which section of the CloudFormation template would you use to define these?

  • A. Transforms
  • B. Outputs
  • C. Resources
  • D. Instances

Answer: C.
The Resources section defines your resources you are provisioning. Outputs is used to output user defines data relating to the reources you have built and can also used as input to another CloudFormation stack. Transforms is used to reference code located in S3.
Reference: Resources

Top

Q64: Which AWS service can be used to fully automate your entire release process?

  • A. CodeDeploy
  • B. CodePipeline
  • C. CodeCommit
  • D. CodeBuild

Answer: B.
AWS CodePipeline is a fully managed continuous delivery service that helps you automate your release pipelines for fast and reliable application and infrastructure updates

Reference: AWS CodePipeline


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q65: You want to use the output of your CloudFormation stack as input to another CloudFormation stack. Which sections of the CloudFormation template would you use to help you configure this?

  • A. Outputs
  • B. Transforms
  • C. Resources
  • D. Exports

Answer: A.
Outputs is used to output user defines data relating to the reources you have built and can also used as input to another CloudFormation stack.
Reference: CloudFormation Outputs

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q66: You have some code located in an S3 bucket that you want to reference in your CloudFormation template. Which section of the template can you use to define this?

  • A. Inputs
  • B. Resources
  • C. Transforms
  • D. Files

Answer: C.
Transforms is used to reference code located in S3 and also specififying the use of the Serverless Application Model (SAM) for Lambda deployments.
Reference: Transforms

Top

Q67: You are deploying an application to a number of Ec2 instances using CodeDeploy. What is the name of the file
used to specify source files and lifecycle hooks?

  • A. buildspec.yml
  • B. appspec.json
  • C. appspec.yml
  • D. buildspec.json

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q68: Which of the following approaches allows you to re-use pieces of CloudFormation code in multiple templates, for common use cases like provisioning a load balancer or web server?

  • A. Share the code using an EBS volume
  • B. Copy and paste the code into the template each time you need to use it
  • C. Use a cloudformation nested stack
  • D. Store the code you want to re-use in an AMI and reference the AMI from within your CloudFormation template.

Answer: C.

Reference: Working with Nested Stacks

Top

Q69: In the CodeDeploy AppSpec file, what are hooks used for?

  • A. To reference AWS resources that will be used during the deployment
  • B. Hooks are reserved for future use
  • C. To specify files you want to copy during the deployment.
  • D. To specify, scripts or function that you want to run at set points in the deployment lifecycle

Answer: D.
The ‘hooks’ section for an EC2/On-Premises deployment contains mappings that link deployment lifecycle event hooks to one or more scripts.

Reference: AppSpec ‘hooks’ Section

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q70: Which command can you use to encrypt a plain text file using CMK?

  • A. aws kms-encrypt
  • B. aws iam encrypt
  • C. aws kms encrypt
  • D. aws encrypt

Answer: C.
aws kms encrypt –key-id 1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab –plaintext fileb://ExamplePlaintextFile –output text –query CiphertextBlob > C:\Temp\ExampleEncryptedFile.base64

Reference: AWS CLI Encrypt

Top

Q72: Which of the following is an encrypted key used by KMS to encrypt your data

  • A. Custmoer Mamaged Key
  • B. Encryption Key
  • C. Envelope Key
  • D. Customer Master Key

Answer: C.
Your Data key also known as the Enveloppe key is encrypted using the master key.This approach is known as Envelope encryption.
Envelope encryption is the practice of encrypting plaintext data with a data key, and then encrypting the data key under another key.

Reference: Envelope Encryption

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q73: Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose 2)

  • A. The Customer Master Key is used to encrypt and decrypt the Envelope Key or Data Key
  • B. The Envelope Key or Data Key is used to encrypt and decrypt plain text files.
  • C. The envelope Key or Data Key is used to encrypt and decrypt the Customer Master Key.
  • D. The Customer MasterKey is used to encrypt and decrypt plain text files.

Answer: A. and B.

Reference: AWS Key Management Service Concepts

Top

 
 

Q74: Which of the following statements is correct in relation to kMS/ (Choose 2)

  • A. KMS Encryption keys are regional
  • B. You cannot export your customer master key
  • C. You can export your customer master key.
  • D. KMS encryption Keys are global

Answer: A. and B.

Reference: AWS Key Management Service FAQs

Q75:  A developer is preparing a deployment package for a Java implementation of an AWS Lambda function. What should the developer include in the deployment package? (Select TWO.)
A. Compiled application code
B. Java runtime environment
C. References to the event sources
D. Lambda execution role
E. Application dependencies


Answer: C. E.
Notes: To create a Lambda function, you first create a Lambda function deployment package. This package is a .zip or .jar file consisting of your code and any dependencies.
Reference: Lambda deployment packages.

Q76: A developer uses AWS CodeDeploy to deploy a Python application to a fleet of Amazon EC2 instances that run behind an Application Load Balancer. The instances run in an Amazon EC2 Auto Scaling group across multiple Availability Zones. What should the developer include in the CodeDeploy deployment package?
A. A launch template for the Amazon EC2 Auto Scaling group
B. A CodeDeploy AppSpec file
C. An EC2 role that grants the application access to AWS services
D. An IAM policy that grants the application access to AWS services


Answer: B.
Notes: The CodeDeploy AppSpec (application specific) file is unique to CodeDeploy. The AppSpec file is used to manage each deployment as a series of lifecycle event hooks, which are defined in the file.
Reference: CodeDeploy application specification (AppSpec) files.
Category: Deployment

Q76: A company is working on a project to enhance its serverless application development process. The company hosts applications on AWS Lambda. The development team regularly updates the Lambda code and wants to use stable code in production. Which combination of steps should the development team take to configure Lambda functions to meet both development and production requirements? (Select TWO.)

A. Create a new Lambda version every time a new code release needs testing.
B. Create two Lambda function aliases. Name one as Production and the other as Development. Point the Production alias to a production-ready unqualified Amazon Resource Name (ARN) version. Point the Development alias to the $LATEST version.
C. Create two Lambda function aliases. Name one as Production and the other as Development. Point the Production alias to the production-ready qualified Amazon Resource Name (ARN) version. Point the Development alias to the variable LAMBDA_TASK_ROOT.
D. Create a new Lambda layer every time a new code release needs testing.
E. Create two Lambda function aliases. Name one as Production and the other as Development. Point the Production alias to a production-ready Lambda layer Amazon Resource Name (ARN). Point the Development alias to the $LATEST layer ARN.


Answer: A. B.
Notes: Lambda function versions are designed to manage deployment of functions. They can be used for code changes, without affecting the stable production version of the code. By creating separate aliases for Production and Development, systems can initiate the correct alias as needed. A Lambda function alias can be used to point to a specific Lambda function version. Using the functionality to update an alias and its linked version, the development team can update the required version as needed. The $LATEST version is the newest published version.
Reference: Lambda function versions.

For more information about Lambda layers, see Creating and sharing Lambda layers.

For more information about Lambda function aliases, see Lambda function aliases.

Category: Deployment

Q77: Each time a developer publishes a new version of an AWS Lambda function, all the dependent event source mappings need to be updated with the reference to the new version’s Amazon Resource Name (ARN). These updates are time consuming and error-prone. Which combination of actions should the developer take to avoid performing these updates when publishing a new Lambda version? (Select TWO.)
A. Update event source mappings with the ARN of the Lambda layer.
B. Point a Lambda alias to a new version of the Lambda function.
C. Create a Lambda alias for each published version of the Lambda function.
D. Point a Lambda alias to a new Lambda function alias.
E. Update the event source mappings with the Lambda alias ARN.


Answer: B. E.
Notes: A Lambda alias is a pointer to a specific Lambda function version. Instead of using ARNs for the Lambda function in event source mappings, you can use an alias ARN. You do not need to update your event source mappings when you promote a new version or roll back to a previous version.
Reference: Lambda function aliases.
Category: Deployment

Q78:  A company wants to store sensitive user data in Amazon S3 and encrypt this data at rest. The company must manage the encryption keys and use Amazon S3 to perform the encryption. How can a developer meet these requirements?
A. Enable default encryption for the S3 bucket by using the option for server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C).
B. Enable client-side encryption with an encryption key. Upload the encrypted object to the S3 bucket.
C. Enable server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed encryption keys (SSE-S3). Upload an object to the S3 bucket.
D. Enable server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C). Upload an object to the S3 bucket.


Answer: D.
Notes: When you upload an object, Amazon S3 uses the encryption key you provide to apply AES-256 encryption to your data and removes the encryption key from memory.
Reference: Protecting data using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C).

Category: Security

Q79: A company is developing a Python application that submits data to an Amazon DynamoDB table. The company requires client-side encryption of specific data items and end-to-end protection for the encrypted data in transit and at rest. Which combination of steps will meet the requirement for the encryption of specific data items? (Select TWO.)

A. Generate symmetric encryption keys with AWS Key Management Service (AWS KMS).
B. Generate asymmetric encryption keys with AWS Key Management Service (AWS KMS).
C. Use generated keys with the DynamoDB Encryption Client.
D. Use generated keys to configure DynamoDB table encryption with AWS managed customer master keys (CMKs).
E. Use generated keys to configure DynamoDB table encryption with AWS owned customer master keys (CMKs).


Answer: A. C.
Notes: When the DynamoDB Encryption Client is configured to use AWS KMS, it uses a customer master key (CMK) that is always encrypted when used outside of AWS KMS. This cryptographic materials provider returns a unique encryption key and signing key for every table item. This method of encryption uses a symmetric CMK.
Reference: Direct KMS Materials Provider.
Category: Deployment

Q80: A company is developing a REST API with Amazon API Gateway. Access to the API should be limited to users in the existing Amazon Cognito user pool. Which combination of steps should a developer perform to secure the API? (Select TWO.)
A. Create an AWS Lambda authorizer for the API.
B. Create an Amazon Cognito authorizer for the API.
C. Configure the authorizer for the API resource.
D. Configure the API methods to use the authorizer.
E. Configure the authorizer for the API stage.


Answer: B. D.
Notes: An Amazon Cognito authorizer should be used for integration with Amazon Cognito user pools. In addition to creating an authorizer, you are required to configure an API method to use that authorizer for the API.
Reference: Control access to a REST API using Amazon Cognito user pools as authorizer.
Category: Security

Q81: A developer is implementing a mobile app to provide personalized services to app users. The application code makes calls to Amazon S3 and Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS). Which options can the developer use to authenticate the app users? (Select TWO.)
A. Authenticate to the Amazon Cognito identity pool directly.
B. Authenticate to AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) directly.
C. Authenticate to the Amazon Cognito user pool directly.
D. Federate authentication by using Login with Amazon with the users managed with AWS Security Token Service (AWS STS).
E. Federate authentication by using Login with Amazon with the users managed with the Amazon Cognito user pool.


Answer: C. E.
Notes: The Amazon Cognito user pool provides direct user authentication. The Amazon Cognito user pool provides a federated authentication option with third-party identity provider (IdP), including amazon.com.
Reference: Adding User Pool Sign-in Through a Third Party.
Category: Security

 
 

Q82: A company is implementing several order processing workflows. Each workflow is implemented by using AWS Lambda functions for each task. Which combination of steps should a developer follow to implement these workflows? (Select TWO.)
A. Define a AWS Step Functions task for each Lambda function.
B. Define a AWS Step Functions task for each workflow.
C. Write code that polls the AWS Step Functions invocation to coordinate each workflow.
D. Define an AWS Step Functions state machine for each workflow.
E. Define an AWS Step Functions state machine for each Lambda function.


Answer: A. D.
Notes: Step Functions is based on state machines and tasks. A state machine is a workflow. Tasks perform work by coordinating with other AWS services, such as Lambda. A state machine is a workflow. It can be used to express a workflow as a number of states, their relationships, and their input and output. You can coordinate individual tasks with Step Functions by expressing your workflow as a finite state machine, written in the Amazon States Language.
Reference: Getting Started with AWS Step Functions.

Category: Development

Q83: A company is migrating a web service to the AWS Cloud. The web service accepts requests by using HTTP (port 80). The company wants to use an AWS Lambda function to process HTTP requests. Which application design will satisfy these requirements?
A. Create an Amazon API Gateway API. Configure proxy integration with the Lambda function.
B. Create an Amazon API Gateway API. Configure non-proxy integration with the Lambda function.
C. Configure the Lambda function to listen to inbound network connections on port 80.
D. Configure the Lambda function as a target in the Application Load Balancer target group.


Answer: D.
Notes: Elastic Load Balancing supports Lambda functions as a target for an Application Load Balancer. You can use load balancer rules to route HTTP requests to a function, based on the path or the header values. Then, process the request and return an HTTP response from your Lambda function.
Reference: Using AWS Lambda with an Application Load Balancer.
Category: Development

Q84: A company is developing an image processing application. When an image is uploaded to an Amazon S3 bucket, a number of independent and separate services must be invoked to process the image. The services do not have to be available immediately, but they must process every image. Which application design satisfies these requirements?
A. Configure an Amazon S3 event notification that publishes to an Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS) queue. Each service pulls the message from the same queue.
B. Configure an Amazon S3 event notification that publishes to an Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS) topic. Each service subscribes to the same topic.
C. Configure an Amazon S3 event notification that publishes to an Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS) queue. Subscribe a separate Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS) topic for each service to an Amazon SQS queue.
D. Configure an Amazon S3 event notification that publishes to an Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS) topic. Subscribe a separate Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS) queue for each service to the Amazon SNS topic.


Answer: D.
Notes: Each service can subscribe to an individual Amazon SQS queue, which receives an event notification from the Amazon SNS topic. This is a fanout architectural implementation.
Reference: Common Amazon SNS scenarios.
Category: Development

Q85: A developer wants to implement Amazon EC2 Auto Scaling for a Multi-AZ web application. However, the developer is concerned that user sessions will be lost during scale-in events. How can the developer store the session state and share it across the EC2 instances?
A. Write the sessions to an Amazon Kinesis data stream. Configure the application to poll the stream.
B. Publish the sessions to an Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS) topic. Subscribe each instance in the group to the topic.
C. Store the sessions in an Amazon ElastiCache for Memcached cluster. Configure the application to use the Memcached API.
D. Write the sessions to an Amazon Elastic Block Store (Amazon EBS) volume. Mount the volume to each instance in the group.


Answer: C.
Notes: ElastiCache for Memcached is a distributed in-memory data store or cache environment in the cloud. It will meet the developer’s requirement of persistent storage and is fast to access.
Reference: What is Amazon ElastiCache for Memcached?

Category: Development

 
 
 

Q86: A developer is integrating a legacy web application that runs on a fleet of Amazon EC2 instances with an Amazon DynamoDB table. There is no AWS SDK for the programming language that was used to implement the web application. Which combination of steps should the developer perform to make an API call to Amazon DynamoDB from the instances? (Select TWO.)
A. Make an HTTPS POST request to the DynamoDB API endpoint for the AWS Region. In the request body, include an XML document that contains the request attributes.
B. Make an HTTPS POST request to the DynamoDB API endpoint for the AWS Region. In the request body, include a JSON document that contains the request attributes.
C. Sign the requests by using AWS access keys and Signature Version 4.
D. Use an EC2 SSH key to calculate Signature Version 4 of the request.
E. Provide the signature value through the HTTP X-API-Key header.


Answer: B. C.
Notes: The HTTPS-based low-level AWS API for DynamoDB uses JSON as a wire protocol format. When you send HTTP requests to AWS, you sign the requests so that AWS can identify who sent them. Requests are signed with your AWS access key, which consists of an access key ID and secret access key. AWS supports two signature versions: Signature Version 4 and Signature Version 2. AWS recommends the use of Signature Version 4.
Reference: Signing AWS API requests.
Category: Development

Q87: A developer has written several custom applications that read and write to the same Amazon DynamoDB table. Each time the data in the DynamoDB table is modified, this change should be sent to an external API. Which combination of steps should the developer perform to accomplish this task? (Select TWO.)
A. Configure an AWS Lambda function to poll the stream and call the external API.
B. Configure an event in Amazon EventBridge (Amazon CloudWatch Events) that publishes the change to an Amazon Managed Streaming for Apache Kafka (Amazon MSK) data stream.
C. Create a trigger in the DynamoDB table to publish the change to an Amazon Kinesis data stream.
D. Deliver the stream to an Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS) topic and subscribe the API to the topic.
E. Enable DynamoDB Streams on the table.


Answer: A. E.
Notes: If you enable DynamoDB Streams on a table, you can associate the stream Amazon Resource Name (ARN) with an Lambda function that you write. Immediately after an item in the table is modified, a new record appears in the table’s stream. Lambda polls the stream and invokes your Lambda function synchronously when it detects new stream records. You can enable DynamoDB Streams on a table to create an event that invokes an AWS Lambda function.
Reference: Tutorial: Process New Items with DynamoDB Streams and Lambda.
Category: Monitoring

 
 
 

Q88: A company is migrating the create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) functionality of an existing Java web application to AWS Lambda. Which minimal code refactoring is necessary for the CRUD operations to run in the Lambda function?
A. Implement a Lambda handler function.
B. Import an AWS X-Ray package.
C. Rewrite the application code in Python.
D. Add a reference to the Lambda execution role.


Answer: A.
Notes: Every Lambda function needs a Lambda-specific handler. Specifics of authoring vary between runtimes, but all runtimes share a common programming model that defines the interface between your code and the runtime code. You tell the runtime which method to run by defining a handler in the function configuration. The runtime runs that method. Next, the runtime passes in objects to the handler that contain the invocation event and context, such as the function name and request ID.
Reference: Getting started with Lambda.
Category: Refactoring

Top

Q89: A company plans to use AWS log monitoring services to monitor an application that runs on premises. Currently, the application runs on a recent version of Ubuntu Server and outputs the logs to a local file. Which combination of steps should a developer perform to accomplish this goal? (Select TWO.)
A. Update the application code to include calls to the agent API for log collection.
B. Install the Amazon Elastic Container Service (Amazon ECS) container agent on the server.
C. Install the unified Amazon CloudWatch agent on the server.
D. Configure the long-term AWS credentials on the server to enable log collection by the agent.
E. Attach an IAM role to the server to enable log collection by the agent.


Answer: C. D.
Notes: The unified CloudWatch agent needs to be installed on the server. Ubuntu Server 18.04 is one of the many supported operating systems. When you install the unified CloudWatch agent on an on-premises server, you will specify a named profile that contains the credentials of the IAM user.
Reference: Collecting metrics and logs from Amazon EC2 instances and on-premises servers with the CloudWatch agent.
Category: Monitoring

Q90: A developer wants to monitor invocations of an AWS Lambda function by using Amazon CloudWatch Logs. The developer added a number of print statements to the function code that write the logging information to the stdout stream. After running the function, the developer does not see any log data being generated. Why does the log data NOT appear in the CloudWatch logs?
A. The log data is not written to the stderr stream.
B. Lambda function logging is not automatically enabled.
C. The execution role for the Lambda function did not grant permissions to write log data to CloudWatch Logs.
D. The Lambda function outputs the logs to an Amazon S3 bucket.


Answer: C.
Notes: The function needs permission to call CloudWatch Logs. Update the execution role to grant the permission. You can use the managed policy of AWSLambdaBasicExecutionRole.
Reference: Troubleshoot execution issues in Lambda.
Category: Monitoting

Q91: Which of the following are best practices you should implement into ongoing deployments of your application? (Select THREE.)

A. Use stage variables to manage secrets across environments
B. Create account-specific AWS SAM templates for each environment
C. Use an AutoPublish alias
D. Use traffic shifting with pre- and post-deployment hooks
E. Test throughout the pipeline


Answer: C. D. E.
Notes: Use an AutoPublish alias, Use traffic shifting with pre- and post-deployment hooks, Test throughout the pipeline
Reference: https://enoumen.com/2019/06/23/aws-solution-architect-associate-exam-prep-facts-and-summaries-questions-and-answers-dump/

Q92: You are handing off maintenance of your new serverless application to an incoming team lead. Which recommendations would you make? (Select THREE.)

A. Keep up to date with the quotas and payload sizes for each AWS service you are using

B. Analyze production access patterns to identify potential improvements

C. Design your services to extend their life as long as possible

D. Minimize changes to your production application

E. Compare the value of using the latest first-class integrations versus using Lambda between AWS services


Answer: A. B. D.

Notes: Keep up to date with the quotas and payload sizes for each AWS service you are using, 

2022 AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam Preparation: Questions and Answers Dump.

Welcome to AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam Preparation:

Definition and Objectives, Top 100 Questions and Answers dump, White papers, Courses, Labs and Training Materials, Exam info and details, References, Jobs, Others AWS Certificates

2022 AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam Preparation: Questions and Answers Dump
AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep
 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

What is the AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam?

This AWS Certified Developer-Associate Examination is intended for individuals who perform a Developer role. It validates an examinee’s ability to:

  • Demonstrate an understanding of core AWS services, uses, and basic AWS architecture best practices
  • Demonstrate proficiency in developing, deploying, and debugging cloud-based applications by using AWS

Recommended general IT knowledge
The target candidate should have the following:
– In-depth knowledge of at least one high-level programming language
– Understanding of application lifecycle management
– The ability to write code for serverless applications
– Understanding of the use of containers in the development process

Recommended AWS knowledge
The target candidate should be able to do the following:

  • Use the AWS service APIs, CLI, and software development kits (SDKs) to write applications
  • Identify key features of AWS services
  • Understand the AWS shared responsibility model
  • Use a continuous integration and continuous delivery (CI/CD) pipeline to deploy applications on AWS
  • Use and interact with AWS services
  • Apply basic understanding of cloud-native applications to write code
  • Write code by using AWS security best practices (for example, use IAM roles instead of secret and access keys in the code)
  • Author, maintain, and debug code modules on AWS

What is considered out of scope for the target candidate?
The following is a non-exhaustive list of related job tasks that the target candidate is not expected to be able to perform. These items are considered out of scope for the exam:
– Design architectures (for example, distributed system, microservices)
– Design and implement CI/CD pipelines

  • Administer IAM users and groups
  • Administer Amazon Elastic Container Service (Amazon ECS)
  • Design AWS networking infrastructure (for example, Amazon VPC, AWS Direct Connect)
  • Understand compliance and licensing

Exam content
Response types
There are two types of questions on the exam:
– Multiple choice: Has one correct response and three incorrect responses (distractors)
– Multiple response: Has two or more correct responses out of five or more response options
Select one or more responses that best complete the statement or answer the question. Distractors, or incorrect answers, are response options that a candidate with incomplete knowledge or skill might choose.
Distractors are generally plausible responses that match the content area.
Unanswered questions are scored as incorrect; there is no penalty for guessing. The exam includes 50 questions that will affect your score.

Unscored content
The exam includes 15 unscored questions that do not affect your score. AWS collects information about candidate performance on these unscored questions to evaluate these questions for future use as scored questions. These unscored questions are not identified on the exam.

Exam results
The AWS Certified Developer – Associate (DVA-C01) exam is a pass or fail exam. The exam is scored against a minimum standard established by AWS professionals who follow certification industry best practices and guidelines.
Your results for the exam are reported as a scaled score of 100–1,000. The minimum passing score is 720.
Your score shows how you performed on the exam as a whole and whether you passed. Scaled scoring models help equate scores across multiple exam forms that might have slightly different difficulty levels.
Your score report could contain a table of classifications of your performance at each section level. This information is intended to provide general feedback about your exam performance. The exam uses a compensatory scoring model, which means that you do not need to achieve a passing score in each section. You need to pass only the overall exam.
Each section of the exam has a specific weighting, so some sections have more questions than other sections have. The table contains general information that highlights your strengths and weaknesses. Use caution when interpreting section-level feedback.

Content outline
This exam guide includes weightings, test domains, and objectives for the exam. It is not a comprehensive listing of the content on the exam. However, additional context for each of the objectives is available to help guide your preparation for the exam. The following table lists the main content domains and their weightings. The table precedes the complete exam content outline, which includes the additional context.
The percentage in each domain represents only scored content.

Domain 1: Deployment 22%
Domain 2: Security 26%
Domain 3: Development with AWS Services 30%
Domain 4: Refactoring 10%
Domain 5: Monitoring and Troubleshooting 12%

Domain 1: Deployment
1.1 Deploy written code in AWS using existing CI/CD pipelines, processes, and patterns.
–  Commit code to a repository and invoke build, test and/or deployment actions
–  Use labels and branches for version and release management
–  Use AWS CodePipeline to orchestrate workflows against different environments
–  Apply AWS CodeCommit, AWS CodeBuild, AWS CodePipeline, AWS CodeStar, and AWS
CodeDeploy for CI/CD purposes
–  Perform a roll back plan based on application deployment policy

1.2 Deploy applications using AWS Elastic Beanstalk.
–  Utilize existing supported environments to define a new application stack
–  Package the application
–  Introduce a new application version into the Elastic Beanstalk environment
–  Utilize a deployment policy to deploy an application version (i.e., all at once, rolling, rolling with batch, immutable)
–  Validate application health using Elastic Beanstalk dashboard
–  Use Amazon CloudWatch Logs to instrument application logging

1.3 Prepare the application deployment package to be deployed to AWS.
–  Manage the dependencies of the code module (like environment variables, config files and static image files) within the package
–  Outline the package/container directory structure and organize files appropriately
–  Translate application resource requirements to AWS infrastructure parameters (e.g., memory, cores)

1.4 Deploy serverless applications.
–  Given a use case, implement and launch an AWS Serverless Application Model (AWS SAM) template
–  Manage environments in individual AWS services (e.g., Differentiate between Development, Test, and Production in Amazon API Gateway)

Domain 2: Security
2.1 Make authenticated calls to AWS services.
–  Communicate required policy based on least privileges required by application.
–  Assume an IAM role to access a service
–  Use the software development kit (SDK) credential provider on-premises or in the cloud to access AWS services (local credentials vs. instance roles)

2.2 Implement encryption using AWS services.
– Encrypt data at rest (client side; server side; envelope encryption) using AWS services
–  Encrypt data in transit

2.3 Implement application authentication and authorization.
– Add user sign-up and sign-in functionality for applications with Amazon Cognito identity or user pools
–  Use Amazon Cognito-provided credentials to write code that access AWS services.
–  Use Amazon Cognito sync to synchronize user profiles and data
–  Use developer-authenticated identities to interact between end user devices, backend
authentication, and Amazon Cognito

Domain 3: Development with AWS Services
3.1 Write code for serverless applications.
– Compare and contrast server-based vs. serverless model (e.g., micro services, stateless nature of serverless applications, scaling serverless applications, and decoupling layers of serverless applications)
– Configure AWS Lambda functions by defining environment variables and parameters (e.g., memory, time out, runtime, handler)
– Create an API endpoint using Amazon API Gateway
–  Create and test appropriate API actions like GET, POST using the API endpoint
–  Apply Amazon DynamoDB concepts (e.g., tables, items, and attributes)
–  Compute read/write capacity units for Amazon DynamoDB based on application requirements
–  Associate an AWS Lambda function with an AWS event source (e.g., Amazon API Gateway, Amazon CloudWatch event, Amazon S3 events, Amazon Kinesis)
–  Invoke an AWS Lambda function synchronously and asynchronously

3.2 Translate functional requirements into application design.
– Determine real-time vs. batch processing for a given use case
– Determine use of synchronous vs. asynchronous for a given use case
– Determine use of event vs. schedule/poll for a given use case
– Account for tradeoffs for consistency models in an application design

Domain 4: Refactoring
4.1 Optimize applications to best use AWS services and features.
 Implement AWS caching services to optimize performance (e.g., Amazon ElastiCache, Amazon API Gateway cache)
 Apply an Amazon S3 naming scheme for optimal read performance

4.2 Migrate existing application code to run on AWS.
– Isolate dependencies
– Run the application as one or more stateless processes
– Develop in order to enable horizontal scalability
– Externalize state

Domain 5: Monitoring and Troubleshooting

5.1 Write code that can be monitored.
– Create custom Amazon CloudWatch metrics
– Perform logging in a manner available to systems operators
– Instrument application source code to enable tracing in AWS X-Ray

5.2 Perform root cause analysis on faults found in testing or production.
– Interpret the outputs from the logging mechanism in AWS to identify errors in logs
– Check build and testing history in AWS services (e.g., AWS CodeBuild, AWS CodeDeploy, AWS CodePipeline) to identify issues
– Utilize AWS services (e.g., Amazon CloudWatch, VPC Flow Logs, and AWS X-Ray) to locate a specific faulty component

Which key tools, technologies, and concepts might be covered on the exam?

The following is a non-exhaustive list of the tools and technologies that could appear on the exam.
This list is subject to change and is provided to help you understand the general scope of services, features, or technologies on the exam.
The general tools and technologies in this list appear in no particular order.
AWS services are grouped according to their primary functions. While some of these technologies will likely be covered more than others on the exam, the order and placement of them in this list is no indication of relative weight or importance:
– Analytics
– Application Integration
– Containers
– Cost and Capacity Management
– Data Movement
– Developer Tools
– Instances (virtual machines)
– Management and Governance
– Networking and Content Delivery
– Security
– Serverless

AWS services and features

Analytics:
– Amazon Elasticsearch Service (Amazon ES)
– Amazon Kinesis
Application Integration:
– Amazon EventBridge (Amazon CloudWatch Events)
– Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS)
– Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS)
– AWS Step Functions

Compute:
– Amazon EC2
– AWS Elastic Beanstalk
– AWS Lambda

Containers:
– Amazon Elastic Container Registry (Amazon ECR)
– Amazon Elastic Container Service (Amazon ECS)
– Amazon Elastic Kubernetes Services (Amazon EKS)

Database:
– Amazon DynamoDB
– Amazon ElastiCache
– Amazon RDS

Developer Tools:
– AWS CodeArtifact
– AWS CodeBuild
– AWS CodeCommit
– AWS CodeDeploy
– Amazon CodeGuru
– AWS CodePipeline
– AWS CodeStar
– AWS Fault Injection Simulator
– AWS X-Ray

Management and Governance:
– AWS CloudFormation
– Amazon CloudWatch

Networking and Content Delivery:
– Amazon API Gateway
– Amazon CloudFront
– Elastic Load Balancing

Security, Identity, and Compliance:
– Amazon Cognito
– AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM)
– AWS Key Management Service (AWS KMS)

Storage:
– Amazon S3

Out-of-scope AWS services and features

The following is a non-exhaustive list of AWS services and features that are not covered on the exam.
These services and features do not represent every AWS offering that is excluded from the exam content.
Services or features that are entirely unrelated to the target job roles for the exam are excluded from this list because they are assumed to be irrelevant.
Out-of-scope AWS services and features include the following:
– AWS Application Discovery Service
– Amazon AppStream 2.0
– Amazon Chime
– Amazon Connect
– AWS Database Migration Service (AWS DMS)
– AWS Device Farm
– Amazon Elastic Transcoder
– Amazon GameLift
– Amazon Lex
– Amazon Machine Learning (Amazon ML)
– AWS Managed Services
– Amazon Mobile Analytics
– Amazon Polly

– Amazon QuickSight
– Amazon Rekognition
– AWS Server Migration Service (AWS SMS)
– AWS Service Catalog
– AWS Shield Advanced
– AWS Shield Standard
– AWS Snow Family
– AWS Storage Gateway
– AWS WAF
– Amazon WorkMail
– Amazon WorkSpaces

To succeed with the real exam, do not memorize the answers below. It is very important that you understand why a question is right or wrong and the concepts behind it by carefully reading the reference documents in the answers.

Top

AWS Certified Developer – Associate Practice Questions And Answers Dump

Q0: Your application reads commands from an SQS queue and sends them to web services hosted by your
partners. When a partner’s endpoint goes down, your application continually returns their commands to the queue. The repeated attempts to deliver these commands use up resources. Commands that can’t be delivered must not be lost.
How can you accommodate the partners’ broken web services without wasting your resources?

  • A. Create a delay queue and set DelaySeconds to 30 seconds
  • B. Requeue the message with a VisibilityTimeout of 30 seconds.
  • C. Create a dead letter queue and set the Maximum Receives to 3.
  • D. Requeue the message with a DelaySeconds of 30 seconds.
2022 AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam Preparation: Questions and Answers Dump
AWS Developer Associates DVA-C01 PRO
 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 


C. After a message is taken from the queue and returned for the maximum number of retries, it is
automatically sent to a dead letter queue, if one has been configured. It stays there until you retrieve it for forensic purposes.

Reference: Amazon SQS Dead-Letter Queues


Top

Q1: A developer is writing an application that will store data in a DynamoDB table. The ratio of reads operations to write operations will be 1000 to 1, with the same data being accessed frequently.
What should the Developer enable on the DynamoDB table to optimize performance and minimize costs?

  • A. Amazon DynamoDB auto scaling
  • B. Amazon DynamoDB cross-region replication
  • C. Amazon DynamoDB Streams
  • D. Amazon DynamoDB Accelerator


D. The AWS Documentation mentions the following:

DAX is a DynamoDB-compatible caching service that enables you to benefit from fast in-memory performance for demanding applications. DAX addresses three core scenarios

  1. As an in-memory cache, DAX reduces the response times of eventually-consistent read workloads by an order of magnitude, from single-digit milliseconds to microseconds.
  2. DAX reduces operational and application complexity by providing a managed service that is API-compatible with Amazon DynamoDB, and thus requires only minimal functional changes to use with an existing application.
  3. For read-heavy or bursty workloads, DAX provides increased throughput and potential operational cost savings by reducing the need to over-provision read capacity units. This is especially beneficial for applications that require repeated reads for individual keys.

Reference: AWS DAX


Top

Q2: You are creating a DynamoDB table with the following attributes:

  • PurchaseOrderNumber (partition key)
  • CustomerID
  • PurchaseDate
  • TotalPurchaseValue

One of your applications must retrieve items from the table to calculate the total value of purchases for a
particular customer over a date range. What secondary index do you need to add to the table?

  • A. Local secondary index with a partition key of CustomerID and sort key of PurchaseDate; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute
  • B. Local secondary index with a partition key of PurchaseDate and sort key of CustomerID; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute
  • C. Global secondary index with a partition key of CustomerID and sort key of PurchaseDate; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute
  • D. Global secondary index with a partition key of PurchaseDate and sort key of CustomerID; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute


C. The query is for a particular CustomerID, so a Global Secondary Index is needed for a different partition
key. To retrieve only the desired date range, the PurchaseDate must be the sort key. Projecting the
TotalPurchaseValue into the index provides all the data needed to satisfy the use case.

Reference: AWS DynamoDB Global Secondary Indexes

Difference between local and global indexes in DynamoDB

    • Global secondary index — an index with a hash and range key that can be different from those on the table. A global secondary index is considered “global” because queries on the index can span all of the data in a table, across all partitions.
    • Local secondary index — an index that has the same hash key as the table, but a different range key. A local secondary index is “local” in the sense that every partition of a local secondary index is scoped to a table partition that has the same hash key.
    • Local Secondary Indexes still rely on the original Hash Key. When you supply a table with hash+range, think about the LSI as hash+range1, hash+range2.. hash+range6. You get 5 more range attributes to query on. Also, there is only one provisioned throughput.
    • Global Secondary Indexes defines a new paradigm – different hash/range keys per index.
      This breaks the original usage of one hash key per table. This is also why when defining GSI you are required to add a provisioned throughput per index and pay for it.
    • Local Secondary Indexes can only be created when you are creating the table, there is no way to add Local Secondary Index to an existing table, also once you create the index you cannot delete it.
    • Global Secondary Indexes can be created when you create the table and added to an existing table, deleting an existing Global Secondary Index is also allowed.

Throughput :

  • Local Secondary Indexes consume throughput from the table. When you query records via the local index, the operation consumes read capacity units from the table. When you perform a write operation (create, update, delete) in a table that has a local index, there will be two write operations, one for the table another for the index. Both operations will consume write capacity units from the table.
  • Global Secondary Indexes have their own provisioned throughput, when you query the index the operation will consume read capacity from the index, when you perform a write operation (create, update, delete) in a table that has a global index, there will be two write operations, one for the table another for the index*.


Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep
AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep
 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q3: When referencing the remaining time left for a Lambda function to run within the function’s code you would use:

  • A. The event object
  • B. The timeLeft object
  • C. The remains object
  • D. The context object


D. The context object.

Reference: AWS Lambda


Top

Q4: What two arguments does a Python Lambda handler function require?

  • A. invocation, zone
  • B. event, zone
  • C. invocation, context
  • D. event, context
D. event, context
def handler_name(event, context):
…
return some_value

Reference: AWS Lambda Function Handler in Python

Top

Q5: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only via SFTP
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package

Top

Q6: A Lambda deployment package contains:

  • A. Function code, libraries, and runtime binaries
  • B. Only function code
  • C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime
  • D. Only libraries not included within the runtime

C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime

Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package in PowerShell

Top

Q7: You are attempting to SSH into an EC2 instance that is located in a public subnet. However, you are currently receiving a timeout error trying to connect. What could be a possible cause of this connection issue?

  • A. The security group associated with the EC2 instance has an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic, but does not have an outbound rule that allows SSH traffic.
  • B. The security group associated with the EC2 instance has an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic AND has an outbound rule that explicitly denies SSH traffic.
  • C. The security group associated with the EC2 instance has an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic AND the associated NACL has both an inbound and outbound rule that allows SSH traffic.
  • D. The security group associated with the EC2 instance does not have an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic AND the associated NACL does not have an outbound rule that allows SSH traffic.


D. Security groups are stateful, so you do NOT have to have an explicit outbound rule for return requests. However, NACLs are stateless so you MUST have an explicit outbound rule configured for return request.

Reference: Comparison of Security Groups and Network ACLs

AWS Security Groups and NACL


Top

Q8: You have instances inside private subnets and a properly configured bastion host instance in a public subnet. None of the instances in the private subnets have a public or Elastic IP address. How can you connect an instance in the private subnet to the open internet to download system updates?

  • A. Create and assign EIP to each instance
  • B. Create and attach a second IGW to the VPC.
  • C. Create and utilize a NAT Gateway
  • D. Connect to a VPN


C. You can use a network address translation (NAT) gateway in a public subnet in your VPC to enable instances in the private subnet to initiate outbound traffic to the Internet, but prevent the instances from receiving inbound traffic initiated by someone on the Internet.

Reference: AWS Network Address Translation Gateway


Top

Q9: What feature of VPC networking should you utilize if you want to create “elasticity” in your application’s architecture?

  • A. Security Groups
  • B. Route Tables
  • C. Elastic Load Balancer
  • D. Auto Scaling


D. Auto scaling is designed specifically with elasticity in mind. Auto scaling allows for the increase and decrease of compute power based on demand, thus creating elasticity in the architecture.

Reference: AWS Autoscalling


Top

Q10: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

Reference: AWS Lambda

Top

Q11: You’re writing a script with an AWS SDK that uses the AWS API Actions and want to create AMIs for non-EBS backed AMIs for you. Which API call should occurs in the final process of creating an AMI?

  • A. RegisterImage
  • B. CreateImage
  • C. ami-register-image
  • D. ami-create-image

A. It is actually – RegisterImage. All AWS API Actions will follow the capitalization like this and don’t have hyphens in them.

Reference: API RegisterImage

Top

Q12: When dealing with session state in EC2-based applications using Elastic load balancers which option is generally thought of as the best practice for managing user sessions?

  • A. Having the ELB distribute traffic to all EC2 instances and then having the instance check a caching solution like ElastiCache running Redis or Memcached for session information
  • B. Permenantly assigning users to specific instances and always routing their traffic to those instances
  • C. Using Application-generated cookies to tie a user session to a particular instance for the cookie duration
  • D. Using Elastic Load Balancer generated cookies to tie a user session to a particular instance

Top

Q13: Which API call would best be used to describe an Amazon Machine Image?

  • A. ami-describe-image
  • B. ami-describe-images
  • C. DescribeImage
  • D. DescribeImages

D. In general, API actions stick to the PascalCase style with the first letter of every word capitalized.

Reference: API DescribeImages

Top

Q14: What is one key difference between an Amazon EBS-backed and an instance-store backed instance?

  • A. Autoscaling requires using Amazon EBS-backed instances
  • B. Virtual Private Cloud requires EBS backed instances
  • C. Amazon EBS-backed instances can be stopped and restarted without losing data
  • D. Instance-store backed instances can be stopped and restarted without losing data

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

C. Instance-store backed images use “ephemeral” storage (temporary). The storage is only available during the life of an instance. Rebooting an instance will allow ephemeral data stay persistent. However, stopping and starting an instance will remove all ephemeral storage.

Reference: What is the difference between EBS and Instance Store?

Top

Q15: After having created a new Linux instance on Amazon EC2, and downloaded the .pem file (called Toto.pem) you try and SSH into your IP address (54.1.132.33) using the following command.
ssh -i my_key.pem ec2-user@52.2.222.22
However you receive the following error.
@@@@@@@@ WARNING: UNPROTECTED PRIVATE KEY FILE! @ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
What is the most probable reason for this and how can you fix it?

  • A. You do not have root access on your terminal and need to use the sudo option for this to work.
  • B. You do not have enough permissions to perform the operation.
  • C. Your key file is encrypted. You need to use the -u option for unencrypted not the -i option.
  • D. Your key file must not be publicly viewable for SSH to work. You need to modify your .pem file to limit permissions.

D. You need to run something like: chmod 400 my_key.pem

Reference:

Top

Q16: You have an EBS root device on /dev/sda1 on one of your EC2 instances. You are having trouble with this particular instance and you need to either Stop/Start, Reboot or Terminate the instance but you do NOT want to lose any data that you have stored on /dev/sda1. However, you are unsure if changing the instance state in any of the aforementioned ways will cause you to lose data stored on the EBS volume. Which of the below statements best describes the effect each change of instance state would have on the data you have stored on /dev/sda1?

  • A. Whether you stop/start, reboot or terminate the instance it does not matter because data on an EBS volume is not ephemeral and the data will not be lost regardless of what method is used.
  • B. If you stop/start the instance the data will not be lost. However if you either terminate or reboot the instance the data will be lost.
  • C. Whether you stop/start, reboot or terminate the instance it does not matter because data on an EBS volume is ephemeral and it will be lost no matter what method is used.
  • D. The data will be lost if you terminate the instance, however the data will remain on /dev/sda1 if you reboot or stop/start the instance because data on an EBS volume is not ephemeral.

D. The question states that an EBS-backed root device is mounted at /dev/sda1, and EBS volumes maintain information regardless of the instance state. If it was instance store, this would be a different answer.

Reference: AWS Root Device Storage

Top

Q17: EC2 instances are launched from Amazon Machine Images (AMIs). A given public AMI:

  • A. Can only be used to launch EC2 instances in the same AWS availability zone as the AMI is stored
  • B. Can only be used to launch EC2 instances in the same country as the AMI is stored
  • C. Can only be used to launch EC2 instances in the same AWS region as the AMI is stored
  • D. Can be used to launch EC2 instances in any AWS region

C. AMIs are only available in the region they are created. Even in the case of the AWS-provided AMIs, AWS has actually copied the AMIs for you to different regions. You cannot access an AMI from one region in another region. However, you can copy an AMI from one region to another

Reference: https://aws.amazon.com/amazon-linux-ami/

Top

Q18: Which of the following statements is true about the Elastic File System (EFS)?

  • A. EFS can scale out to meet capacity requirements and scale back down when no longer needed
  • B. EFS can be used by multiple EC2 instances simultaneously
  • C. EFS cannot be used by an instance using EBS
  • D. EFS can be configured on an instance before launch just like an IAM role or EBS volumes

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

A. and B.

Reference: https://aws.amazon.com/efs/

Top

Q19: IAM Policies, at a minimum, contain what elements?

  • A. ID
  • B. Effects
  • C. Resources
  • D. Sid
  • E. Principle
  • F. Actions

B. C. and F.

Effect – Use Allow or Deny to indicate whether the policy allows or denies access.

Resource – Specify a list of resources to which the actions apply.

Action – Include a list of actions that the policy allows or denies.

Id, Sid aren’t required fields in IAM Policies. But they are optional fields

Reference: AWS IAM Access Policies

Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q20: What are the main benefits of IAM groups?

  • A. The ability to create custom permission policies.
  • B. Assigning IAM permission policies to more than one user at a time.
  • C. Easier user/policy management.
  • D. Allowing EC2 instances to gain access to S3.

B. and C.

A. is incorrect: This is a benefit of IAM generally or a benefit of IAM policies. But IAM groups don’t create policies, they have policies attached to them.

Reference: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/IAM/latest/UserGuide/id_groups.html

 

Top

Q21: What are benefits of using AWS STS?

  • A. Grant access to AWS resources without having to create an IAM identity for them
  • B. Since credentials are temporary, you don’t have to rotate or revoke them
  • C. Temporary security credentials can be extended indefinitely
  • D. Temporary security credentials can be restricted to a specific region

Top

Q22: What should the Developer enable on the DynamoDB table to optimize performance and minimize costs?

  • A. Amazon DynamoDB auto scaling
  • B. Amazon DynamoDB cross-region replication
  • C. Amazon DynamoDB Streams
  • D. Amazon DynamoDB Accelerator


D. DAX is a DynamoDB-compatible caching service that enables you to benefit from fast in-memory performance for demanding applications. DAX addresses three core scenarios:

  1. As an in-memory cache, DAX reduces the response times of eventually-consistent read workloads by an order of magnitude, from single-digit milliseconds to microseconds.
  2. DAX reduces operational and application complexity by providing a managed service that is API-compatible with Amazon DynamoDB, and thus requires only minimal functional changes to use with an existing application.
  3. For read-heavy or bursty workloads, DAX provides increased throughput and potential operational cost savings by reducing the need to over-provision read capacity units. This is especially beneficial for applications that require repeated reads for individual keys.

Reference: AWS DAX


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q23: A Developer has been asked to create an AWS Elastic Beanstalk environment for a production web application which needs to handle thousands of requests. Currently the dev environment is running on a t1 micro instance. How can the Developer change the EC2 instance type to m4.large?

  • A. Use CloudFormation to migrate the Amazon EC2 instance type of the environment from t1 micro to m4.large.
  • B. Create a saved configuration file in Amazon S3 with the instance type as m4.large and use the same during environment creation.
  • C. Change the instance type to m4.large in the configuration details page of the Create New Environment page.
  • D. Change the instance type value for the environment to m4.large by using update autoscaling group CLI command.

B. The Elastic Beanstalk console and EB CLI set configuration options when you create an environment. You can also set configuration options in saved configurations and configuration files. If the same option is set in multiple locations, the value used is determined by the order of precedence.
Configuration option settings can be composed in text format and saved prior to environment creation, applied during environment creation using any supported client, and added, modified or removed after environment creation.
During environment creation, configuration options are applied from multiple sources with the following precedence, from highest to lowest:

  • Settings applied directly to the environment – Settings specified during a create environment or update environment operation on the Elastic Beanstalk API by any client, including the AWS Management Console, EB CLI, AWS CLI, and SDKs. The AWS Management Console and EB CLI also applyrecommended values for some options that apply at this level unless overridden.
  • Saved Configurations–
    Settings for any options that are not applied directly to the
    environment are loaded from a saved configuration, if specified.
  • Configuration Files (.ebextensions)– Settings for any options that are not applied directly to the
    environment, and also not specified in a saved configuration, are loaded from configuration files in the .ebextensions folder at the root of the application source bundle.

     

    Configuration files are executed in alphabetical order. For example,.ebextensions/01run.configis executed before.ebextensions/02do.config.

  • Default Values– If a configuration option has a default value, it only applies when the option is not set at any of the above levels.

If the same configuration option is defined in more than one location, the setting with the highest precedence is applied. When a setting is applied from a saved configuration or settings applied directly to the environment, the setting is stored as part of the environment’s configuration. These settings can be removed with the AWS CLI or with the EB CLI
.
Settings in configuration files are not applied
directly to the environment and cannot be removed without modifying the configuration files and deploying a new application version.If a setting applied with one of the other methods is removed, the same setting will be loaded from configuration files in the source bundle.

Reference: Managing ec2 features – Elastic beanstalk

Q24: What statements are true about Availability Zones (AZs) and Regions?

  • A. There is only one AZ in each AWS Region
  • B. AZs are geographically separated inside a region to help protect against natural disasters affecting more than one at a time.
  • C. AZs can be moved between AWS Regions based on your needs
  • D. There are (almost always) two or more AZs in each AWS Region

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

B and D.

Reference: AWS global infrastructure/

Top

Q25: An AWS Region contains:

  • A. Edge Locations
  • B. Data Centers
  • C. AWS Services
  • D. Availability Zones


B. C. D. Edge locations are actually distinct locations that don’t explicitly fall within AWS regions.

Reference: AWS Global Infrastructure


Top

Q26: Which read request in DynamoDB returns a response with the most up-to-date data, reflecting the updates from all prior write operations that were successful?

  • A. Eventual Consistent Reads
  • B. Conditional reads for Consistency
  • C. Strongly Consistent Reads
  • D. Not possible


C. This is provided very clearly in the AWS documentation as shown below with regards to the read consistency for DynamoDB. Only in Strong Read consistency can you be guaranteed that you get the write read value after all the writes are completed.

Reference: https://aws.amazon.com/dynamodb/faqs/


Top

Q27: You’ ve been asked to move an existing development environment on the AWS Cloud. This environment consists mainly of Docker based containers. You need to ensure that minimum effort is taken during the migration process. Which of the following step would you consider for this requirement?

  • A. Create an Opswork stack and deploy the Docker containers
  • B. Create an application and Environment for the Docker containers in the Elastic Beanstalk service
  • C. Create an EC2 Instance. Install Docker and deploy the necessary containers.
  • D. Create an EC2 Instance. Install Docker and deploy the necessary containers. Add an Autoscaling Group for scalability of the containers.


B. The Elastic Beanstalk service is the ideal service to quickly provision development environments. You can also create environments which can be used to host Docker based containers.

Reference: Create and Deploy Docker in AWS


Top

Q28: You’ve written an application that uploads objects onto an S3 bucket. The size of the object varies between 200 – 500 MB. You’ve seen that the application sometimes takes a longer than expected time to upload the object. You want to improve the performance of the application. Which of the following would you consider?

  • A. Create multiple threads and upload the objects in the multiple threads
  • B. Write the items in batches for better performance
  • C. Use the Multipart upload API
  • D. Enable versioning on the Bucket

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 


C. All other options are invalid since the best way to handle large object uploads to the S3 service is to use the Multipart upload API. The Multipart upload API enables you to upload large objects in parts. You can use this API to upload new large objects or make a copy of an existing object. Multipart uploading is a three-step process: You initiate the upload, you upload the object parts, and after you have uploaded all the parts, you complete the multipart upload. Upon receiving the complete multipart upload request, Amazon S3 constructs the object from the uploaded parts, and you can then access the object just as you would any other object in your bucket.

Reference: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuoverview.html


Top

Q29: A security system monitors 600 cameras, saving image metadata every 1 minute to an Amazon DynamoDb table. Each sample involves 1kb of data, and the data writes are evenly distributed over time. How much write throughput is required for the target table?

  • A. 6000
  • B. 10
  • C. 3600
  • D. 600

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

B. When you mention the write capacity of a table in Dynamo DB, you mention it as the number of 1KB writes per second. So in the above question, since the write is happening every minute, we need to divide the value of 600 by 60, to get the number of KB writes per second. This gives a value of 10.

You can specify the Write capacity in the Capacity tab of the DynamoDB table.

Reference: AWS working with tables

Q30: What two arguments does a Python Lambda handler function require?

  • A. invocation, zone
  • B. event, zone
  • C. invocation, context
  • D. event, context


D. event, context def handler_name(event, context):
…
return some_value
Reference: AWS Lambda Function Handler in Python

Top

Q31: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only via SFTP
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere


D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere
Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package

Top

Q32: A Lambda deployment package contains:

  • A. Function code, libraries, and runtime binaries
  • B. Only function code
  • C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime
  • D. Only libraries not included within the runtime


C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime
Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package in PowerShell

Top

Q33: You have instances inside private subnets and a properly configured bastion host instance in a public subnet. None of the instances in the private subnets have a public or Elastic IP address. How can you connect an instance in the private subnet to the open internet to download system updates?

  • A. Create and assign EIP to each instance
  • B. Create and attach a second IGW to the VPC.
  • C. Create and utilize a NAT Gateway
  • D. Connect to a VPN


C. You can use a network address translation (NAT) gateway in a public subnet in your VPC to enable instances in the private subnet to initiate outbound traffic to the Internet, but prevent the instances from receiving inbound traffic initiated by someone on the Internet.
Reference: AWS Network Address Translation Gateway

Top

Q34: What feature of VPC networking should you utilize if you want to create “elasticity” in your application’s architecture?

  • A. Security Groups
  • B. Route Tables
  • C. Elastic Load Balancer
  • D. Auto Scaling


D. Auto scaling is designed specifically with elasticity in mind. Auto scaling allows for the increase and decrease of compute power based on demand, thus creating elasticity in the architecture.
Reference: AWS Autoscalling

Top

Q30: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

Answer:


D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere
Reference: AWS Lambda

Top

Q31: An organization is using an Amazon ElastiCache cluster in front of their Amazon RDS instance. The organization would like the Developer to implement logic into the code so that the cluster only retrieves data from RDS when there is a cache miss. What strategy can the Developer implement to achieve this?

  • A. Lazy loading
  • B. Write-through
  • C. Error retries
  • D. Exponential backoff

Answer:


Answer – A
Whenever your application requests data, it first makes the request to the ElastiCache cache. If the data exists in the cache and is current, ElastiCache returns the data to your application. If the data does not exist in the cache, or the data in the cache has expired, your application requests data from your data store which returns the data to your application. Your application then writes the data received from the store to the cache so it can be more quickly retrieved next time it is requested. All other options are incorrect.
Reference: Caching Strategies

Top

Q32: A developer is writing an application that will run on Ec2 instances and read messages from SQS queue. The nessages will arrive every 15-60 seconds. How should the Developer efficiently query the queue for new messages?

  • A. Use long polling
  • B. Set a custom visibility timeout
  • C. Use short polling
  • D. Implement exponential backoff


Answer – A Long polling will help insure that the applications make less requests for messages in a shorter period of time. This is more cost effective. Since the messages are only going to be available after 15 seconds and we don’t know exacly when they would be available, it is better to use Long Polling.
Reference: Amazon SQS Long Polling

Top

Q33: You are using AWS SAM to define a Lambda function and configure CodeDeploy to manage deployment patterns. With new Lambda function working as per expectation which of the following will shift traffic from original Lambda function to new Lambda function in the shortest time frame?

  • A. Canary10Percent5Minutes
  • B. Linear10PercentEvery10Minutes
  • C. Canary10Percent15Minutes
  • D. Linear10PercentEvery1Minute


Answer – A
With Canary Deployment Preference type, Traffic is shifted in two intervals. With Canary10Percent5Minutes, 10 percent of traffic is shifted in the first interval while remaining all traffic is shifted after 5 minutes.
Reference: Gradual Code Deployment

Top

Q34: You are using AWS SAM templates to deploy a serverless application. Which of the following resource will embed application from Amazon S3 buckets?

  • A. AWS::Serverless::Api
  • B. AWS::Serverless::Application
  • C. AWS::Serverless::Layerversion
  • D. AWS::Serverless::Function


Answer – B
AWS::Serverless::Application resource in AWS SAm template is used to embed application frm Amazon S3 buckets.
Reference: Declaring Serverless Resources

Top

Q35: You are using AWS Envelope Encryption for encrypting all sensitive data. Which of the followings is True with regards to Envelope Encryption?

  • A. Data is encrypted be encrypting Data key which is further encrypted using encrypted Master Key.
  • B. Data is encrypted by plaintext Data key which is further encrypted using encrypted Master Key.
  • C. Data is encrypted by encrypted Data key which is further encrypted using plaintext Master Key.
  • D. Data is encrypted by plaintext Data key which is further encrypted using plaintext Master Key.


Answer – D
With Envelope Encryption, unencrypted data is encrypted using plaintext Data key. This Data is further encrypted using plaintext Master key. This plaintext Master key is securely stored in AWS KMS & known as Customer Master Keys.
Reference: AWS Key Management Service Concepts

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q36: You are developing an application that will be comprised of the following architecture –

  1. A set of Ec2 instances to process the videos.
  2. These (Ec2 instances) will be spun up by an autoscaling group.
  3. SQS Queues to maintain the processing messages.
  4. There will be 2 pricing tiers.

How will you ensure that the premium customers videos are given more preference?

  • A. Create 2 Autoscaling Groups, one for normal and one for premium customers
  • B. Create 2 set of Ec2 Instances, one for normal and one for premium customers
  • C. Create 2 SQS queus, one for normal and one for premium customers
  • D. Create 2 Elastic Load Balancers, one for normal and one for premium customers.


Answer – C
The ideal option would be to create 2 SQS queues. Messages can then be processed by the application from the high priority queue first.<br? The other options are not the ideal options. They would lead to extra costs and also extra maintenance.
Reference: SQS

Top

Q37: You are developing an application that will interact with a DynamoDB table. The table is going to take in a lot of read and write operations. Which of the following would be the ideal partition key for the DynamoDB table to ensure ideal performance?

  • A. CustomerID
  • B. CustomerName
  • C. Location
  • D. Age


Answer- A
Use high-cardinality attributes. These are attributes that have distinct values for each item, like e-mailid, employee_no, customerid, sessionid, orderid, and so on..
Use composite attributes. Try to combine more than one attribute to form a unique key.
Reference: Choosing the right DynamoDB Partition Key

Top

Q38: A developer is making use of AWS services to develop an application. He has been asked to develop the application in a manner to compensate any network delays. Which of the following two mechanisms should he implement in the application?

  • A. Multiple SQS queues
  • B. Exponential backoff algorithm
  • C. Retries in your application code
  • D. Consider using the Java sdk.


Answer- B. and C.
In addition to simple retries, each AWS SDK implements exponential backoff algorithm for better flow control. The idea behind exponential backoff is to use progressively longer waits between retries for consecutive error responses. You should implement a maximum delay interval, as well as a maximum number of retries. The maximum delay interval and maximum number of retries are not necessarily fixed values, and should be set based on the operation being performed, as well as other local factors, such as network latency.
Reference: Error Retries and Exponential Backoff in AWS

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q39: An application is being developed that is going to write data to a DynamoDB table. You have to setup the read and write throughput for the table. Data is going to be read at the rate of 300 items every 30 seconds. Each item is of size 6KB. The reads can be eventual consistent reads. What should be the read capacity that needs to be set on the table?

  • A. 10
  • B. 20
  • C. 6
  • D. 30


Answer – A

Since there are 300 items read every 30 seconds , that means there are (300/30) = 10 items read every second.
Since each item is 6KB in size , that means , 2 reads will be required for each item.
So we have total of 2*10 = 20 reads for the number of items per second
Since eventual consistency is required , we can divide the number of reads(20) by 2 , and in the end we get the Read Capacity of 10.

Reference: Read/Write Capacity Mode


Top

Q40: You are in charge of deploying an application that will be hosted on an EC2 Instance and sit behind an Elastic Load balancer. You have been requested to monitor the incoming connections to the Elastic Load Balancer. Which of the below options can suffice this requirement?

  • A. Use AWS CloudTrail with your load balancer
  • B. Enable access logs on the load balancer
  • C. Use a CloudWatch Logs Agent
  • D. Create a custom metric CloudWatch lter on your load balancer


Answer – B
Elastic Load Balancing provides access logs that capture detailed information about requests sent to your load balancer. Each log contains information such as the time the request was received, the client’s IP address, latencies, request paths, and server responses. You can use these access logs to analyze traffic patterns and troubleshoot issues.
Reference: Access Logs for Your Application Load Balancer

Top

Q41: A static web site has been hosted on a bucket and is now being accessed by users. One of the web pages javascript section has been changed to access data which is hosted in another S3 bucket. Now that same web page is no longer loading in the browser. Which of the following can help alleviate the error?

  • A. Enable versioning for the underlying S3 bucket.
  • B. Enable Replication so that the objects get replicated to the other bucket
  • C. Enable CORS for the bucket
  • D. Change the Bucket policy for the bucket to allow access from the other bucket


Answer – C

Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) defines a way for client web applications that are loaded in one domain to interact with resources in a different domain. With CORS support, you can build rich client-side web applications with Amazon S3 and selectively allow cross-origin access to your Amazon S3 resources.

Cross-Origin Resource Sharing: Use-case Scenarios The following are example scenarios for using CORS:

Scenario 1: Suppose that you are hosting a website in an Amazon S3 bucket named website as described in Hosting a Static Website on Amazon S3. Your users load the website endpoint http://website.s3-website-us-east-1.amazonaws.com. Now you want to use JavaScript on the webpages that are stored in this bucket to be able to make authenticated GET and PUT requests against the same bucket by using the Amazon S3 API endpoint for the bucket, website.s3.amazonaws.com. A browser would normally block JavaScript from allowing those requests, but with CORS you can configure your bucket to explicitly enable cross-origin requests from website.s3-website-us-east-1.amazonaws.com.

Scenario 2: Suppose that you want to host a web font from your S3 bucket. Again, browsers require a CORS check (also called a preight check) for loading web fonts. You would configure the bucket that is hosting the web font to allow any origin to make these requests.

Reference: Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q42: Your mobile application includes a photo-sharing service that is expecting tens of thousands of users at launch. You will leverage Amazon Simple Storage Service (S3) for storage of the user Images, and you must decide how to authenticate and authorize your users for access to these images. You also need to manage the storage of these images. Which two of the following approaches should you use? Choose two answers from the options below

  • A. Create an Amazon S3 bucket per user, and use your application to generate the S3 URL for the appropriate content.
  • B. Use AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) user accounts as your application-level user database, and offload the burden of authentication from your application code.
  • C. Authenticate your users at the application level, and use AWS Security Token Service (STS)to grant token-based authorization to S3 objects.
  • D. Authenticate your users at the application level, and send an SMS token message to the user. Create an Amazon S3 bucket with the same name as the SMS message token, and move the user’s objects to that bucket.


Answer- C
The AWS Security Token Service (STS) is a web service that enables you to request temporary, limited-privilege credentials for AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) users or for users that you authenticate (federated users). The token can then be used to grant access to the objects in S3.
You can then provides access to the objects based on the key values generated via the user id.

Reference: The AWS Security Token Service (STS)


Top

Q43: Your current log analysis application takes more than four hours to generate a report of the top 10 users of your web application. You have been asked to implement a system that can report this information in real time, ensure that the report is always up to date, and handle increases in the number of requests to your web application. Choose the option that is cost-effective and can fulfill the requirements.

  • A. Publish your data to CloudWatch Logs, and congure your application to Autoscale to handle the load on demand.
  • B. Publish your log data to an Amazon S3 bucket.  Use AWS CloudFormation to create an Auto Scaling group to scale your post-processing application which is congured to pull down your log les stored an Amazon S3
  • C. Post your log data to an Amazon Kinesis data stream, and subscribe your log-processing application so that is congured to process your logging data.
  • D. Create a multi-AZ Amazon RDS MySQL cluster, post the logging data to MySQL, and run a map reduce job to retrieve the required information on user counts.

Answer:


Answer – C
Amazon Kinesis makes it easy to collect, process, and analyze real-time, streaming data so you can get timely insights and react quickly to new information. Amazon Kinesis offers key capabilities to cost effectively process streaming data at any scale, along with the flexibility to choose the tools that best suit the requirements of your application. With Amazon Kinesis, you can ingest real-time data such as application logs, website clickstreams, IoT telemetry data, and more into your databases, data lakes and data warehouses, or build your own real-time applications using this data.
Reference: Amazon Kinesis

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q44: You’ve been instructed to develop a mobile application that will make use of AWS services. You need to decide on a data store to store the user sessions. Which of the following would be an ideal data store for session management?

  • A. AWS Simple Storage Service
  • B. AWS DynamoDB
  • C. AWS RDS
  • D. AWS Redshift

Answer:


Answer – B
DynamoDB is a alternative solution which can be used for storage of session management. The latency of access to data is less , hence this can be used as a data store for session management
Reference: Scalable Session Handling in PHP Using Amazon DynamoDB

Top

Q45: Your application currently interacts with a DynamoDB table. Records are inserted into the table via the application. There is now a requirement to ensure that whenever items are updated in the DynamoDB primary table , another record is inserted into a secondary table. Which of the below feature should be used when developing such a solution?

  • A. AWS DynamoDB Encryption
  • B. AWS DynamoDB Streams
  • C. AWS DynamoDB Accelerator
  • D. AWSTable Accelerator


Answer – B
DynamoDB Streams Use Cases and Design Patterns This post describes some common use cases you might encounter, along with their design options and solutions, when migrating data from relational data stores to Amazon DynamoDB. We will consider how to manage the following scenarios:

  • How do you set up a relationship across multiple tables in which, based on the value of an item from one table, you update the item in a second table?
  • How do you trigger an event based on a particular transaction?
  • How do you audit or archive transactions?
  • How do you replicate data across multiple tables (similar to that of materialized views/streams/replication in relational data stores)?

Relational databases provide native support for transactions, triggers, auditing, and replication. Typically, a transaction in a database refers to performing create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations against multiple tables in a block. A transaction can have only two states—success or failure. In other words, there is no partial completion. As a NoSQL database, DynamoDB is not designed to support transactions. Although client-side libraries are available to mimic the transaction capabilities, they are not scalable and cost-effective. For example, the Java Transaction Library for DynamoDB creates 7N+4 additional writes for every write operation. This is partly because the library holds metadata to manage the transactions to ensure that it’s consistent and can be rolled back before commit. You can use DynamoDB Streams to address all these use cases. DynamoDB Streams is a powerful service that you can combine with other AWS services to solve many similar problems. When enabled, DynamoDB Streams captures a time-ordered sequence of item-level modifications in a DynamoDB table and durably stores the information for up to 24 hours. Applications can access a series of stream records, which contain an item change, from a DynamoDB stream in near real time. AWS maintains separate endpoints for DynamoDB and DynamoDB Streams. To work with database tables and indexes, your application must access a DynamoDB endpoint. To read and process DynamoDB Streams records, your application must access a DynamoDB Streams endpoint in the same Region. All of the other options are incorrect since none of these would meet the core requirement.
Reference: DynamoDB Streams Use Cases and Design Patterns


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q46: An application has been making use of AWS DynamoDB for its back-end data store. The size of the table has now grown to 20 GB , and the scans on the table are causing throttling errors. Which of the following should now be implemented to avoid such errors?

  • A. Large Page size
  • B. Reduced page size
  • C. Parallel Scans
  • D. Sequential scans

Answer – B
When you scan your table in Amazon DynamoDB, you should follow the DynamoDB best practices for avoiding sudden bursts of read activity. You can use the following technique to minimize the impact of a scan on a table’s provisioned throughput. Reduce page size Because a Scan operation reads an entire page (by default, 1 MB), you can reduce the impact of the scan operation by setting a smaller page size. The Scan operation provides a Limit parameter that you can use to set the page size for your request. Each Query or Scan request that has a smaller page size uses fewer read operations and creates a “pause” between each request. For example, suppose that each item is 4 KB and you set the page size to 40 items. A Query request would then consume only 20 eventually consistent read operations or 40 strongly consistent read operations. A larger number of smaller Query or Scan operations would allow your other critical requests to succeed without throttling.
Reference1: Rate-Limited Scans in Amazon DynamoDB

Reference2: Best Practices for Querying and Scanning Data


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q47: Which of the following is correct way of passing a stage variable to an HTTP URL ? (Select TWO.)

  • A. http://example.com/${}/prod
  • B. http://example.com/${stageVariables.}/prod
  • C. http://${stageVariables.}.example.com/dev/operation
  • D. http://${stageVariables}.example.com/dev/operation
  • E. http://${}.example.com/dev/operation
  • F. http://example.com/${stageVariables}/prod


Answer – B. and C.
A stage variable can be used as part of HTTP integration URL as in following cases, ·         A full URI without protocol ·         A full domain ·         A subdomain ·         A path ·         A query string In the above case , option B & C displays stage variable as a path & sub-domain.
Reference: Amazon API Gateway Stage Variables Reference

Top

Q48: Your company is planning on creating new development environments in AWS. They want to make use of their existing Chef recipes which they use for their on-premise configuration for servers in AWS. Which of the following service would be ideal to use in this regard?

  • A. AWS Elastic Beanstalk
  • B. AWS OpsWork
  • C. AWS Cloudformation
  • D. AWS SQS


Answer – B
AWS OpsWorks is a configuration management service that provides managed instances of Chef and Puppet. Chef and Puppet are automation platforms that allow you to use code to automate the configurations of your servers. OpsWorks lets you use Chef and Puppet to automate how servers are configured, deployed, and managed across your Amazon EC2 instances or on-premises compute environments All other options are invalid since they cannot be used to work with Chef recipes for configuration management.
Reference: AWS OpsWorks

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q49: Your company has developed a web application and is hosting it in an Amazon S3 bucket configured for static website hosting. The users can log in to this app using their Google/Facebook login accounts. The application is using the AWS SDK for JavaScript in the browser to access data stored in an Amazon DynamoDB table. How can you ensure that API keys for access to your data in DynamoDB are kept secure?

  • A. Create an Amazon S3 role in IAM with access to the specific DynamoDB tables, and assign it to the bucket hosting your website
  • B. Configure S3 bucket tags with your AWS access keys for your bucket hosing your website so that the application can query them for access.
  • C. Configure a web identity federation role within IAM to enable access to the correct DynamoDB resources and retrieve temporary credentials
  • D. Store AWS keys in global variables within your application and configure the application to use these credentials when making requests.


Answer – C
With web identity federation, you don’t need to create custom sign-in code or manage your own user identities. Instead, users of your app can sign in using a well-known identity provider (IdP) —such as Login with Amazon, Facebook, Google, or any other OpenID Connect (OIDC)-compatible IdP, receive an authentication token, and then exchange that token for temporary security credentials in AWS that map to an IAM role with permissions to use the resources in your AWS account. Using an IdP helps you keep your AWS account secure, because you don’t have to embed and distribute long-term security credentials with your application. Option A is invalid since Roles cannot be assigned to S3 buckets Options B and D are invalid since the AWS Access keys should not be used
Reference: About Web Identity Federation

Top

Q50: Your application currently makes use of AWS Cognito for managing user identities. You want to analyze the information that is stored in AWS Cognito for your application. Which of the following features of AWS Cognito should you use for this purpose?

  • A. Cognito Data
  • B. Cognito Events
  • C. Cognito Streams
  • D. Cognito Callbacks


Answer – C
Amazon Cognito Streams gives developers control and insight into their data stored in Amazon Cognito. Developers can now configure a Kinesis stream to receive events as data is updated and synchronized. Amazon Cognito can push each dataset change to a Kinesis stream you own in real time. All other options are invalid since you should use Cognito Streams
Reference:

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q51: You’ve developed a set of scripts using AWS Lambda. These scripts need to access EC2 Instances in a VPC. Which of the following needs to be done to ensure that the AWS Lambda function can access the resources in the VPC. Choose 2 answers from the options given below

  • A. Ensure that the subnet ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function
  • B. Ensure that the NACL ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function
  • C. Ensure that the Security Group ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function
  • D. Ensure that the VPC Flow Log ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function


Answer: A and C.
AWS Lambda runs your function code securely within a VPC by default. However, to enable your Lambda function to access resources inside your private VPC, you must provide additional VPCspecific configuration information that includes VPC subnet IDs and security group IDs. AWS Lambda uses this information to set up elastic network interfaces (ENIs) that enable your function to connect securely to other resources within your private VPC.
Reference: Configuring a Lambda Function to Access Resources in an Amazon VPC

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q52: You’ve currently been tasked to migrate an existing on-premise environment into Elastic Beanstalk. The application does not make use of Docker containers. You also can’t see any relevant environments in the beanstalk service that would be suitable to host your application. What should you consider doing in this case?

  • A. Migrate your application to using Docker containers and then migrate the app to the Elastic Beanstalk environment.
  • B. Consider using Cloudformation to deploy your environment to Elastic Beanstalk
  • C. Consider using Packer to create a custom platform
  • D. Consider deploying your application using the Elastic Container Service


Answer – C
Elastic Beanstalk supports custom platforms. A custom platform is a more advanced customization than a Custom Image in several ways. A custom platform lets you develop an entire new platform from scratch, customizing the operating system, additional software, and scripts that Elastic Beanstalk runs on platform instances. This flexibility allows you to build a platform for an application that uses a language or other infrastructure software, for which Elastic Beanstalk doesn’t provide a platform out of the box. Compare that to custom images, where you modify an AMI for use with an existing Elastic Beanstalk platform, and Elastic Beanstalk still provides the platform scripts and controls the platform’s software stack. In addition, with custom platforms you use an automated, scripted way to create and maintain your customization, whereas with custom images you make the changes manually over a running instance. To create a custom platform, you build an Amazon Machine Image (AMI) from one of the supported operating systems—Ubuntu, RHEL, or Amazon Linux (see the flavor entry in Platform.yaml File Format for the exact version numbers)—and add further customizations. You create your own Elastic Beanstalk platform using Packer, which is an open-source tool for creating machine images for many platforms, including AMIs for use with Amazon EC2. An Elastic Beanstalk platform comprises an AMI configured to run a set of software that supports an application, and metadata that can include custom configuration options and default configuration option settings.
Reference: AWS Elastic Beanstalk Custom Platforms

Top

Q53: Company B is writing 10 items to the Dynamo DB table every second. Each item is 15.5Kb in size. What would be the required provisioned write throughput for best performance? Choose the correct answer from the options below.

  • A. 10
  • B. 160
  • C. 155
  • D. 16


Answer – B.
Company B is writing 10 items to the Dynamo DB table every second. Each item is 15.5Kb in size. What would be the required provisioned write throughput for best performance? Choose the correct answer from the options below.
Reference: Read/Write Capacity Mode

Top

Top

Q54: Which AWS Service can be used to automatically install your application code onto EC2, on premises systems and Lambda?

  • A. CodeCommit
  • B. X-Ray
  • C. CodeBuild
  • D. CodeDeploy


Answer: D

Reference: AWS CodeDeploy


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q55: Which AWS service can be used to compile source code, run tests and package code?

  • A. CodePipeline
  • B. CodeCommit
  • C. CodeBuild
  • D. CodeDeploy


Answer: D

Reference: AWS CodeDeploy Answer: B.

Reference: AWS CodeBuild


Top

Q56: How can your prevent CloudFormation from deleting your entire stack on failure? (Choose 2)

  • A. Set the Rollback on failure radio button to No in the CloudFormation console
  • B. Set Termination Protection to Enabled in the CloudFormation console
  • C. Use the –disable-rollback flag with the AWS CLI
  • D. Use the –enable-termination-protection protection flag with the AWS CLI

Answer: A. and C.

Reference: Protecting a Stack From Being Deleted

Top

Q57: Which of the following practices allows multiple developers working on the same application to merge code changes frequently, without impacting each other and enables the identification of bugs early on in the release process?

  • A. Continuous Integration
  • B. Continuous Deployment
  • C. Continuous Delivery
  • D. Continuous Development

Top

Q58: When deploying application code to EC2, the AppSpec file can be written in which language?

  • A. JSON
  • B. JSON or YAML
  • C. XML
  • D. YAML

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q59: Part of your CloudFormation deployment fails due to a mis-configuration, by defaukt what will happen?

  • A. CloudFormation will rollback only the failed components
  • B. CloudFormation will rollback the entire stack
  • C. Failed component will remain available for debugging purposes
  • D. CloudFormation will ask you if you want to continue with the deployment


Top

Q60: You want to receive an email whenever a user pushes code to CodeCommit repository, how can you configure this?

  • A. Create a new SNS topic and configure it to poll for CodeCommit eveents. Ask all users to subscribe to the topic to receive notifications
  • B. Configure a CloudWatch Events rule to send a message to SES which will trigger an email to be sent whenever a user pushes code to the repository.
  • C. Configure Notifications in the console, this will create a CloudWatch events rule to send a notification to a SNS topic which will trigger an email to be sent to the user.
  • D. Configure a CloudWatch Events rule to send a message to SQS which will trigger an email to be sent whenever a user pushes code to the repository.

Answer: C

Reference: Getting Started with Amazon SNS


Top

Q61: Which AWS service can be used to centrally store and version control your application source code, binaries and libraries

  • A. CodeCommit
  • B. CodeBuild
  • C. CodePipeline
  • D. ElasticFileSystem

Answer: A

Reference: AWS CodeCommit


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q62: You are using CloudFormation to create a new S3 bucket, which of the following sections would you use to define the properties of your bucket?

  • A. Conditions
  • B. Parameters
  • C. Outputs
  • D. Resources

Answer: D

Reference: Resources


Top

Q63: You are deploying a number of EC2 and RDS instances using CloudFormation. Which section of the CloudFormation template would you use to define these?

  • A. Transforms
  • B. Outputs
  • C. Resources
  • D. Instances

Answer: C.
The Resources section defines your resources you are provisioning. Outputs is used to output user defines data relating to the reources you have built and can also used as input to another CloudFormation stack. Transforms is used to reference code located in S3.
Reference: Resources

Top

Q64: Which AWS service can be used to fully automate your entire release process?

  • A. CodeDeploy
  • B. CodePipeline
  • C. CodeCommit
  • D. CodeBuild

Answer: B.
AWS CodePipeline is a fully managed continuous delivery service that helps you automate your release pipelines for fast and reliable application and infrastructure updates

Reference: AWS CodePipeline


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q65: You want to use the output of your CloudFormation stack as input to another CloudFormation stack. Which sections of the CloudFormation template would you use to help you configure this?

  • A. Outputs
  • B. Transforms
  • C. Resources
  • D. Exports

Answer: A.
Outputs is used to output user defines data relating to the reources you have built and can also used as input to another CloudFormation stack.
Reference: CloudFormation Outputs

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q66: You have some code located in an S3 bucket that you want to reference in your CloudFormation template. Which section of the template can you use to define this?

  • A. Inputs
  • B. Resources
  • C. Transforms
  • D. Files

Answer: C.
Transforms is used to reference code located in S3 and also specififying the use of the Serverless Application Model (SAM) for Lambda deployments.
Reference: Transforms

Top

Q67: You are deploying an application to a number of Ec2 instances using CodeDeploy. What is the name of the file
used to specify source files and lifecycle hooks?

  • A. buildspec.yml
  • B. appspec.json
  • C. appspec.yml
  • D. buildspec.json

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q68: Which of the following approaches allows you to re-use pieces of CloudFormation code in multiple templates, for common use cases like provisioning a load balancer or web server?

  • A. Share the code using an EBS volume
  • B. Copy and paste the code into the template each time you need to use it
  • C. Use a cloudformation nested stack
  • D. Store the code you want to re-use in an AMI and reference the AMI from within your CloudFormation template.

Answer: C.

Reference: Working with Nested Stacks

Top

Q69: In the CodeDeploy AppSpec file, what are hooks used for?

  • A. To reference AWS resources that will be used during the deployment
  • B. Hooks are reserved for future use
  • C. To specify files you want to copy during the deployment.
  • D. To specify, scripts or function that you want to run at set points in the deployment lifecycle

Answer: D.
The ‘hooks’ section for an EC2/On-Premises deployment contains mappings that link deployment lifecycle event hooks to one or more scripts.

Reference: AppSpec ‘hooks’ Section

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q70: Which command can you use to encrypt a plain text file using CMK?

  • A. aws kms-encrypt
  • B. aws iam encrypt
  • C. aws kms encrypt
  • D. aws encrypt

Answer: C.
aws kms encrypt –key-id 1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab –plaintext fileb://ExamplePlaintextFile –output text –query CiphertextBlob > C:\Temp\ExampleEncryptedFile.base64

Reference: AWS CLI Encrypt

Top

Q72: Which of the following is an encrypted key used by KMS to encrypt your data

  • A. Custmoer Mamaged Key
  • B. Encryption Key
  • C. Envelope Key
  • D. Customer Master Key

Answer: C.
Your Data key also known as the Enveloppe key is encrypted using the master key.This approach is known as Envelope encryption.
Envelope encryption is the practice of encrypting plaintext data with a data key, and then encrypting the data key under another key.

Reference: Envelope Encryption

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q73: Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose 2)

  • A. The Customer Master Key is used to encrypt and decrypt the Envelope Key or Data Key
  • B. The Envelope Key or Data Key is used to encrypt and decrypt plain text files.
  • C. The envelope Key or Data Key is used to encrypt and decrypt the Customer Master Key.
  • D. The Customer MasterKey is used to encrypt and decrypt plain text files.

Answer: A. and B.

Reference: AWS Key Management Service Concepts

Top

Q74: Which of the following statements is correct in relation to kMS/ (Choose 2)

  • A. KMS Encryption keys are regional
  • B. You cannot export your customer master key
  • C. You can export your customer master key.
  • D. KMS encryption Keys are global

Answer: A. and B.

Reference: AWS Key Management Service FAQs

Q75:  A developer is preparing a deployment package for a Java implementation of an AWS Lambda function. What should the developer include in the deployment package? (Select TWO.)
A. Compiled application code
B. Java runtime environment
C. References to the event sources
D. Lambda execution role
E. Application dependencies


Answer: C. E.
Notes: To create a Lambda function, you first create a Lambda function deployment package. This package is a .zip or .jar file consisting of your code and any dependencies.
Reference: Lambda deployment packages.

Q76: A developer uses AWS CodeDeploy to deploy a Python application to a fleet of Amazon EC2 instances that run behind an Application Load Balancer. The instances run in an Amazon EC2 Auto Scaling group across multiple Availability Zones. What should the developer include in the CodeDeploy deployment package?
A. A launch template for the Amazon EC2 Auto Scaling group
B. A CodeDeploy AppSpec file
C. An EC2 role that grants the application access to AWS services
D. An IAM policy that grants the application access to AWS services


Answer: B.
Notes: The CodeDeploy AppSpec (application specific) file is unique to CodeDeploy. The AppSpec file is used to manage each deployment as a series of lifecycle event hooks, which are defined in the file.
Reference: CodeDeploy application specification (AppSpec) files.
Category: Deployment

Q76: A company is working on a project to enhance its serverless application development process. The company hosts applications on AWS Lambda. The development team regularly updates the Lambda code and wants to use stable code in production. Which combination of steps should the development team take to configure Lambda functions to meet both development and production requirements? (Select TWO.)

A. Create a new Lambda version every time a new code release needs testing.
B. Create two Lambda function aliases. Name one as Production and the other as Development. Point the Production alias to a production-ready unqualified Amazon Resource Name (ARN) version. Point the Development alias to the $LATEST version.
C. Create two Lambda function aliases. Name one as Production and the other as Development. Point the Production alias to the production-ready qualified Amazon Resource Name (ARN) version. Point the Development alias to the variable LAMBDA_TASK_ROOT.
D. Create a new Lambda layer every time a new code release needs testing.
E. Create two Lambda function aliases. Name one as Production and the other as Development. Point the Production alias to a production-ready Lambda layer Amazon Resource Name (ARN). Point the Development alias to the $LATEST layer ARN.


Answer: A. B.
Notes: Lambda function versions are designed to manage deployment of functions. They can be used for code changes, without affecting the stable production version of the code. By creating separate aliases for Production and Development, systems can initiate the correct alias as needed. A Lambda function alias can be used to point to a specific Lambda function version. Using the functionality to update an alias and its linked version, the development team can update the required version as needed. The $LATEST version is the newest published version.
Reference: Lambda function versions.

For more information about Lambda layers, see Creating and sharing Lambda layers.

For more information about Lambda function aliases, see Lambda function aliases.

Category: Deployment

Q77: Each time a developer publishes a new version of an AWS Lambda function, all the dependent event source mappings need to be updated with the reference to the new version’s Amazon Resource Name (ARN). These updates are time consuming and error-prone. Which combination of actions should the developer take to avoid performing these updates when publishing a new Lambda version? (Select TWO.)
A. Update event source mappings with the ARN of the Lambda layer.
B. Point a Lambda alias to a new version of the Lambda function.
C. Create a Lambda alias for each published version of the Lambda function.
D. Point a Lambda alias to a new Lambda function alias.
E. Update the event source mappings with the Lambda alias ARN.


Answer: B. E.
Notes: A Lambda alias is a pointer to a specific Lambda function version. Instead of using ARNs for the Lambda function in event source mappings, you can use an alias ARN. You do not need to update your event source mappings when you promote a new version or roll back to a previous version.
Reference: Lambda function aliases.
Category: Deployment

Q78:  A company wants to store sensitive user data in Amazon S3 and encrypt this data at rest. The company must manage the encryption keys and use Amazon S3 to perform the encryption. How can a developer meet these requirements?
A. Enable default encryption for the S3 bucket by using the option for server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C).
B. Enable client-side encryption with an encryption key. Upload the encrypted object to the S3 bucket.
C. Enable server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed encryption keys (SSE-S3). Upload an object to the S3 bucket.
D. Enable server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C). Upload an object to the S3 bucket.


Answer: D.
Notes: When you upload an object, Amazon S3 uses the encryption key you provide to apply AES-256 encryption to your data and removes the encryption key from memory.
Reference: Protecting data using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C).

Category: Security

Q79: A company is developing a Python application that submits data to an Amazon DynamoDB table. The company requires client-side encryption of specific data items and end-to-end protection for the encrypted data in transit and at rest. Which combination of steps will meet the requirement for the encryption of specific data items? (Select TWO.)

A. Generate symmetric encryption keys with AWS Key Management Service (AWS KMS).
B. Generate asymmetric encryption keys with AWS Key Management Service (AWS KMS).
C. Use generated keys with the DynamoDB Encryption Client.
D. Use generated keys to configure DynamoDB table encryption with AWS managed customer master keys (CMKs).
E. Use generated keys to configure DynamoDB table encryption with AWS owned customer master keys (CMKs).


Answer: A. C.
Notes: When the DynamoDB Encryption Client is configured to use AWS KMS, it uses a customer master key (CMK) that is always encrypted when used outside of AWS KMS. This cryptographic materials provider returns a unique encryption key and signing key for every table item. This method of encryption uses a symmetric CMK.
Reference: Direct KMS Materials Provider.
Category: Deployment

Q80: A company is developing a REST API with Amazon API Gateway. Access to the API should be limited to users in the existing Amazon Cognito user pool. Which combination of steps should a developer perform to secure the API? (Select TWO.)
A. Create an AWS Lambda authorizer for the API.
B. Create an Amazon Cognito authorizer for the API.
C. Configure the authorizer for the API resource.
D. Configure the API methods to use the authorizer.
E. Configure the authorizer for the API stage.


Answer: B. D.
Notes: An Amazon Cognito authorizer should be used for integration with Amazon Cognito user pools. In addition to creating an authorizer, you are required to configure an API method to use that authorizer for the API.
Reference: Control access to a REST API using Amazon Cognito user pools as authorizer.
Category: Security

Q81: A developer is implementing a mobile app to provide personalized services to app users. The application code makes calls to Amazon S3 and Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS). Which options can the developer use to authenticate the app users? (Select TWO.)
A. Authenticate to the Amazon Cognito identity pool directly.
B. Authenticate to AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) directly.
C. Authenticate to the Amazon Cognito user pool directly.
D. Federate authentication by using Login with Amazon with the users managed with AWS Security Token Service (AWS STS).
E. Federate authentication by using Login with Amazon with the users managed with the Amazon Cognito user pool.


Answer: C. E.
Notes: The Amazon Cognito user pool provides direct user authentication. The Amazon Cognito user pool provides a federated authentication option with third-party identity provider (IdP), including amazon.com.
Reference: Adding User Pool Sign-in Through a Third Party.
Category: Security

Question: A company is implementing several order processing workflows. Each workflow is implemented by using AWS Lambda functions for each task. Which combination of steps should a developer follow to implement these workflows? (Select TWO.)
A. Define a AWS Step Functions task for each Lambda function.
B. Define a AWS Step Functions task for each workflow.
C. Write code that polls the AWS Step Functions invocation to coordinate each workflow.
D. Define an AWS Step Functions state machine for each workflow.
E. Define an AWS Step Functions state machine for each Lambda function.
Answer: A. D.
Notes: Step Functions is based on state machines and tasks. A state machine is a workflow. Tasks perform work by coordinating with other AWS services, such as Lambda. A state machine is a workflow. It can be used to express a workflow as a number of states, their relationships, and their input and output. You can coordinate individual tasks with Step Functions by expressing your workflow as a finite state machine, written in the Amazon States Language.
ReferenceText: Getting Started with AWS Step Functions.
ReferenceUrl: https://aws.amazon.com/step-functions/getting-started/
Category: Development

Welcome to AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam Preparation: Definition and Objectives, Top 100 Questions and Answers dump, White papers, Courses, Labs and Training Materials, Exam info and details, References, Jobs, Others AWS Certificates

AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep
AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep
 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

What is the AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam?

This AWS Certified Developer-Associate Examination is intended for individuals who perform a Developer role. It validates an examinee’s ability to:

  • Demonstrate an understanding of core AWS services, uses, and basic AWS architecture best practices
  • Demonstrate proficiency in developing, deploying, and debugging cloud-based applications by using AWS

Recommended general IT knowledge
The target candidate should have the following:
– In-depth knowledge of at least one high-level programming language
– Understanding of application lifecycle management
– The ability to write code for serverless applications
– Understanding of the use of containers in the development process

Recommended AWS knowledge
The target candidate should be able to do the following:

  • Use the AWS service APIs, CLI, and software development kits (SDKs) to write applications
  • Identify key features of AWS services
  • Understand the AWS shared responsibility model
  • Use a continuous integration and continuous delivery (CI/CD) pipeline to deploy applications on AWS
  • Use and interact with AWS services
  • Apply basic understanding of cloud-native applications to write code
  • Write code by using AWS security best practices (for example, use IAM roles instead of secret and access keys in the code)
  • Author, maintain, and debug code modules on AWS

What is considered out of scope for the target candidate?
The following is a non-exhaustive list of related job tasks that the target candidate is not expected to be able to perform. These items are considered out of scope for the exam:
– Design architectures (for example, distributed system, microservices)
– Design and implement CI/CD pipelines

  • Administer IAM users and groups
  • Administer Amazon Elastic Container Service (Amazon ECS)
  • Design AWS networking infrastructure (for example, Amazon VPC, AWS Direct Connect)
  • Understand compliance and licensing

Exam content
Response types
There are two types of questions on the exam:
– Multiple choice: Has one correct response and three incorrect responses (distractors)
– Multiple response: Has two or more correct responses out of five or more response options
Select one or more responses that best complete the statement or answer the question. Distractors, or incorrect answers, are response options that a candidate with incomplete knowledge or skill might choose.
Distractors are generally plausible responses that match the content area.
Unanswered questions are scored as incorrect; there is no penalty for guessing. The exam includes 50 questions that will affect your score.

Unscored content
The exam includes 15 unscored questions that do not affect your score. AWS collects information about candidate performance on these unscored questions to evaluate these questions for future use as scored questions. These unscored questions are not identified on the exam.

Exam results
The AWS Certified Developer – Associate (DVA-C01) exam is a pass or fail exam. The exam is scored against a minimum standard established by AWS professionals who follow certification industry best practices and guidelines.
Your results for the exam are reported as a scaled score of 100–1,000. The minimum passing score is 720.
Your score shows how you performed on the exam as a whole and whether you passed. Scaled scoring models help equate scores across multiple exam forms that might have slightly different difficulty levels.
Your score report could contain a table of classifications of your performance at each section level. This information is intended to provide general feedback about your exam performance. The exam uses a compensatory scoring model, which means that you do not need to achieve a passing score in each section. You need to pass only the overall exam.
Each section of the exam has a specific weighting, so some sections have more questions than other sections have. The table contains general information that highlights your strengths and weaknesses. Use caution when interpreting section-level feedback.

Content outline
This exam guide includes weightings, test domains, and objectives for the exam. It is not a comprehensive listing of the content on the exam. However, additional context for each of the objectives is available to help guide your preparation for the exam. The following table lists the main content domains and their weightings. The table precedes the complete exam content outline, which includes the additional context.
The percentage in each domain represents only scored content.

Domain 1: Deployment 22%
Domain 2: Security 26%
Domain 3: Development with AWS Services 30%
Domain 4: Refactoring 10%
Domain 5: Monitoring and Troubleshooting 12%

Domain 1: Deployment
1.1 Deploy written code in AWS using existing CI/CD pipelines, processes, and patterns.
–  Commit code to a repository and invoke build, test and/or deployment actions
–  Use labels and branches for version and release management
–  Use AWS CodePipeline to orchestrate workflows against different environments
–  Apply AWS CodeCommit, AWS CodeBuild, AWS CodePipeline, AWS CodeStar, and AWS
CodeDeploy for CI/CD purposes
–  Perform a roll back plan based on application deployment policy

1.2 Deploy applications using AWS Elastic Beanstalk.
–  Utilize existing supported environments to define a new application stack
–  Package the application
–  Introduce a new application version into the Elastic Beanstalk environment
–  Utilize a deployment policy to deploy an application version (i.e., all at once, rolling, rolling with batch, immutable)
–  Validate application health using Elastic Beanstalk dashboard
–  Use Amazon CloudWatch Logs to instrument application logging

1.3 Prepare the application deployment package to be deployed to AWS.
–  Manage the dependencies of the code module (like environment variables, config files and static image files) within the package
–  Outline the package/container directory structure and organize files appropriately
–  Translate application resource requirements to AWS infrastructure parameters (e.g., memory, cores)

1.4 Deploy serverless applications.
–  Given a use case, implement and launch an AWS Serverless Application Model (AWS SAM) template
–  Manage environments in individual AWS services (e.g., Differentiate between Development, Test, and Production in Amazon API Gateway)

Domain 2: Security
2.1 Make authenticated calls to AWS services.
–  Communicate required policy based on least privileges required by application.
–  Assume an IAM role to access a service
–  Use the software development kit (SDK) credential provider on-premises or in the cloud to access AWS services (local credentials vs. instance roles)

2.2 Implement encryption using AWS services.
– Encrypt data at rest (client side; server side; envelope encryption) using AWS services
–  Encrypt data in transit

2.3 Implement application authentication and authorization.
– Add user sign-up and sign-in functionality for applications with Amazon Cognito identity or user pools
–  Use Amazon Cognito-provided credentials to write code that access AWS services.
–  Use Amazon Cognito sync to synchronize user profiles and data
–  Use developer-authenticated identities to interact between end user devices, backend
authentication, and Amazon Cognito

Domain 3: Development with AWS Services
3.1 Write code for serverless applications.
– Compare and contrast server-based vs. serverless model (e.g., micro services, stateless nature of serverless applications, scaling serverless applications, and decoupling layers of serverless applications)
– Configure AWS Lambda functions by defining environment variables and parameters (e.g., memory, time out, runtime, handler)
– Create an API endpoint using Amazon API Gateway
–  Create and test appropriate API actions like GET, POST using the API endpoint
–  Apply Amazon DynamoDB concepts (e.g., tables, items, and attributes)
–  Compute read/write capacity units for Amazon DynamoDB based on application requirements
–  Associate an AWS Lambda function with an AWS event source (e.g., Amazon API Gateway, Amazon CloudWatch event, Amazon S3 events, Amazon Kinesis)
–  Invoke an AWS Lambda function synchronously and asynchronously

3.2 Translate functional requirements into application design.
– Determine real-time vs. batch processing for a given use case
– Determine use of synchronous vs. asynchronous for a given use case
– Determine use of event vs. schedule/poll for a given use case
– Account for tradeoffs for consistency models in an application design

Domain 4: Refactoring
4.1 Optimize applications to best use AWS services and features.
 Implement AWS caching services to optimize performance (e.g., Amazon ElastiCache, Amazon API Gateway cache)
 Apply an Amazon S3 naming scheme for optimal read performance

4.2 Migrate existing application code to run on AWS.
– Isolate dependencies
– Run the application as one or more stateless processes
– Develop in order to enable horizontal scalability
– Externalize state

Domain 5: Monitoring and Troubleshooting

5.1 Write code that can be monitored.
– Create custom Amazon CloudWatch metrics
– Perform logging in a manner available to systems operators
– Instrument application source code to enable tracing in AWS X-Ray

5.2 Perform root cause analysis on faults found in testing or production.
– Interpret the outputs from the logging mechanism in AWS to identify errors in logs
– Check build and testing history in AWS services (e.g., AWS CodeBuild, AWS CodeDeploy, AWS CodePipeline) to identify issues
– Utilize AWS services (e.g., Amazon CloudWatch, VPC Flow Logs, and AWS X-Ray) to locate a specific faulty component

Which key tools, technologies, and concepts might be covered on the exam?

The following is a non-exhaustive list of the tools and technologies that could appear on the exam.
This list is subject to change and is provided to help you understand the general scope of services, features, or technologies on the exam.
The general tools and technologies in this list appear in no particular order.
AWS services are grouped according to their primary functions. While some of these technologies will likely be covered more than others on the exam, the order and placement of them in this list is no indication of relative weight or importance:
– Analytics
– Application Integration
– Containers
– Cost and Capacity Management
– Data Movement
– Developer Tools
– Instances (virtual machines)
– Management and Governance
– Networking and Content Delivery
– Security
– Serverless

AWS services and features

Analytics:
– Amazon Elasticsearch Service (Amazon ES)
– Amazon Kinesis
Application Integration:
– Amazon EventBridge (Amazon CloudWatch Events)
– Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS)
– Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS)
– AWS Step Functions

Compute:
– Amazon EC2
– AWS Elastic Beanstalk
– AWS Lambda

Containers:
– Amazon Elastic Container Registry (Amazon ECR)
– Amazon Elastic Container Service (Amazon ECS)
– Amazon Elastic Kubernetes Services (Amazon EKS)

Database:
– Amazon DynamoDB
– Amazon ElastiCache
– Amazon RDS

Developer Tools:
– AWS CodeArtifact
– AWS CodeBuild
– AWS CodeCommit
– AWS CodeDeploy
– Amazon CodeGuru
– AWS CodePipeline
– AWS CodeStar
– AWS Fault Injection Simulator
– AWS X-Ray

Management and Governance:
– AWS CloudFormation
– Amazon CloudWatch

Networking and Content Delivery:
– Amazon API Gateway
– Amazon CloudFront
– Elastic Load Balancing

Security, Identity, and Compliance:
– Amazon Cognito
– AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM)
– AWS Key Management Service (AWS KMS)

Storage:
– Amazon S3

Out-of-scope AWS services and features

The following is a non-exhaustive list of AWS services and features that are not covered on the exam.
These services and features do not represent every AWS offering that is excluded from the exam content.
Services or features that are entirely unrelated to the target job roles for the exam are excluded from this list because they are assumed to be irrelevant.
Out-of-scope AWS services and features include the following:
– AWS Application Discovery Service
– Amazon AppStream 2.0
– Amazon Chime
– Amazon Connect
– AWS Database Migration Service (AWS DMS)
– AWS Device Farm
– Amazon Elastic Transcoder
– Amazon GameLift
– Amazon Lex
– Amazon Machine Learning (Amazon ML)
– AWS Managed Services
– Amazon Mobile Analytics
– Amazon Polly

– Amazon QuickSight
– Amazon Rekognition
– AWS Server Migration Service (AWS SMS)
– AWS Service Catalog
– AWS Shield Advanced
– AWS Shield Standard
– AWS Snow Family
– AWS Storage Gateway
– AWS WAF
– Amazon WorkMail
– Amazon WorkSpaces

To succeed with the real exam, do not memorize the answers below. It is very important that you understand why a question is right or wrong and the concepts behind it by carefully reading the reference documents in the answers.

Top

AWS Certified Developer – Associate Practice Questions And Answers Dump

Q0: Your application reads commands from an SQS queue and sends them to web services hosted by your
partners. When a partner’s endpoint goes down, your application continually returns their commands to the queue. The repeated attempts to deliver these commands use up resources. Commands that can’t be delivered must not be lost.
How can you accommodate the partners’ broken web services without wasting your resources?

  • A. Create a delay queue and set DelaySeconds to 30 seconds
  • B. Requeue the message with a VisibilityTimeout of 30 seconds.
  • C. Create a dead letter queue and set the Maximum Receives to 3.
  • D. Requeue the message with a DelaySeconds of 30 seconds.
AWS Developer Associates DVA-C01 PRO
AWS Developer Associates DVA-C01 PRO
 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 


C. After a message is taken from the queue and returned for the maximum number of retries, it is
automatically sent to a dead letter queue, if one has been configured. It stays there until you retrieve it for forensic purposes.

Reference: Amazon SQS Dead-Letter Queues


Top

Q1: A developer is writing an application that will store data in a DynamoDB table. The ratio of reads operations to write operations will be 1000 to 1, with the same data being accessed frequently.
What should the Developer enable on the DynamoDB table to optimize performance and minimize costs?

  • A. Amazon DynamoDB auto scaling
  • B. Amazon DynamoDB cross-region replication
  • C. Amazon DynamoDB Streams
  • D. Amazon DynamoDB Accelerator


D. The AWS Documentation mentions the following:

DAX is a DynamoDB-compatible caching service that enables you to benefit from fast in-memory performance for demanding applications. DAX addresses three core scenarios

  1. As an in-memory cache, DAX reduces the response times of eventually-consistent read workloads by an order of magnitude, from single-digit milliseconds to microseconds.
  2. DAX reduces operational and application complexity by providing a managed service that is API-compatible with Amazon DynamoDB, and thus requires only minimal functional changes to use with an existing application.
  3. For read-heavy or bursty workloads, DAX provides increased throughput and potential operational cost savings by reducing the need to over-provision read capacity units. This is especially beneficial for applications that require repeated reads for individual keys.

Reference: AWS DAX


Top

Q2: You are creating a DynamoDB table with the following attributes:

  • PurchaseOrderNumber (partition key)
  • CustomerID
  • PurchaseDate
  • TotalPurchaseValue

One of your applications must retrieve items from the table to calculate the total value of purchases for a
particular customer over a date range. What secondary index do you need to add to the table?

  • A. Local secondary index with a partition key of CustomerID and sort key of PurchaseDate; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute
  • B. Local secondary index with a partition key of PurchaseDate and sort key of CustomerID; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute
  • C. Global secondary index with a partition key of CustomerID and sort key of PurchaseDate; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute
  • D. Global secondary index with a partition key of PurchaseDate and sort key of CustomerID; project the
    TotalPurchaseValue attribute


C. The query is for a particular CustomerID, so a Global Secondary Index is needed for a different partition
key. To retrieve only the desired date range, the PurchaseDate must be the sort key. Projecting the
TotalPurchaseValue into the index provides all the data needed to satisfy the use case.

Reference: AWS DynamoDB Global Secondary Indexes

Difference between local and global indexes in DynamoDB

    • Global secondary index — an index with a hash and range key that can be different from those on the table. A global secondary index is considered “global” because queries on the index can span all of the data in a table, across all partitions.
    • Local secondary index — an index that has the same hash key as the table, but a different range key. A local secondary index is “local” in the sense that every partition of a local secondary index is scoped to a table partition that has the same hash key.
    • Local Secondary Indexes still rely on the original Hash Key. When you supply a table with hash+range, think about the LSI as hash+range1, hash+range2.. hash+range6. You get 5 more range attributes to query on. Also, there is only one provisioned throughput.
    • Global Secondary Indexes defines a new paradigm – different hash/range keys per index.
      This breaks the original usage of one hash key per table. This is also why when defining GSI you are required to add a provisioned throughput per index and pay for it.
    • Local Secondary Indexes can only be created when you are creating the table, there is no way to add Local Secondary Index to an existing table, also once you create the index you cannot delete it.
    • Global Secondary Indexes can be created when you create the table and added to an existing table, deleting an existing Global Secondary Index is also allowed.

Throughput :

  • Local Secondary Indexes consume throughput from the table. When you query records via the local index, the operation consumes read capacity units from the table. When you perform a write operation (create, update, delete) in a table that has a local index, there will be two write operations, one for the table another for the index. Both operations will consume write capacity units from the table.
  • Global Secondary Indexes have their own provisioned throughput, when you query the index the operation will consume read capacity from the index, when you perform a write operation (create, update, delete) in a table that has a global index, there will be two write operations, one for the table another for the index*.


Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep
AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep
 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q3: When referencing the remaining time left for a Lambda function to run within the function’s code you would use:

  • A. The event object
  • B. The timeLeft object
  • C. The remains object
  • D. The context object


D. The context object.

Reference: AWS Lambda


Top

Q4: What two arguments does a Python Lambda handler function require?

  • A. invocation, zone
  • B. event, zone
  • C. invocation, context
  • D. event, context
D. event, context
def handler_name(event, context):
…
return some_value

Reference: AWS Lambda Function Handler in Python

Top

Q5: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only via SFTP
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package

Top

Q6: A Lambda deployment package contains:

  • A. Function code, libraries, and runtime binaries
  • B. Only function code
  • C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime
  • D. Only libraries not included within the runtime

C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime

Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package in PowerShell

Top

Q7: You are attempting to SSH into an EC2 instance that is located in a public subnet. However, you are currently receiving a timeout error trying to connect. What could be a possible cause of this connection issue?

  • A. The security group associated with the EC2 instance has an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic, but does not have an outbound rule that allows SSH traffic.
  • B. The security group associated with the EC2 instance has an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic AND has an outbound rule that explicitly denies SSH traffic.
  • C. The security group associated with the EC2 instance has an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic AND the associated NACL has both an inbound and outbound rule that allows SSH traffic.
  • D. The security group associated with the EC2 instance does not have an inbound rule that allows SSH traffic AND the associated NACL does not have an outbound rule that allows SSH traffic.


D. Security groups are stateful, so you do NOT have to have an explicit outbound rule for return requests. However, NACLs are stateless so you MUST have an explicit outbound rule configured for return request.

Reference: Comparison of Security Groups and Network ACLs

AWS Security Groups and NACL


Top

Q8: You have instances inside private subnets and a properly configured bastion host instance in a public subnet. None of the instances in the private subnets have a public or Elastic IP address. How can you connect an instance in the private subnet to the open internet to download system updates?

  • A. Create and assign EIP to each instance
  • B. Create and attach a second IGW to the VPC.
  • C. Create and utilize a NAT Gateway
  • D. Connect to a VPN


C. You can use a network address translation (NAT) gateway in a public subnet in your VPC to enable instances in the private subnet to initiate outbound traffic to the Internet, but prevent the instances from receiving inbound traffic initiated by someone on the Internet.

Reference: AWS Network Address Translation Gateway


Top

Q9: What feature of VPC networking should you utilize if you want to create “elasticity” in your application’s architecture?

  • A. Security Groups
  • B. Route Tables
  • C. Elastic Load Balancer
  • D. Auto Scaling


D. Auto scaling is designed specifically with elasticity in mind. Auto scaling allows for the increase and decrease of compute power based on demand, thus creating elasticity in the architecture.

Reference: AWS Autoscalling


Top

Q10: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

Reference: AWS Lambda

Top

Q11: You’re writing a script with an AWS SDK that uses the AWS API Actions and want to create AMIs for non-EBS backed AMIs for you. Which API call should occurs in the final process of creating an AMI?

  • A. RegisterImage
  • B. CreateImage
  • C. ami-register-image
  • D. ami-create-image

A. It is actually – RegisterImage. All AWS API Actions will follow the capitalization like this and don’t have hyphens in them.

Reference: API RegisterImage

Top

Q12: When dealing with session state in EC2-based applications using Elastic load balancers which option is generally thought of as the best practice for managing user sessions?

  • A. Having the ELB distribute traffic to all EC2 instances and then having the instance check a caching solution like ElastiCache running Redis or Memcached for session information
  • B. Permenantly assigning users to specific instances and always routing their traffic to those instances
  • C. Using Application-generated cookies to tie a user session to a particular instance for the cookie duration
  • D. Using Elastic Load Balancer generated cookies to tie a user session to a particular instance

Top

Q13: Which API call would best be used to describe an Amazon Machine Image?

  • A. ami-describe-image
  • B. ami-describe-images
  • C. DescribeImage
  • D. DescribeImages

D. In general, API actions stick to the PascalCase style with the first letter of every word capitalized.

Reference: API DescribeImages

Top

Q14: What is one key difference between an Amazon EBS-backed and an instance-store backed instance?

  • A. Autoscaling requires using Amazon EBS-backed instances
  • B. Virtual Private Cloud requires EBS backed instances
  • C. Amazon EBS-backed instances can be stopped and restarted without losing data
  • D. Instance-store backed instances can be stopped and restarted without losing data

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

C. Instance-store backed images use “ephemeral” storage (temporary). The storage is only available during the life of an instance. Rebooting an instance will allow ephemeral data stay persistent. However, stopping and starting an instance will remove all ephemeral storage.

Reference: What is the difference between EBS and Instance Store?

Top

Q15: After having created a new Linux instance on Amazon EC2, and downloaded the .pem file (called Toto.pem) you try and SSH into your IP address (54.1.132.33) using the following command.
ssh -i my_key.pem ec2-user@52.2.222.22
However you receive the following error.
@@@@@@@@ WARNING: UNPROTECTED PRIVATE KEY FILE! @ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
What is the most probable reason for this and how can you fix it?

  • A. You do not have root access on your terminal and need to use the sudo option for this to work.
  • B. You do not have enough permissions to perform the operation.
  • C. Your key file is encrypted. You need to use the -u option for unencrypted not the -i option.
  • D. Your key file must not be publicly viewable for SSH to work. You need to modify your .pem file to limit permissions.

D. You need to run something like: chmod 400 my_key.pem

Reference:

Top

Q16: You have an EBS root device on /dev/sda1 on one of your EC2 instances. You are having trouble with this particular instance and you need to either Stop/Start, Reboot or Terminate the instance but you do NOT want to lose any data that you have stored on /dev/sda1. However, you are unsure if changing the instance state in any of the aforementioned ways will cause you to lose data stored on the EBS volume. Which of the below statements best describes the effect each change of instance state would have on the data you have stored on /dev/sda1?

  • A. Whether you stop/start, reboot or terminate the instance it does not matter because data on an EBS volume is not ephemeral and the data will not be lost regardless of what method is used.
  • B. If you stop/start the instance the data will not be lost. However if you either terminate or reboot the instance the data will be lost.
  • C. Whether you stop/start, reboot or terminate the instance it does not matter because data on an EBS volume is ephemeral and it will be lost no matter what method is used.
  • D. The data will be lost if you terminate the instance, however the data will remain on /dev/sda1 if you reboot or stop/start the instance because data on an EBS volume is not ephemeral.

D. The question states that an EBS-backed root device is mounted at /dev/sda1, and EBS volumes maintain information regardless of the instance state. If it was instance store, this would be a different answer.

Reference: AWS Root Device Storage

Top

Q17: EC2 instances are launched from Amazon Machine Images (AMIs). A given public AMI:

  • A. Can only be used to launch EC2 instances in the same AWS availability zone as the AMI is stored
  • B. Can only be used to launch EC2 instances in the same country as the AMI is stored
  • C. Can only be used to launch EC2 instances in the same AWS region as the AMI is stored
  • D. Can be used to launch EC2 instances in any AWS region

C. AMIs are only available in the region they are created. Even in the case of the AWS-provided AMIs, AWS has actually copied the AMIs for you to different regions. You cannot access an AMI from one region in another region. However, you can copy an AMI from one region to another

Reference: https://aws.amazon.com/amazon-linux-ami/

Top

Q18: Which of the following statements is true about the Elastic File System (EFS)?

  • A. EFS can scale out to meet capacity requirements and scale back down when no longer needed
  • B. EFS can be used by multiple EC2 instances simultaneously
  • C. EFS cannot be used by an instance using EBS
  • D. EFS can be configured on an instance before launch just like an IAM role or EBS volumes

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

A. and B.

Reference: https://aws.amazon.com/efs/

Top

Q19: IAM Policies, at a minimum, contain what elements?

  • A. ID
  • B. Effects
  • C. Resources
  • D. Sid
  • E. Principle
  • F. Actions

B. C. and F.

Effect – Use Allow or Deny to indicate whether the policy allows or denies access.

Resource – Specify a list of resources to which the actions apply.

Action – Include a list of actions that the policy allows or denies.

Id, Sid aren’t required fields in IAM Policies. But they are optional fields

Reference: AWS IAM Access Policies

Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q20: What are the main benefits of IAM groups?

  • A. The ability to create custom permission policies.
  • B. Assigning IAM permission policies to more than one user at a time.
  • C. Easier user/policy management.
  • D. Allowing EC2 instances to gain access to S3.

B. and C.

A. is incorrect: This is a benefit of IAM generally or a benefit of IAM policies. But IAM groups don’t create policies, they have policies attached to them.

Reference: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/IAM/latest/UserGuide/id_groups.html

 

Top

Q21: What are benefits of using AWS STS?

  • A. Grant access to AWS resources without having to create an IAM identity for them
  • B. Since credentials are temporary, you don’t have to rotate or revoke them
  • C. Temporary security credentials can be extended indefinitely
  • D. Temporary security credentials can be restricted to a specific region

Top

Q22: What should the Developer enable on the DynamoDB table to optimize performance and minimize costs?

  • A. Amazon DynamoDB auto scaling
  • B. Amazon DynamoDB cross-region replication
  • C. Amazon DynamoDB Streams
  • D. Amazon DynamoDB Accelerator


D. DAX is a DynamoDB-compatible caching service that enables you to benefit from fast in-memory performance for demanding applications. DAX addresses three core scenarios:

  1. As an in-memory cache, DAX reduces the response times of eventually-consistent read workloads by an order of magnitude, from single-digit milliseconds to microseconds.
  2. DAX reduces operational and application complexity by providing a managed service that is API-compatible with Amazon DynamoDB, and thus requires only minimal functional changes to use with an existing application.
  3. For read-heavy or bursty workloads, DAX provides increased throughput and potential operational cost savings by reducing the need to over-provision read capacity units. This is especially beneficial for applications that require repeated reads for individual keys.

Reference: AWS DAX


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q23: A Developer has been asked to create an AWS Elastic Beanstalk environment for a production web application which needs to handle thousands of requests. Currently the dev environment is running on a t1 micro instance. How can the Developer change the EC2 instance type to m4.large?

  • A. Use CloudFormation to migrate the Amazon EC2 instance type of the environment from t1 micro to m4.large.
  • B. Create a saved configuration file in Amazon S3 with the instance type as m4.large and use the same during environment creation.
  • C. Change the instance type to m4.large in the configuration details page of the Create New Environment page.
  • D. Change the instance type value for the environment to m4.large by using update autoscaling group CLI command.

B. The Elastic Beanstalk console and EB CLI set configuration options when you create an environment. You can also set configuration options in saved configurations and configuration files. If the same option is set in multiple locations, the value used is determined by the order of precedence.
Configuration option settings can be composed in text format and saved prior to environment creation, applied during environment creation using any supported client, and added, modified or removed after environment creation.
During environment creation, configuration options are applied from multiple sources with the following precedence, from highest to lowest:

  • Settings applied directly to the environment – Settings specified during a create environment or update environment operation on the Elastic Beanstalk API by any client, including the AWS Management Console, EB CLI, AWS CLI, and SDKs. The AWS Management Console and EB CLI also applyrecommended values for some options that apply at this level unless overridden.
  • Saved Configurations–
    Settings for any options that are not applied directly to the
    environment are loaded from a saved configuration, if specified.
  • Configuration Files (.ebextensions)– Settings for any options that are not applied directly to the
    environment, and also not specified in a saved configuration, are loaded from configuration files in the .ebextensions folder at the root of the application source bundle.

     

    Configuration files are executed in alphabetical order. For example,.ebextensions/01run.configis executed before.ebextensions/02do.config.

  • Default Values– If a configuration option has a default value, it only applies when the option is not set at any of the above levels.

If the same configuration option is defined in more than one location, the setting with the highest precedence is applied. When a setting is applied from a saved configuration or settings applied directly to the environment, the setting is stored as part of the environment’s configuration. These settings can be removed with the AWS CLI or with the EB CLI
.
Settings in configuration files are not applied
directly to the environment and cannot be removed without modifying the configuration files and deploying a new application version.If a setting applied with one of the other methods is removed, the same setting will be loaded from configuration files in the source bundle.

Reference: Managing ec2 features – Elastic beanstalk

Q24: What statements are true about Availability Zones (AZs) and Regions?

  • A. There is only one AZ in each AWS Region
  • B. AZs are geographically separated inside a region to help protect against natural disasters affecting more than one at a time.
  • C. AZs can be moved between AWS Regions based on your needs
  • D. There are (almost always) two or more AZs in each AWS Region

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

B and D.

Reference: AWS global infrastructure/

Top

Q25: An AWS Region contains:

  • A. Edge Locations
  • B. Data Centers
  • C. AWS Services
  • D. Availability Zones


B. C. D. Edge locations are actually distinct locations that don’t explicitly fall within AWS regions.

Reference: AWS Global Infrastructure


Top

Q26: Which read request in DynamoDB returns a response with the most up-to-date data, reflecting the updates from all prior write operations that were successful?

  • A. Eventual Consistent Reads
  • B. Conditional reads for Consistency
  • C. Strongly Consistent Reads
  • D. Not possible


C. This is provided very clearly in the AWS documentation as shown below with regards to the read consistency for DynamoDB. Only in Strong Read consistency can you be guaranteed that you get the write read value after all the writes are completed.

Reference: https://aws.amazon.com/dynamodb/faqs/


Top

Q27: You’ ve been asked to move an existing development environment on the AWS Cloud. This environment consists mainly of Docker based containers. You need to ensure that minimum effort is taken during the migration process. Which of the following step would you consider for this requirement?

  • A. Create an Opswork stack and deploy the Docker containers
  • B. Create an application and Environment for the Docker containers in the Elastic Beanstalk service
  • C. Create an EC2 Instance. Install Docker and deploy the necessary containers.
  • D. Create an EC2 Instance. Install Docker and deploy the necessary containers. Add an Autoscaling Group for scalability of the containers.


B. The Elastic Beanstalk service is the ideal service to quickly provision development environments. You can also create environments which can be used to host Docker based containers.

Reference: Create and Deploy Docker in AWS


Top

Q28: You’ve written an application that uploads objects onto an S3 bucket. The size of the object varies between 200 – 500 MB. You’ve seen that the application sometimes takes a longer than expected time to upload the object. You want to improve the performance of the application. Which of the following would you consider?

  • A. Create multiple threads and upload the objects in the multiple threads
  • B. Write the items in batches for better performance
  • C. Use the Multipart upload API
  • D. Enable versioning on the Bucket

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 


C. All other options are invalid since the best way to handle large object uploads to the S3 service is to use the Multipart upload API. The Multipart upload API enables you to upload large objects in parts. You can use this API to upload new large objects or make a copy of an existing object. Multipart uploading is a three-step process: You initiate the upload, you upload the object parts, and after you have uploaded all the parts, you complete the multipart upload. Upon receiving the complete multipart upload request, Amazon S3 constructs the object from the uploaded parts, and you can then access the object just as you would any other object in your bucket.

Reference: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/dev/mpuoverview.html


Top

Q29: A security system monitors 600 cameras, saving image metadata every 1 minute to an Amazon DynamoDb table. Each sample involves 1kb of data, and the data writes are evenly distributed over time. How much write throughput is required for the target table?

  • A. 6000
  • B. 10
  • C. 3600
  • D. 600

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

B. When you mention the write capacity of a table in Dynamo DB, you mention it as the number of 1KB writes per second. So in the above question, since the write is happening every minute, we need to divide the value of 600 by 60, to get the number of KB writes per second. This gives a value of 10.

You can specify the Write capacity in the Capacity tab of the DynamoDB table.

Reference: AWS working with tables

Q30: What two arguments does a Python Lambda handler function require?

  • A. invocation, zone
  • B. event, zone
  • C. invocation, context
  • D. event, context


D. event, context def handler_name(event, context):
…
return some_value
Reference: AWS Lambda Function Handler in Python

Top

Q31: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only via SFTP
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere


D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere
Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package

Top

Q32: A Lambda deployment package contains:

  • A. Function code, libraries, and runtime binaries
  • B. Only function code
  • C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime
  • D. Only libraries not included within the runtime


C. Function code and libraries not included within the runtime
Reference: AWS Lambda Deployment Package in PowerShell

Top

Q33: You have instances inside private subnets and a properly configured bastion host instance in a public subnet. None of the instances in the private subnets have a public or Elastic IP address. How can you connect an instance in the private subnet to the open internet to download system updates?

  • A. Create and assign EIP to each instance
  • B. Create and attach a second IGW to the VPC.
  • C. Create and utilize a NAT Gateway
  • D. Connect to a VPN


C. You can use a network address translation (NAT) gateway in a public subnet in your VPC to enable instances in the private subnet to initiate outbound traffic to the Internet, but prevent the instances from receiving inbound traffic initiated by someone on the Internet.
Reference: AWS Network Address Translation Gateway

Top

Q34: What feature of VPC networking should you utilize if you want to create “elasticity” in your application’s architecture?

  • A. Security Groups
  • B. Route Tables
  • C. Elastic Load Balancer
  • D. Auto Scaling


D. Auto scaling is designed specifically with elasticity in mind. Auto scaling allows for the increase and decrease of compute power based on demand, thus creating elasticity in the architecture.
Reference: AWS Autoscalling

Top

Q30: Lambda allows you to upload code and dependencies for function packages:

  • A. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • B. Only from a directly uploaded zip file
  • C. Only from a zip file in AWS S3
  • D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere

Answer:


D. From a zip file in AWS S3 or uploaded directly from elsewhere
Reference: AWS Lambda

Top

Q31: An organization is using an Amazon ElastiCache cluster in front of their Amazon RDS instance. The organization would like the Developer to implement logic into the code so that the cluster only retrieves data from RDS when there is a cache miss. What strategy can the Developer implement to achieve this?

  • A. Lazy loading
  • B. Write-through
  • C. Error retries
  • D. Exponential backoff

Answer:


Answer – A
Whenever your application requests data, it first makes the request to the ElastiCache cache. If the data exists in the cache and is current, ElastiCache returns the data to your application. If the data does not exist in the cache, or the data in the cache has expired, your application requests data from your data store which returns the data to your application. Your application then writes the data received from the store to the cache so it can be more quickly retrieved next time it is requested. All other options are incorrect.
Reference: Caching Strategies

Top

Q32: A developer is writing an application that will run on Ec2 instances and read messages from SQS queue. The nessages will arrive every 15-60 seconds. How should the Developer efficiently query the queue for new messages?

  • A. Use long polling
  • B. Set a custom visibility timeout
  • C. Use short polling
  • D. Implement exponential backoff


Answer – A Long polling will help insure that the applications make less requests for messages in a shorter period of time. This is more cost effective. Since the messages are only going to be available after 15 seconds and we don’t know exacly when they would be available, it is better to use Long Polling.
Reference: Amazon SQS Long Polling

Top

Q33: You are using AWS SAM to define a Lambda function and configure CodeDeploy to manage deployment patterns. With new Lambda function working as per expectation which of the following will shift traffic from original Lambda function to new Lambda function in the shortest time frame?

  • A. Canary10Percent5Minutes
  • B. Linear10PercentEvery10Minutes
  • C. Canary10Percent15Minutes
  • D. Linear10PercentEvery1Minute


Answer – A
With Canary Deployment Preference type, Traffic is shifted in two intervals. With Canary10Percent5Minutes, 10 percent of traffic is shifted in the first interval while remaining all traffic is shifted after 5 minutes.
Reference: Gradual Code Deployment

Top

Q34: You are using AWS SAM templates to deploy a serverless application. Which of the following resource will embed application from Amazon S3 buckets?

  • A. AWS::Serverless::Api
  • B. AWS::Serverless::Application
  • C. AWS::Serverless::Layerversion
  • D. AWS::Serverless::Function


Answer – B
AWS::Serverless::Application resource in AWS SAm template is used to embed application frm Amazon S3 buckets.
Reference: Declaring Serverless Resources

Top

Q35: You are using AWS Envelope Encryption for encrypting all sensitive data. Which of the followings is True with regards to Envelope Encryption?

  • A. Data is encrypted be encrypting Data key which is further encrypted using encrypted Master Key.
  • B. Data is encrypted by plaintext Data key which is further encrypted using encrypted Master Key.
  • C. Data is encrypted by encrypted Data key which is further encrypted using plaintext Master Key.
  • D. Data is encrypted by plaintext Data key which is further encrypted using plaintext Master Key.


Answer – D
With Envelope Encryption, unencrypted data is encrypted using plaintext Data key. This Data is further encrypted using plaintext Master key. This plaintext Master key is securely stored in AWS KMS & known as Customer Master Keys.
Reference: AWS Key Management Service Concepts

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q36: You are developing an application that will be comprised of the following architecture –

  1. A set of Ec2 instances to process the videos.
  2. These (Ec2 instances) will be spun up by an autoscaling group.
  3. SQS Queues to maintain the processing messages.
  4. There will be 2 pricing tiers.

How will you ensure that the premium customers videos are given more preference?

  • A. Create 2 Autoscaling Groups, one for normal and one for premium customers
  • B. Create 2 set of Ec2 Instances, one for normal and one for premium customers
  • C. Create 2 SQS queus, one for normal and one for premium customers
  • D. Create 2 Elastic Load Balancers, one for normal and one for premium customers.


Answer – C
The ideal option would be to create 2 SQS queues. Messages can then be processed by the application from the high priority queue first.<br? The other options are not the ideal options. They would lead to extra costs and also extra maintenance.
Reference: SQS

Top

Q37: You are developing an application that will interact with a DynamoDB table. The table is going to take in a lot of read and write operations. Which of the following would be the ideal partition key for the DynamoDB table to ensure ideal performance?

  • A. CustomerID
  • B. CustomerName
  • C. Location
  • D. Age


Answer- A
Use high-cardinality attributes. These are attributes that have distinct values for each item, like e-mailid, employee_no, customerid, sessionid, orderid, and so on..
Use composite attributes. Try to combine more than one attribute to form a unique key.
Reference: Choosing the right DynamoDB Partition Key

Top

Q38: A developer is making use of AWS services to develop an application. He has been asked to develop the application in a manner to compensate any network delays. Which of the following two mechanisms should he implement in the application?

  • A. Multiple SQS queues
  • B. Exponential backoff algorithm
  • C. Retries in your application code
  • D. Consider using the Java sdk.


Answer- B. and C.
In addition to simple retries, each AWS SDK implements exponential backoff algorithm for better flow control. The idea behind exponential backoff is to use progressively longer waits between retries for consecutive error responses. You should implement a maximum delay interval, as well as a maximum number of retries. The maximum delay interval and maximum number of retries are not necessarily fixed values, and should be set based on the operation being performed, as well as other local factors, such as network latency.
Reference: Error Retries and Exponential Backoff in AWS

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q39: An application is being developed that is going to write data to a DynamoDB table. You have to setup the read and write throughput for the table. Data is going to be read at the rate of 300 items every 30 seconds. Each item is of size 6KB. The reads can be eventual consistent reads. What should be the read capacity that needs to be set on the table?

  • A. 10
  • B. 20
  • C. 6
  • D. 30


Answer – A

Since there are 300 items read every 30 seconds , that means there are (300/30) = 10 items read every second.
Since each item is 6KB in size , that means , 2 reads will be required for each item.
So we have total of 2*10 = 20 reads for the number of items per second
Since eventual consistency is required , we can divide the number of reads(20) by 2 , and in the end we get the Read Capacity of 10.

Reference: Read/Write Capacity Mode


Top

Q40: You are in charge of deploying an application that will be hosted on an EC2 Instance and sit behind an Elastic Load balancer. You have been requested to monitor the incoming connections to the Elastic Load Balancer. Which of the below options can suffice this requirement?

  • A. Use AWS CloudTrail with your load balancer
  • B. Enable access logs on the load balancer
  • C. Use a CloudWatch Logs Agent
  • D. Create a custom metric CloudWatch lter on your load balancer


Answer – B
Elastic Load Balancing provides access logs that capture detailed information about requests sent to your load balancer. Each log contains information such as the time the request was received, the client’s IP address, latencies, request paths, and server responses. You can use these access logs to analyze traffic patterns and troubleshoot issues.
Reference: Access Logs for Your Application Load Balancer

Top

Q41: A static web site has been hosted on a bucket and is now being accessed by users. One of the web pages javascript section has been changed to access data which is hosted in another S3 bucket. Now that same web page is no longer loading in the browser. Which of the following can help alleviate the error?

  • A. Enable versioning for the underlying S3 bucket.
  • B. Enable Replication so that the objects get replicated to the other bucket
  • C. Enable CORS for the bucket
  • D. Change the Bucket policy for the bucket to allow access from the other bucket


Answer – C

Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) defines a way for client web applications that are loaded in one domain to interact with resources in a different domain. With CORS support, you can build rich client-side web applications with Amazon S3 and selectively allow cross-origin access to your Amazon S3 resources.

Cross-Origin Resource Sharing: Use-case Scenarios The following are example scenarios for using CORS:

Scenario 1: Suppose that you are hosting a website in an Amazon S3 bucket named website as described in Hosting a Static Website on Amazon S3. Your users load the website endpoint http://website.s3-website-us-east-1.amazonaws.com. Now you want to use JavaScript on the webpages that are stored in this bucket to be able to make authenticated GET and PUT requests against the same bucket by using the Amazon S3 API endpoint for the bucket, website.s3.amazonaws.com. A browser would normally block JavaScript from allowing those requests, but with CORS you can configure your bucket to explicitly enable cross-origin requests from website.s3-website-us-east-1.amazonaws.com.

Scenario 2: Suppose that you want to host a web font from your S3 bucket. Again, browsers require a CORS check (also called a preight check) for loading web fonts. You would configure the bucket that is hosting the web font to allow any origin to make these requests.

Reference: Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q42: Your mobile application includes a photo-sharing service that is expecting tens of thousands of users at launch. You will leverage Amazon Simple Storage Service (S3) for storage of the user Images, and you must decide how to authenticate and authorize your users for access to these images. You also need to manage the storage of these images. Which two of the following approaches should you use? Choose two answers from the options below

  • A. Create an Amazon S3 bucket per user, and use your application to generate the S3 URL for the appropriate content.
  • B. Use AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) user accounts as your application-level user database, and offload the burden of authentication from your application code.
  • C. Authenticate your users at the application level, and use AWS Security Token Service (STS)to grant token-based authorization to S3 objects.
  • D. Authenticate your users at the application level, and send an SMS token message to the user. Create an Amazon S3 bucket with the same name as the SMS message token, and move the user’s objects to that bucket.


Answer- C
The AWS Security Token Service (STS) is a web service that enables you to request temporary, limited-privilege credentials for AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) users or for users that you authenticate (federated users). The token can then be used to grant access to the objects in S3.
You can then provides access to the objects based on the key values generated via the user id.

Reference: The AWS Security Token Service (STS)


Top

Q43: Your current log analysis application takes more than four hours to generate a report of the top 10 users of your web application. You have been asked to implement a system that can report this information in real time, ensure that the report is always up to date, and handle increases in the number of requests to your web application. Choose the option that is cost-effective and can fulfill the requirements.

  • A. Publish your data to CloudWatch Logs, and congure your application to Autoscale to handle the load on demand.
  • B. Publish your log data to an Amazon S3 bucket.  Use AWS CloudFormation to create an Auto Scaling group to scale your post-processing application which is congured to pull down your log les stored an Amazon S3
  • C. Post your log data to an Amazon Kinesis data stream, and subscribe your log-processing application so that is congured to process your logging data.
  • D. Create a multi-AZ Amazon RDS MySQL cluster, post the logging data to MySQL, and run a map reduce job to retrieve the required information on user counts.

Answer:


Answer – C
Amazon Kinesis makes it easy to collect, process, and analyze real-time, streaming data so you can get timely insights and react quickly to new information. Amazon Kinesis offers key capabilities to cost effectively process streaming data at any scale, along with the flexibility to choose the tools that best suit the requirements of your application. With Amazon Kinesis, you can ingest real-time data such as application logs, website clickstreams, IoT telemetry data, and more into your databases, data lakes and data warehouses, or build your own real-time applications using this data.
Reference: Amazon Kinesis

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q44: You’ve been instructed to develop a mobile application that will make use of AWS services. You need to decide on a data store to store the user sessions. Which of the following would be an ideal data store for session management?

  • A. AWS Simple Storage Service
  • B. AWS DynamoDB
  • C. AWS RDS
  • D. AWS Redshift

Answer:


Answer – B
DynamoDB is a alternative solution which can be used for storage of session management. The latency of access to data is less , hence this can be used as a data store for session management
Reference: Scalable Session Handling in PHP Using Amazon DynamoDB

Top

Q45: Your application currently interacts with a DynamoDB table. Records are inserted into the table via the application. There is now a requirement to ensure that whenever items are updated in the DynamoDB primary table , another record is inserted into a secondary table. Which of the below feature should be used when developing such a solution?

  • A. AWS DynamoDB Encryption
  • B. AWS DynamoDB Streams
  • C. AWS DynamoDB Accelerator
  • D. AWSTable Accelerator


Answer – B
DynamoDB Streams Use Cases and Design Patterns This post describes some common use cases you might encounter, along with their design options and solutions, when migrating data from relational data stores to Amazon DynamoDB. We will consider how to manage the following scenarios:

  • How do you set up a relationship across multiple tables in which, based on the value of an item from one table, you update the item in a second table?
  • How do you trigger an event based on a particular transaction?
  • How do you audit or archive transactions?
  • How do you replicate data across multiple tables (similar to that of materialized views/streams/replication in relational data stores)?

Relational databases provide native support for transactions, triggers, auditing, and replication. Typically, a transaction in a database refers to performing create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations against multiple tables in a block. A transaction can have only two states—success or failure. In other words, there is no partial completion. As a NoSQL database, DynamoDB is not designed to support transactions. Although client-side libraries are available to mimic the transaction capabilities, they are not scalable and cost-effective. For example, the Java Transaction Library for DynamoDB creates 7N+4 additional writes for every write operation. This is partly because the library holds metadata to manage the transactions to ensure that it’s consistent and can be rolled back before commit. You can use DynamoDB Streams to address all these use cases. DynamoDB Streams is a powerful service that you can combine with other AWS services to solve many similar problems. When enabled, DynamoDB Streams captures a time-ordered sequence of item-level modifications in a DynamoDB table and durably stores the information for up to 24 hours. Applications can access a series of stream records, which contain an item change, from a DynamoDB stream in near real time. AWS maintains separate endpoints for DynamoDB and DynamoDB Streams. To work with database tables and indexes, your application must access a DynamoDB endpoint. To read and process DynamoDB Streams records, your application must access a DynamoDB Streams endpoint in the same Region. All of the other options are incorrect since none of these would meet the core requirement.
Reference: DynamoDB Streams Use Cases and Design Patterns


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q46: An application has been making use of AWS DynamoDB for its back-end data store. The size of the table has now grown to 20 GB , and the scans on the table are causing throttling errors. Which of the following should now be implemented to avoid such errors?

  • A. Large Page size
  • B. Reduced page size
  • C. Parallel Scans
  • D. Sequential scans

Answer – B
When you scan your table in Amazon DynamoDB, you should follow the DynamoDB best practices for avoiding sudden bursts of read activity. You can use the following technique to minimize the impact of a scan on a table’s provisioned throughput. Reduce page size Because a Scan operation reads an entire page (by default, 1 MB), you can reduce the impact of the scan operation by setting a smaller page size. The Scan operation provides a Limit parameter that you can use to set the page size for your request. Each Query or Scan request that has a smaller page size uses fewer read operations and creates a “pause” between each request. For example, suppose that each item is 4 KB and you set the page size to 40 items. A Query request would then consume only 20 eventually consistent read operations or 40 strongly consistent read operations. A larger number of smaller Query or Scan operations would allow your other critical requests to succeed without throttling.
Reference1: Rate-Limited Scans in Amazon DynamoDB

Reference2: Best Practices for Querying and Scanning Data


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q47: Which of the following is correct way of passing a stage variable to an HTTP URL ? (Select TWO.)

  • A. http://example.com/${}/prod
  • B. http://example.com/${stageVariables.}/prod
  • C. http://${stageVariables.}.example.com/dev/operation
  • D. http://${stageVariables}.example.com/dev/operation
  • E. http://${}.example.com/dev/operation
  • F. http://example.com/${stageVariables}/prod


Answer – B. and C.
A stage variable can be used as part of HTTP integration URL as in following cases, ·         A full URI without protocol ·         A full domain ·         A subdomain ·         A path ·         A query string In the above case , option B & C displays stage variable as a path & sub-domain.
Reference: Amazon API Gateway Stage Variables Reference

Top

Q48: Your company is planning on creating new development environments in AWS. They want to make use of their existing Chef recipes which they use for their on-premise configuration for servers in AWS. Which of the following service would be ideal to use in this regard?

  • A. AWS Elastic Beanstalk
  • B. AWS OpsWork
  • C. AWS Cloudformation
  • D. AWS SQS


Answer – B
AWS OpsWorks is a configuration management service that provides managed instances of Chef and Puppet. Chef and Puppet are automation platforms that allow you to use code to automate the configurations of your servers. OpsWorks lets you use Chef and Puppet to automate how servers are configured, deployed, and managed across your Amazon EC2 instances or on-premises compute environments All other options are invalid since they cannot be used to work with Chef recipes for configuration management.
Reference: AWS OpsWorks

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q49: Your company has developed a web application and is hosting it in an Amazon S3 bucket configured for static website hosting. The users can log in to this app using their Google/Facebook login accounts. The application is using the AWS SDK for JavaScript in the browser to access data stored in an Amazon DynamoDB table. How can you ensure that API keys for access to your data in DynamoDB are kept secure?

  • A. Create an Amazon S3 role in IAM with access to the specific DynamoDB tables, and assign it to the bucket hosting your website
  • B. Configure S3 bucket tags with your AWS access keys for your bucket hosing your website so that the application can query them for access.
  • C. Configure a web identity federation role within IAM to enable access to the correct DynamoDB resources and retrieve temporary credentials
  • D. Store AWS keys in global variables within your application and configure the application to use these credentials when making requests.


Answer – C
With web identity federation, you don’t need to create custom sign-in code or manage your own user identities. Instead, users of your app can sign in using a well-known identity provider (IdP) —such as Login with Amazon, Facebook, Google, or any other OpenID Connect (OIDC)-compatible IdP, receive an authentication token, and then exchange that token for temporary security credentials in AWS that map to an IAM role with permissions to use the resources in your AWS account. Using an IdP helps you keep your AWS account secure, because you don’t have to embed and distribute long-term security credentials with your application. Option A is invalid since Roles cannot be assigned to S3 buckets Options B and D are invalid since the AWS Access keys should not be used
Reference: About Web Identity Federation

Top

Q50: Your application currently makes use of AWS Cognito for managing user identities. You want to analyze the information that is stored in AWS Cognito for your application. Which of the following features of AWS Cognito should you use for this purpose?

  • A. Cognito Data
  • B. Cognito Events
  • C. Cognito Streams
  • D. Cognito Callbacks


Answer – C
Amazon Cognito Streams gives developers control and insight into their data stored in Amazon Cognito. Developers can now configure a Kinesis stream to receive events as data is updated and synchronized. Amazon Cognito can push each dataset change to a Kinesis stream you own in real time. All other options are invalid since you should use Cognito Streams
Reference:

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q51: You’ve developed a set of scripts using AWS Lambda. These scripts need to access EC2 Instances in a VPC. Which of the following needs to be done to ensure that the AWS Lambda function can access the resources in the VPC. Choose 2 answers from the options given below

  • A. Ensure that the subnet ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function
  • B. Ensure that the NACL ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function
  • C. Ensure that the Security Group ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function
  • D. Ensure that the VPC Flow Log ID’s are mentioned when conguring the Lambda function


Answer: A and C.
AWS Lambda runs your function code securely within a VPC by default. However, to enable your Lambda function to access resources inside your private VPC, you must provide additional VPCspecific configuration information that includes VPC subnet IDs and security group IDs. AWS Lambda uses this information to set up elastic network interfaces (ENIs) that enable your function to connect securely to other resources within your private VPC.
Reference: Configuring a Lambda Function to Access Resources in an Amazon VPC

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q52: You’ve currently been tasked to migrate an existing on-premise environment into Elastic Beanstalk. The application does not make use of Docker containers. You also can’t see any relevant environments in the beanstalk service that would be suitable to host your application. What should you consider doing in this case?

  • A. Migrate your application to using Docker containers and then migrate the app to the Elastic Beanstalk environment.
  • B. Consider using Cloudformation to deploy your environment to Elastic Beanstalk
  • C. Consider using Packer to create a custom platform
  • D. Consider deploying your application using the Elastic Container Service


Answer – C
Elastic Beanstalk supports custom platforms. A custom platform is a more advanced customization than a Custom Image in several ways. A custom platform lets you develop an entire new platform from scratch, customizing the operating system, additional software, and scripts that Elastic Beanstalk runs on platform instances. This flexibility allows you to build a platform for an application that uses a language or other infrastructure software, for which Elastic Beanstalk doesn’t provide a platform out of the box. Compare that to custom images, where you modify an AMI for use with an existing Elastic Beanstalk platform, and Elastic Beanstalk still provides the platform scripts and controls the platform’s software stack. In addition, with custom platforms you use an automated, scripted way to create and maintain your customization, whereas with custom images you make the changes manually over a running instance. To create a custom platform, you build an Amazon Machine Image (AMI) from one of the supported operating systems—Ubuntu, RHEL, or Amazon Linux (see the flavor entry in Platform.yaml File Format for the exact version numbers)—and add further customizations. You create your own Elastic Beanstalk platform using Packer, which is an open-source tool for creating machine images for many platforms, including AMIs for use with Amazon EC2. An Elastic Beanstalk platform comprises an AMI configured to run a set of software that supports an application, and metadata that can include custom configuration options and default configuration option settings.
Reference: AWS Elastic Beanstalk Custom Platforms

Top

Q53: Company B is writing 10 items to the Dynamo DB table every second. Each item is 15.5Kb in size. What would be the required provisioned write throughput for best performance? Choose the correct answer from the options below.

  • A. 10
  • B. 160
  • C. 155
  • D. 16


Answer – B.
Company B is writing 10 items to the Dynamo DB table every second. Each item is 15.5Kb in size. What would be the required provisioned write throughput for best performance? Choose the correct answer from the options below.
Reference: Read/Write Capacity Mode

Top

Top

Q54: Which AWS Service can be used to automatically install your application code onto EC2, on premises systems and Lambda?

  • A. CodeCommit
  • B. X-Ray
  • C. CodeBuild
  • D. CodeDeploy


Answer: D

Reference: AWS CodeDeploy


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q55: Which AWS service can be used to compile source code, run tests and package code?

  • A. CodePipeline
  • B. CodeCommit
  • C. CodeBuild
  • D. CodeDeploy


Answer: D

Reference: AWS CodeDeploy Answer: B.

Reference: AWS CodeBuild


Top

Q56: How can your prevent CloudFormation from deleting your entire stack on failure? (Choose 2)

  • A. Set the Rollback on failure radio button to No in the CloudFormation console
  • B. Set Termination Protection to Enabled in the CloudFormation console
  • C. Use the –disable-rollback flag with the AWS CLI
  • D. Use the –enable-termination-protection protection flag with the AWS CLI

Answer: A. and C.

Reference: Protecting a Stack From Being Deleted

Top

Q57: Which of the following practices allows multiple developers working on the same application to merge code changes frequently, without impacting each other and enables the identification of bugs early on in the release process?

  • A. Continuous Integration
  • B. Continuous Deployment
  • C. Continuous Delivery
  • D. Continuous Development

Top

Q58: When deploying application code to EC2, the AppSpec file can be written in which language?

  • A. JSON
  • B. JSON or YAML
  • C. XML
  • D. YAML

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q59: Part of your CloudFormation deployment fails due to a mis-configuration, by defaukt what will happen?

  • A. CloudFormation will rollback only the failed components
  • B. CloudFormation will rollback the entire stack
  • C. Failed component will remain available for debugging purposes
  • D. CloudFormation will ask you if you want to continue with the deployment


Top

Q60: You want to receive an email whenever a user pushes code to CodeCommit repository, how can you configure this?

  • A. Create a new SNS topic and configure it to poll for CodeCommit eveents. Ask all users to subscribe to the topic to receive notifications
  • B. Configure a CloudWatch Events rule to send a message to SES which will trigger an email to be sent whenever a user pushes code to the repository.
  • C. Configure Notifications in the console, this will create a CloudWatch events rule to send a notification to a SNS topic which will trigger an email to be sent to the user.
  • D. Configure a CloudWatch Events rule to send a message to SQS which will trigger an email to be sent whenever a user pushes code to the repository.

Answer: C

Reference: Getting Started with Amazon SNS


Top

Q61: Which AWS service can be used to centrally store and version control your application source code, binaries and libraries

  • A. CodeCommit
  • B. CodeBuild
  • C. CodePipeline
  • D. ElasticFileSystem

Answer: A

Reference: AWS CodeCommit


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q62: You are using CloudFormation to create a new S3 bucket, which of the following sections would you use to define the properties of your bucket?

  • A. Conditions
  • B. Parameters
  • C. Outputs
  • D. Resources

Answer: D

Reference: Resources


Top

Q63: You are deploying a number of EC2 and RDS instances using CloudFormation. Which section of the CloudFormation template would you use to define these?

  • A. Transforms
  • B. Outputs
  • C. Resources
  • D. Instances

Answer: C.
The Resources section defines your resources you are provisioning. Outputs is used to output user defines data relating to the reources you have built and can also used as input to another CloudFormation stack. Transforms is used to reference code located in S3.
Reference: Resources

Top

Q64: Which AWS service can be used to fully automate your entire release process?

  • A. CodeDeploy
  • B. CodePipeline
  • C. CodeCommit
  • D. CodeBuild

Answer: B.
AWS CodePipeline is a fully managed continuous delivery service that helps you automate your release pipelines for fast and reliable application and infrastructure updates

Reference: AWS CodePipeline


Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q65: You want to use the output of your CloudFormation stack as input to another CloudFormation stack. Which sections of the CloudFormation template would you use to help you configure this?

  • A. Outputs
  • B. Transforms
  • C. Resources
  • D. Exports

Answer: A.
Outputs is used to output user defines data relating to the reources you have built and can also used as input to another CloudFormation stack.
Reference: CloudFormation Outputs

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q66: You have some code located in an S3 bucket that you want to reference in your CloudFormation template. Which section of the template can you use to define this?

  • A. Inputs
  • B. Resources
  • C. Transforms
  • D. Files

Answer: C.
Transforms is used to reference code located in S3 and also specififying the use of the Serverless Application Model (SAM) for Lambda deployments.
Reference: Transforms

Top

Q67: You are deploying an application to a number of Ec2 instances using CodeDeploy. What is the name of the file
used to specify source files and lifecycle hooks?

  • A. buildspec.yml
  • B. appspec.json
  • C. appspec.yml
  • D. buildspec.json

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q68: Which of the following approaches allows you to re-use pieces of CloudFormation code in multiple templates, for common use cases like provisioning a load balancer or web server?

  • A. Share the code using an EBS volume
  • B. Copy and paste the code into the template each time you need to use it
  • C. Use a cloudformation nested stack
  • D. Store the code you want to re-use in an AMI and reference the AMI from within your CloudFormation template.

Answer: C.

Reference: Working with Nested Stacks

Top

Q69: In the CodeDeploy AppSpec file, what are hooks used for?

  • A. To reference AWS resources that will be used during the deployment
  • B. Hooks are reserved for future use
  • C. To specify files you want to copy during the deployment.
  • D. To specify, scripts or function that you want to run at set points in the deployment lifecycle

Answer: D.
The ‘hooks’ section for an EC2/On-Premises deployment contains mappings that link deployment lifecycle event hooks to one or more scripts.

Reference: AppSpec ‘hooks’ Section

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q70: Which command can you use to encrypt a plain text file using CMK?

  • A. aws kms-encrypt
  • B. aws iam encrypt
  • C. aws kms encrypt
  • D. aws encrypt

Answer: C.
aws kms encrypt –key-id 1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab –plaintext fileb://ExamplePlaintextFile –output text –query CiphertextBlob > C:\Temp\ExampleEncryptedFile.base64

Reference: AWS CLI Encrypt

Top

Q72: Which of the following is an encrypted key used by KMS to encrypt your data

  • A. Custmoer Mamaged Key
  • B. Encryption Key
  • C. Envelope Key
  • D. Customer Master Key

Answer: C.
Your Data key also known as the Enveloppe key is encrypted using the master key.This approach is known as Envelope encryption.
Envelope encryption is the practice of encrypting plaintext data with a data key, and then encrypting the data key under another key.

Reference: Envelope Encryption

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Q73: Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose 2)

  • A. The Customer Master Key is used to encrypt and decrypt the Envelope Key or Data Key
  • B. The Envelope Key or Data Key is used to encrypt and decrypt plain text files.
  • C. The envelope Key or Data Key is used to encrypt and decrypt the Customer Master Key.
  • D. The Customer MasterKey is used to encrypt and decrypt plain text files.

Answer: A. and B.

Reference: AWS Key Management Service Concepts

Top

 
 

Q74: Which of the following statements is correct in relation to kMS/ (Choose 2)

  • A. KMS Encryption keys are regional
  • B. You cannot export your customer master key
  • C. You can export your customer master key.
  • D. KMS encryption Keys are global

Answer: A. and B.

Reference: AWS Key Management Service FAQs

Q75:  A developer is preparing a deployment package for a Java implementation of an AWS Lambda function. What should the developer include in the deployment package? (Select TWO.)
A. Compiled application code
B. Java runtime environment
C. References to the event sources
D. Lambda execution role
E. Application dependencies


Answer: C. E.
Notes: To create a Lambda function, you first create a Lambda function deployment package. This package is a .zip or .jar file consisting of your code and any dependencies.
Reference: Lambda deployment packages.

Q76: A developer uses AWS CodeDeploy to deploy a Python application to a fleet of Amazon EC2 instances that run behind an Application Load Balancer. The instances run in an Amazon EC2 Auto Scaling group across multiple Availability Zones. What should the developer include in the CodeDeploy deployment package?
A. A launch template for the Amazon EC2 Auto Scaling group
B. A CodeDeploy AppSpec file
C. An EC2 role that grants the application access to AWS services
D. An IAM policy that grants the application access to AWS services


Answer: B.
Notes: The CodeDeploy AppSpec (application specific) file is unique to CodeDeploy. The AppSpec file is used to manage each deployment as a series of lifecycle event hooks, which are defined in the file.
Reference: CodeDeploy application specification (AppSpec) files.
Category: Deployment

Q76: A company is working on a project to enhance its serverless application development process. The company hosts applications on AWS Lambda. The development team regularly updates the Lambda code and wants to use stable code in production. Which combination of steps should the development team take to configure Lambda functions to meet both development and production requirements? (Select TWO.)

A. Create a new Lambda version every time a new code release needs testing.
B. Create two Lambda function aliases. Name one as Production and the other as Development. Point the Production alias to a production-ready unqualified Amazon Resource Name (ARN) version. Point the Development alias to the $LATEST version.
C. Create two Lambda function aliases. Name one as Production and the other as Development. Point the Production alias to the production-ready qualified Amazon Resource Name (ARN) version. Point the Development alias to the variable LAMBDA_TASK_ROOT.
D. Create a new Lambda layer every time a new code release needs testing.
E. Create two Lambda function aliases. Name one as Production and the other as Development. Point the Production alias to a production-ready Lambda layer Amazon Resource Name (ARN). Point the Development alias to the $LATEST layer ARN.


Answer: A. B.
Notes: Lambda function versions are designed to manage deployment of functions. They can be used for code changes, without affecting the stable production version of the code. By creating separate aliases for Production and Development, systems can initiate the correct alias as needed. A Lambda function alias can be used to point to a specific Lambda function version. Using the functionality to update an alias and its linked version, the development team can update the required version as needed. The $LATEST version is the newest published version.
Reference: Lambda function versions.

For more information about Lambda layers, see Creating and sharing Lambda layers.

For more information about Lambda function aliases, see Lambda function aliases.

Category: Deployment

Q77: Each time a developer publishes a new version of an AWS Lambda function, all the dependent event source mappings need to be updated with the reference to the new version’s Amazon Resource Name (ARN). These updates are time consuming and error-prone. Which combination of actions should the developer take to avoid performing these updates when publishing a new Lambda version? (Select TWO.)
A. Update event source mappings with the ARN of the Lambda layer.
B. Point a Lambda alias to a new version of the Lambda function.
C. Create a Lambda alias for each published version of the Lambda function.
D. Point a Lambda alias to a new Lambda function alias.
E. Update the event source mappings with the Lambda alias ARN.


Answer: B. E.
Notes: A Lambda alias is a pointer to a specific Lambda function version. Instead of using ARNs for the Lambda function in event source mappings, you can use an alias ARN. You do not need to update your event source mappings when you promote a new version or roll back to a previous version.
Reference: Lambda function aliases.
Category: Deployment

Q78:  A company wants to store sensitive user data in Amazon S3 and encrypt this data at rest. The company must manage the encryption keys and use Amazon S3 to perform the encryption. How can a developer meet these requirements?
A. Enable default encryption for the S3 bucket by using the option for server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C).
B. Enable client-side encryption with an encryption key. Upload the encrypted object to the S3 bucket.
C. Enable server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed encryption keys (SSE-S3). Upload an object to the S3 bucket.
D. Enable server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C). Upload an object to the S3 bucket.


Answer: D.
Notes: When you upload an object, Amazon S3 uses the encryption key you provide to apply AES-256 encryption to your data and removes the encryption key from memory.
Reference: Protecting data using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C).

Category: Security

Q79: A company is developing a Python application that submits data to an Amazon DynamoDB table. The company requires client-side encryption of specific data items and end-to-end protection for the encrypted data in transit and at rest. Which combination of steps will meet the requirement for the encryption of specific data items? (Select TWO.)

A. Generate symmetric encryption keys with AWS Key Management Service (AWS KMS).
B. Generate asymmetric encryption keys with AWS Key Management Service (AWS KMS).
C. Use generated keys with the DynamoDB Encryption Client.
D. Use generated keys to configure DynamoDB table encryption with AWS managed customer master keys (CMKs).
E. Use generated keys to configure DynamoDB table encryption with AWS owned customer master keys (CMKs).


Answer: A. C.
Notes: When the DynamoDB Encryption Client is configured to use AWS KMS, it uses a customer master key (CMK) that is always encrypted when used outside of AWS KMS. This cryptographic materials provider returns a unique encryption key and signing key for every table item. This method of encryption uses a symmetric CMK.
Reference: Direct KMS Materials Provider.
Category: Deployment

Q80: A company is developing a REST API with Amazon API Gateway. Access to the API should be limited to users in the existing Amazon Cognito user pool. Which combination of steps should a developer perform to secure the API? (Select TWO.)
A. Create an AWS Lambda authorizer for the API.
B. Create an Amazon Cognito authorizer for the API.
C. Configure the authorizer for the API resource.
D. Configure the API methods to use the authorizer.
E. Configure the authorizer for the API stage.


Answer: B. D.
Notes: An Amazon Cognito authorizer should be used for integration with Amazon Cognito user pools. In addition to creating an authorizer, you are required to configure an API method to use that authorizer for the API.
Reference: Control access to a REST API using Amazon Cognito user pools as authorizer.
Category: Security

Q81: A developer is implementing a mobile app to provide personalized services to app users. The application code makes calls to Amazon S3 and Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS). Which options can the developer use to authenticate the app users? (Select TWO.)
A. Authenticate to the Amazon Cognito identity pool directly.
B. Authenticate to AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) directly.
C. Authenticate to the Amazon Cognito user pool directly.
D. Federate authentication by using Login with Amazon with the users managed with AWS Security Token Service (AWS STS).
E. Federate authentication by using Login with Amazon with the users managed with the Amazon Cognito user pool.


Answer: C. E.
Notes: The Amazon Cognito user pool provides direct user authentication. The Amazon Cognito user pool provides a federated authentication option with third-party identity provider (IdP), including amazon.com.
Reference: Adding User Pool Sign-in Through a Third Party.
Category: Security

 
 

Q82: A company is implementing several order processing workflows. Each workflow is implemented by using AWS Lambda functions for each task. Which combination of steps should a developer follow to implement these workflows? (Select TWO.)
A. Define a AWS Step Functions task for each Lambda function.
B. Define a AWS Step Functions task for each workflow.
C. Write code that polls the AWS Step Functions invocation to coordinate each workflow.
D. Define an AWS Step Functions state machine for each workflow.
E. Define an AWS Step Functions state machine for each Lambda function.


Answer: A. D.
Notes: Step Functions is based on state machines and tasks. A state machine is a workflow. Tasks perform work by coordinating with other AWS services, such as Lambda. A state machine is a workflow. It can be used to express a workflow as a number of states, their relationships, and their input and output. You can coordinate individual tasks with Step Functions by expressing your workflow as a finite state machine, written in the Amazon States Language.
Reference: Getting Started with AWS Step Functions.

Category: Development

Q83: A company is migrating a web service to the AWS Cloud. The web service accepts requests by using HTTP (port 80). The company wants to use an AWS Lambda function to process HTTP requests. Which application design will satisfy these requirements?
A. Create an Amazon API Gateway API. Configure proxy integration with the Lambda function.
B. Create an Amazon API Gateway API. Configure non-proxy integration with the Lambda function.
C. Configure the Lambda function to listen to inbound network connections on port 80.
D. Configure the Lambda function as a target in the Application Load Balancer target group.


Answer: D.
Notes: Elastic Load Balancing supports Lambda functions as a target for an Application Load Balancer. You can use load balancer rules to route HTTP requests to a function, based on the path or the header values. Then, process the request and return an HTTP response from your Lambda function.
Reference: Using AWS Lambda with an Application Load Balancer.
Category: Development

Q84: A company is developing an image processing application. When an image is uploaded to an Amazon S3 bucket, a number of independent and separate services must be invoked to process the image. The services do not have to be available immediately, but they must process every image. Which application design satisfies these requirements?
A. Configure an Amazon S3 event notification that publishes to an Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS) queue. Each service pulls the message from the same queue.
B. Configure an Amazon S3 event notification that publishes to an Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS) topic. Each service subscribes to the same topic.
C. Configure an Amazon S3 event notification that publishes to an Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS) queue. Subscribe a separate Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS) topic for each service to an Amazon SQS queue.
D. Configure an Amazon S3 event notification that publishes to an Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS) topic. Subscribe a separate Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS) queue for each service to the Amazon SNS topic.


Answer: D.
Notes: Each service can subscribe to an individual Amazon SQS queue, which receives an event notification from the Amazon SNS topic. This is a fanout architectural implementation.
Reference: Common Amazon SNS scenarios.
Category: Development

Q85: A developer wants to implement Amazon EC2 Auto Scaling for a Multi-AZ web application. However, the developer is concerned that user sessions will be lost during scale-in events. How can the developer store the session state and share it across the EC2 instances?
A. Write the sessions to an Amazon Kinesis data stream. Configure the application to poll the stream.
B. Publish the sessions to an Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS) topic. Subscribe each instance in the group to the topic.
C. Store the sessions in an Amazon ElastiCache for Memcached cluster. Configure the application to use the Memcached API.
D. Write the sessions to an Amazon Elastic Block Store (Amazon EBS) volume. Mount the volume to each instance in the group.


Answer: C.
Notes: ElastiCache for Memcached is a distributed in-memory data store or cache environment in the cloud. It will meet the developer’s requirement of persistent storage and is fast to access.
Reference: What is Amazon ElastiCache for Memcached?

Category: Development

 
 
 

Q86: A developer is integrating a legacy web application that runs on a fleet of Amazon EC2 instances with an Amazon DynamoDB table. There is no AWS SDK for the programming language that was used to implement the web application. Which combination of steps should the developer perform to make an API call to Amazon DynamoDB from the instances? (Select TWO.)
A. Make an HTTPS POST request to the DynamoDB API endpoint for the AWS Region. In the request body, include an XML document that contains the request attributes.
B. Make an HTTPS POST request to the DynamoDB API endpoint for the AWS Region. In the request body, include a JSON document that contains the request attributes.
C. Sign the requests by using AWS access keys and Signature Version 4.
D. Use an EC2 SSH key to calculate Signature Version 4 of the request.
E. Provide the signature value through the HTTP X-API-Key header.


Answer: B. C.
Notes: The HTTPS-based low-level AWS API for DynamoDB uses JSON as a wire protocol format. When you send HTTP requests to AWS, you sign the requests so that AWS can identify who sent them. Requests are signed with your AWS access key, which consists of an access key ID and secret access key. AWS supports two signature versions: Signature Version 4 and Signature Version 2. AWS recommends the use of Signature Version 4.
Reference: Signing AWS API requests.
Category: Development

Q87: A developer has written several custom applications that read and write to the same Amazon DynamoDB table. Each time the data in the DynamoDB table is modified, this change should be sent to an external API. Which combination of steps should the developer perform to accomplish this task? (Select TWO.)
A. Configure an AWS Lambda function to poll the stream and call the external API.
B. Configure an event in Amazon EventBridge (Amazon CloudWatch Events) that publishes the change to an Amazon Managed Streaming for Apache Kafka (Amazon MSK) data stream.
C. Create a trigger in the DynamoDB table to publish the change to an Amazon Kinesis data stream.
D. Deliver the stream to an Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS) topic and subscribe the API to the topic.
E. Enable DynamoDB Streams on the table.


Answer: A. E.
Notes: If you enable DynamoDB Streams on a table, you can associate the stream Amazon Resource Name (ARN) with an Lambda function that you write. Immediately after an item in the table is modified, a new record appears in the table’s stream. Lambda polls the stream and invokes your Lambda function synchronously when it detects new stream records. You can enable DynamoDB Streams on a table to create an event that invokes an AWS Lambda function.
Reference: Tutorial: Process New Items with DynamoDB Streams and Lambda.
Category: Monitoring

 
 
 

Q88: A company is migrating the create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) functionality of an existing Java web application to AWS Lambda. Which minimal code refactoring is necessary for the CRUD operations to run in the Lambda function?
A. Implement a Lambda handler function.
B. Import an AWS X-Ray package.
C. Rewrite the application code in Python.
D. Add a reference to the Lambda execution role.


Answer: A.
Notes: Every Lambda function needs a Lambda-specific handler. Specifics of authoring vary between runtimes, but all runtimes share a common programming model that defines the interface between your code and the runtime code. You tell the runtime which method to run by defining a handler in the function configuration. The runtime runs that method. Next, the runtime passes in objects to the handler that contain the invocation event and context, such as the function name and request ID.
Reference: Getting started with Lambda.
Category: Refactoring

Top

Q89: A company plans to use AWS log monitoring services to monitor an application that runs on premises. Currently, the application runs on a recent version of Ubuntu Server and outputs the logs to a local file. Which combination of steps should a developer perform to accomplish this goal? (Select TWO.)
A. Update the application code to include calls to the agent API for log collection.
B. Install the Amazon Elastic Container Service (Amazon ECS) container agent on the server.
C. Install the unified Amazon CloudWatch agent on the server.
D. Configure the long-term AWS credentials on the server to enable log collection by the agent.
E. Attach an IAM role to the server to enable log collection by the agent.


Answer: C. D.
Notes: The unified CloudWatch agent needs to be installed on the server. Ubuntu Server 18.04 is one of the many supported operating systems. When you install the unified CloudWatch agent on an on-premises server, you will specify a named profile that contains the credentials of the IAM user.
Reference: Collecting metrics and logs from Amazon EC2 instances and on-premises servers with the CloudWatch agent.
Category: Monitoring

Q90: A developer wants to monitor invocations of an AWS Lambda function by using Amazon CloudWatch Logs. The developer added a number of print statements to the function code that write the logging information to the stdout stream. After running the function, the developer does not see any log data being generated. Why does the log data NOT appear in the CloudWatch logs?
A. The log data is not written to the stderr stream.
B. Lambda function logging is not automatically enabled.
C. The execution role for the Lambda function did not grant permissions to write log data to CloudWatch Logs.
D. The Lambda function outputs the logs to an Amazon S3 bucket.


Answer: C.
Notes: The function needs permission to call CloudWatch Logs. Update the execution role to grant the permission. You can use the managed policy of AWSLambdaBasicExecutionRole.
Reference: Troubleshoot execution issues in Lambda.
Category: Monitoting

Q91: Which of the following are best practices you should implement into ongoing deployments of your application? (Select THREE.)

A. Use stage variables to manage secrets across environments
B. Create account-specific AWS SAM templates for each environment
C. Use an AutoPublish alias
D. Use traffic shifting with pre- and post-deployment hooks
E. Test throughout the pipeline


Answer: C. D. E.
Notes: Use an AutoPublish alias, Use traffic shifting with pre- and post-deployment hooks, Test throughout the pipeline
Reference: https://enoumen.com/2019/06/23/aws-solution-architect-associate-exam-prep-facts-and-summaries-questions-and-answers-dump/

Q92: You are handing off maintenance of your new serverless application to an incoming team lead. Which recommendations would you make? (Select THREE.)

A. Keep up to date with the quotas and payload sizes for each AWS service you are using

B. Analyze production access patterns to identify potential improvements

C. Design your services to extend their life as long as possible

D. Minimize changes to your production application

E. Compare the value of using the latest first-class integrations versus using Lambda between AWS services


Answer: A. B. D.

Notes: Keep up to date with the quotas and payload sizes for each AWS service you are using, 
Reference: https://enoumen.com/2019/06/23/aws-solution-architect-associate-exam-prep-facts-and-summaries-questions-and-answers-dump/

Q93: You are handing off maintenance of your new serverless application to an incoming team lead. Which recommendations would you make? (Select THREE.)

A. Keep up to date with the quotas and payload sizes for each AWS service you are using

B. Analyze production access patterns to identify potential improvements

C. Design your services to extend their life as long as possible

D. Minimize changes to your production application

E. Compare the value of using the latest first-class integrations versus using Lambda between AWS services


Answer: A. B. D.
Notes: Keep up to date with the quotas and payload sizes for each AWS service you are using. Analyze production access patterns to identify potential improvements. Minimize changes to your production application

Reference: https://enoumen.com/2019/06/23/aws-solution-architect-associate-exam-prep-facts-and-summaries-questions-and-answers-dump/

Q94: Your application needs to connect to an Amazon RDS instance on the backend. What is the best recommendation to the developer whose function must read from and write to the Amazon RDS instance?

A. Initialize the number of connections you want outside of the handler

B. Use the database TTL setting to clean up connections

C. Use reserved concurrency to limit the number of concurrent functions that would try to write to the database

D. Use the database proxy feature to provide connection pooling for the functions


Answer: D.
Notes: Use the database proxy feature to provide connection pooling for the functions

Reference: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/serverless-application-model/latest/developerguide/automating-updates-to-serverless-apps.html

 

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

Question 95: A developer reports that a third-party library they need cannot be shared in the Lambda invocation environment. Which suggestion would you make?

A. Decrease the deployment package size

B. Set a provisioned concurrency of one so that the library doesn’t need to be shared across environments

C. Use reserved concurrency for the function that needs to use the library

D. Load the third-party library onto an Amazon EFS volume


Answer: D
Notes: Load the third-party library onto an Amazon EFS volume

Reference: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/serverless-application-model/latest/developerguide/automating-updates-to-serverless-apps.html

AWS Certified Developer Associate exam: Whitepapers

AWS has provided whitepapers to help you understand the technical concepts. Below are the recommended whitepapers for the AWS Certified Developer – Associate Exam.

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Online Training and Labs for AWS Certified Developer Associates Exam

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Top

AWS Developer Associates Jobs

Top

AWS Certified Developer-Associate Exam info and details, How To:

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

The AWS Certified Developer Associate exam is a multiple choice, multiple answer exam. Here is the Exam Overview:

  • Certification Name: AWS Certified Developer Associate.
  • Prerequisites for the Exam: None.
  • Exam Pattern: Multiple Choice Questions
  • The AWS Certified Developer-Associate Examination (DVA-C01) is a pass or fail exam. The examination is scored against a minimum standard established by AWS professionals guided by certification industry best practices and guidelines.
  • Your results for the examination are reported as a score from 100 – 1000, with a minimum passing score of 720.
  • Exam fees: US $150
  • Exam Guide on AWS Website
  • Available languages for tests: English, Japanese, Korean, Simplified Chinese
  • Read AWS whitepapers
  • Register for certification account here.
  • Prepare for Certification Here

  • Exam Content Outline

    Domain% of Examination
    Domain 1: Deployment (22%)
    1.1 Deploy written code in AWS using existing CI/CD pipelines, processes, and patterns.
    1.2 Deploy applications using Elastic Beanstalk.
    1.3 Prepare the application deployment package to be deployed to AWS.
    1.4 Deploy serverless applications    		22%
    Domain 2: Security (26%)
    2.1 Make authenticated calls to AWS services.
    2.2 Implement encryption using AWS services.
    2.3 Implement application authentication and authorization.    		26%
    Domain 3: Development with AWS Services (30%)
    3.1 Write code for serverless applications.
    3.2 Translate functional requirements into application design.
    3.3 Implement application design into application code.
    3.4 Write code that interacts with AWS services by using APIs, SDKs, and AWS CLI.    		30%
    Domain 4: Refactoring
    4.1 Optimize application to best use AWS services and features.
    4.2 Migrate existing application code to run on AWS.    		10%
    Domain 5: Monitoring and Troubleshooting (10%)
    5.1 Write code that can be monitored.
    5.2 Perform root cause analysis on faults found in testing or production.    		10%
    TOTAL100%

Top

AWS Certified Developer Associate exam: Additional Information for reference

Below are some useful reference links that would help you to learn about AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam.

Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Other Relevant and Recommended AWS Certifications

AWS Certification Exams Roadmap
AWS Certification Exams Roadmap

Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

Top

Other AWS Facts and Summaries and Questions/Answers Dump

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

AWS Certified Developer Associate exam: Whitepapers

AWS has provided whitepapers to help you understand the technical concepts. Below are the recommended whitepapers for the AWS Certified Developer – Associate Exam.

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Online Training and Labs for AWS Certified Developer Associates Exam

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Top

AWS Developer Associates Jobs

Top

AWS Certified Developer-Associate Exam info and details, How To:

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

The AWS Certified Developer Associate exam is a multiple choice, multiple answer exam. Here is the Exam Overview:

  • Certification Name: AWS Certified Developer Associate.
  • Prerequisites for the Exam: None.
  • Exam Pattern: Multiple Choice Questions
  • The AWS Certified Developer-Associate Examination (DVA-C01) is a pass or fail exam. The examination is scored against a minimum standard established by AWS professionals guided by certification industry best practices and guidelines.
  • Your results for the examination are reported as a score from 100 – 1000, with a minimum passing score of 720.
  • Exam fees: US $150
  • Exam Guide on AWS Website
  • Available languages for tests: English, Japanese, Korean, Simplified Chinese
  • Read AWS whitepapers
  • Register for certification account here.
  • Prepare for Certification Here

  • Exam Content Outline

    Domain% of Examination
    Domain 1: Deployment (22%)
    1.1 Deploy written code in AWS using existing CI/CD pipelines, processes, and patterns.
    1.2 Deploy applications using Elastic Beanstalk.
    1.3 Prepare the application deployment package to be deployed to AWS.
    1.4 Deploy serverless applications    		22%
    Domain 2: Security (26%)
    2.1 Make authenticated calls to AWS services.
    2.2 Implement encryption using AWS services.
    2.3 Implement application authentication and authorization.    		26%
    Domain 3: Development with AWS Services (30%)
    3.1 Write code for serverless applications.
    3.2 Translate functional requirements into application design.
    3.3 Implement application design into application code.
    3.4 Write code that interacts with AWS services by using APIs, SDKs, and AWS CLI.    		30%
    Domain 4: Refactoring
    4.1 Optimize application to best use AWS services and features.
    4.2 Migrate existing application code to run on AWS.    		10%
    Domain 5: Monitoring and Troubleshooting (10%)
    5.1 Write code that can be monitored.
    5.2 Perform root cause analysis on faults found in testing or production.    		10%
    TOTAL100%

Top

Load balancing EC2 Instances in an Autoscaling Group By Neal Davis

 

In this AWS tutorial, we are going to discuss how we can make the best use of AWS services to build a highly scalable, and fault tolerant configuration of EC2 instances. The use of Load Balancers and Auto Scaling Groups falls under a number of best practices in AWS, including Performance Efficiency, Reliability and high availability.

Before we dive into this hands-on tutorial on how exactly we can build this solution, let’s have a brief recap on what an Auto Scaling group is, and what a Load balancer is.

Autoscaling group (ASG)

An Autoscaling group (ASG) is a logical grouping of instances which can scale up and scale down depending on pre-configured settings. By setting Scaling policies of your ASG, you can choose how many EC2 instances are launched and terminated based on your application’s load. You can do this based on manual, dynamic, scheduled or predictive scaling.

Elastic Load Balancer (ELB)

An Elastic Load Balancer (ELB) is a name describing a number of services within AWS designed to distribute traffic across multiple EC2 instances in order to provide enhanced scalability, availability, security and more. The particular type of Load Balancer we will be using today is an Application Load Balancer (ALB). The ALB is a Layer 7 Load Balancer designed to distribute HTTP/HTTPS traffic across multiple nodes – with added features such as TLS termination, Sticky Sessions and Complex routing configurations.

Getting Started

First of all, we open our AWS management console and head to the EC2 management console.

We scroll down on the left-hand side and select ‘Launch Templates’. A Launch Template is a configuration template which defines the settings for EC2 instances launched by the ASG.

Under Launch Templates, we will select “Create launch template”.

We specify the name ‘MyTestTemplate’ and use the same text in the description.

Under the ‘Auto Scaling guidance’ box, tick the box which says ‘Provide guidance to help me set up a template that I can use with EC2 Auto Scaling’ and scroll down to launch template contents.

When it comes to choosing our AMI (Amazon Machine Image) we can choose the Amazon Linux 2 under ‘Quick Start’.

The Amazon Linux 2 AMI is free tier eligible, and easy to use for our demonstration purposes.

Next, we select the ‘t2.micro’ under instance types, as this is also free tier eligible.

Under Network Settings, we create a new Security Group called ExampleSG in our default VPC, allowing HTTP access to everyone. It should look like this.

AWS Certified Developer Associate exam: Additional Information for reference

Below are some useful reference links that would help you to learn about AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam.

Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Other Relevant and Recommended AWS Certifications

AWS Certification Exams Roadmap
AWS Certification Exams Roadmap

Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

Top

Other AWS Facts and Summaries and Questions/Answers Dump

AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep

 
 
 

AWS Certifications Breaking News and Top Stories

    Feed has no items.

 

Reference: https://enoumen.com/2019/06/23/aws-solution-architect-associate-exam-prep-facts-and-summaries-questions-and-answers-dump/

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

AWS Certified Developer Associate exam: Whitepapers

AWS has provided whitepapers to help you understand the technical concepts. Below are the recommended whitepapers for the AWS Certified Developer – Associate Exam.

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Online Training and Labs for AWS Certified Developer Associates Exam

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Top

AWS Developer Associates Jobs

Top

AWS Certified Developer-Associate Exam info and details, How To:

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

The AWS Certified Developer Associate exam is a multiple choice, multiple answer exam. Here is the Exam Overview:

  • Certification Name: AWS Certified Developer Associate.
  • Prerequisites for the Exam: None.
  • Exam Pattern: Multiple Choice Questions
  • The AWS Certified Developer-Associate Examination (DVA-C01) is a pass or fail exam. The examination is scored against a minimum standard established by AWS professionals guided by certification industry best practices and guidelines.
  • Your results for the examination are reported as a score from 100 – 1000, with a minimum passing score of 720.
  • Exam fees: US $150
  • Exam Guide on AWS Website
  • Available languages for tests: English, Japanese, Korean, Simplified Chinese
  • Read AWS whitepapers
  • Register for certification account here.
  • Prepare for Certification Here

  • Exam Content Outline

    Domain% of Examination
    Domain 1: Deployment (22%)
    1.1 Deploy written code in AWS using existing CI/CD pipelines, processes, and patterns.
    1.2 Deploy applications using Elastic Beanstalk.
    1.3 Prepare the application deployment package to be deployed to AWS.
    1.4 Deploy serverless applications    		22%
    Domain 2: Security (26%)
    2.1 Make authenticated calls to AWS services.
    2.2 Implement encryption using AWS services.
    2.3 Implement application authentication and authorization.    		26%
    Domain 3: Development with AWS Services (30%)
    3.1 Write code for serverless applications.
    3.2 Translate functional requirements into application design.
    3.3 Implement application design into application code.
    3.4 Write code that interacts with AWS services by using APIs, SDKs, and AWS CLI.    		30%
    Domain 4: Refactoring
    4.1 Optimize application to best use AWS services and features.
    4.2 Migrate existing application code to run on AWS.    		10%
    Domain 5: Monitoring and Troubleshooting (10%)
    5.1 Write code that can be monitored.
    5.2 Perform root cause analysis on faults found in testing or production.    		10%
    TOTAL100%

Top

AWS Certified Developer Associate exam: Additional Information for reference

Below are some useful reference links that would help you to learn about AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam.

Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Other Relevant and Recommended AWS Certifications

AWS Certification Exams Roadmap
AWS Certification Exams Roadmap

Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

Top

Other AWS Facts and Summaries and Questions/Answers Dump

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

AWS Certified Developer Associate exam: Whitepapers

AWS has provided whitepapers to help you understand the technical concepts. Below are the recommended whitepapers for the AWS Certified Developer – Associate Exam.

Top

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Online Training and Labs for AWS Certified Developer Associates Exam

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Top

AWS Developer Associates Jobs

Top

AWS Certified Developer-Associate Exam info and details, How To:

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

The AWS Certified Developer Associate exam is a multiple choice, multiple answer exam. Here is the Exam Overview:

  • Certification Name: AWS Certified Developer Associate.
  • Prerequisites for the Exam: None.
  • Exam Pattern: Multiple Choice Questions
  • The AWS Certified Developer-Associate Examination (DVA-C01) is a pass or fail exam. The examination is scored against a minimum standard established by AWS professionals guided by certification industry best practices and guidelines.
  • Your results for the examination are reported as a score from 100 – 1000, with a minimum passing score of 720.
  • Exam fees: US $150
  • Exam Guide on AWS Website
  • Available languages for tests: English, Japanese, Korean, Simplified Chinese
  • Read AWS whitepapers
  • Register for certification account here.
  • Prepare for Certification Here

  • Exam Content Outline

    Domain% of Examination
    Domain 1: Deployment (22%)
    1.1 Deploy written code in AWS using existing CI/CD pipelines, processes, and patterns.
    1.2 Deploy applications using Elastic Beanstalk.
    1.3 Prepare the application deployment package to be deployed to AWS.
    1.4 Deploy serverless applications    		22%
    Domain 2: Security (26%)
    2.1 Make authenticated calls to AWS services.
    2.2 Implement encryption using AWS services.
    2.3 Implement application authentication and authorization.    		26%
    Domain 3: Development with AWS Services (30%)
    3.1 Write code for serverless applications.
    3.2 Translate functional requirements into application design.
    3.3 Implement application design into application code.
    3.4 Write code that interacts with AWS services by using APIs, SDKs, and AWS CLI.    		30%
    Domain 4: Refactoring
    4.1 Optimize application to best use AWS services and features.
    4.2 Migrate existing application code to run on AWS.    		10%
    Domain 5: Monitoring and Troubleshooting (10%)
    5.1 Write code that can be monitored.
    5.2 Perform root cause analysis on faults found in testing or production.    		10%
    TOTAL100%

Top

Load balancing EC2 Instances in an Autoscaling Group By Neal Davis

 

In this AWS tutorial, we are going to discuss how we can make the best use of AWS services to build a highly scalable, and fault tolerant configuration of EC2 instances. The use of Load Balancers and Auto Scaling Groups falls under a number of best practices in AWS, including Performance Efficiency, Reliability and high availability.

Before we dive into this hands-on tutorial on how exactly we can build this solution, let’s have a brief recap on what an Auto Scaling group is, and what a Load balancer is.

Autoscaling group (ASG)

An Autoscaling group (ASG) is a logical grouping of instances which can scale up and scale down depending on pre-configured settings. By setting Scaling policies of your ASG, you can choose how many EC2 instances are launched and terminated based on your application’s load. You can do this based on manual, dynamic, scheduled or predictive scaling.

Elastic Load Balancer (ELB)

An Elastic Load Balancer (ELB) is a name describing a number of services within AWS designed to distribute traffic across multiple EC2 instances in order to provide enhanced scalability, availability, security and more. The particular type of Load Balancer we will be using today is an Application Load Balancer (ALB). The ALB is a Layer 7 Load Balancer designed to distribute HTTP/HTTPS traffic across multiple nodes – with added features such as TLS termination, Sticky Sessions and Complex routing configurations.

Getting Started

First of all, we open our AWS management console and head to the EC2 management console.

We scroll down on the left-hand side and select ‘Launch Templates’. A Launch Template is a configuration template which defines the settings for EC2 instances launched by the ASG.

Under Launch Templates, we will select “Create launch template”.

We specify the name ‘MyTestTemplate’ and use the same text in the description.

Under the ‘Auto Scaling guidance’ box, tick the box which says ‘Provide guidance to help me set up a template that I can use with EC2 Auto Scaling’ and scroll down to launch template contents.

When it comes to choosing our AMI (Amazon Machine Image) we can choose the Amazon Linux 2 under ‘Quick Start’.

The Amazon Linux 2 AMI is free tier eligible, and easy to use for our demonstration purposes.

Next, we select the ‘t2.micro’ under instance types, as this is also free tier eligible.

Under Network Settings, we create a new Security Group called ExampleSG in our default VPC, allowing HTTP access to everyone. It should look like this.

AWS Certified Developer Associate exam: Additional Information for reference

Below are some useful reference links that would help you to learn about AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam.

Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 

Other Relevant and Recommended AWS Certifications

AWS Certification Exams Roadmap
AWS Certification Exams Roadmap

Top

The Cloud is the future: Get Certified now.
The AWS Certified Solution Architect Average Salary is: US $149,446/year. Get Certified with the App below:

 
#AWS #Developer #AWSCloud #DVAC01 #AWSDeveloper #AWSDev #Djamgatech
 
 
 
 
 
 

Top

Other AWS Facts and Summaries and Questions/Answers Dump

AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep

 
 
 

AWS Certifications Breaking News and Top Stories

    Feed has no items.
 

AWS Developer Associate DVA-C01 Exam Prep
 
 
 

I Passed AWS Developer Associate Certification DVA-C01 Testimonials

Passed DVA-C01

 
AWS Certified Developer Associate

Passed the certified developer associate this week.

Primary study was Stephane Maarek’s course on Udemy.

I also used the Practice Exams by Stephane Maarek and Abhishek Singh.

I used Stephane’s course and practice exams for the Solutions Architect Associate as well, and find his course does a good job preparing you to pass the exams.

The practice exams were more challenging than the actual exam, so they are a good gauge to see if you are ready for the exam.

Haven’t decided if I’ll do another associate level certification next or try for the solutions architect professional.

Cleared AWS Certified Developer – Associate (DVA-C01)

 

I cleared Developer associate exam yesterday. I scored 873.
Actual Exam Exp: More questions were focused on mainly on Lambda, API, Dynamodb, cloudfront, cognito(must know proper difference between user pool and identity pool)
3 questions I found were just for redis vs memecached (so maybe you can focus more here also to know exact use case& difference.) other topic were cloudformation, beanstalk, sts, ec2. Exam was mix of too easy and too tough for me. some questions were one liner and somewhere too long.

Resources: The main resources I used was udemy. Course of Stéphane Maarek and practice exams of Neal Davis and Stéphane Maarek. These exams proved really good and they even helped me in focusing the area which I lacked. And they are up to the level to actual exam, I found 3-4 exact same questions in actual exam(This might be just luck ! ). so I feel, the course of stephane is more than sufficient and you can trust it. I have achieved solution architect associate previously so I knew basic things, so I took around 2 weeks for preparation and revised the Stephen’s course as much as possible. Parallelly I gave the mentioned exams as well, which guided me where to focus more.

Thanks to all of you and feel free to comment/DM me, if you think I can help you in anyway for achieving the same.

Passed the Developer Associate. My Notes.

  1. There was more SNS “fan out” options. None of the Udemy or Tutorial Dojo tests had that.

  2. They aren’t joking about the 30 min check I and expiring your exam if you don’t check in at least 15 mins before hand.

  3. When you finish do a pass over review for multi select questions and check the number required.

  4. Review again and look for gotcha phrases like “least operational cost”, “fastest solution”, “most secure”, and “least expensive”. Change your answers of you put on what “you” would do.

  5. Watch out for questions that mention services that don’t really have anything to do with the problem.

  6. Look at every service mentioned in the question. You can probably think of a better stack for the solution but just adhere to what the present.

  7. If you are clueless of an answer start by ruling out the ones you KNOW are wrong and then guess.

  8. Take as many practice exams like tutorial dojo as you can. On review filter out the review for “incorrect”. Open another tab on the subject and read up or book mark it.

  9. I would get 50-60% first pass at each exam. Then 85-95% after reading the answer and the open tabs and book marks.

  10. If taking the Pearson proctored online test down load the OnVue App as soon as you can. Installing that thing made me miss the 15 min window and I had to rebook and pay. Their checkin is confusing between all the cert portals and their own site. Just use the “Manage Pearson Exams” from the aws cert portal to force auth to theirs.

 

New versions of the Developer (Associate) and DevOps Engineer (Professional) exams in Feb/March 2023

 
AWS Certified DevOps Engineer Professional

AWS Certified Developer – Associate

  • Current version: DVA-C01

  • New version: DVA-C02

  • Last day to take the current exam: 2023-02-27

  • Registration open for the updated exam: 2023-01-31

  • First day to take the updated exam: 2023-02-28

AWS Certified DevOps Engineer – Professional

  • Current version: DOP-C01

  • New version: DOP-C02

  • Last day to take the current exam: 2023-03-06

  • Registration open for the updated exam: 2023-01-31

  • First day to take the updated exam: 2023-03-07

Both updates were posted on 2022-10-04 on https://aws.amazon.com/certification/coming-soon/. The exam guides and practice questions are also available there.

Passed DVA-C01 scored 910

 
AWS Certified Developer Associate

Past January as usual I chose some goals to achieve during 2022, including to obtain an AWS certification. In February I started studying using the Pluralsight platform. The course for developers is a good introduction but is messy sometimes. At the end of the course I had a big picture of the main AWS services but I was really confused by all the different topics. Pluralsight offers alsl some labs that allowed me to practice with AWS services because I my work wasn’t related to cloud.

Then a senior engineer suggested me to study using ACloudGuru platform and I loved their contents. They focus only on the details necessary for the exam. During the videos they show useful list to summarize services and tables to compare them. Moreover they offer a quite unrestricted playground where to put your hands. So i could try their labs but also try my first cloudformation scripts and lambdas. There are also 4 practice exams that are very similar to real questions. Even though their platform is buggy sometimes, the subscription was worth it.

At the same time I purchased the pack of practice questions from Jon Bonso on Udemy and indeed the answer explainations are very detailed and very useful.

For practicing more, I was adding wrong questions to the Anki desktop application but I was revising them on my phone whenever I could. I ended up with 150 different questions on Anki.

In the meantime, in August I left my software engineer job because my boss told me that I was not able to work with cloud technologies. In september I started a new job as cloud engineer in a new company. Finally, in October I passed the Developer Associate exam and I scored 910.

I put a lot of effort into prepare the exam and eventually i got it! However I believe this is just my first step and I want to keep studying. My next objective is the Solutions Architect Associate certification.

AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam Prep - DVA-C01 DVA-C02
AWS Certified Developer Associate Exam Prep – DVA-C01 DVA-C02

Top 100 AWS Solutions Architect Associate Certification Exam Questions and Answers Dump SAA-C03

Top 60 AWS Solution Architect Associate Exam Tips

Posted on

Top 100 AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam Preparation Questions and Answers Dumps

AWS Cloud Practitioner CCP CLF-C01 Certification Exam Prep

Welcome to the Top 100 AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam Preparation Questions and Answers Dumps :

Table of Content:

Definition and Objectives,  

Top 100 Questions and Answers Dumps, 

White papers,  

Courses, Labs and Training Materials,  

Exam info and details,  

References,  

Jobs,

 Others


Custom AI Chatbot

Imagine a 24/7 virtual assistant that never sleeps, always ready to serve customers with instant, accurate responses.

Contact us here to book a demo and receive a personalized value proposition



GeoVision AI

We combine the power of GIS and AI to deliver instant, actionable intelligence for organizations that rely on real-time data gathering. Our unique solution leverages 🍇 GIS best practices and 🍉 Power Automate for GIS integration to collect field data—texts, photos, and geolocation—seamlessly. Then, through 🍊 Generative AI for image analysis, we deliver immediate insights and recommendations right to your team’s inbox and chat tools.

Contact us here to book a demo and receive a personalized value proposition


AWS Certificates, 

AWS Cloud Support Engineer Job Interview Prep,  

Top 20 AWS Training and Certification  Q&A , 

AWS Web Services Cheat Sheet,  

Latest Products & Services at AWS RE:INVENT

AI Unraveled - Master GPT-x, Gemini, Generative AI, LLMs, Prompt Engineering: A simplified Guide For Everyday Users: OpenAI, ChatGPT, Google Gemini, Anthropic Claude, Grok xAI, Generative AI, Large Language Models (LLMs), Llama, Deepmind, Explainable AI (XAI), Discriminative AI, AI Ethics, Machine Learning, Reinforcement Learning, Natural Language Processing, Neural networks, Intelligent agents, GPUs, Q*, RAG, AI Agents, AI Workflows, Vertex AI, AI Quiz, Master Prompt Engineering, Pass AI Certifications, AI Practitioner

AI- Powered Jobs Interview Warmup For Job Seekers

⚽️Comparative Analysis: Top Calgary Amateur Soccer Clubs – Outdoor 2025 Season (Kids' Programs by Age Group)

Ace the AWS Cloud Practitioner Certification CCP CLF-C02 Exam: Prepare and Ace the AWS Cloud Practitioner Certification CCP CLF-C02: Practice Exam, Quizzes, Detailed Answers, Cheat Sheets, Flashcards
Ace the AWS Cloud Practitioner Certification CCP CLF-C02 Exam: Prepare and Ace the AWS Cloud Practitioner Certification CCP CLF-C02: Practice Exam, Quizzes, Detailed Answers, Cheat Sheets, Flashcards
Top 100 AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam Preparation Questions and Answers Dumps
AWS Cloud Practitioner CCP CLF-C02 Certification Exam Prep 2023

The AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner average salary is — $131,465/year

What is the AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam?

The AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam (CLF-C02) is an introduction to AWS services and the intention is to examine the candidates ability to define what the AWS cloud is and its global infrastructure. It provides an overview of AWS core services security aspects, pricing and support services. The main objective is to provide an overall understanding about the Amazon Web Services Cloud platform. The course helps you get the conceptual understanding of the AWS and can help you know about the basics of AWS and cloud computing, including the services, cases and benefits [Get AWS CCP Practice Exam PDF Dumps here]

2023 AWS CCP CLF-C02 Practice Exam Course on   – Top 250+ Questions and Detailed Answers – Success Guaranteed – Save 50% with this link

 

Ace the AWS Cloud Practitioner Certification CCP CLF-C02 Exam (2023)
Prepare and Ace the AWS Cloud Practitioner Certification CCP CLF-C02: Practice Exam, Quizzes for each Exam Category, Detailed Answers, FAQs, I Passed AWS CCP Testimonials, Top 10 Tips and Tricks to help you ace the AWS CCP exam

AWS CCP CLF-C02 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C02 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C02 on Windows 10/11

 

Invest in your future today by enrolling in this Azure Fundamentals - Pass the Azure Fundamentals Exam with Ease: Master the AZ-900 Certification with the Comprehensive Exam Preparation Guide!


AWS Cloud Practitioner Exam Prep - CCP CLF-C01
AWS Cloud Practitioner Exam Prep – CCP CLF-C02

 

 
AWS CCP CLF-C02 on Android 
 
This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is image.png

 

 
AWS CCP CLF-C02 on iOS
 
AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Mock Exams Pro Windows10/11
AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Mock Exams Pro Windows10/11

 

To succeed with the real exam, do not memorize the answers below. It is very important that you understand why a question is right or wrong and the concepts behind it by carefully reading the reference documents in the answers.

Top

AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam Prep (CLF-C02) Questions and Answers 

 

AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam Certification Prep Quiz App

Download AWS Cloud Practitioner Exam Prep Pro App (No Ads, Full Version with Answers) for:

AWS CCP CLF-C02 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C02 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C02 on Windows 10/11

Below we are providing you with:


AI Unraveled: Demystifying Frequently Asked Questions on Artificial Intelligence (OpenAI, ChatGPT, Google Gemini, Generative AI, Discriminative AI, xAI, LLMs, GPUs, Machine Learning, NLP, Promp Engineering)
  • aws cloud practitioner exam questions
  • aws cloud practitioner sample questions
  • aws cloud practitioner exam dumps
  • aws cloud practitioner practice questions and answers
  • aws cloud practitioner practice exam questions and references

Q1: For auditing purposes, your company now wants to monitor all API activity for all regions in your AWS environment. What can you use to fulfill this new requirement?

  • A. For each region, enable CloudTrail and send all logs to a bucket in each region.
  • B. Enable CloudTrail for all regions.
  • C. Ensure one CloudTrail is enabled for all regions.
  • D. Use AWS Config to enable the trail for all regions.

Answer:

Answer: (C) [Get AWS CCP Practice Exam PDF Dumps here] AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Ensure one CloudTrail is enabled for all regions.
Turn on CloudTrail for all regions in your environment and CloudTrail will deliver log files from all regions to one S3 bucket.
AWS CloudTrail is a service that enables governance, compliance, operational auditing, and risk auditing of your AWS account. With CloudTrail, you can log, continuously monitor, and retain account activity related to actions across your AWS infrastructure. CloudTrail provides event history of your AWS account activity, including actions taken through the AWS Management Console, AWS SDKs, command line tools, and other AWS services. This event history simplifies security analysis, resource change tracking, and troubleshooting.

Reference:
AWS CloudTrail


Top

Q2: What is the best solution to provide secure access to an S3 bucket not using the internet?

  • A. Use a VPN connection.
  • B. Use an Internet Gateway.
  • C. Use a VPC Endpoint to access S3.
  • D. Use a NAT Gateway.

Answer:

Answer: iOS – Android (C) AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

[Get AWS CCP Practice Exam PDF Dumps here]

Use a VPC Endpoint to access S3.
A VPC endpoint enables you to privately connect your VPC to supported AWS services and VPC endpoint services powered by PrivateLink without requiring an internet gateway, NAT device, VPN connection, or AWS Direct Connect connection. Instances in your VPC do not require public IP addresses to communicate with resources in the service. Traffic between your VPC and the other service does not leave the Amazon network.

AWS PrivateLink simplifies the security of data shared with cloud-based applications by eliminating the exposure of data to the public Internet.

Reference:
VPC Endpoint


Top

Q3: In the AWS Shared Responsibility Model, which of the following are the responsibility of AWS?

  • A. Securing Edge Locations
  • B. Encrypting data
  • C. Password policies
  • D. Decomissioning data

Answer:

Answer: iOS – Android (A and D) AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

[Get AWS CCP Practice Exam PDF Dumps here]
It is AWS responsibility to secure Edge locations and decommission the data.
AWS responsibility “Security of the Cloud” – AWS is responsible for protecting the infrastructure that runs all of the services offered in the AWS Cloud. This infrastructure is composed of the hardware, software, networking, and facilities that run AWS Cloud services.

Reference:
AWS Shared Responsibility Model


Top

Q4: You have EC2 instances running at 90% utilization and you expect this to continue for at least a year. What type of EC2 instance would you choose to ensure your cost stay at a minimum?

  • A. Dedicated host instances
  • B. On-demand instances
  • C. Spot instances
  • D. Reserved instances

Answer:

Answer: iOS – Android AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

[Get AWS CCP Practice Exam PDF Dumps here]
Reserved instances are the best choice for instances with continuous usage and offer a reduced cost because you purchase the instance for the entire year.
Amazon EC2 Reserved Instances (RI) provide a significant discount (up to 75%) compared to On-Demand pricing and provide a capacity reservation when used in a specific Availability Zone.

Get AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam Practice CCP CLF-C01 eBook Print Book here

Reference:
AWS Reserved instances.


Top

Q5: What tool would you use to get an estimated monthly cost for your environment?

  • A. TCO Calculator
  • B. Simply Monthly Calculator
  • C. Cost Explorer
  • D. Consolidated Billing

Answer:

Answer: iOS – Android (B) Get AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Practice Exam CCP CLF-C01 eBook Print Book here

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

The AWS Simple Monthly Calculator helps customers and prospects estimate their monthly AWS bill more efficiently. Using this tool, they can add, modify and remove services from their ‘bill’ and it will recalculate their estimated monthly charges automatically.

Reference:
AWS Simply Monthly Calculator


Top

Q6: How do you make sure your organization does not exceed its monthly budget?

AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam Prep App
AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam Prep PWA App

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Get AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Practice Exam CCP CLF-C02 eBook Print Book here

  • A. Sign up for the free alert under filing preferences in the AWS Management Console.
  • B. Set a schedule to regularly review the Billing an Cost Management dashboard each month.
  • C. Create an email alert in AWS Budget
  • D. In CloudWatch, create an alarm that triggers each time the limit is exceeded.

Answer:

Answer: iOS – Android (C) [Get AWS CCP Practice Exam PDF Dumps here]
AWS Budgets gives you the ability to set custom budgets that alert you when your costs or usage exceed (or are forecasted to exceed) your budgeted amount.
You can also use AWS Budgets to set reservation utilization or coverage targets and receive alerts when your utilization drops below the threshold you define. Reservation alerts are supported for Amazon EC2, Amazon RDS, Amazon Redshift, Amazon ElastiCache, and Amazon Elasticsearch reservations.

Get AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam Practice CCP CLF-C01 eBook Print Book here

Reference:
AWS Budget.


Top

Q7: An Edge Location is a specialization AWS data centre that works with which services?

  • A. Lambda
  • B. CloudWatch
  • C. CloudFront
  • D. Route 53

Answer:

Answer: Get AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Practice Exam CCP CLF-C02 eBook Print Book here
Lambda@Edge lets you run Lambda functions to customize the content that CloudFront delivers, executing the functions in AWS locations closer to the viewer.
Amazon CloudFront is a web service that speeds up distribution of your static and dynamic web content, such as .html, .css, .js, and image files, to your users. CloudFront delivers your content through a worldwide network of data centers called edge locations. When a user requests content that you’re serving with CloudFront, the user is routed to the edge location that provides the lowest latency (time delay), so that content is delivered with the best possible performance.

CloudFront speeds up the distribution of your content by routing each user request through the AWS backbone network to the edge location that can best serve your content. Typically, this is a CloudFront edge server that provides the fastest delivery to the viewer. Using the AWS network dramatically reduces the number of networks that your users’ requests must pass through, which improves performance. Users get lower latency—the time it takes to load the first byte of the file—and higher data transfer rates.

You also get increased reliability and availability because copies of your files (also known as objects) are now held (or cached) in multiple edge locations around the world.

Reference:
AWS Edge Locations


Top

Q8: What is the preferred method of linking 2 AWS accounts?

  • A. AWS Organizations
  • B. Cost Explorer
  • C. VPC Peering
  • D. Consolidated billing

Answer:

Answer: iOS – Android (A) AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C02 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C02 on Windows 10/11 Get AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Practice Exam CCP CLF-C01 eBook Print Book here
AWS Organizations is an account management service that enables you to consolidate multiple AWS accounts into an organization that you create and centrally manage. AWSOrganizations includes account management and consolidated billing capabilities that enable you to better meet the budgetary, security, and compliance needs of your business.

Ace the Microsoft Azure Fundamentals AZ-900 Certification Exam: Pass the Azure Fundamentals Exam with Ease

Get AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam Practice CCP CLF-C02 eBook Print Book here

Ace the AWS Cloud Practitioner Certification CCP CLF-C02 Exam: Prepare and Ace the AWS Cloud Practitioner Certification CCP CLF-C02: Practice Exam, Quizzes, Detailed Answers, Cheat Sheets, Flashcards
Ace the AWS Cloud Practitioner Certification CCP CLF-C02 Exam: Prepare and Ace the AWS Cloud Practitioner Certification CCP CLF-C02: Practice Exam, Quizzes, Detailed Answers, Cheat Sheets, Flashcards

Reference:
AWS Organizations.


Top

Q9: Which of the following service is most useful when a Disaster Recovery method is triggered in AWS.

  • A. Amazon Route 53
  • B. Amazon SNS
  • C. Amazon SQS
  • D. Amazon Inspector

Answer:

Anser: A.
Route 53 is a domain name system service by AWS. When a Disaster does occur , it can be easy to switch to secondary sites using the Route53 service.
Amazon Route 53 is a highly available and scalable cloud Domain Name System (DNS) web service. It is designed to give developers and businesses an extremely reliable and cost effective way to route end users to Internet applications by translating names like www.example.com into the numeric IP addresses like 192.0.2.1 that
computers use to connect to each other. Amazon Route 53 is fully compliant with IPv6 as well.

Reference: AWS Route 53/

Top

Q10: Which of the following disaster recovery deployment mechanisms that has the highest downtime

  • A. Pilot light
  • B. Warm standby
  • C. Multi Site
  • D. Backup and Restore

Answer: iOS – Android [Get AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam Practice CCP CLF-C01 eBook Print Book here]

Answer: D.
The below snapshot from the AWS Documentation shows the spectrum of the Disaster recovery methods. If you go to the further end of the spectrum you have the least time for downtime for the users.

AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam: AWS Disaster Recovery Techniques

AWS Disaster Recovery Techniques

Reference: AWS Route 53/

Top

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11 [Get AWS CCP Practice Exam PDF Dumps here]

If you are looking for an all-in-one solution to help you prepare for the AWS Cloud Practitioner Certification Exam, look no further than this AWS Cloud Practitioner CCP CLF-C02 book

Q11: Your company is planning to host resources in the AWS Cloud. They want to use services which can be used to decouple resources hosted on the cloud. Which of the following services can help fulfil this requirement?

  • A. AWS EBS Volumes
  • B. AWS EBS Snapshots
  • C. AWS Glacier
  • D. AWS SQS

Answer:


D. AWS SQS: Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS) offers a reliable, highly-scalable hosted queue for storing messages as they travel between applications or microservices. It moves data between distributed application components and helps you decouple these components.

Reference: AWS Simple Queue Service Developer Guive

Top

Q12: If you have a set of frequently accessed files that are used on a daily basis, what S3 storage class should you store them in?

  • A. Infrequent Access
  • B. Fast Access
  • C. Reduced Redundancy
  • D. Standard

Answer:


D. Standard: The Standard storage class should be used for files that you access on a daily or very frequent basis.

Reference: AWS storage-classes/

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11 [Get AWS CCP Practice Exam PDF Dumps here]

AWS Cloud Practitioner CCP CLF-C01 Certification Exam Prep 2023
AWS Cloud Practitioner CCP CLF-C01 Certification Exam Prep 2023

Q13: What is the availability and durability rating of S3 Standard Storage Class?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. 99.999999999% Durability and 99.99% Availability
  • B. 99.999999999% Availability and 99.90% Durability
  • C. 99.999999999% Durability and 99.00% Availability
  • D. 99.999999999% Availability and 99.99% Durability

Answer:


A. 99.999999999% Durability and 99.99% Availability
S3 Standard Storage class has a rating of 99.999999999% durability (referred to as 11 nines) and 99.99% availability.

Reference: AWS storage classes/

Top

Q14: What AWS database is primarily used to analyze data using standard SQL formatting with compatibility for your existing business intelligence tools

  • A. Redshift
  • B. RDS
  • C. DynamoDB
  • D. ElastiCache

Answer:


A. Redshift is a database offering that is fully-managed and used for data warehousing and analytics, including compatibility with existing business intelligence tools.

Reference: AWS redshift/

Top

Q15: What are the benefits of DynamoDB?

Choose the 3 correct answers:

  • A. Single-digit millisecond latency.
  • B. Supports multiple known NoSQL database engines like MariaDB and Oracle NoSQL.
  • C. Supports both document and key-value store data models.
  • D. Automatic scaling of throughput capacity.

Answer:


A. C. D. DynamoDB does not use/support other NoSQL database engines. You only have access to use DynamoDB’s built-in engine.

Reference: AWS DynamoDB

Top

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

[Get AWS CCP Practice Exam PDF Dumps here]

Q16: Which of the following are the benefits of AWS Organizations?

Choose the 2 correct answers:

  • A. Analyze cost before migrating to AWS.
  • B. Centrally manage access polices across multiple AWS accounts.
  • C. Automate AWS account creation and management.
  • D. Provide technical help (by AWS) for issues in your AWS account.

Answer: iOS – Android [Get AWS CCP Practice Exam PDF Dumps here]


B. and C.
CENTRALLY MANAGE POLICIES ACROSS MULTIPLE AWS ACCOUNTS
AUTOMATE AWS ACCOUNT CREATION AND MANAGEMENT
CONTROL ACCESS TO AWS SERVICES
CONSOLIDATE BILLING ACROSS MULTIPLE AWS ACCOUNTS

Reference: AWS organizations/

Q17: There is a requirement hosting a set of servers in the Cloud for a short period of 3 months. Which of the following types of instances should be chosen to be cost effective.

  • A. Spot Instances
  • B. On-Demand
  • C. No Upfront costs Reserved
  • D. Partial Upfront costs Reserved

Answer:


B. Since the requirement is just for 3 months, then the best cost effective option is to use On-Demand Instances.

Reference: AWS pricing on-demand/

Top

Q18: Which of the following is not a disaster recovery deployment technique.

  • A. Pilot light
  • B. Warm standby
  • C. Single Site
  • D. Multi-Site

Answer:

Answer: iOS – Android [Get AWS CCP Practice Exam PDF Dumps here]

The following figure shows a spectrum for the four scenarios, arranged by how quickly a system can be available to users after a DR event.

AWS Disaster Recovery Techniques
AWS Disaster Recovery Techniques

Reference: Disaster Recovery


Top

Q19: Which of the following are attributes to the costing for using the Simple Storage Service. Choose 2 answers from the options given below

  • A. The storage class used for the objects stored.
  • B. Number of S3 buckets.
  • C. The total size in gigabytes of all objects stored.
  • D. Using encryption in S3

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android ( A and C)

Below is a snapshot of the costing calculator for AWS S3.

AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam: S3 storage cost estimator
Amazon S3 is storage for the Internet. It is designed to make web-scale computing easier for developers.

Reference: Calculator ; S3 storage classes

Q20: What endpoints are possible to send messages to with Simple Notification Service?

Choose the 3 correct answers:

  • A. SQS
  • B. SMS
  • C. FTP
  • D. Lambda

Answer:

Top
AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Q21: What service helps you to aggregate logs from your EC2 instance? Choose one answer from the options below:

  • A. SQS
  • B. S3
  • C. Cloudtrail
  • D. Cloudwatch Logs

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (D)

You can use Amazon CloudWatch Logs to monitor, store, and access your log files from Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) instances, AWS CloudTrail, and other sources. You can then retrieve the associated log data from CloudWatch Log.

Reference: AWS CloudWatch Logs

Top

Q22: A company is deploying a new two-tier web application in AWS. The company wants to store their most frequently used data so that the response time for the application is improved. Which AWS service provides the solution for the company’s requirements?

  • A. MySQL Installed on two Amazon EC2 Instances in a single Availability Zone
  • B. Amazon RDS for MySQL with Multi-AZ
  • C. Amazon ElastiCache
  • D. Amazon DynamoDB

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android

Amazon ElastiCache is a web service that makes it easy to deploy, operate, and scale an in-memory data store or cache in the cloud. The service improves the performance of web applications by allowing you to retrieve information from fast, managed, in-memory data stores, instead of relying entirely on slower disk-based databases.

Reference: AWS elasticache/


Top

Q23: You have a distributed application that periodically processes large volumes of data across multiple Amazon EC2 Instances. The application is designed to recover gracefully from Amazon EC2 instance failures. You are required to accomplish this task in the most cost-effective way. Which of the following will meet your requirements?

  • A. Spot Instances
  • B. Reserved Instances
  • C. Dedicated Instances

On-Demand Instances

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android

When you think of cost effectiveness, you can either have to choose Spot or Reserved instances. Now when you have a regular processing job, the best is to use spot instances and since your application is designed recover gracefully from Amazon EC2 instance failures, then even if you lose the Spot instance , there is no issue because your application can recover.

Reference: AWS EC2 spot instances


Top

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Q24: Which of the following features is associated with a Subnet in a VPC to protect against Incoming traffic requests?

  • A. AWS Inspector
  • B. Subnet Groups
  • C. Security Groups
  • D. NACL

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (D) AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

A network access control list (ACL) is an optional layer of security for your VPC that acts as a firewall for controlling traffic in and out of one or more subnets. You might set up network ACLs with rules similar to your security groups in order to add an additional layer of security to your VPC.

Reference: AWS VPC ACLs


Top

Q25: A company is deploying a two-tier, highly available web application to AWS. Which service provides durable storage for static content while utilizing Overall CPU resources for the web tier?

  • A. Amazon EBC volume.
  • B. Amazon S3
  • C. Amazon EC2 instance store
  • D. Amazon RDS instance

Answer:


B. Amazon S3 is the default storage service that should be considered for companies. It provides durable storage for all static content.

Reference: S3 faqs


Top

Q26: What are characteristics of Amazon S3?
Choose 2 answers from the options given below.

  • A. S3 allows you to store objects of virtually unlimited size.
  • B. S3 allows you to store unlimited amounts of data.
  • C. S3 should be used to host relational database.
  • D. Objects are directly accessible via a URL.

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Each object does have a limitation in S3, but you can store virtually unlimited amounts of data. Also each object gets a directly accessible URL

Reference: AWS s3 faqs

Top

Q26: When working on the costing for on-demand EC2 instances , which are the following are attributes which determine the costing of the EC2 Instance. Choose 3 answers from the options given below

  • A. Instance Type
  • B. AMI Type
  • C. Region
  • D. Edge location

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (A. B. C. ) AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

See components making up the pricing below.

AWS AMI Pricing
AWS AMI Pricing

Reference: AWS ec2 pricing on-demand/

Top

Q27: You have a mission-critical application which must be globally available at all times. If this is the case, which of the below deployment mechanisms would you employ

  • A. Deployment to multiple edge locations
  • B. Deployment to multiple Availability Zones
  • D. Deployment to multiple Data Centers
  • D. Deployment to multiple Regions

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (D) AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Regions represent different geographic locations and it is best to host your application across multiple regions for disaster recovery.

Reference: AWS regions availability zones

Top

Q28: Which of the following are right principles when designing cloud based systems. Choose 2 answers from the options below

  • A. Build Tightly-coupled components
  • B. Build loosely-coupled components
  • C. Assume everything will fail
  • D. Use as many services as possible

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android B. and C. AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Always build components which are loosely coupled. This is so that even if one component does fail, the entire system does not fail. Also if you build with the assumption that everything will fail, then you will ensure that the right measures are taken to build a highly available and fault tolerant system.

Reference: AWS Well architected networks

Top

Q29: You have 2 accounts in your AWS account. One for the Dev and the other for QA. All are part of consolidated billing. The master account has purchase 3 reserved instances. The Dev department is currently using 2 reserved instances. The QA team is planning on using 3 instances which of the same instance type. What is the pricing tier of the instances that can be used by the QA Team?

  • A. No Reserved and 3 on-demand
  • B. One Reserved and 2 on-demand
  • C. Two Reserved and 1 on-demand
  • D. Three Reserved and no on-demand

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android

Since all are a part of consolidating billing, the pricing of reserved instances can be shared by All. And since 2 are already used by the Dev team , another one can be used by the QA team. The rest of the instances can be on-demand instances.

Reference: AWS ec2 pricing reserved instances/

Top

Q30: Which one of the following features is normally present in all of AWS Support plans

  • A. 24/7 access to Customer Service
  • B. Access to all features in the Trusted Advisor
  • C. A technical Account Manager
  • D. A dedicated support person

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (A)

AWS Support plans
AWS Support plans

Reference: AWS premium support compare plans

Top

Q31: Which of the following storage mechanisms can be used to store messages effectively which can be used across distributed systems?

  • A. Amazon Glacier
  • B. Amazon EBS Volumes
  • C. Amazon EBS Snapshots
  • D. Amazon SQS

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (D)

Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS) offers a reliable, highly-scalable hosted queue for storing messages as they travel between applications or microservices. It moves data between distributed application components and helps you decouple these components.

Reference: AWS Simple Queue Service

Top

Q32: You are exploring what services AWS has off-hand. You have a large number of data sets that need to be processed. Which of the following services can help fulfil this requirement.

  • A. EMR
  • B. S3
  • C. Glacier
  • D. Storage Gateway

Answer:


A. Amazon EMR helps you analyze and process vast amounts of data by distributing the computational work across a cluster of virtual servers running in the AWS Cloud. The cluster is managed using an open-source framework called Hadoop. Amazon EMR lets you focus on crunching or analyzing your data without having to worry about time-consuming setup, management, and tuning of Hadoop clusters or the compute capacity they rely on.

Reference: AWS Emr

Get AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam Practice CCP CLF-C01 eBook Print Book here

Top

Q33: Which of the following services allows you to analyze EC2 Instances against pre-defined security templates to check for vulnerabilities

  • A. AWS Trusted Advisor
  • B. AWS Inspector
  • C. AWS WAF
  • D. AWS Shield

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (B)

Amazon Inspector enables you to analyze the behaviour of your AWS resources and helps you to identify potential security issues. Using Amazon Inspector, you can define a collection of AWS resources that you want to include in an assessment target. You can then create an assessment template and launch a security
assessment run of this target.

Reference: AWS inspector introduction


Top

Q34: Your company is planning to offload some of the batch processing workloads on to AWS. These jobs can be interrupted and resumed at any time. Which of the following instance types would be the most cost effective to use for this purpose.

  • A. On-Demand
  • B. Spot
  • C. Full Upfront Reserved
  • D. Partial Upfront Reserved

Answer:


B. Spot Instances are a cost-effective choice if you can be flexible about when your applications run and if your applications can be interrupted. For example, Spot Instances are well-suited for data analysis, batch jobs, background processing, and optional tasks

Reference: AWS Spot Instances

Get AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Practice Exam CCP CLF-C01 eBook Print Book here

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Top

Q35: Which of the following is not a category recommendation given by the AWS Trusted Advisor?

  • A. Security
  • B. High Availability
  • C. Performance
  • D. Fault tolerance

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (B)

AWS Trusted advisor

Reference: AWS Trust Advisor

Top

Q36: Which of the below cannot be used to get data onto Amazon Glacier.

  • A. AWS Glacier API
  • B. AWS Console
  • C. AWS Glacier SDK
  • D. AWS S3 Lifecycle policies

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (B)

Note that the AWS Console cannot be used to upload data onto Glacier. The console can only be used to create a Glacier vault which can be used to upload the data.

Reference: Uploading an archive in AWS

Top

Q37: Which of the following from AWS can be used to transfer petabytes of data from on-premise locations to the AWS Cloud.

  • A. AWS Import/Export
  • B. AWS EC2
  • C. AWS Snowball
  • D. AWS Transfer

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (C)

Snowball is a petabyte-scale data transport solution that uses secure appliances to transfer large amounts of data& into and out of the AWS cloud. Using Snowball addresses common challenges with large-scale data transfers including high network costs, long transfer times, and security concerns. Transferring data with Snowball is simple, fast, secure, and can be as little as one-fifth the cost of high-speed Internet.

Reference: AWS snowball

Top

Q38: Which of the following services allows you to analyze EC2 Instances against pre-defined security templates to check for vulnerabilities

  • A. AWS Trusted Advisor
  • B. AWS Inspector
  • C. AWS WAF
  • D. AWS Shield

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android

Amazon Inspector enables you to analyze the behavior of your AWS resources and helps you to identify potential security issues. Using Amazon Inspector, you can define a collection of AWS resources that you want to include in an assessment target. You can then create an assessment template and launch a security
assessment run of this target.

Reference: AWS Inspector


Top

Q39: Your company wants to move an existing Oracle database to the AWS Cloud. Which of the following services can help facilitate this move.

  • A. AWS Database Migration Service
  • B. AWS VM Migration Service
  • C. AWS Inspector
  • D. AWS Trusted Advisor

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (A)

AWS Database Migration Service helps you migrate databases to AWS quickly and securely. The source database remains fully operational during the migration, minimizing downtime to applications that rely on the database. The AWS Database Migration Service can migrate your data to and from most widely used commercial and open source databases.

Reference: AWS dms


Top


AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Q40: Which of the following features of AWS RDS allows for offloading reads of the database.

  • A. Cross region replication
  • B. Creating Read Replica’s
  • C. Using snapshots
  • D. Using Multi-AZ feature

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (B)

You can reduce the load on your source DB Instance by routing read queries from your applications to the read replica. Read replicas allow you to elastically scale out beyond the capacity constraints of a single DB instance for read-heavy database workloads.

Reference: AWS read replicas


Top

Q41: Which of the following does AWS perform on its behalf for EBS volumes to make it less prone to failure?

  • A. Replication of the volume across Availability Zones
  • B. Replication of the volume in the same Availability Zone
  • C. Replication of the volume across Regions
  • D. Replication of the volume across Edge locations

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android

When you create an EBS volume in an Availability Zone, it is automatically replicated within that zone to prevent data loss due to failure of any single hardware component

Reference: AWS EBS Volumes

Top

Q42: Your company is planning to host a large e-commerce application on the AWS Cloud. One of their major concerns is Internet attacks such as DDos attacks.

Which of the following services can help mitigate this concern. Choose 2 answers from the options given below

  • A. A. Cloudfront
  • B. AWS Shield
  • C. C. AWS EC2
  • D. AWS Config

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (A. and B. )

One of the first techniques to mitigate DDoS attacks is to minimize the surface area that can be attacked thereby limiting the options for attackers and allowing you to build protections in a single place. We want to ensure that we do not expose our application or resources to ports, protocols or applications from where they do not expect any communication. Thus, minimizing the possible points of attack and letting us concentrate our mitigation efforts. In some cases, you can do this by placing your computation resources behind Content Distribution
Networks (CDNs), Load Balancers and restricting direct Internet traffic to certain parts of your infrastructure
like your database servers. In other cases, you can use firewalls or Access Control Lists (ACLs) to control what traffic reaches your applications.

Reference: ddos attack protection/

Top

Q43: Which of the following are 2 ways that AWS allows to link accounts

  • A. Consolidating billing
  • B. AWS Organizations
  • C. Cost Explorer
  • D. IAM

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android

You can use the consolidated billing feature in AWS Organizations to consolidate payment for multiple AWS accounts or multiple AISPL accounts. With consolidated billing, you can see a combined view of AWS charges incurred by all of your accounts. You also can get a cost report for each member account that is associated with your master account. Consolidated billing is offered at no additional charge.

Reference: AWS Consolidated billing

Top


Q44: Which of the following helps in DDos protection. Choose 2 answers from the options given below

  • A. Cloudfront
  • B. AWS Shield
  • C. AWS EC2
  • D. AWS Config

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android ( A. and B. )

One of the first techniques to mitigate DDoS attacks is to minimize the surface area that can be attacked thereby limiting the options for attackers and allowing you to build protections in a single place. We want to ensure that we do not expose our application or resources to ports, protocols or applications from where they do not expect any communication. Thus, minimizing the possible points of attack and letting us concentrate our mitigation efforts. In some cases, you can do this by placing your computation resources behind; Content Distribution Networks (CDNs), Load Balancers and restricting direct Internet traffic to certain parts of your infrastructure like your database servers. In other cases, you can use firewalls or Access Control Lists (ACLs) to control what traffic reaches your applications.

Reference: AWS shield – ddos attack protection/

Top

Q45: Which of the following can be used to call AWS services from programming languages

  • A. AWS SDK
  • B. AWS Console
  • C. AWS CLI
  • D. AWS IAM

Answer:

Answer: iOS – Android (A)
AWS SDK can be plugged in for various programming languages. Using the SDK you can then call the required AWS services.

Reference: AWS tools

Q46: A company wants to host a self-managed database in AWS. How would you ideally implement this solution?

  • A. Using the AWS DynamoDB service
  • B. Using the AWS RDS service
  • C. Hosting a database on an EC2 Instance
  • D. Using the Amazon Aurora service

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (C)

If you want a self-managed database, that means you want complete control over the database engine and the underlying infrastructure. In such a case you need to host the database on an EC2 Instance

Reference: AWS ec2

Top

Q47: When creating security groups, which of the following is a responsibility of the customer. Choose 2 answers from the options given below.

  • A. Giving a name and description for the security group
  • B. Defining the rules as per the customer requirements.
  • C. Ensure the rules are applied immediately
  • D. Ensure the security groups are linked to the Elastic Network interface

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (A. and B.)

When you define security rules for EC2 Instances, you give a name, description and write the rules for the security group

Reference: AWS using Network Security Groups

Top

Q48: There is a requirement to host a database server for a minimum period of one year. Which of the following would result in the least cost?

  • A. Spot Instances
  • B. On-Demand
  • C. No Upfront costs Reserved
  • D. Partial Upfront costs Reserved

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (D.)

If the database is going to be used for a minimum of one year at least , then it is better to get Reserved Instances. You can save on costs , and if you use a partial upfront options , you can get a better discount

Reference: AWS Reserved Instances

Top

Q49: Which of the below can be used to import data into Amazon Glacier?
Choose 3 answers from the options given below:

  • A. AWS Glacier API
  • B. AWS Console
  • C. AWS Glacier SDK
  • D. AWS S3 Lifecycle policies

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (A. C. and D. )

The AWS Console cannot be used to upload data onto Glacier. The console can only be used to create a Glacier vault which can be used to upload the data.

Reference: Uploading an archive in AWS

Top

Q50: Which of the following can be used to secure EC2 Instances hosted in AWS. Choose 2 answers

  • A. Usage of Security Groups
  • B. Usage of AMI’s
  • C. Usage of Network Access Control Lists
  • D. Usage of the Internet gateway

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android

Security groups acts as a virtual firewall for your instance to control inbound and outbound traffic. Network access control list (ACL) is an optional layer of security for your VPC that acts as a firewall for
controlling traffic in and out of one or more subnets.

Reference: VPC Security Groups and Network Access Control List

Top

Q51: Which of the following can be used to host virtual servers on AWS

  • A. AWS IAM
  • B. AWS Server
  • C. AWS EC2
  • D. AWS Regions

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (C.)

AWS EC2

Reference: AWS ec2

Top

Q52: You plan to deploy an application on AWS. This application needs to be PCI Compliant. Which of the below steps are needed to ensure the compliance? Choose 2 answers from the below list:

  • A. Choose AWS services which are PCI Compliant
  • B. Ensure the right steps are taken during application development for PCI Compliance
  • C. Encure the AWS Services are made PCI Compliant
  • D. Do an audit after the deployment of the application for PCI Compliance.

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android

Q53: Which tool can you use to forecast your AWS spending?

  • A. AWS organizations
  • B. Amazon Dev pay
  • C. AWS Trusted Advisor
  • D. AWS Cost explorer

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (D)

AWS Cost Explorer lets you dive deeper into your cost and usage data to identify trends, pinpoint cost drivers, and detect anomalies.

Reference: AWS Cost Explorer Docs

Q54: The Trusted Advisor service provides insight regarding which four categories of an AWS account?

  • A. Security, fault tolerance, high availability, performance and Service Limits
  • B. Security, access control, high availability, performance and Service Limits
  • C. Performance, cost optimization, Security, fault tolerance and Service Limits
  • D. Performance, cost optimization, Access Control, Connectivity, and Service Limits

Answer:


C. Performance, cost optimization, Security, fault tolerance and Service Limits

Reference: AWS trusted advisor


Top

Q55: As per the AWS Acceptable Use Policy, penetration testing of EC2 instances

  • A. May be performed by AWS, and will be performed by AWS upon customer request
  • B. May be performed by AWS, and is periodically performed by AWS
  • C. Are expressly prohibited under all circumtances
  • D. May be performed by the customer on their own instances with prior authorization from AWS
  • E. May be performed by the customer on their own instances, only if performed from EC2 instances

Answer:


D. You need to take authorization from AWS before doing a penetration test on EC2 instances.

Reference: AWS pen testing


Top

Q56: What is the AWS feature that enables fast, easy, and secure transfers of files over long distances between your client and your Amazon S3 bucket

  • A. File Transfer
  • B. HTTP Transfer
  • C. Transfer Acceleration
  • D. S3 Acceleration

Answer:


C. Transfer Acceleration

Reference: AWS transfer acceleration examples


Top

Q56: What best describes an AWS region?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. The physical networking connections between Availability Zones.
  • B. A specific location where an AWS data center is located.
  • C. A collection of DNS servers.
  • D. An isolated collection of AWS Availability Zones, of which there are many placed all around the world.

Answer:


D: An AWS region is an isolated geographical area that is is comprised of three or more AWS Availability Zones.

Reference:Concepts Regions And AvailabilityZones


Top

Q57: Which of the following is a factor when calculating Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) for the AWS Cloud?

  • A. The number of servers migrated to AWS
  • B. The number of users migrated to AWS
  • C. The number of passwords migrated to AWS
  • D. The number of keys migrated to AWS

Answer:

A. Running servers will incur costs. The number of running servers is one factor of Server Costs; a key component of AWS’s Total Cost of Ownership (TCO). Reference: AWS cost calculator

Top

Q58: Which AWS Services can be used to store files? Choose 2 answers from the options given below:

  • A. Amazon CloudWatch
  • B. Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3)
  • C. Amazon Elastic Block Store (Amazon EBS)
  • D. AWS COnfig
  • D. AWS Amazon Athena

B. and C. Amazon S3 is a Object storage built to store and retrieve any amount of data from anywhere. Amazon Elastic Block Store is a Persistent block storage for Amazon EC2.

Reference: AWS s3 and AWS EBS

Q59: What best describes Amazon Web Services (AWS)?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. AWS is the cloud.
  • B. AWS only provides compute and storage services.
  • C. AWS is a cloud services provider.
  • D. None of the above.

Answer:


C: AWS is defined as a cloud services provider. They provide hundreds of services of which compute and storage are included (not not limited to).
Reference: AWS

Q60: Which AWS service can be used as a global content delivery network (CDN) service?

  • A. Amazon SES
  • B. Amazon CouldTrail
  • C. Amazon CloudFront
  • D. Amazon S3

Answer:

C: Amazon CloudFront is a web service that gives businesses and web application developers an easy
and cost effective way to distribute content with low latency and high data transfer speeds. Like other AWS services, Amazon CloudFront is a self-service, pay-per-use offering, requiring no long term commitments or minimum fees. With CloudFront, your files are delivered to end-users using a global network of edge locations.Reference: AWS cloudfront

Top

Q61: What best describes the concept of fault tolerance?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. The ability for a system to withstand a certain amount of failure and still remain functional.
  • B. The ability for a system to grow in size, capacity, and/or scope.
  • C. The ability for a system to be accessible when you attempt to access it.
  • D. The ability for a system to grow and shrink based on demand.

Answer:


A: Fault tolerance describes the concept of a system (in our case a web application) to have failure in some of its components and still remain accessible (highly available). Fault tolerant web applications will have at least two web servers (in case one fails).

Reference:Designing fault tolerant applications/

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Q62: The firm you work for is considering migrating to AWS. They are concerned about cost and the initial investment needed. Which of the following features of AWS pricing helps lower the initial investment amount needed?

Choose 2 answers from the options given below:

  • A. The ability to choose the lowest cost vendor.
  • B. The ability to pay as you go
  • C. No upfront costs
  • D. Discounts for upfront payments

Answer:
B and C: The best features of moving to the AWS Cloud is: No upfront cost and The ability to pay as you go where the customer only pays for the resources needed. Reference: AWS pricing

Top

Q63: What best describes the concept of elasticity?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. The ability for a system to grow in size, capacity, and/or scope.
  • B. The ability for a system to grow and shrink based on demand.
  • C. The ability for a system to withstand a certain amount of failure and still remain functional.
  • D. ability for a system to be accessible when you attempt to access it.

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android B:

Elasticity (think of a rubber band) defines a system that can easily (and cost-effectively) grow and shrink based on required demand.

Reference:Cost optimization automating elasticity

Q64: Your company has started using AWS. Your IT Security team is concerned with the security of hosting resources in the Cloud. Which AWS service provides security optimization recommendations that could help the IT Security team secure resources using AWS?

  • A. AWS API Gateway
  • B. Reserved Instances
  • C. AWS Trusted Advisor
  • D. AWS Spot Instances

Answer:

Answer: iOS – Android C:

An online resource to help you reduce cost, increase performance, and improve security by optimizing your AWS environment, Trusted Advisor provides real time guidance to help you provision your resources following AWS best practices. Reference: AWS trusted advisor

Q65: What is the relationship between AWS global infrastructure and the concept of high availability?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. AWS is centrally located in one location and is subject to widespread outages if something happens at that one location.
  • B. AWS regions and Availability Zones allow for redundant architecture to be placed in isolated parts of the world.
  • C. Each AWS region handles a different AWS services, and you must use all regions to fully use AWS.
  • D. None of the above

Answer


Answer: iOS – Android

As an AWS user, you can create your applications infrastructure and duplicate it. By placing duplicate infrastructure in multiple regions, high availability is created because if one region fails you have a backup (in a another region) to use.

Reference:RDS Concepts MultiAZ

Q66: You are hosting a number of EC2 Instances on AWS. You are looking to monitor CPU Utilization on the Instance. Which service would you use to collect and track performance metrics for AWS services?

  • A. Amazon CloudFront
  • B. Amazon CloudSearch
  • C. Amazon CloudWatch
  • D. AWS Managed Services

Top

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Answer:

Answer: iOS – Android C: Amazon CloudWatch is a monitoring service for AWS cloud resources and the applications you run on AWS. You can use Amazon CloudWatch to collect and track metrics, collect and monitor log files, set alarms, and automatically react to changes in your AWS resources. Reference: AWS cloudwatch

Q67: Which of the following support plans give access to all the checks in the Trusted Advisor service.

Choose 2 answers from the options given below:

  • A. Basic
  • B. Business
  • C. Enterprise
  • D. None

Answer:
Answer: iOS – Android B and C: Reference: AWS Premium support compare plans

Q68: Which of the following in AWS maps to a separate geographic location?

A. AWS Region
B. AWS Data Centers
C. AWS Availability Zone

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android A: Amazon cloud computing resources are hosted in multiple locations world-wide. These locations are composed of AWS Regions and Availability Zones. Each AWS Region is a separate geographic area. Reference: AWS Regions And Availability Zone

Top

Q69: What best describes the concept of scalability?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. The ability for a system to grow and shrink based on demand.
  • B. The ability for a system to grow in size, capacity, and/or scope.
  • C. The ability for a system be be accessible when you attempt to access it.
  • D. The ability for a system to withstand a certain amount of failure and still remain functional.

Answer

Answer: iOS – Android B: Scalability refers to the concept of a system being able to easily (and cost-effectively) scale UP. For web applications, this means the ability to easily add server capacity when demand requires.

Reference:AWS autoscaling

Q70: If you wanted to monitor all events in your AWS account, which of the below services would you use?

  • A. AWS CloudWatch
  • B. AWS CloudWatch logs
  • C. AWS Config
  • D. AWS CloudTrail

Answer:

D: AWS CloudTrail is a service that enables governance, compliance, operational auditing, and risk
auditing of your AWS account. With CloudTrail, you can log, continuously monitor, and retain account activity related to actions across your AWS infrastructure. CloudTrail provides event history of your AWS account activity, including actions taken through the AWS Management Console, AWS SDKs, command line tools, and other AWS services. This event history simplifies security analysis, resource change tracking, and troubleshooting. Reference: Cloudtrail

Top

Q71: What are the four primary benefits of using the cloud/AWS?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. Fault tolerance, scalability, elasticity, and high availability.
  • B. Elasticity, scalability, easy access, limited storage.
  • C. Fault tolerance, scalability, sometimes available, unlimited storage
  • D. Unlimited storage, limited compute capacity, fault tolerance, and high availability.

Answer:

Answer: iOS – Android Fault tolerance, scalability, elasticity, and high availability are the four primary benefits of AWS/the cloud.

Q72: What best describes a simplified definition of the “cloud”?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. All the computers in your local home network.
  • B. Your internet service provider
  • C. A computer located somewhere else that you are utilizing in some capacity.
  • D. An on-premise data center that your company owns.

Answer


Answer: iOS – Android (D) The simplest definition of the cloud is a computer that is located somewhere else that you are utilizing in some capacity. AWS is a cloud services provider, as the provide access to computers they own (located at AWS data centers), that you use for various purposes.

Top

Q73: Your development team is planning to host a development environment on the cloud. This consists of EC2 and RDS instances. This environment will probably only be required for 2 months.

Which types of instances would you use for this purpose?

  • A. On-Demand
  • B. Spot
  • C. Reserved
  • D. Dedicated

Answer:

Answer: iOS – Android (A) The best and cost effective option would be to use On-Demand Instances. The AWS documentation gives the following additional information on On-Demand EC2 Instances. With On-Demand instances you only pay for EC2 instances you use. The use of On-Demand instances frees you from the costs and complexities of planning, purchasing, and maintaining hardware and transforms what are commonly large fixed costs into much smaller variable costs. Reference: AWS ec2 pricing on-demand

Q74: Which of the following can be used to secure EC2 Instances?

  • A. Security Groups
  • B. EC2 Lists
  • C. AWS Configs
  • D. AWS CloudWatch

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Answer:

Answer: iOS – Android security groups acts as a virtual firewall for your instance to control inbound and outbound traffic. When you launch an instance in a VPC, you can assign up to five security groups to the instance. Security groups act at the instance level, not the subnet level. Therefore, each instance in a subnet in your VPC could be assigned to a different set of security groups. If you don’t specify a particular group at launch time, the instance is automatically assigned to the default security group for the VPC. Reference: VPC Security Groups

Q75: What is the purpose of a DNS server?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. To act as an internet search engine.
  • B. To protect you from hacking attacks.
  • C. To convert common language domain names to IP addresses.
  • D. To serve web application content.

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (C)

Domain name system servers act as a “third party” that provides the service of converting common language domain names to IP addresses (which are required for a web browser to properly make a request for web content).

Top

Q76:What best describes the concept of high availability?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. The ability for a system to grow in size, capacity, and/or scope.
  • B. The ability for a system to withstand a certain amount of failure and still remain functional.
  • C. The ability for a system to grow and shrink based on demand.
  • D. The ability for a system to be accessible when you attempt to access it.

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (D)

High availability refers to the concept that something will be accessible when you try to access it. An object or web application is “highly available” when it is accessible a vast majority of the time.


Top

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Q77: What is the major difference between AWS’s RDS and DynamoDB database services?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. RDS offers NoSQL database options, and DynamoDB offers SQL database options.
  • B. RDS offers one SQL database option, and DynamoDB offers many NoSQL database options.
  • C. RDS offers SQL database options, and DynamoDB offers a NoSQL database option.
  • D. None of the above

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (C.)

RDS is a SQL database service (that offers several database engine options), and DynamoDB is a NoSQL database option that only offers one NoSQL engine.

Reference:

Q78: What are two open source in-memory engines supported by ElastiCache?

Choose the 2 correct answers:

  • A. CacheIt
  • B. Aurora
  • C. MemcacheD
  • D. Redis

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (C. and D.)

Redis, MemcacheD

Reference: AWS Elasticache/

Top

Q79: What AWS database service is used for data warehousing of petabytes of data?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. RDS
  • B. Elasticache
  • C. Redshift
  • D. DynamoDB

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (C.)

Redshift is a fully-managed data warehouse that is perfect for storing petabytes worth of data.

Reference: AWS Redshift

Q80: Which AWS service uses a combination of publishers and subscribers?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. Lambda
  • B. RDS
  • C. EC2
  • D. SNS

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android

In SNS, there are two types of clients: publishers and subscribers. Publishers send the message, and subscribers receive the message.

Reference: AWS SNS

Q81: What SQL database engine options are available in RDS?

Choose the 3 correct answers:

  • A. MySQL
  • B. MongoDB
  • C. PostgreSQL
  • D. MariaDB

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (A. C. and ….)

RDS offers the following SQL options: Aurora MySQL MariaDB PostgreSQL Oracle Microsoft SQLServer

Reference:

Q81: What is the name of AWS’s RDS SQL database engine?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. Lightsail
  • B. Aurora
  • C. MySQL
  • D. SNS

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (B.) AWS created their own custom SQL database engine, which is called Aurora.

Reference: AWS Aurora

Q82: Under what circumstances would you choose to use the AWS service CloudTrail?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. When you want to log what actions various IAM users are taking in your AWS account.
  • B. When you want a serverless compute platform.
  • C. When you want to collect and view resource metrics.
  • D. When you want to send SMS notifications based on events that occur in your account.

Answer:


AAnswer: iOS – Android (A). When you want to log what actions various IAM users are taking in your AWS account.

Reference: AWS Cloudtrail

Q83: If you want to monitor the average CPU usage of your EC2 instances, which AWS service should you use?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. CloudMonitor
  • B. CloudTrail
  • C. CloudWatch
  • D. None of the above

Answer:


C. CloudWatch is used to collect, view, and track metrics for resources (such as EC2 instances) in your AWS account.

Reference: AWS CloudWatch

Q84: What is AWS’s relational database service?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. ElastiCache
  • B. DymamoDB
  • C. RDS
  • D. Redshift

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (C)

RDS offers SQL database options – otherwise known as relational databases.

Reference: AWS RDS

Top

Q85: If you want to have SMS or email notifications sent to various members of your department with status updates on resources in your AWS account, what service should you choose?

Choose the correct answer:

  • A. SNS
  • B. GetSMS
  • C. RDS
  • D. STS

Answer:


Answer: iOS – Android (A) Simple Notification Service (SNS) is what publishes messages to SMS and/or email endpoints.

Reference: AWS SNS

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Q86: Which AWS service can provide a Desktop as a Service (DaaS) solution?

A. EC2

B. AWS Systems Manager

C. Amazon WorkSpaces

D. Elastic Beanstalk

Answer: iOS – Android

Amazon WorkSpaces is a managed, secure Desktop-as-a-Service (DaaS) solution. You can use Amazon WorkSpaces to provision either Windows or Linux desktops in just a few minutes and quickly scale to provide thousands of desktops to workers across the globe

Q87: Your company has recently migrated large amounts of data to the AWS cloud in S3 buckets. But it is necessary to discover and protect the sensitive data in these buckets. Which AWS service can do that?

A. GuardDuty

B. Amazon Macie

C. CloudTrail

D. AWS Inspector

Answer: iOS – Android (B)

Notes: Amazon Macie is a fully managed data security and data privacy service that uses machine learning and pattern matching to discover and protect your sensitive data in AWS.

Q88: Your Finance Department has instructed you to save costs wherever possible when using the AWS Cloud. You notice that using reserved EC2 instances on a 1year contract will save money. What payment method will save the most money?

A: Deferred

B: Partial Upfront

C: All Upfront

D: No Upfront

Answer: C

Notes: With the All Upfront option, you pay for the entire Reserved Instance term with one upfront payment. This option provides you with the largest discount compared to On Demand Instance pricing.

Q89: A fantasy sports company needs to run an application for the length of a football season (5 months). They will run the application on an EC2 instance and there can be no interruption. Which purchasing option best suits this use case?

A. On-Demand

B. Reserved

C. Dedicated

D. Spot

Answer: iOS – Android (A)

Notes: This is not a long enough term to make reserved instances the better option. Plus, the application can’t be interrupted, which rules out spot instances. Dedicated instances provide the option to bring along existing software licenses. 

The scenario does not indicate a need to do this.

Q90: Your company is considering migrating its data center to the cloud. What are the advantages of the AWS cloud over an on-premises data center?

A. Replace upfront operational expenses with low variable operational expenses.

B. Maintain physical access to the new data center, but share responsibility with AWS.

C. Replace low variable costs with upfront capital expenses.

D. Replace upfront capital expenses with low variable costs.

Q91:  You are leading a pilot program to try the AWS Cloud for one of your applications. You have been instructed to provide an estimate of your AWS bill. Which service will allow you to do this by manually entering your planned resources by service?

A. AWS CloudTrail

B. AWS Cost and Usage Report

C. AWS Pricing Calculator

D. AWS Cost Explorer

Answer: iOS – Android (C)

Notes: With the AWS Pricing Calculator, you can input the services you will use, and the configuration of those services, and get an estimate of the costs these services will accrue. AWS Pricing Calculator lets you explore AWS services, and create an estimate for the cost of your use cases on AWS.

Q92: Which AWS service would enable you to view the spending distribution in one of your AWS accounts?

A. AWS Spending Explorer

B. Billing Advisor

C. AWS Organizations

D. AWS Cost Explorer

Answer: iOS – Android

Notes: AWS Cost Explorer is a free tool that you can use to view your costs and usage. You can view data up to the last 13 months, forecast how much you are likely to spend for the next three months, and get recommendations for what Reserved Instances to purchase. You can use AWS Cost Explorer to see patterns in how much you spend on AWS resources over time, identify areas that need further inquiry, and see trends that you can use to understand your costs. You can also specify time ranges for the data, and view time data by day or by month.

Q93: You are managing the company’s AWS account. The current support plan is Basic, but you would like to begin using Infrastructure Event Management. What support plan (that already includes Infrastructure Event Management without an additional fee) should you upgrade to?

A. Upgrade to Enterprise plan.

B. Do nothing. It is included in the Basic plan.

C. Upgrade to Developer plan.

D. Upgrade to the Business plan. No other steps are necessary.

Answer: iOS – Android (A)

Notes: AWS Infrastructure Event Management is a structured program available to Enterprise support customers (and Business Support customers for an additional fee) that helps you plan for large-scale events, such as product or application launches, infrastructure migrations, and marketing events.

With Infrastructure Event Management, you get strategic planning assistance before your event, as well as real-time support during these moments that matter most for your business.

Q94: You have decided to use the AWS Cost and Usage Report to track your EC2 Reserved Instance costs. To where can these reports be published?

A. Trusted Advisor

B. An S3 Bucket that you own.

C. CloudWatch

D. An AWS owned S3 Bucket.

Answer: B

Notes: The AWS Cost and Usage Reports (AWS CUR) contains the most comprehensive set of cost and usage data available. You can use Cost and Usage Reports to publish your AWS billing reports to an Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3) bucket that you own. You can receive reports that break down your costs by the hour or day, by product or product resource, or by tags that you define yourself. AWS updates the report in your bucket once a day in comma-separated value (CSV) format. You can view the reports using spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel or Apache OpenOffice Calc, or access them from an application using the Amazon S3 API.

Q95: What can we do in AWS to receive the benefits of volume pricing for your multiple AWS accounts?

A. Use consolidated billing in AWS Organizations.

B. Purchase services in bulk from AWS Marketplace.

C. Use AWS Trusted Advisor

D. You will receive volume pricing by default.

Answer: iOS – Android (A)

Notes: You can use the consolidated billing feature in AWS Organizations to consolidate billing and payment for multiple AWS accounts or multiple Amazon Internet Services Pvt. Ltd (AISPL) accounts. You can combine the usage across all accounts in the organization to share the volume pricing discounts, Reserved Instance discounts, and Savings Plans. This can result in a lower charge for your project, department, or company than with individual standalone accounts.

Q96: A gaming company is using the AWS Developer Tool Suite to develop, build, and deploy their applications. Which AWS service can be used to trace user requests from end-to-end through the application?

A. AWS X-Ray

B. CloudWatch

C. AWS Inspector

D. CloudTrail

Answer: iOS – Android (A)

Notes: AWS X-Ray helps developers analyze and debug production, distributed applications, such as those built using a microservices architecture. With X-Ray, you can understand how your application and its underlying services are performing to identify and troubleshoot the root cause of performance issues and errors. X-Ray provides an end-to-end view of requests as they travel through your application, and shows a map of your application’s underlying components.

Q97: A company needs to use a Load Balancer which can serve traffic at the TCP, and UDP layers. Additionally, it needs to handle millions of requests per second at very low latencies. Which Load Balancer should they use?

A. TCP Load Balancer

B. Application Load Balancer

C. Classic Load Balancer

D. Network Load Balancer

Answer: iOS – Android

Notes: Network Load Balancer is best suited for load balancing of Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transport Layer Security (TLS) traffic where extreme performance is required. Operating at the connection level (Layer 4), Network Load Balancer routes traffic to targets within Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC) and is capable of handling millions of requests per second while maintaining ultra-low latencies.

Q98: Your company is migrating its services to the AWS cloud. The DevOps team has heard about infrastructure as code, and wants to investigate this concept. Which AWS service would they investigate?

A. AWS CloudFormation

B. AWS Lambda

C. CodeCommit

D. Elastic Beanstalk

Answer: iOS – Android (A)

Notes: AWS CloudFormation is a service that helps you model and set up your Amazon Web Services resources so that you can spend less time managing those resources and more time focusing on your applications that run in AWS.

Q99: You have a MySQL database that you want to migrate to the cloud, and you need it to be significantly faster there. You are looking for a speed increase up to 5 times the current performance. Which AWS offering could you use?

A. Elasticache

B. Amazon Aurora

C. DynamoDB

D. Amazon RDS MySQL

Answer: iOS – Android (B)

Notes: Amazon Aurora is a MySQL and PostgreSQL-compatible relational database built for the cloud, that combines the performance and availability of traditional enterprise databases with the simplicity and cost-effectiveness of open source databases. Amazon Aurora is up to five times faster than standard MySQL databases and three times faster than standard PostgreSQL databases.

Q100:A developer is trying to programmatically retrieve information from an EC2 instance such as public keys, ip address, and instance id. From where can this information be retrieved?

A. Instance metadata

B. Instance Snapshot

C. CloudWatch Logs

D. Instance userdata

Answer: iOS – Android (A)

Notes: This type of data is stored in Instance metadata. Instance userdata does not retrieve the information mentioned, but can be used to help configure a new instance.

Q101: Why is AWS more economical than traditional data centers for applications with varying compute workloads?

A) Amazon EC2 costs are billed on a monthly basis.
B) Users retain full administrative access to their Amazon EC2 instances.
C) Amazon EC2 instances can be launched on demand when needed.
D) Users can permanently run enough instances to handle peak workloads.


Answer: C
Notes: The ability to launch instances on demand when needed allows users to launch and terminate instances in response to a varying workload. This is a more economical practice than purchasing enough on-premises servers to handle the peak load.
Reference:  Advantage of cloud computing

Q102: Which AWS service would simplify the migration of a database to AWS?

A) AWS Storage Gateway
B) AWS Database Migration Service (AWS DMS)
C) Amazon EC2
D) Amazon AppStream 2.0


Answer: B
Notes: AWS DMS helps users migrate databases to AWS quickly and securely. The source database remains fully operational during the migration, minimizing downtime to applications that rely on the database. AWS DMS can migrate data to and from most widely used commercial and open-source databases.
Reference: AWS DMS 

Q103: Which AWS offering enables users to find, buy, and immediately start using software solutions in their AWS environment?

A) AWS Config
B) AWS OpsWorks
C) AWS SDK
D) AWS Marketplace


Answer: D
Notes: AWS Marketplace is a digital catalog with thousands of software listings from independent software vendors that makes it easy to find, test, buy, and deploy software that runs on AWS.
Reference: AWS Markerplace 

Q104: Which AWS networking service enables a company to create a virtual network within AWS?

A) AWS Config
B) Amazon Route 53
C) AWS Direct Connect
D) Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC)


Answer: D
Notes: Amazon VPC lets users provision a logically isolated section of the AWS Cloud where users can launch AWS resources in a virtual network that they define.
Reference: VPC https://aws.amazon.com/vpc/

Q105: Which component of the AWS global infrastructure does Amazon CloudFront use to ensure low-latency delivery?

A) AWS Regions
B) Edge locations
C) Availability Zones
D) Virtual Private Cloud (VPC)


Answer: B
Notes: – To deliver content to users with lower latency, Amazon CloudFront uses a global network of points of presence (edge locations and regional edge caches) worldwide.
Reference: Cloudfront – https://aws.amazon.com/cloudfront/

Q106: How would a system administrator add an additional layer of login security to a user’s AWS Management Console?

A) Use Amazon Cloud Directory
B) Audit AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) roles
C) Enable multi-factor authentication
D) Enable AWS CloudTrail


Answer: C
Notes: – Multi-factor authentication (MFA) is a simple best practice that adds an extra layer of protection on top of a username and password. With MFA enabled, when a user signs in to an AWS Management Console, they will be prompted for their username and password (the first factor—what they know), as well as for an authentication code from their MFA device (the second factor—what they have). Taken together, these multiple factors provide increased security for AWS account settings and resources.
Reference: MFA – https://aws.amazon.com/iam/features/mfa/

Q107: Which service can identify the user that made the API call when an Amazon EC2 instance is terminated?

A) AWS Trusted Advisor
B) AWS CloudTrail
C) AWS X-Ray
D) AWS Identity and Access Management (AWS IAM)


Answer: B
Notes: – AWS CloudTrail helps users enable governance, compliance, and operational and risk auditing of their AWS accounts. Actions taken by a user, role, or an AWS service are recorded as events in CloudTrail. Events include actions taken in the AWS Management Console, AWS Command Line Interface (CLI), and AWS SDKs and APIs.
Reference: AWS CloudTrail https://docs.aws.amazon.com/awscloudtrail/latest/userguide/cloudtrail-user-guide.html

Q108: Which service would be used to send alerts based on Amazon CloudWatch alarms?

A) Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS)
B) AWS CloudTrail
C) AWS Trusted Advisor
D) Amazon Route 53


Answer: A
Notes: Amazon SNS and Amazon CloudWatch are integrated so users can collect, view, and analyze metrics for every active SNS. Once users have configured CloudWatch for Amazon SNS, they can gain better insight into the performance of their Amazon SNS topics, push notifications, and SMS deliveries.
Reference: CloudWatch for Amazon SNS https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sns/latest/dg/sns-monitoring-using-cloudwatch.html

Q109: Where can a user find information about prohibited actions on the AWS infrastructure?

A) AWS Trusted Advisor
B) AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM)
C) AWS Billing Console
D) AWS Acceptable Use Policy


Answer: D
Notes: – The AWS Acceptable Use Policy provides information regarding prohibited actions on the AWS infrastructure.
Reference: AWS Acceptable Use Policy – https://aws.amazon.com/aup/

Q110: Which of the following is an AWS responsibility under the AWS shared responsibility model?

A) Configuring third-party applications
B) Maintaining physical hardware
C) Securing application access and data
D) Managing guest operating systems


Answer: B
Notes: – Maintaining physical hardware is an AWS responsibility under the AWS shared responsibility model.
Reference: AWS shared responsibility model https://aws.amazon.com/compliance/shared-responsibility-model/

Q111: Which recommendations are included in the AWS Trusted Advisor checks? (Select TWO.)

A) Amazon S3 bucket permissions
C) Multi-factor authentication (MFA) use on the AWS account root user
D) Available software patches for Amazon EC2 instances
Answer: A and C
Notes: Trusted Advisor checks for S3 bucket permissions in Amazon S3 with open access permissions. Bucket permissions that grant list access to everyone can result in higher than expected charges if objects in the bucket are listed by unintended users at a high frequency. Bucket permissions that grant upload and delete access to all users create potential security vulnerabilities by allowing anyone to add, modify, or remove items in a bucket. This Trusted Advisor check examines explicit bucket permissions and associated bucket policies that might override the bucket permissions. 
Trusted Advisor does not provide notifications for service outages. You can use the AWS Personal Health Dashboard to learn about AWS Health events that can affect your AWS services or account.
Trusted Advisor checks the root account and warns if MFA is not enabled.
 Trusted Advisor does not provide information about the number of users in an AWS account.

AWS CCP Exam Topics:

The AWS Cloud Practitioner exam is broken down into 4 domains

  • Cloud Concepts
  • Security and Compliance
  • Technology
  • Billing and Pricing.

AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam Whitepapers:

AWS has provided whitepapers to help you understand the technical concepts. Below are the recommended whitepapers.

Top

Online Training and Labs for AWS Cloud Certified Practitioner Exam

Top

AWS Cloud Practitioners Jobs

Top

AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam info and details, How To:

The AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam is a multiple choice, multiple answer exam. Here is the Exam Overview:

Top

Additional Information for reference

Below are some useful reference links that would help you to learn about AWS Practitioner Exam.

Other Relevant and Recommended AWS Certifications

AWS Certification Exams Roadmap
AWS Certification Exams Roadmap

AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner

AWS Certified Solutions Architect – Associate

AWS Certified Solution Architect Exam Prep App: Free

AAWS Certified Developer – Associate

AWS Certified SysOps Administrator – Associate

AWS Certified Solutions Architect – Professional

AWS Certified DevOps Engineer – Professional

AWS Certified Big Data Specialty

AWS Certified Advanced Networking.

AWS Certified Security – Specialty

Other AWS Certification Exams Questions and Answers Dumps:

Top 20 AWS Certified Associate SysOps Administrator Practice Quiz – Questions and Answers Dumps

Big Data and Data Analytics 101 – Top 100 AWS Certified Data Analytics Specialty Certification Questions and Answers Dumps

CyberSecurity 101 and Top 25 AWS Certified Security Specialty Questions and Answers Dumps

Networking 101 and Top 20 AWS Certified Advanced Networking Specialty Questions and Answers Dumps

Top

Other AWS Facts and Summaries and Questions/Answers Dump

Below is a listing of AWS certification exam quiz apps for all platforms:

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

AWS Certified Cloud practitioner Exam Prep FREE version: CCP, CLF-C01

Online Training and Labs for AWS Certified Solution Architect Associate Exam

Top

AWS Certified Solution Architect Associate Jobs

AWS Certification and Training Apps for all platforms:

AWS Cloud practitioner FREE version:

AWS Certified Cloud practitioner for the web:pwa

AWS Certified Cloud practitioner Exam Prep App for iOS

AWS Certified Cloud practitioner Exam Prep App for Microsoft/Windows10

AWS Certified Cloud practitioner Exam Prep App for Android (Google Play Store)

AWS Certified Cloud practitioner Exam Prep App for Android (Amazon App Store)

AWS Certified Cloud practitioner Exam Prep App for Android (Huawei App Gallery)

AWS Solution Architect FREE version:

AWS Certified Solution Architect Associate Exam Prep App for iOS: 

Solution Architect Associate for Android Google Play

AWS Certified Solution Architect Associate Exam Prep App :Pwa

AWS Certified Solution Architect Associate Exam Prep App for Amazon android

AWS Certified Cloud practitioner Exam Prep App for Microsoft/Windows10

AWS Certified Cloud practitioner Exam Prep App for Huawei App Gallery

AWS Cloud Practitioner PRO Versions:

AWS Certified Cloud practitioner PRO Exam Prep App for iOS

AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner PRO Associate Exam Prep App for android google

AWS Certified Cloud practitioner Exam Prep App for Amazon android

AWS Certified Cloud practitioner Exam Prep App for Windows 10

AWS Certified Cloud practitioner Exam Prep PRO App for Android (Huawei App Gallery)

AWS Solution Architect PRO

AWS Certified Solution Architect Associate PRO versions for iOS

AWS Certified Solution Architect Associate PRO Exam Prep App for Android google

AWS Certified Solution Architect Associate PRO Exam Prep App for Windows10

AWS Certified Solution Architect Associate PRO Exam Prep App for Amazon android

Huawei App Gallery: Coming soon

AWS Certified Developer Associates Free version:

AWS Certified Developer Associates for Android (Google Play)

AWS Certified Developer Associates Web/PWA

AWS Certified Developer Associates for iOs

AWS Certified Developer Associates for Android (Huawei App Gallery)

AWS Certified Developer Associates for windows 10 (Microsoft App store)

Amazon App Store: Coming soon

AWS Developer Associates PRO version

PRO version with mock exam for android (Google Play)

PRO version with mock exam ios

AWS Certified Developer Associates PRO for Android (Microsoft App Store)

AWS Certified Developer Associates PRO for Android (Huawei App Gallery): Coming soon

Latest Cloud AWS Cloud Training Questions and Answers from around the Web:

Jon Bonso vs Stephane Maarek CCP Practice Exam Differences

Tutorialsdojo.com are the best in the market IMO

They have a long standing reputation for quality.

I’ve used them, I’ve recommended them to friends and family and I recommend them to students of my AWS courses also.

And last but not least, the Djamgatech Apps for iOs and and android.

Practice on the web directly here via the AWS Cloud Practitioner Exam Perp App

I would also recommend checking: Exam Digest

What is the difference between Amazon EC2 Savings Plans and Spot Instances?

Amazon EC2 Savings Plans are ideal for workloads that involve a consistent amount of compute usage over a 1-year or 3-year term.
With Amazon EC2 Savings Plans, you can reduce your compute costs by up to 72% over On-Demand costs.

Spot Instances are ideal for workloads with flexible start and end times, or that can withstand interruptions. With Spot Instances, you can reduce your compute costs by up to 90% over On-Demand costs.
Unlike Amazon EC2 Savings Plans, Spot Instances do not require contracts or a commitment to a consistent amount of compute usage.

Amazon EBS vs Amazon EFS

An Amazon EBS volume stores data in a single Availability Zone.
To attach an Amazon EC2 instance to an EBS volume, both the Amazon EC2 instance and the EBS volume must reside within the same Availability Zone.

Amazon EFS is a regional service. It stores data in and across multiple Availability Zones.
The duplicate storage enables you to access data concurrently from all the Availability Zones in the Region where a file system is located. Additionally, on-premises servers can access Amazon EFS using AWS Direct Connect.

Which cloud deployment model allows you to connect public cloud resources to on-premises infrastructure?

Applications made available through hybrid deployments connect cloud resources to on-premises infrastructure and applications. For example, you might have an application that runs in the cloud but accesses data stored in your on-premises data center.

What is the difference between Amazon EC2 Savings Plans and Spot Instances?

Amazon EC2 Savings Plans are ideal for workloads that involve a consistent amount of compute usage over a 1-year or 3-year term.
With Amazon EC2 Savings Plans, you can reduce your compute costs by up to 72% over On-Demand costs.

Spot Instances are ideal for workloads with flexible start and end times, or that can withstand interruptions. With Spot Instances, you can reduce your compute costs by up to 90% over On-Demand costs.
Unlike Amazon EC2 Savings Plans, Spot Instances do not require contracts or a commitment to a consistent amount of compute usage.

Which benefit of cloud computing helps you innovate and build faster?

Agility: The cloud gives you quick access to resources and services that help you build and deploy your applications faster.

Which developer tool allows you to write code within your web browser?

Cloud9 is an integrated development environment (IDE) that allows you to write code within your web browser.

Which method of accessing an EC2 instance requires both a private key and a public key?

SSH allows you to access an EC2 instance from your local laptop using a key pair, which consists of a private key and a public key.

Which service allows you to track the name of the user making changes in your AWS account?

CloudTrail tracks user activity and API calls in your account, which includes identity information (the user’s name, source IP address, etc.) about the API caller.

Which analytics service allows you to query data in Amazon S3 using Structured Query Language (SQL)?

Athena is a query service that makes it easy to analyze data in Amazon S3 using SQL.

Which machine learning service helps you build, train, and deploy models quickly?

SageMaker helps you build, train, and deploy machine learning models quickly.

Which EC2 storage mechanism is recommended when running a database on an EC2 instance?

EBS is a storage device you can attach to your instances and is a recommended storage option when you run databases on an instance.

Which storage service is a scalable file system that only works with Linux-based workloads?

EFS is an elastic file system for Linux-based workloads.

Djamgatech: AI Driven Certification Preparation: Azure AI, AWS Machine Learning Specialty, AWS Data Analytics, GCP ML, GCP PDE,
Djamgatech: AI Driven Certification Preparation: Azure AI, AWS Machine Learning Specialty, AWS Data Analytics, GCP ML, GCP PDE,

Which AWS service provides a secure and resizable compute platform with choice of processor, storage, networking, operating system, and purchase model?

Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) is a web service that provides secure, resizable compute capacity in the cloud. Amazon EC2 offers the broadest and deepest compute platform with choice of processor, storage, networking, operating system, and purchase model. Amazon EC2.

Which services allow you to build hybrid environments by connecting on-premises infrastructure to AWS?

Site-to-site VPN allows you to establish a secure connection between your on-premises equipment and the VPCs in your AWS account.

Direct Connect allows you to establish a dedicated network connection between your on-premises network and AWS.

What service could you recommend to a developer to automate the software release process?

CodePipeline is a developer tool that allows you to continuously automate the software release process.

Which service allows you to practice infrastructure as code by provisioning your AWS resources via scripted templates?

CloudFormation allows you to provision your AWS resources via scripted templates.

Which machine learning service allows you to add image analysis to your applications?

Rekognition is a service that makes it easy to add image analysis to your applications.

Which services allow you to run containerized applications without having to manage servers or clusters?

Fargate removes the need for you to interact with servers or clusters as it provisions, configures, and scales clusters of virtual machines to run containers for you.

ECS lets you run your containerized Docker applications on both Amazon EC2 and AWS Fargate.

EKS lets you run your containerized Kubernetes applications on both Amazon EC2 and AWS Fargate.

Amazon S3 offers multiple storage classes. Which storage class is best for archiving data when you want the cheapest cost and don’t mind long retrieval times?

S3 Glacier Deep Archive offers the lowest cost and is used to archive data. You can retrieve objects within 12 hours.

Djamgatech App for iOS, Android, Windows: AWS CCP, AWS SAA-C02, AZ900, AZ104, GCP ACE, AWS DVA-C01, AWS DAS-C01, AWS SCS-C01, AZ AI-900, AZ303, AZ304, AZ204
Djamgatech App for iOS, Android, Windows: AWS CCP, AWS SAA-C02, AZ900, AZ104, GCP ACE, AWS DVA-C01, AWS DAS-C01, AWS SCS-C01, AZ AI-900, AZ303, AZ304, AZ204

In the shared responsibility model, what is the customer responsible for?

You are responsible for patching the guest OS, including updates and security patches.

You are responsible for firewall configuration and securing your application.

A company needs phone, email, and chat access 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. The response time must be less than 1 hour if a production system has a service interruption. Which AWS Support plan meets these requirements at the LOWEST cost?

The Business Support plan provides phone, email, and chat access 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. The Business Support plan has a response time of less than 1 hour if a production system has a service interruption.

For more information about AWS Support plans, see Compare AWS Support Plans.

Which Amazon EC2 pricing model adjusts based on supply and demand of EC2 instances?

Spot Instances are discounted more heavily when there is more capacity available in the Availability Zones.

For more information about Spot Instances, see Amazon EC2 Spot Instances.

Which of the following is an advantage of consolidated billing on AWS?

Consolidated billing is a feature of AWS Organizations. You can combine the usage across all accounts in your organization to share volume pricing discounts, Reserved Instance discounts, and Savings Plans. This solution can result in a lower charge compared to the use of individual standalone accounts.

For more information about consolidated billing, see Consolidated billing for AWS Organizations.

A company requires physical isolation of its Amazon EC2 instances from the instances of other customers. Which instance purchasing option meets this requirement?

With Dedicated Hosts, a physical server is dedicated for your use. Dedicated Hosts provide visibility and the option to control how you place your instances on an isolated, physical server. For more information about Dedicated Hosts, see Amazon EC2 Dedicated Hosts.

A company is hosting a static website from a single Amazon S3 bucket.  Which AWS service will achieve lower latency and high transfer speeds?

CloudFront is a web service that speeds up the distribution of your static and dynamic web content, such as .html, .css, .js, and image files, to your users. Content is cached in edge locations. Content that is repeatedly accessed can be served from the edge locations instead of the source S3 bucket. For more information about CloudFront, see Accelerate static website content delivery.

Which AWS service provides a simple and scalable shared file storage solution for use with Linux-based Amazon EC2 instances and on-premises servers?

Amazon EFS provides an elastic file system that lets you share file data without the need to provision and manage storage. It can be used with AWS Cloud services and on-premises resources, and is built to scale on demand to petabytes without disrupting applications. With Amazon EFS, you can grow and shrink your file systems automatically as you add and remove files, eliminating the need to provision and manage capacity to accommodate growth.

For more information about using Amazon EFS, see Walkthrough: Create and mount a file system on premises with AWS Direct Connect and VPN.

Which service allows you to generate encryption keys managed by AWS?

KMS allows you to generate and manage encryption keys. The keys generated by KMS are managed by AWS.

Which service can integrate with a Lambda function to automatically take remediation steps when it uncovers suspicious network activity when monitoring logs in your AWS account?

GuardDuty can perform automated remediation actions by leveraging Amazon CloudWatch Events and AWS Lambda. GuardDuty continuously monitors for threats and unauthorized behavior to protect your AWS accounts, workloads, and data stored in Amazon S3. GuardDuty analyzes multiple AWS data sources, such as AWS CloudTrail event logs, Amazon VPC Flow Logs, and DNS logs.

Which service allows you to create access keys for someone needing to access AWS via the command line interface (CLI)?

IAM allows you to create users and generate access keys for users needing to access AWS via the CLI.

Which service allows you to record software configuration changes within your Amazon EC2 instances over time?

Config helps with recording compliance and configuration changes over time for your AWS resources.

Which service assists with compliance and auditing by offering a downloadable report that provides the status of passwords and MFA devices in your account?

IAM provides a downloadable credential report that lists all users in your account and the status of their various credentials, including passwords, access keys, and MFA devices.

Which service allows you to locate credit card numbers stored in Amazon S3?

Macie is a data privacy service that helps you uncover and protect your sensitive data, such as personally identifiable information (PII) like credit card numbers, passport numbers, social security numbers, and more.

How do you manage permissions for multiple users at once using AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM)?

An IAM group is a collection of IAM users. When you assign an IAM policy to a group, all users in the group are granted permissions specified by the policy.

Which service protects your web application from cross-site scripting attacks?

WAF helps protect your web applications from common web attacks, like SQL injection or cross-site scripting.
 

Which AWS Trusted Advisor real-time guidance recommendations are available for AWS Basic Support and AWS Developer Support customers?

Basic and Developer Support customers get 50 service limit checks.

Basic and Developer Support customers get security checks for “Specific Ports Unrestricted” on Security Groups.

Basic and Developer Support customers get security checks on S3 Bucket Permissions.

Which service allows you to simplify billing by using a single payment method for all your accounts?

Organizations offers consolidated billing that provides 1 bill for all your AWS accounts. This also gives you access to volume discounts.

Which AWS service usage will always be free even after the 12-month free tier plan has expired?

One million Lambda requests are always free each month.

What is the easiest way for a customer on the AWS Basic Support plan to increase service limits?

The Basic Support plan allows 24/7 access to Customer Service via email and the ability to open service limit increase support cases.

Which types of issues are covered by AWS Support?

“How to” questions about AWS service and features

Problems detected by health checks

Djamgatech: AI Driven Certification Preparation: Azure AI, AWS Machine Learning Specialty, AWS Data Analytics, GCP ML, GCP PDE,
Djamgatech: AI Driven Certification Preparation: Azure AI, AWS Machine Learning Specialty, AWS Data Analytics, GCP ML, GCP PDE,

Which features of AWS reduce your total cost of ownership (TCO)?

Sharing servers with others allows you to save money.

Elastic computing allows you to trade capital expense for variable expense.

You pay only for the computing resources you use with no long-term commitments.

Which service allows you to select and deploy operating system and software patches automatically across large groups of Amazon EC2 instances?

Systems Manager allows you to automate operational tasks across your AWS resources.

Which service provides the easiest way to set up and govern a secure, multi-account AWS environment?

Control Tower allows you to centrally govern and enforce the best use of AWS services across your accounts.

Which cost management tool gives you the ability to be alerted when the actual or forecasted cost and usage exceed your desired threshold?

Budgets allow you to improve planning and cost control with flexible budgeting and forecasting. You can choose to be alerted when your budget threshold is exceeded.

Which tool allows you to compare your estimated service costs per Region?

The Pricing Calculator allows you to get an estimate for the cost of AWS services. Comparing service costs per Region is a common use case.

Who can assist with accelerating the migration of legacy contact center infrastructure to AWS?

Professional Services is a global team of experts that can help you realize your desired business outcomes with AWS.

The AWS Partner Network (APN) is a global community of partners that helps companies build successful solutions with AWS.

Which cost management tool allows you to view costs from the past 12 months, current detailed costs, and forecasts costs for up to 3 months?

Cost Explorer allows you to visualize, understand, and manage your AWS costs and usage over time.

Which service reduces the operational overhead of your IT organization?

Managed Services implements best practices to maintain your infrastructure and helps reduce your operational overhead and risk.

How do I set up Failover on Amazon AWS Route53?

In simple configurations, you create a group of records that all have the same name and type, such as a group of weighted records with a type of A for example.com. In more complex configurations, you create a tree of records that route traffic based on multiple criteria. Read more …
 
 

How do AWS step functions communicate with lambda functions which are in a VPC?

When a Lambda “is in a VPC”, it really means that its attached Elastic Network Interface is the customer’s VPC and not the hidden VPC that AWS manages for Lambda.

The ENI is not related to the AWS Lambda management system that does the invocation (the data plane mentioned here). The AWS Step Function system can go ahead and invoke the Lambda through the API, and the network request for that can pass through the underlying VPC and host infrastructure.

Those Lambdas in turn can invoke other Lambda directly through the API, or more commonly by decoupling them, such as through Amazon SQS used as a trigger. Read more ….

How do I invoke an AWS Lambda function programmatically?

public InvokeResult invoke(InvokeRequest request)

Invokes a Lambda function. You can invoke a function synchronously (and wait for the response), or asynchronously. To invoke a function asynchronously, set InvocationType to Event.

For synchronous invocation, details about the function response, including errors, are included in the response body and headers. For either invocation type, you can find more information in the execution log and trace.

When an error occurs, your function may be invoked multiple times. Retry behavior varies by error type, client, event source, and invocation type. For example, if you invoke a function asynchronously and it returns an error, Lambda executes the function up to two more times. For more information, see Retry Behavior.

For asynchronous invocation, Lambda adds events to a queue before sending them to your function. If your function does not have enough capacity to keep up with the queue, events may be lost. Occasionally, your function may receive the same event multiple times, even if no error occurs. To retain events that were not processed, configure your function with a dead-letter queue.

The status code in the API response doesn’t reflect function errors. Error codes are reserved for errors that prevent your function from executing, such as permissions errors, limit errors, or issues with your function’s code and configuration. For example, Lambda returns TooManyRequestsException if executing the function would cause you to exceed a concurrency limit at either the account level ( Concurrent Invocation Limit Exceeded) or function level ( Reserved Function Concurrent Invocation LimitExceeded).

For functions with a long timeout, your client might be disconnected during synchronous invocation while it waits for a response. Configure your HTTP client, SDK, firewall, proxy, or operating system to allow for long connections with timeout or keep-alive settings.

This operation requires permission for the lambda:InvokeFunction action. Read more…

How bad would it be to configure one AWS VPC for all my environments (dev, stg, prod) while creating 2 subnets (priv, pub) for each environment?  It depends highly on the budget. However, for my systems I always set different environments up in different VPCs. Why? Because they’re guaranteed to be isolated from one another, and VPCs are very easy to create and manage if you’ve automated. The flip side is you do pay a bit more for edge services like NAT Gateway and ALB, since you’ll have at least one per VPC.

 

What are the differences between default and non-default AWS VPCs?

Default VPC

  1. 1 per region
  2. a set VPC CIDR range … you can’t changed it
  3. has everything configured by default .. 1 subnet per AZ, an internet gateway, routes and subnets set to allocate IPv4 by default.

Custom VPCs

  1. As any as you want per region (within limits)
  2. Customisable CIDR range
  3. Customisable subnet structure
  4. Nothing configured by default, you have to configure everything

Read more here…

 
 
Why is the subnet mask important in determining the network address?

The subnet mask determines how many bits of the network address are relevant (and thus indirectly the size of the network block in terms of how many host addresses are available) –

192.0.2.0, subnet mask 255.255.255.0 means that 192.0.2 is the significant portion of the network number, and that there 8 bits left for host addresses (i.e. 192.0.2.0 thru 192.0.2.255)

192.0.2.0, subnet mask 255.255.255.128 means that 192.0.2.0 is the significant portion of the network number (first three octets and the most significant bit of the last octet), and that there 7 bits left for host addresses (i.e. 192.0.2.0 thru 192.0.2.127)

When in doubt, envision the network number and subnet mask in base 2 (i.e. binary) and it will become much clearer. Read more here…

 

What are some best practices securing my Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (VPC)?

IAM is the new perimeter.

Separate out the roles needed to do each job. (Assuming this is a corporate environment)

Have a role for EC2, another for Networking, another for IAM.

Everyone should not be admin. Everyone should not be able to add/remove IGW’s, NAT gateways, alter security groups and NACLS, or setup peering connections.

Also, another thing… lock down full internet access. Limit to what is needed and that’s it. Read more here….

How can we setup AWS public-private subnet in VPC without NAT server?

Within a single VPC, the subnets’ route tables need to point to each other. This will already work without additional routes because VPC sets up the local target to point to the VPC subnet.

Security groups are not used here since they are attached to instances, and not networks.

See: Amazon Virtual Private Cloud

The NAT EC2 instance (server), or AWS-provided NAT gateway is necessary only if the private subnet internal addresses need to make outbound connections. The NAT will translate the private subnet internal addresses to the public subnet internal addresses, and the AWS VPC Internet Gateway will translate these to external IP addresses, which can then go out to the Internet. Read more here ….

What are the applications (or workloads) that cannot be migrated on to cloud (AWS or Azure or GCP)?

A good example of workloads that currently are not in public clouds are mobile and fixed core telecom networks for tier 1 service providers. This is despite the fact that these core networks are increasingly software based and have largely been decoupled from the hardware. There are a number of reasons for this such as the public cloud providers such as Azure and AWS do not offer the guaranteed availability required by telecom networks. These networks require 99.999% availability and is typically referred to as telecom grade.

The regulatory environment frequently restricts hosting of subscriber data outside the of the operators data centers or in another country and key network functions such as lawful interception cannot contractually be hosted off-prem. Read more here….

How many CIDRs can we add to my own created VPC?

You can add up to 5 IPv4 CIDR blocks, or 1 IPv6 block per VPC. You can further segment the network by utilizing up to 200 subnets per VPC. Amazon VPC Limits. Read more …

Why can’t a subnet’s CIDR be changed once it has been assigned?

Sure it can, but you’ll need to coordinate with the neighbors. You can merge two /25’s into a single /24 quite effortlessly if you control the entire range it covers. In practice you’ll see many tiny allocations in public IPv4 space, like /29’s and even smaller. Those are all assigned to different people. If you want to do a big shuffle there, you have a lot of coordinating to do.. or accept the fallout from the breakage you cause. Read more…

Can one VPC talk to another VPC?

Yes, but a Virtual Private Cloud is usually built for the express purpose of being isolated from unwanted external traffic. I can think of several good reasons to encourage that sort of communication, so the idea is not without merit. Read more..
 

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

What questions to expect in cloud support engineer deployment roles at AWS? 

Cloud Support Engineer (CSE) is a role which requires the following abilities:

  • Wide range of technical skills
  • Good communication and time management
  • Good knowledge about the AWS services, and how to leverage them to solve simple to complex problems.

As your question is related to the deployment Pod, you will probably be asked about deployment methods (A/B testing like blue-green deployment) as well as pipelining strategies. You might be asked during this interview to reason about a simple task and to code it (like parsing a log file). Also review the TCP/IP stack in-depth as well as the tools to troubleshoot it for the networking round. You will eventually have some Linux questions, the range of questions can vary from common CLI tools to Linux internals like signals / syscalls / file descriptors and so on.

Last but not least the Leadership principles, I can only suggest you to prepare a story for each of them. You will quickly find what LP they are looking for and would be able to give the right signal to your interviewer.

Finally, remember that theres a debrief after the (usually 5) stages of your on site interview, and more senior and convincing interviewers tend to defend their vote so don’t screw up with them.

Be natural, focus on the question details and ask for confirmation, be cool but not too much. At the end of the day, remember that your job will be to understand customer issues and provide a solution, so treat your interviewers as if they were customers and they will see a successful CSE in you, be reassured and give you the job. 

Expect questions on cloudformations, Teraform, Aws ec2/rds and stack related questions.

Its a high tech call center. You are expected to take calls, chats of customers and give them technical advice. You will not be doing any of the cool stuff you did earlier (if you are coming from engineering job or DBA). You will surely gain a very good knowledge of multiple AWS services and the one that you will be hired in, however most of the knowledge will be theoretical and nothing practical in day-to-day life.

It also depends on the support team you are being hired for. Networking or compute teams (Ec2) have different interview patterns vs database or big data support.

In any case, basics of OS, networking are critical to the interview. If you have a phone screen, we will be looking for basic/semi advance skills of these and your speciality. For example if you mention Oracle in your resume and you are interviewing for the database team, expect a flurry of those questions.

Other important aspect is the Amazon leadership principles. Half of your interview is based on LPs. If you fail to have scenarios where you do not demonstrate our LPs, you cannot expect to work here even though your technical skills are above average (Having extraordinary skills is a different thing).

The overall interview itself will have 1 phone screen if you are interviewing in the US and 1–2 if outside US. The onsite loop will be 4 rounds , 2 of which are technical (again divided into OS and networking and the specific speciality of the team you are interviewing for ) and 2 of them are leadership principles where we test your soft skills and management skills as they are very important in this job. You need to have a strong view point, disagree if it seems valid to do so, empathy and be a team player while showing the ability to pull off things individually as well. These skills will be critical for cracking LP interviews.

You will NOT be asked to code or write queries as its not part of the job, so you can concentrate on the theoretical part of the subject and also your resume. We will grill you on topics mentioned on your resume to start with.

Traditional monolithic architectures are hard to scale: TRUE

Monolithic architecture is something that build from single piece of material, historically from rock. Monolith term normally use for object made from single large piece of material.” – Non-Technical Definition. “Monolithic application has single code base with multiple modules.

Large Monolithic code-base (often spaghetti code) puts immense cognitive complexity on the developer’s head. As a result, the development velocity is poor. Granular scaling (i.e., scaling part of the application) is not possible. Polyglot programming or polyglot database is challenging.

Drawbacks of Monolithic Architecture

This simple approach has a limitation in size and complexity. Application is too large and complex to fully understand and made changes fast and correctly. The size of the application can slow down the start-up time. You must redeploy the entire application on each update.

18. Sticky Sessions help increase your application’s scability: FALSE

Sticky sessions, also known as session affinity, allow you to route a site user to the particular web server that is managing that individual user’s session. The session’s validity can be determined by a number of methods, including a client-side cookies or via configurable duration parameters that can be set at the load balancer which routes requests to the web servers.

Some advantages with utilizing sticky sessions are that it’s cost effective due to the fact you are storing sessions on the same web servers running your applications and that retrieval of those sessions is generally fast because it eliminates network latency. A drawback for using storing sessions on an individual node is that in the event of a failure, you are likely to lose the sessions that were resident on the failed node. In addition, in the event the number of your web servers change, for example a scale-up scenario, it’s possible that the traffic may be unequally spread across the web servers as active sessions may exist on particular servers. If not mitigated properly, this can hinder the scalability of your applications. Read more here … 

AWS recommends replicating across Availability Zones for resiliency: TRUE

If you need to replicate your data or applications in an AWS Local Zone, AWS recommends that you use one of the following zones as the failover zone:

  • Another Local Zone

  • An Availability Zone in the Region that is not the parent zone. You can use the describe-availability-zones command to view the parent zone.

For more information about AWS Regions and Availability Zones, see AWS Global Infrastructure.

What are the benefits of AWS Cloud Computing?

  • Trade Capital expenses for variable expenses
  • Increase speed and agility
  • Benefit from massive economies at scale
  • Stop spending money on running and maintaining data centers
  • Stop guessing capacity
  • Go global in minutes

What is the default behavior for an EC2 instance when terminated?

After you terminate an instance, it remains visible in the console for a short while, and then the entry is automatically deleted. You cannot delete the terminated instance entry yourself. After an instance is terminated, resources such as tags and volumes are gradually disassociated from the instance, therefore may no longer be visible on the terminated instance after a short while.

When an instance terminates, the data on any instance store volumes associated with that instance is deleted.

By default, Amazon EBS root device volumes are automatically deleted when the instance terminates. However, by default, any additional EBS volumes that you attach at launch, or any EBS volumes that you attach to an existing instance persist even after the instance terminates. This behavior is controlled by the volume’s DeleteOnTermination attribute, which you can modify

For more information, please visit: Terminate Your Instance

How do Amazon EC2 EBS burst credits work?

The documentation on General Purpose SSD (gp2) EBS volumes can be found at this page: New SSD-Backed Elastic Block Storage 

When you first launch an instance with gp2 volumes attached, you get an initial burst credit allowing for up to 30 minutes of 3,000 iops/sec.

After the first 30 minutes, your volume will accrue credits as follows (taken directly from AWS documentation):

Within the General Purpose (SSD) implementation is a Token Bucket model that works as follows

  • Each token represents an “I/O credit” that pays for one read or one write.
  • A bucket is associated with each General Purpose (SSD) volume, and can hold up to 5.4 million tokens.
  • Tokens accumulate at a rate of 3 per configured GB per second, up to the capacity of the bucket.
  • Tokens can be spent at up to 3000 per second per volume.
  • The baseline performance of the volume is equal to the rate at which tokens are accumulated — 3 IOPS per GB per second.

In addition to this, gp2 volumes provide baseline performance of 3 iops per Gb, up to 1Tb (3000 iops). Volumes larger than 1Tb no longer work on the credit system, as they already provide a baseline of 3000 iops. Gp2 volumes have a cap of 10,000 iops regardless of the volume size (so the iops max out for volumes larger than 3.3Tb)

Is elastic IP service free if we associate it with any VM (EC2 server)?

Elastic IP addresses are free when you have them assigned to an instance, feel free to use one! Elastic IPs get disassociated when you stop an instance, so you will get charged in the mean time. The benefit is that you get to keep that IP allocated to your account though, instead of losing it like any other. Once you start the instance you just re-associate it back and you have your old IP again.

Here are the changes associated with the use of Elastic IP addresses

No cost for Elastic IP addresses while in use

* $0.01 per non-attached Elastic IP address per complete hour

* $0.00 per Elastic IP address remap – first 100 remaps / month

* $0.10 per Elastic IP address remap – additional remap / month over 100

If you require any additional information about pricing please reference the link below

Amazon EC2 Pricing – Amazon Web Services

The other cost are as outlined in the paragraph you have quoted.

How do I reduce my AWS EC2 cost? My AWS EC2 expenditure comprises 80% of my AWS bill.

The short answer to reducing your AWS EC2 costs – turn off your instances when you don’t need them.

Your AWS bill is just like any other utility bill, you get charged for however much you used that month. Don’t make the mistake of leaving your instances on 24/7 if you’re only using them during certain days and times (ex. Monday – Friday, 9 to 5).

To automatically start and stop your instances, AWS offers an “EC2 scheduler” solution. A better option would be a cloud cost management tool that not only stops and starts your instances automatically, but also tracks your usage and makes sizing recommendations to optimize your cloud costs and maximize your time and savings.

You could potentially save money using Reserved Instances. But, in non-production environments such as dev, test, QA, and training, Reserved Instances are not your best bet. Why is this the case? These environments are less predictable; you may not know how many instances you need and when you will need them, so it’s better to not waste spend on these usage charges. Instead, schedule such instances (preferably using ParkMyCloud). Scheduling instances to be only up 12 hours per day on weekdays will save you 65% – better than all but the most restrictive 3-year RIs!

You can also save money with:

  • Spot Instances
  • AWS Dedicated Hosts & Dedicated Instances
  • Auto Scaling Groups
  • Rightsizing

What is the difference between an Instance, AMI and Snaphots in AWS? What are they used for?

Well AWS is a web service provider which offers a set of services related to compute, storage, database, network and more to help the business scale and grow

All your concerns are related to AWS EC2 instance, so let me start with an instance

Instance:

  • An EC2 instance is similar to a server where you can host your websites or applications to make it available Globally
  • It is highly scalable and works on the pay-as-you-go model
  • You can increase or decrease the capacity of these instances as per the requirement

AMI:

  • AMI provides the information required to launch the EC2 instance
  • AMI includes the pre-configured templates of the operating system that runs on the AWS
  • Users can launch multiple instances with the same configuration from a single AMI

Snapshot:

  • Snapshots are the incremental backups for the Amazon EBS
  • Data in the EBS are stored in S3 by taking point-to-time snapshots
  • Unique data are only deleted when a snapshot is deleted
  • Multiple EBS can be created using these snapshots

What are the main differences between a VPNs, VPS and VPC?

They are definitely all chalk and cheese to one another.

A VPN (Virtual Private Network) is essentially an encrypted “channel” connecting two networks, or a machine to a network, generally over the public internet.

A VPS (Virtual Private Server) is a rented virtual machine running on someone else’s hardware. AWS EC2 can be thought of as a VPS, but the term is usually used to describe low-cost products offered by lots of other hosting companies.

A VPC (Virtual Private Cloud) is a virtual network in AWS (Amazon Web Services). It can be divided into private and public subnets, have custom routing rules, have internal connections to other VPCs, etc. EC2 instances and other resources are placed in VPCs similarly to how physical data centers have operated for a very long time.

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

What is the use of elastic IP in AWS?

Elastic IP address is basically the static IP (IPv4) address that you can allocate to your resources.

Now, in case that you allocate IP to the resource (and the resource is running), you are not charged anything. On the other hand, if you create Elastic IP, but you do not allocate it to the resource (or the resource is not running), then you are charged some amount (should be around $0.005 per hour if I remember correctly)

Additional info about these:

You are limited to 5 Elastic IP addresses per region. If you require more than that, you can contact AWS support with a request for additional addresses. You need to have a good reason in order to be approved because IPv4 addresses are becoming a scarce resource.

In general, you should be good without Elastic IPs for most of the use-cases (as every EC2 instance has its own public IP, and you can use load balancers, as well as map most of the resources via Route 53).

One of the use-cases that I’ve seen where my client is using Elastic IP is to make it easier for him to access specific EC2 instance via RDP, as well as do deployment through Visual Studio, as he targets the Elastic IP, and thus does not have to watch for any changes in public IP (in case of stopping or rebooting).

Why would you choose not to use AWS Transit Gateway instead of VPC peering?

At this time, AWS Transit Gateway does not support inter region attachments. The transit gateway and the attached VPCs must be in the same region. VPC peering supports inter region peering.

Difference between AWS Workspace and AWS Ec2 VM?

  • The EC2 instance is server instance whilst a Workspace is windows desktop instance

  • Both Windows Server and Windows workstation editions have desktops. Windows Server Core doesn’t not (and AWS doesn’t have an AMI for Windows Server Core that I could find).

  • It is possible to SSH into a Windows instance – this is done on port 22. You would not see a desktop when using SSH if you had enabled it. It is not enabled by default.

  • If you are seeing a desktop, I believe you’re “RDPing” to the Windows instance. This is done with the RDP protocol on port 3389.

  • Two different protocols and two different ports.
  • Workspaces doesn’t allow terminal or ssh services by default. You need to use Workspace client. You still can enable RDP or/and SSH but this is not recommended.
  • Workspaces is a managed desktop service. AWS is taking care of pre-build AMIs, software licenses, joining to domain, scaling etc.
  • What is Amazon EC2? Scalable, pay-as-you-go compute capacity in the cloud. Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) is a web service that provides resizable compute capacity in the cloud. It is designed to make web-scale computing easier for developers.
  • What is Amazon WorkSpaces? Easily provision cloud-based desktops that allow end-users to access applications and resources. With a few clicks in the AWS Management Console, customers can provision a high-quality desktop experience for any number of users at a cost that is highly competitive with traditional desktops and half the cost of most virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI) solutions. End-users can access the documents, applications and resources they need with the device of their choice, including laptops, iPad, Kindle Fire, or Android tablets.
  • Amazon EC2 can be classified as a tool in the “Cloud Hosting” category, while Amazon WorkSpaces is grouped under “Virtual Desktop”.

  • Some of the features offered by Amazon EC2 are:

    • Elastic – Amazon EC2 enables you to increase or decrease capacity within minutes, not hours or days. You can commission one, hundreds or even thousands of server instances simultaneously.
    • Completely Controlled – You have complete control of your instances. You have root access to each one, and you can interact with them as you would any machine.
    • Flexible – You have the choice of multiple instance types, operating systems, and software packages. Amazon EC2 allows you to select a configuration of memory, CPU, instance storage, and the boot partition size that is optimal for your choice of operating system and application.

    On the other hand, Amazon WorkSpaces provides the following key features:

    • Support Multiple Devices- Users can access their Amazon WorkSpaces using their choice of device, such as a laptop computer (Mac OS or Windows), iPad, Kindle Fire, or Android tablet.
    • Keep Your Data Secure and Available- Amazon WorkSpaces provides each user with access to persistent storage in the AWS cloud. When users access their desktops using Amazon WorkSpaces, you control whether your corporate data is stored on multiple client devices, helping you keep your data secure.
    • Choose the Hardware and Software you need- Amazon WorkSpaces offers a choice of bundles providing different amounts of CPU, memory, and storage so you can match your Amazon WorkSpaces to your requirements. Amazon WorkSpaces offers preinstalled applications (including Microsoft Office) or you can bring your own licensed software.

Amazon EBS vs Amazon EFS

An Amazon EBS volume stores data in a single Availability Zone.
To attach an Amazon EC2 instance to an EBS volume, both the Amazon EC2 instance and the EBS volume must reside within the same Availability Zone.

Amazon EFS is a regional service. It stores data in and across multiple Availability Zones.
The duplicate storage enables you to access data concurrently from all the Availability Zones in the Region where a file system is located. Additionally, on-premises servers can access Amazon EFS using AWS Direct Connect.

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

AWS Cloud Practitioner CCP CLF-C01 Certification Exam Prep
AWS Cloud Practitioner CCP CLF-C01 Certification Exam Prep

AWS Services Cheat Sheet:

Comp­ute

Cate­goryServ­iceDesc­rip­tion
Inst­ances (Virtual machin­es)EC2Provides secure, resizable compute capacity in the cloud. It makes web-scale cloud computing easier for develo­pers. EC2
 EC2 SpotRun fault-­tol­erant workloads for up to 90% off. EC2Spot
 EC2 Autosc­alingAutoma­tically add or remove compute capacity to meet changes in demand. EC2_AustoScaling
 LightsailDesigned to be the easiest way to launch & manage a virtual private server with AWS. An easy-t­o-use cloud platform that offers everything need to build an applic­ation or website. Lightsail
 BatchEnables develo­pers, scient­ists, & engineers to easily & effici­ently run hundreds of thousands of batch computing jobs on AWS. Fully managed batch processing at any scale. Batch
Cont­ain­ersElastic Container Service (ECS)Highly secure, reliable, & scalable way to run contai­ners. ECS
 Elastic Container Registry (ECR)Easily store, manage, & deploy container images. ECR
 Elastic Kubernetes Service (EKS)Fully managed Kubernetes service. EKS
 FargateServerless compute for contai­ners. Fargate
Serv­erl­essLambdaRun code without thinking about servers. Pay only for the compute time you consume. Lamda
Edge and hybridOutpostsRun AWS infras­tru­cture & services on premises for a truly consistent hybrid experi­ence. Outposts
 Snow FamilyCollect and process data in rugged or discon­nected edge enviro­nments. SnowFamily
 WavelengthDeliver ultra-low latency applic­ation for 5G devices. Wavelenth
 VMware Cloud on AWSInnovate faster, rapidly transition to the cloud, & work securely from any location. VMware_On_AWS
 Local ZonesRun latency sensitive applic­ations closer to end-users. LocalZones


Netw­orking and Content Delivery

Use casesFunc­tio­nal­ityServ­iceDesc­rip­tion
Build a cloud networkDefine and provision a logically isolated network for your AWS resourcesVPCVPC lets you provision a logically isolated section of the AWS Cloud where you can launch AWS resources in a virtual network that you define. VPC
 Connect VPCs and on-pre­mises networks through a central hubTransit GatewayTransit Gateway connects VPCs & on-pre­mises networks through a central hub. This simplifies network & puts an end to complex peering relati­ons­hips. TransitGateway
 Provide private connec­tivity between VPCs, services, and on-pre­mises applic­ationsPrivat­eLinkPrivat­eLink provides private connec­tivity between VPCs & services hosted on AWS or on-pre­mises, securely on the Amazon network. PrivateLink
 Route users to Internet applic­ations with a managed DNS serviceRoute 53Route 53 is a highly available & scalable cloud DNS web service. Route53
Scale your network designAutoma­tically distribute traffic across a pool of resources, such as instances, contai­ners, IP addresses, and Lambda functionsElastic Load BalancingElastic Load Balancing automa­tically distri­butes incoming applic­ation traffic across multiple targets, such as EC2’s, contai­ners, IP addresses, & Lambda functions. ElasticLoadBalancing
 Direct traffic through the AWS Global network to improve global applic­ation perfor­manceGlobal Accele­ratorGlobal Accele­rator is a networking service that sends user’s traffic through AWS’s global network infras­tru­cture, improving internet user perfor­mance by up to 60%. GlobalAccelerator
Secure your network trafficSafeguard applic­ations running on AWS against DDoS attacksShieldShield is a managed Distri­buted Denial of Service (DDoS) protection service that safeguards applic­ations running on AWS. Shield
 Protect your web applic­ations from common web exploitsWAFWAF is a web applic­ation firewall that helps protect your web applic­ations or APIs against common web exploits that may affect availa­bility, compromise security, or consume excessive resources. WAF
 Centrally configure and manage firewall rulesFirewall ManagerFirewall Manager is a security management service which allows to centrally configure & manage firewall rules across accounts & apps in AWS Organi­zation. link text
Build a hybrid IT networkConnect your users to AWS or on-pre­mises resources using a Virtual Private Network(VPN) – ClientVPN solutions establish secure connec­tions between on-pre­mises networks, remote offices, client devices, & the AWS global network. VPN
 Create an encrypted connection between your network and your Amazon VPCs or AWS Transit Gateways(VPN) – Site to SiteSite-t­o-Site VPN creates a secure connection between data center or branch office & AWS cloud resources. site_to_site
 Establish a private, dedicated connection between AWS and your datace­nter, office, or colocation enviro­nmentDirect ConnectDirect Connect is a cloud service solution that makes it easy to establish a dedicated network connection from your premises to AWS. DirectConnect
Content delivery networksSecurely deliver data, videos, applic­ations, and APIs to customers globally with low latency, and high transfer speedsCloudFrontCloudFront expedites distri­bution of static & dynamic web content. CloudFront
Build a network for micros­ervices archit­ect­uresProvide applic­ati­on-­level networking for containers and micros­ervicesApp MeshApp Mesh makes it accessible to guide & control micros­ervices operating on AWS. AppMesh
 Create, maintain, and secure APIs at any scaleAPI GatewayAPI Gateway allows the user to design & expand their own REST and WebSocket APIs at any scale. APIGateway
 Discover AWS services connected to your applic­ationsCloud MapCloud Map permits the name & handles the cloud resources. CloudMap

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Storage

Serv­iceDesc­rip­tion
AWS S3S3 is the storehouse for the internet i.e. object storage built to store & retrieve any amount of data from anywhere S3
AWS BackupAWS Backup is an extern­all­y-a­cce­ssible backup provider that makes it easier to align & optimize the backup of data across AWS services in the cloud. AWS_Backup
Amazon EBSAmazon Elastic Block Store is a web service that provides block-­level storage volumes. EBS
Amazon EFS StorageEFS offers file storage for the user’s Amazon EC2 instances. It’s kind of blob Storage. EFS
Amazon FSxFSx supply fully managed 3rd-party file systems with the native compat­ibility & charac­ter­istic sets for workloads. It’s available as FSx for Windows server (Fully managed file storage built on Windows Server) & Lustre (Fully managed high-p­erf­ormance file system integrated with S3). FSx_Windows FSx_Lustre
AWS Storage GatewayStorage Gateway is a service which connects an on-pre­mises software appliance with cloud-­based storage. Storage_Gateway
AWS DataSyncDataSync makes it simple & fast to move large amounts of data online between on-pre­mises storage & S3, EFS, or FSx for Windows File Server. DataSync
AWS Transfer FamilyThe Transfer Family provides fully managed support for file transfers directly into & out of S3. Transfer_Family
AWS Snow FamilyHighly­-se­cure, portable devices to collect & process data at the edge, and migrate data into and out of AWS. Snow_Family

Clas­sif­ica­tion:
Object storage: S3
File storage servic­es: Elastic File System, FSx for Windows Servers & FSx for Lustre
Block storage: EBS
Back­up: AWS Backup
Data transf­er:
Storage gateway –> 3 types: Tape, File, Volume.
Transfer Family –> SFTP, FTPS, FTP.
Edge computing and storage and Snow Family –> Snowcone, Snowball, Snowmobile

Data­bases

Database typeUse casesServ­iceDesc­rip­tion
Rela­tio­nalTradit­ional applic­ations, ERP, CRM, e-commerceAurora, RDS, RedshiftRDS is a web service that makes it easier to set up, control, and scale a relational database in the cloud. Aurora RDS Redshift
Key-­valueHigh-t­raffic web apps, e-commerce systems, gaming applic­ationsDynamoDBDynamoDB is a fully admini­stered NoSQL database service that offers quick and reliable perfor­mance with integrated scalab­ility. DynamoDB
In-m­emoryCaching, session manage­ment, gaming leader­boards, geospatial applic­ationsElasti­Cache for Memcached & RedisElasti­Cache helps in setting up, managing, and scaling in-memory cache condit­ions. Memcached Redis
Docu­mentContent manage­ment, catalogs, user profilesDocumentDBDocumentDB (with MongoDB compat­ibi­lity) is a quick, depend­able, and fully-­managed database service that makes it easy for you to set up, operate, and scale MongoD­B-c­omp­atible databases.DocumentDB
Wide columnHigh scale industrial apps for equipment mainte­nance, fleet manage­ment, and route optimi­zationKeyspaces (for Apache Cassandra)Keyspaces is a scalable, highly available, and managed Apache Cassan­dra­–co­mpa­tible database service. Keyspaces
GraphFraud detection, social networ­king, recomm­end­ation enginesNeptuneNeptune is a fast, reliable, fully managed graph database service that makes it easy to build and run applic­ations that work with highly connected datasets. Neptune
Time seriesIoT applic­ations, DevOps, industrial telemetryTimestreamTimestream is a fast, scalable, and serverless time series database service for IoT and operat­ional applic­ations that makes it easy to store and analyze trillions of events per day. Timestream
LedgerSystems of record, supply chain, regist­rat­ions, banking transa­ctionsQuantum Ledger Database (QLDB)QLDB is a fully managed ledger database that provides a transp­arent, immutable, and crypto­gra­phi­cally verifiable transa­ction log ‎owned by a central trusted authority. QLDB

Deve­loper Tools

Serv­iceDesc­rip­tion
Cloud9Cloud9 is a cloud-­based IDE that enables the user to write, run, and debug code. Cloud9
CodeAr­tifactCodeAr­tifact is a fully managed artifact repository service that makes it easy for organi­zations of any size to securely store, publish, & share software packages used in their software develo­pment process. CodeArtifact
CodeBuildCodeBuild is a fully managed service that assembles source code, runs unit tests, & also generates artefacts ready to deploy. CodeBuild
CodeGuruCodeGuru is a developer tool powered by machine learning that provides intell­igent recomm­end­ations for improving code quality & identi­fying an applic­ation’s most expensive lines of code. CodeGuru
Cloud Develo­pment KitCloud Develo­pment Kit (AWS CDK) is an open source software develo­pment framework to define cloud applic­ation resources using familiar progra­mming languages. CDK
CodeCommitCodeCommit is a version control service that enables the user to personally store & manage Git archives in the AWS cloud. CodeCommit
CodeDeployCodeDeploy is a fully managed deployment service that automates software deploy­ments to a variety of compute services such as EC2, Fargate, Lambda, & on-pre­mises servers. CodeDeploy
CodePi­pelineCodePi­peline is a fully managed continuous delivery service that helps automate release pipelines for fast & reliable app & infra updates. CodePipeline
CodeStarCodeStar enables to quickly develop, build, & deploy applic­ations on AWS. CodeStar
CLIAWS CLI is a unified tool to manage AWS services & control multiple services from the command line & automate them through scripts. CLI
X-RayX-Ray helps developers analyze & debug produc­tion, distri­buted applic­ations, such as those built using a micros­ervices archit­ecture. X-Ray

Migration & Transfer services

Serv­iceDesc­rip­tion
Migration EvaluatorBuild a data-d­riven business case for AWS. ME
Migration HubMigration Hub provides a single location to track the progress of app migrations across multiple AWS & partner solutions. MigrationHub
Applic­ation Discovery ServiceApplic­ation Discovery Service helps enterprise customers plan migration projects by gathering inform­ation about their on-pre­mises data centers. ADS
Server Migration Service (SMS)SMS is an agentless service which makes it easier & faster to migrate thousands of on-pre­mises workloads to AWS. SMS
Database Migration Service (DMS)DMS helps migrate databases to AWS quickly & securely. DMS
CloudE­ndure MigrationCloudE­ndure Migration simpli­fies, expedites, & reduces the cost of cloud migration by offering a highly automated lift-&-shift solution. CloudEndure
VMware Cloud on AWSRefer compute section.
DataSyncRefer storage section.
Transfer FamilyRefer storage section.
Snow FamilyRefer storage section.

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

SDKs & Toolkits

Serv­iceDesc­rip­tion
CDKCDK uses the famili­arity & expressive power of progra­mming languages for modeling apps. CDK
CorrettoCorretto is a no-cost, multip­lat­form, produc­tio­n-ready distri­bution of the OpenJDK. Corretto
Crypto ToolsCrypto­graphy is hard to do safely & correctly. The AWS Crypto Tools libraries are designed to help everyone do crypto­graphy right, even without special expertise. Crypto Tools
Serverless Applic­ation Model (SAM)SAM is an open-s­ource framework for building serverless applic­ations. It provides shorthand syntax to express functions, APIs, databases, & event source mappings. SAM
Tools for developing and managing applic­ations on AWS

Security, Identity, & Compliance

Cate­goryUse casesServ­iceDesc­rip­tion
Identity & access manage­mentSecurely manage access to services and resourcesIdentity & Access Management (IAM)IAM is a web service for safely contro­lling access to AWS services. IAM
 Securely manage access to services and resourcesSingle Sign-OnSSO helps in simpli­fying, managing SSO access to AWS accounts & business applic­ations. SSO
 Identity management for appsCognitoCognito lets you add user sign-up, sign-in, & access control to web & mobile apps quickly and easily. Cognito
 Managed Microsoft Active DirectoryDirectory ServiceAWS Managed Microsoft Active Directory (AD) enables your direct­ory­-aware workloads & AWS resources to use managed Active Directory (AD) in AWS. DirectoryService
 Simple, secure service to share AWS resourcesResource Access ManagerResource Access Manager (RAM) is a service that enables you to easily & securely share AWS resources with any AWS account or within AWS Organi­zation. RAM
 Central governance and management across AWS accountsOrgani­zationsOrgani­zations helps you centrally govern your enviro­nment as you grow and scale your workloads on AWS. Orgs
Dete­ctionUnified security and compliance centerSecurity HubSecurity Hub gives a compre­hensive view of security alerts & security posture across AWS accounts. SecurityHub
 Managed threat detection serviceGuardDutyGuardDuty is a threat detection service that contin­uously monitors for malicious activity & unauth­orized behavior to protect AWS accounts, workloads, & data stored in S3. GuardDuty
 Analyze applic­ation securityInspectorInspector is a security vulner­ability assessment service improves the security & compliance of the AWS resources. Inspector
 Record and evaluate config­ura­tions of your AWS resourcesConfigConfig is a service that enables to assess, audit, & evaluate the config­ura­tions of AWS resources. Config
 Track user activity and API usageCloudTrailCloudTrail is a service that enables govern­ance, compli­ance, operat­ional auditing, & risk auditing of AWS account. CloudTrail
 Security management for IoT devicesIoT Device DefenderIoT Device Defender is a fully managed service that helps secure fleet of IoT devices. IoTDD
Infr­ast­ructure protec­tionDDoS protectionShieldShield is a managed DDoS protection service that safeguards apps running. It provides always-on detection & automatic inline mitiga­tions that minimize applic­ation downtime & latency. Shield
 Filter malicious web trafficWeb Applic­ation Firewall (WAF)WAF is a web applic­ation firewall that helps protect web apps or APIs against common web exploits that may affect availa­bility, compromise security, or consume excessive resources. WAF
 Central management of firewall rulesFirewall ManagerFirewall Manager eases the user AWS WAF admini­str­ation & mainte­nance activities over multiple accounts & resources. FirewallManager
Data protec­tionDiscover and protect your sensitive data at scaleMacieMacie is a fully managed data (security & privacy) service that uses ML & pattern matching to discover & protect sensitive data. Macie
 Key storage and managementKey Management Service (KMS)KMS makes it easy for to create & manage crypto­graphic keys & control their use across a wide range of AWS services & in your applic­ations. KMS
 Hardware based key storage for regulatory complianceCloudHSMCloudHSM is a cloud-­based hardware security module (HSM) that enables you to easily generate & use your own encryption keys. CloudHSM
 Provision, manage, and deploy public and private SSL/TLS certif­icatesCertif­icate ManagerCertif­icate Manager is a service that easily provision, manage, & deploy public and private SSL/TLS certs for use with AWS services & internal connected resources. ACM
 Rotate, manage, and retrieve secretsSecrets ManagerSecrets Manager assist the user to safely encode, store, & recover creden­tials for any user’s database & other services. SecretsManager
Incident responseInvest­igate potential security issuesDetectiveDetective makes it easy to analyze, invest­igate, & quickly identify the root cause of potential security issues or suspicious activi­ties. Detective
 Fast, automated, cost- effective disaster recoveryCloudE­ndure Disaster RecoveryProvides scalable, cost-e­ffe­ctive business continuity for physical, virtual, & cloud servers. CloudEndure
Comp­lia­nceNo cost, self-s­ervice portal for on-demand access to AWS’ compliance reportsArtifactArtifact is a web service that enables the user to download AWS security & compliance records. Artifact

Data Lakes & Analytics

Cate­goryUse casesServ­iceDesc­rip­tion
Anal­yticsIntera­ctive analyticsAthenaAthena is an intera­ctive query service that makes it easy to analyze data in S3 using standard SQL. Athena
 Big data processingEMREMR is the indust­ry-­leading cloud big data platform for processing vast amounts of data using open source tools such as Apache Spark, Hive, HBase,­Flink, Hudi, & Presto. EMR
 Data wareho­usingRedshiftThe most popular & fastest cloud data warehouse. Redshift
 Real-time analyticsKinesisKinesis makes it easy to collect, process, & analyze real-time, streaming data so one can get timely insights. Kinesis
 Operat­ional analyticsElasti­csearch ServiceElasti­csearch Service is a fully managed service that makes it easy to deploy, secure, & run Elasti­csearch cost effect­ively at scale. ES
 Dashboards & visual­iza­tionsQuicksightQuickSight is a fast, cloud-­powered business intell­igence service that makes it easy to deliver insights to everyone in organi­zation. QuickSight
Data movementReal-time data movement1) Amazon Managed Streaming for Apache Kafka (MSK) 2) Kinesis Data Streams 3) Kinesis Data Firehose 4) Kinesis Data Analytics 5) Kinesis Video Streams 6) GlueMSK is a fully managed service that makes it easy to build & run applic­ations that use Apache Kafka to process streaming data. MSK KDS KDF KDA KVS Glue
Data lakeObject storage1) S3 2) Lake FormationLake Formation is a service that makes it easy to set up a secure data lake in days. A data lake is a centra­lized, curated, & secured repository that stores all data, both in its original form & prepared for analysis. S3 LakeFormation
 Backup & archive1) S3 Glacier 2) BackupS3 Glacier & S3 Glacier Deep Archive are a secure, durable, & extremely low-cost S3 cloud storage classes for data archiving & long-term backup. S3Glacier
 Data catalog1) Glue 2)) Lake FormationRefer as above.
 Third-­party dataData ExchangeData Exchange makes it easy to find, subscribe to, & use third-­party data in the cloud. DataExchange
Pred­ictive analytics && machine learningFrameworks & interfacesDeep Learning AMIsDeep Learning AMIs provide machine learning practi­tioners & resear­chers with the infras­tru­cture & tools to accelerate deep learning in the cloud, at any scale. DeepLearningAMIs
 Platform servicesSageMakerSageMaker is a fully managed service that provides every developer & data scientist with the ability to build, train, & deploy machine learning (ML) models quickly. SageMaker

Containers

Use casesServ­iceDesc­rip­tion
Store, encrypt, and manage container imagesECRRefer compute section
Run contai­nerized applic­ations or build micros­ervicesECSRefer compute section
Manage containers with KubernetesEKSRefer compute section
Run containers without managing serversFargateFargate is a serverless compute engine for containers that works with both ECS & EKS. Fargate
Run containers with server­-level controlEC2Refer compute section
Contai­nerize and migrate existing applic­ationsApp2Co­ntainerApp2Co­ntainer (A2C) is a comman­d-line tool for modern­izing .NET & Java applic­ations into contai­nerized applic­ations. App2Container
Quickly launch and manage contai­nerized applic­ationsCopilotCopilot is a command line interface (CLI) that enables customers to quickly launch & easily manage contai­nerized applic­ations on AWS. Copilot

Serverless

Cate­goryServ­iceDesc­rip­tion
Comp­uteLambdaLambda lets you run code without provis­ioning or managing servers. You pay only for the compute time you consume.
 Lambda@EdgeLambda­@Edge is a feature of Amazon CloudFront that lets you run code closer to users of your applic­ation, which improves perfor­mance & reduces latency.
 FargateRefer containers section
Stor­ageS3Refer storage section
 EFSRefer storage section
Data storesDynamoDBDynamoDB is a key-value & document database that delivers single­-digit millis­econd perfor­mance at any scale.
 Aurora ServerlessAurora Serverless is an on-demand, auto-s­caling config­uration for Amazon Aurora (MySQL & Postgr­eSQ­L-c­omp­atible editions), where the database will automa­tically start up, shut down, & scale capacity up or down based on your applic­ation’s needs.
 RDS ProxyRDS Proxy is a fully managed, highly available database proxy for RDS that makes applic­ations more scalable, resilient to database failures, & more secure.
API ProxyAPI GatewayAPI Gateway is a fully managed service that makes it easy for developers to create, publish, maintain, monitor, & secure APIs at any scale.
Appl­ication integr­ationSNSSNS is a fully managed messaging service for both system­-to­-system & app-to­-person (A2P) commun­ica­tion.
 SQSSQS is a fully managed message queuing service that enables to decouple & scale micros­erv­ices, distri­buted systems, & serverless applic­ations.
 AppSyncAppSync is a fully managed service that makes it easy to develop GraphQL APIs by handling the heavy lifting of securely connecting to data sources like AWS DynamoDB, Lambda.
 EventBridgeEventB­ridge is a serverless event bus that makes it easy to connect applic­ations together using data from apps, integrated SaaS apps, & AWS services.
Orch­est­rat­ionStep FunctionsStep Functions is a serverless function orches­trator that makes it easy to sequence Lambda functions & multiple AWS services into busine­ss-­cri­tical applic­ations.
Anal­yticsKinesisKinesis makes it easy to collect, process, & analyze real-time, streaming data so one can get timely insights.
 AthenaAthena is an intera­ctive query service that makes it easy to analyze data in Amazon S3 using standard SQL.

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Applic­ation Integr­ation

Cate­goryServ­iceDesc­rip­tion
Mess­agingSNSReliable high throughput pub/sub, SMS, email, and mobile push notifi­cations
 SQSMessage queue that sends, stores, and receives messages between applic­ation components at any volume
 MQMessage broker for Apache ActiveMQ that makes migration easy and enables hybrid archit­ectures
Work­flowsStep FunctionsCoordinate multiple AWS services into serverless workflows so you can build and update apps quickly
API manage­mentAPI GatewayCreate, publish, maintain, monitor, & secure APIs at any scale for serverless workloads & web apps
 AppSyncCreate a flexible API to securely access, manipu­late, & combine data from one or more data sources
Event busEventBridgeBuild an event-­driven archit­ecture that connects applic­ation data from your own apps, SaaS, & AWS services
 AppFlowAutomate the flow of data between SaaS applic­ations & AWS services at nearly any scale, without code.


AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Management & Governance Services

Cate­goryServ­iceDesc­rip­tion
EnableControl TowerThe easiest way to set up and govern a new, secure multi-­account AWS enviro­nment. ControlTower
 Organi­zationsOrgani­zations helps centrally govern enviro­nment as you grow & scale workloads on AWS Organizations
 Well-A­rch­itected ToolWell-A­rch­itected Tool helps review the state of workloads & compares them to the latest AWS archit­ectural best practices. WATool
 BudgetsBudgets allows to set custom budgets to track cost & usage from the simplest to the most complex use cases. Budgets
 License ManagerLicense Manager makes it easier to manage software licenses from software vendors such as Microsoft, SAP, Oracle, & IBM across AWS & on-pre­mises enviro­nments. LicenseManager
Prov­isionCloudF­orm­ationCloudF­orm­ation enables the user to design & provision AWS infras­tru­cture deploy­ments predic­tably & repeat­edly. CloudFormation
 Service CatalogService Catalog allows organi­zations to create & manage catalogs of IT services that are approved for use on AWS. ServiceCatalog
 OpsWorksOpsWorks presents a simple and flexible way to create and maintain stacks and applic­ations. OpsWorks
 Market­placeMarket­place is a digital catalog with thousands of software listings from indepe­ndent software vendors that make it easy to find, test, buy, & deploy software that runs on AWS. Marketplace
Oper­ateCloudWatchCloudWatch offers a reliable, scalable, & flexible monitoring solution that can easily start. CloudWatch
 CloudTrailCloudTrail is a service that enables govern­ance, compli­ance, operat­ional auditing, & risk auditing of AWS account. CloudTrail
 ConfigConfig
 Systems ManagerSystems Manager to plan, proctor, & automate admini­str­ation tasks on the AWS resources. SystemsManager
 Cost & usage reportRefer cost management section
 Cost explorerRefer cost management section
 Managed ServicesOperate your AWS infras­tru­cture on your behalf. ManagedServices
 X RayX-Ray

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

AWS Recommended security best practices

Turn on multif­actor authen­tic­ation for the “root” account
Turn on CloudTrail log file valida­tion.
Enable CloudTrail multi-­region logging.
Integrate CloudTrail with CloudW­atch.
Enable access logging for CloudTrail S3 buckets.
Enable access logging for Elastic Load Balancer (ELB).
Enable Redshift audit logging.
Enable Virtual Private Cloud (VPC) flow logging.
Require multif­actor authen­tic­ation (MFA) to delete CloudTrail buckets
Enable CloudTrail logging across all AWS.
Turn on multi-­factor authen­tic­ation for IAM users.
Enable IAM users for multi-mode access.
Attach IAM policies to groups or roles
Rotate IAM access keys regularly, and standa­rdize on the selected number of days
Set up a strict password policy.
Set the password expiration period to 90 days and prevent reuseC­ustomer Visual­force pages with standard headers
Don’t use expired SSL/TLS certif­icates
User HTTPS for CloudFront distri­butions
Restrict access to CloudTrail bucket.
Encrypt CloudTrail log files at rest
Encrypt Elastic Block Store (EBS) database.
Provision access to resources using IAM roles.
Ensure EC2 security groups don’t have large ranges of ports open
Configure EC2 security groups to restrict inbound access to EC2.
Avoid using root user accounts.
Use secure SSL ciphers when connecting between the client and ELB.
Use secure SSL versions when connecting between client and ELB.
Use a standard naming (tagging) convention for EC2.
Encrypt RDS.
Ensure access keys are not being used with root accounts.
Use secure CloudFront SSL versions.
Enable the requir­e_ssl parameter in all Redshift clusters.
Rotate SSH keys period­ically.
Minimize the number of discrete security groups.
Reduce number of IAM groups.
Terminate unused access keys
Disable access for inactive or unused IAM users
Remove unused IAM access keys
Delete unused SSH Public Keys
Restrict access to AMIs.
Restrict access to EC2 security groups.
Restrict access to RDS instances.
Restrict access to Redshift clusters.
Restrict outbound access.
Disallow unrest­ricted ingress access on uncommon ports.
Restrict access to well-known ports such as CIFS, FTP, ICMP, SMTP, SSH, Remote desktop
Inventory & categorize all existing custom apps by the types of data stored, compliance requir­ements & possible threats they face.
Involve IT security throughout the develo­pment process.
Grant the fewest privileges as possible for applic­ation users
Enforce a single set of data loss prevention policies across custom applic­ations and all other cloud services.
Encrypt highly sensitive data such as protected health inform­ation (PHI) or personally identi­fiable inform­ation (PII).

AWS RE:INVENT 2021 – LATEST PRODUCTS AND SERVICES ANNOUNCED:

1- Read For Me

Read For Me launched at the 2021 AWS re:Invent Builders’ Fair in Las Vegas. A web application which helps the visually impaired ‘hear documents. With the help of AI services such as Amazon Textract, Amazon Comprehend, Amazon Translate and Amazon Polly utilizing an event-driven architecture and serverless technology, users upload a picture of a document, or anything with text, and within a few seconds “hear” that document in their chosen language.

AWS read for me

2- Delivering code and architectures through AWS Proton and Git

Infrastructure operators are looking for ways to centrally define and manage the architecture of their services, while developers need to find a way to quickly and safely deploy their code. In this session, learn how to use AWS Proton to define architectural templates and make them available to development teams in a collaborative manner. Also, learn how to enable development teams to customize their templates so that they fit the needs of their services.

3- Accelerate front-end web and mobile development with AWS Amplify

User-facing web and mobile applications are the primary touchpoint between organizations and their customers. To meet the ever-rising bar for customer experience, developers must deliver high-quality apps with both foundational and differentiating features. AWS Amplify helps front-end web and mobile developers build faster front to back. In this session, review Amplify’s core capabilities like authentication, data, and file storage and explore new capabilities, such as Amplify Geo and extensibility features for easier app customization with AWS services and better integration with existing deployment pipelines. Also learn how customers have been successful using Amplify to innovate in their businesses.

3- Train ML models at scale with Amazon SageMaker, featuring Aurora

Today, AWS customers use Amazon SageMaker to train and tune millions of machine learning (ML) models with billions of parameters. In this session, learn about advanced SageMaker capabilities that can help you manage large-scale model training and tuning, such as distributed training, automatic model tuning, optimizations for deep learning algorithms, debugging, profiling, and model checkpointing, so that even the largest ML models can be trained in record time for the lowest cost. Then, hear from Aurora, a self-driving vehicle technology company, on how they use SageMaker training capabilities to train large perception models for autonomous driving using massive amounts of images, video, and 3D point cloud data.

AWS RE:INVENT 2020 – LATEST PRODUCTS AND SERVICES ANNOUNCED:

1-Modernize log analytics with Amazon Elasticsearch Service

Amazon Elasticsearch Service is uniquely positioned to handle log analytics workloads. With a multitude of open-source and AWS-native service options, users can assemble effective log data ingestion pipelines and couple these with Amazon Elasticsearch Service to build a robust, cost-effective log analytics solution. This session reviews patterns and frameworks leveraged by companies such as Capital One to build an end-to-end log analytics solution using Amazon Elasticsearch Service.
 
Many companies in regulated industries have achieved compliance requirements using AWS Config. They also need a record of the incidents generated by AWS Config in tools such as ServiceNow for audits and remediation. In this session, learn how you can achieve compliance as code using AWS Config. Through the creation of a noncompliant Amazon EC2 machine, this demo shows how AWS Config triggers an incident into a governance, risk, and compliance system for audit recording and remediation. The session also covers best practices for how to automate the setup process with AWS CloudFormation to support many teams.
 
3- Cost-optimize your enterprise workloads with Amazon EBS – Compute

Recent times have underscored the need to enable agility while maintaining the lowest total cost of ownership (TCO). In this session, learn about the latest volume types that further optimize your performance and cost, while enabling you to run newer applications on AWS with high availability. Dive deep into the latest AWS volume launches and cost-optimization strategies for workloads such as databases, virtual desktop infrastructure, and low-latency interactive applications.
4- Amazon Location Service: Enable apps with location features
Location data is a vital ingredient in today’s applications, enabling use cases from asset tracking to geomarketing. Now, developers can use the new Amazon Location Service to add maps, tracking, places, geocoding, and geofences to applications, easily, securely, and affordably. Join this session to see how to get started with the service and integrate high-quality location data from geospatial data providers Esri and HERE. Learn how to move from experimentation to production quickly with location capabilities. This session can help developers who require simple location data and those building sophisticated asset tracking, customer engagement, fleet management, and delivery applications.
 
5- Automate, track, and manage tasks with Amazon Connect Tasks
In this session, learn how Amazon Connect Tasks makes it easy for you to prioritize, assign, and track all the tasks that agents need to complete, including work in external applications needed to resolve customer issues (such as emails, cases, and social posts). Tasks provides a single place for agents to be assigned calls, chats, and tasks, ensuring agents are focused on the highest-priority work. Also, learn how you can also use Tasks with Amazon Connect’s workflow capabilities to automate task-related actions that don’t require agent interaction. Come see how you can use Amazon Connect Tasks to increase customer satisfaction while improving agent productivity.
6- Solve customer issues quickly with Amazon Connect Wisdom
New agent-assist capabilities from Amazon Connect Wisdom make it easier and faster for agents to find the information they need to solve customer issues in real time. In this session, see how agents can use simple ML-powered search to find information stored across knowledge bases, wikis, and FAQs, like Salesforce and ServiceNow. Join the session to hear Traeger Pellet Grills discuss how it’s using these new features, along with Contact Lens for Amazon Connect, to deliver real-time recommendations to agents based on issues automatically detected during calls.
 
 

7- Introducing Amazon Managed Service for Grafana:

Grafana is a popular, open-source data visualization tool that enables you to centrally query and analyze observability data across multiple data sources. Learn how the new Amazon Managed Service for Grafana, announced with Grafana’s parent company Grafana Labs, solves common observability challenges. With the new fully managed service, you can monitor, analyze, and alarm on metrics, logs, and traces while offloading the operational management of security patching, upgrading, and resource scaling to AWS. This session also covers new Grafana capabilities such as advanced security features and native AWS service integrations to simplify configuration and onboarding of data sources.
 
8- Introducing Amazon Managed Service for Prometheus (AMP)

Prometheus is a popular open-source monitoring and alerting solution optimized for container environments. Customers love Prometheus for its active open-source community and flexible query language, using it to monitor containers across AWS and on-premises environments. Amazon Managed Service for Prometheus is a fully managed Prometheus-compatible monitoring service. In this session, learn how you can use the same open-source Prometheus data model, existing instrumentation, and query language to monitor performance with improved scalability, availability, and security without having to manage the underlying infrastructure.

Today, enterprises use low-power, long-range wide-area network (LoRaWAN) connectivity to transmit data over long ranges, through walls and floors of buildings, and in commercial and industrial use cases. However, this requires companies to operate their own LoRa network server (LNS). In this session, learn how you can use LoRaWAN for AWS IoT Core to avoid time-consuming and undifferentiated development work, operational overhead of managing infrastructure, or commitment to costly subscription-based pricing from third-party service providers.
 
 
10-AWS CloudShell: The fastest way to get started with AWS CLI

AWS CloudShell is a free, browser-based shell available from the AWS console that provides a simple way to interact with AWS resources through the AWS command-line interface (CLI). In this session, see an overview of both AWS CloudShell and the AWS CLI, which when used together are the fastest and easiest ways to automate tasks, write scripts, and explore new AWS services. Also, see a demo of both services and how to quickly and easily get started with each.

Industrial organizations use AWS IoT SiteWise to liberate their industrial equipment data in order to make data-driven decisions. Now with AWS IoT SiteWise Edge, you can collect, organize, process, and monitor your equipment data on premises before sending it to local or AWS Cloud destinations—all while using the same asset models, APIs, and functionality. Learn how you can extend the capabilities of AWS IoT SiteWise to the edge with AWS IoT SiteWise Edge.
 

12-AWS Fault Injection Simulator: Fully managed chaos engineering service

AWS Fault Injection Simulator is a fully managed chaos engineering service that helps you improve application resiliency by making it easy and safe to perform controlled chaos engineering experiments on AWS. In this session, see an overview of chaos engineering and AWS Fault Injection Simulator, and then see a demo of how to use AWS Fault Injection Simulator to make applications more resilient to failure.
 
13- Data lakes: Easily build, secure, and share with AWS Lake Formation
Organizations are breaking down data silos and building petabyte-scale data lakes on AWS to democratize access to thousands of end users. Since its launch, AWS Lake Formation has accelerated data lake adoption by making it easy to build and secure data lakes. In this session, AWS Lake Formation GM Mehul A. Shah showcases recent innovations enabling modern data lake use cases. He also introduces a new capability of AWS Lake Formation that enables fine-grained, row-level security and near-real-time analytics in data lakes.
 
14- Understand ML model predictions and biases with Amazon SageMaker Clarify
Machine learning (ML) models may generate predictions that are not fair, whether because of biased data, a model that contains bias, or bias that emerges over time as real-world conditions change. Likewise, closed-box ML models are opaque, making it difficult to explain to internal stakeholders, auditors, external regulators, and customers alike why models make predictions both overall and for individual inferences. In this session, learn how Amazon SageMaker Clarify is providing built-in tools to detect bias across the ML workflow including during data prep, after training, and over time in your deployed model.
 
15- Run Spark on Kubernetes with Amazon EMR on Amazon EKS
Amazon EMR on Amazon EKS introduces a new deployment option in Amazon EMR that allows you to run open-source big data frameworks on Amazon EKS. This session digs into the technical details of Amazon EMR on Amazon EKS, helps you understand benefits for customers using Amazon EMR or running open-source Spark on Amazon EKS, and discusses performance considerations.
 
Finding unexpected anomalies in metrics can be challenging. Some organizations look for data that falls outside of arbitrary ranges; if the range is too narrow, they miss important alerts, and if it is too broad, they receive too many false alerts. In this session, learn about Amazon Lookout for Metrics, a fully managed anomaly detection service that is powered by machine learning and over 20 years of anomaly detection expertise at Amazon to quickly help organizations detect anomalies and understand what caused them. This session guides you through setting up your own solution to monitor for anomalies and showcases how to deliver notifications via various integrations with the service.
 
 
17- Improve application availability with ML-powered insights using Amazon DevOps Guru
As applications become increasingly distributed and complex, developers and IT operations teams need more automated practices to maintain application availability and reduce the time and effort spent detecting, debugging, and resolving operational issues manually. In this session, discover Amazon DevOps Guru, an ML-powered cloud operations service, informed by years of Amazon.com and AWS operational excellence, that provides an easy and automated way to improve an application’s operational performance and availability. See how you can transform your IT operations and reduce mean time to recovery (MTTR) with contextual insights.
 
18- ML-powered voice authentication with Amazon Connect Voice ID
Amazon Connect Voice ID provides real-time caller authentication that makes voice interactions in contact centers more secure and efficient. Voice ID uses machine learning to verify the identity of genuine customers by analyzing a caller’s unique voice characteristics. This allows contact centers to use an additional security layer that doesn’t rely on the caller answering multiple security questions, and it makes it easy to enroll and verify customers without disrupting the natural flow of the conversation. Join this session to see how fast and secure ML-based voice authentication can power your contact center.
 
19- Introducing EC2 G4ad instances for graphics-intensive apps
G4ad instances feature the latest AMD Radeon Pro V520 GPUs and second-generation AMD EPYC processors. These new instances deliver the best price performance in Amazon EC2 for graphics-intensive applications such as virtual workstations, game streaming, and graphics rendering. This session dives deep into these instances, ideal use cases, and performance benchmarks, and it provides a demo.
 
 
new capability that enables deployment of Amazon ECS tasks on customer-managed infrastructure. This session covers the evolution of Amazon ECS over time, including new on-premises capabilities to manage your hybrid footprint using a common fully managed control plane and API. You learn some foundational technical details and important tenets that AWS is using to design these capabilities, and the session ends with a short demo of Amazon ECS Anywhere.
 
21- Amazon Aurora Serverless v2: Instant scaling for demanding workloads
Amazon Aurora Serverless is an on-demand, auto scaling configuration of Amazon Aurora that automatically adjusts database capacity based on application demand. With Amazon Aurora Serverless v2, you can now scale database workloads instantly from hundreds to hundreds of thousands of transactions per second and adjust capacity in fine-grained increments to provide just the right amount of database resources. This session dives deep into Aurora Serverless v2 and shows how it can help you operate even the most demanding database workloads worry-free.
 
Apple delights its customers with stunning devices like iPhones, iPads, MacBooks, Apple Watches, and Apple TVs, and developers want to create applications that run on iOS, macOS, iPadOS, tvOS, watchOS, and Safari. In this session, learn how Amazon is innovating to improve the development experience for Apple applications. Come learn how AWS now enables you to develop, build, test, and sign Apple applications with the flexibility, scalability, reliability, and cost benefits of Amazon EC2.
 
When industrial equipment breaks down, this means costly downtime. To avoid this, you perform maintenance at regular intervals, which is inefficient and increases your maintenance costs. Predictive maintenance allows you to plan the required repair at an optimal time before a breakdown occurs. However, predictive maintenance solutions can be challenging and costly to implement given the high costs and complexity of sensors and infrastructure. You also have to deal with the challenges of interpreting sensor data and accurately detecting faults in order to send alerts. Come learn how Amazon Monitron helps you solve these challenges by offering an out-of-the-box, end-to-end, cost-effective system.
 
As data grows, we need innovative approaches to get insight from all the information at scale and speed. AQUA is a new hardware-accelerated cache that uses purpose-built analytics processors to deliver up to 10 times better query performance than other cloud data warehouses by automatically boosting certain types of queries. It’s available in preview on Amazon Redshift RA3 nodes in select regions at no extra cost and without any code changes. Attend this session to understand how AQUA works and which analytic workloads will benefit the most from AQUA.
 
Figuring out if a part has been manufactured correctly, or if machine part is damaged, is vitally important. Making this determination usually requires people to inspect objects, which can be slow and error-prone. Some companies have applied automated image analysis—machine vision—to detect anomalies. While useful, these systems can be very difficult and expensive to maintain. In this session, learn how Amazon Lookout for Vision can automate visual inspection across your production lines in few days. Get started in minutes, and perform visual inspection and identify product defects using as few as 30 images, with no machine learning (ML) expertise required.
 
AWS Proton is a new service that enables infrastructure operators to create and manage common container-based and serverless application stacks and automate provisioning and code deployments through a self-service interface for their developers. Learn how infrastructure teams can empower their developers to use serverless and container technologies without them first having to learn, configure, and maintain the underlying resources.
 
Migrating applications from SQL Server to an open-source compatible database can be time-consuming and resource-intensive. Solutions such as the AWS Database Migration Service (AWS DMS) automate data and database schema migration, but there is often more work to do to migrate application code. This session introduces Babelfish for Aurora PostgreSQL, a new translation layer for Amazon Aurora PostgreSQL that enables Amazon Aurora to understand commands from applications designed to run on Microsoft SQL Server. Learn how Babelfish for Aurora PostgreSQL works to reduce the time, risk, and effort of migrating Microsoft SQL Server-based applications to Aurora, and see some of the capabilities that make this possible.
 
 
 
Over the past decade, we’ve witnessed a digital transformation in healthcare, with organizations capturing huge volumes of patient information. But this data is often unstructured and difficult to extract, with information trapped in clinical notes, insurance claims, recorded conversations, and more. In this session, explore how the new Amazon HealthLake service removes the heavy lifting of organizing, indexing, and structuring patient information to provide a complete view of each patient’s health record in the FHIR standard format. Come learn how to use prebuilt machine learning models to analyze and understand relationships in the data, identify trends, and make predictions, ultimately delivering better care for patients.
 
 
When business users want to ask new data questions that are not answered by existing business intelligence (BI) dashboards, they rely on BI teams to create or update data models and dashboards, which can take several weeks to complete. In this session, learn how Merlin lets users simply enter their questions on the Merlin search bar and get answers in seconds. Merlin uses natural language processing and semantic data understanding to make sense of the data. It extracts business terminologies and intent from users’ questions, retrieves the corresponding data from the source, and returns the answer in the form of a number, chart, or table in Amazon QuickSight.
 
When developers publish images publicly for anyone to find and use—whether for free or under license—they must make copies of common images and upload them to public websites and registries that do not offer the same availability commitment as Amazon ECR. This session explores a new Amazon public registry, Amazon ECR Public, built with AWS experience operating Amazon ECR. Here, developers can share georeplicated container software worldwide for anyone to discover and download. Developers can quickly publish public container images with a single command. Learn how anyone can browse and pull container software for use in their own applications.
 
Industrial companies are constantly working to avoid unplanned downtime due to equipment failure and to improve operational efficiency. Over the years, they have invested in physical sensors, data connectivity, data storage, and dashboarding to monitor equipment and get real-time alerts. Current data analytics methods include single-variable thresholds and physics-based modeling approaches, which are not effective at detecting certain failure types and operating conditions. In this session, learn how Amazon Lookout for Equipment uses data from your sensors to detect abnormal equipment behavior so that you can take action before machine failures occur and avoid unplanned downtime.
 
In this session, learn how Contact Lens for Amazon Connect enables your contact center supervisors to understand the sentiment of customer conversations, identify call drivers, evaluate compliance with company guidelines, and analyze trends. This can help supervisors train agents, replicate successful interactions, and identify crucial company and product feedback. Your supervisors can conduct fast full-text search on all transcripts to quickly troubleshoot customer issues. With real-time capabilities, you can get alerted to issues during live customer calls and deliver proactive assistance to agents while calls are in progress, improving customer satisfaction. Join this session to see how real-time ML-powered analytics can power your contact center.
 
AWS Local Zones places compute, storage, database, and other select services closer to locations where no AWS Region exists today. Last year, AWS launched the first two Local Zones in Los Angeles, and organizations are using Local Zones to deliver applications requiring ultra-low-latency compute. AWS is launching Local Zones in 15 metro areas to extend access across the contiguous US. In this session, learn how you can run latency-sensitive portions of applications local to end users and resources in a specific geography, delivering single-digit millisecond latency for use cases such as media and entertainment content creation, real-time gaming, reservoir simulations, electronic design automation, and machine learning.
 
Your customers expect a fast, frictionless, and personalized customer service experience. In this session, learn about Amazon Connect Customer Profiles—a new unified customer profile capability to allow agents to provide more personalized service during a call. Customer Profiles automatically brings together customer information from multiple applications, such as Salesforce, Marketo, Zendesk, ServiceNow, and Amazon Connect contact history, into a unified customer profile. With Customer Profiles, agents have the information they need, when they need it, directly in their agent application, resulting in improved customer satisfaction and reduced call resolution times (by up to 15%).
 
Preparing training data can be tedious. Amazon SageMaker Data Wrangler provides a faster, visual way to aggregate and prepare data for machine learning. In this session, learn how to use SageMaker Data Wrangler to connect to data sources and use prebuilt visualization templates and built-in data transforms to streamline the process of cleaning, verifying, and exploring data without having to write a single line of code. See a demonstration of how SageMaker Data Wrangler  can be used to perform simple tasks as well as more advanced use cases. Finally, see how you can take your data preparation workflows into production with a single click.
 

Increase availability with AWS observability solutions

To provide access to critical resources when needed and also limit the potential financial impact of an application outage, a highly available application design is critical. In this session, learn how you can use Amazon CloudWatch and AWS X-Ray to increase the availability of your applications. Join this session to learn how AWS observability solutions can help you proactively detect, efficiently investigate, and quickly resolve operational issues. All of which help you manage and improve your application’s availability.

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Securing your Amazon EKS applications: Best practices

Security is critical for your Kubernetes-based applications. Join this session to learn about the security features and best practices for Amazon EKS. This session covers encryption and other configurations and policies to keep your containers safe.

 
Andy Jassy Keynote: Live from Seattle, Andy Jassy takes the stage to share his insights and the latest news about AWS customers, products, and services.
 
AWS Partner Keynote
Don’t miss the AWS Partner Keynote with Doug Yeum, head of Global Partner Organization; Sandy Carter, vice president, Global Public Sector Partners and Programs; and Dave McCann, vice president, AWS Migration, Marketplace, and Control Services, to learn how AWS is helping partners modernize their businesses to help their customers transform.
 
Machine Learning Keynote
Join Swami Sivasubramanian for the first-ever Machine Learning Keynote, live at re:Invent. Hear how AWS is freeing builders to innovate on machine learning with the latest developments in AWS machine learning, demos of new technology, and insights from customers.
 
Infrastructure Keynote
Join Peter DeSantis, senior vice president of Global Infrastructure and Customer Support, to learn how AWS has optimized its cloud infrastructure to run some of the world’s most demanding womath.ceilrkloads and give your business a competitive edge.
 
Werner Vogels Keynote – Watch First

Join Dr. Werner Vogels at 8:00AM (PST) as he goes behind the scenes to show how Amazon is solving today’s hardest technology problems. Based on his experience working with some of the largest and most successful applications in the world, Dr. Vogels shares his insights on building truly resilient architectures and what that means for the future of software development.

The evolution of cloud architecture
Cloud architecture has evolved over the years as the nature of adoption has changed and the level of maturity in our thinking continues to develop. In this session, Rudy Valdez, VP of Solutions Architecture and Training & Certification, walks
 
Increasing innovation with serverless applications
Organizations around the world are minimizing operations and maximizing agility by developing with serverless building blocks. Join David Richardson, VP of Serverless, for a closer look at the serverless programming model, including event-dri
 
The extended cloud: AWS powers edge-to-cloud applications
AWS edge computing solutions provide infrastructure and software that move data processing and analysis as close to the endpoint where data is generated as required by customers. In this session, learn about new edge computing capabilities announced at re:Invent and how customers are using purpose-built edge solutions to extend the cloud to the edge.
 
 

Containers

Topics on simplifying container deployment, legacy workload migration using containers, optimizing costs for containerized applications, container architectural choices, and more.
 
Getting an insight into your Kubernetes applications

Do you need to know what’s happening with your applications that run on Amazon EKS? In this session, learn how you can combine open-source tools, such as Prometheus and Grafana, with Amazon CloudWatch using CloudWatch Container Insights. Come to this session for a demo of Prometheus metrics with Container Insights.

 
AWS Copilot: Simplifying container development

The hard part is done. You and your team have spent weeks poring over pull requests, building microservices and containerizing them. Congrats! But what do you do now? How do you get those services on AWS? How do you manage multiple environments? How do you automate deployments? AWS Copilot is a new command line tool that makes building, developing, and operating containerized applications on AWS a breeze. In this session, learn how AWS Copilot can help you and your team manage your services and deploy them to production, safely and delightfully.

 
Choosing your container data plane on AWS
Five years ago, if you talked about containers, the assumption was that you were running them on a Linux VM. Fast forward to today, and now that assumption is challenged—in a good way. Come to this session to explore the best data plane option to meet your needs. This session covers the advantages of different abstraction models (Amazon EC2 or AWS Fargate), the operating system (Linux or Windows), the CPU architecture (x86 or Arm), and the commercial model (Spot or On-Demand Instances.)
 
Securing your Amazon EKS applications: Best practices

Security is critical for your Kubernetes-based applications. Join this session to learn about the security features and best practices for Amazon EKS. This session covers encryption and other configurations and policies to keep your containers safe.

 
GitOps compliant: How CommBank multiplied Amazon EKS clusters

In this session, learn how the Commonwealth Bank of Australia (CommBank) built a platform to run containerized applications in a regulated environment and then replicated it across multiple departments using Amazon EKS, AWS CDK, and GitOps. This session covers how to manage multiple multi-team Amazon EKS clusters across multiple AWS accounts while ensuring compliance and observability requirements and integrating Amazon EKS with AWS Identity and Access Management, Amazon CloudWatch, AWS Secrets Manager, Application Load Balancer, Amazon Route 53, and AWS Certificate Manager.

 
Getting up and running with Amazon EKS

Amazon EKS is a fully managed service that makes it easy to deploy, manage, and scale containerized applications using Kubernetes on AWS. Join this session to learn about how Verizon runs its core applications on Amazon EKS at scale. Verizon also discusses how it worked with AWS to overcome several post-Amazon EKS migration challenges and ensured that the platform was robust.

 
Developing CI/CD pipelines with Amazon ECS and AWS Fargate

Containers have helped revolutionize modern application architecture. While managed container services have enabled greater agility in application development, coordinating safe deployments and maintainable infrastructure has become more important than ever. This session outlines how to integrate CI/CD best practices into deployments of your Amazon ECS and AWS Fargate services using pipelines and the latest in AWS developer tooling.

 
Securing your Amazon ECS applications: Best practices

With Amazon ECS, you can run your containerized workloads securely and with ease. In this session, learn how to utilize the full spectrum of Amazon ECS security features and its tight integrations with AWS security features to help you build highly secure applications.

 
Optimize costs and manage spend for containerized applications

Do you have to budget your spend for container workloads? Do you need to be able to optimize your spend in multiple services to reduce waste? If so, this session is for you. It walks you through how you can use AWS services and configurations to improve your cost visibility. You learn how you can select the best compute options for your containers to maximize utilization and reduce duplication. This combined with various AWS purchase options helps you ensure that you’re using the best options for your services and your budget.

 
AWS Fargate: Are serverless containers right for you?

You have a choice of approach when it comes to provisioning compute for your containers. Some users prefer to have more direct control of their instances, while others could do away with the operational heavy lifting. AWS Fargate removes the need to provision and manage servers, lets you specify and pay for resources per application, and improves security through application isolation by design. This session explores the benefits and considerations of running on Fargate or directly on Amazon EC2 instances. You hear about new and upcoming features and learn how Amenity Analytics benefits from the serverless operational model.

 
Containers at AWS: More options and power than ever before

Are you confused by the many choices of containers services that you can run on AWS? This session explores all your options and the advantages of each. Whether you are just beginning to learn Docker or are an expert with Kubernetes, join this session to learn how to pick the right services that would work best for you.

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

 
Modernizing with containers

Leading containers migration and modernization initiatives can be daunting, but AWS is making it easier. This session explores architectural choices and common patterns, and it provides real-world customer examples. Learn about core technologies to help you build and operate container environments at scale. Discover how abstractions can reduce the pain for infrastructure teams, operators, and developers. Finally, hear the AWS vision for how to bring it all together with improved usability for more business agility.

 
Improving observability with AWS App Mesh and Amazon ECS

As the number of services grow within an application, it becomes difficult to pinpoint the exact location of errors, reroute traffic after failures, and safely deploy code changes. In this session, learn how to integrate AWS App Mesh with Amazon ECS to export monitoring data and implement consistent communications control logic across your application. This makes it easy to quickly pinpoint the exact locations of errors and automatically reroute network traffic, keeping your container applications highly available and performing well.

 
Best practices for containerizing legacy applications

Enterprises are continually looking to develop new applications using container technologies and leveraging modern CI/CD tools to automate their software delivery lifecycles. This session highlights the types of applications and associated factors that make a candidate suitable to be containerized. It also covers best practices that can be considered as you embark on your modernization journey.

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Looking at Amazon EKS through a networking lens

Because of its security, reliability, and scalability capabilities, Amazon Elastic Kubernetes Service (Amazon EKS) is used by organization in their most sensitive and mission-critical applications. This session focuses on how Amazon EKS networking works with an Amazon VPC and how to expose your Kubernetes application using Elastic Load Balancing load balancers. It also looks at options for more efficient IP address utilization.

AWS networking best practices in large-scale migrations

Network design is a critical component in your large-scale migration journey. This session covers some of the real-world networking challenges faced when migrating to the cloud. You learn how to overcome these challenges by diving deep into topics such as establishing private connectivity to your on-premises data center and accelerating data migrations using AWS Direct Connect/Direct Connect gateway, centralizing and simplifying your networking with AWS Transit Gateway, and extending your private DNS into the cloud. The session also includes a discussion of related best practices.

Innovating on AWS in a 5G world

5G will be the catalyst for the next industrial revolution. In this session, come learn about key technical use cases for different industry segments that will be enabled by 5G and related technologies, and hear about the architectural patterns that will support these use cases. You also learn about AWS-enabled 5G reference architectures that incorporate AWS services.

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

How to choose the right instance type for ML inference

AWS offers a breadth and depth of machine learning (ML) infrastructure you can use through either a do-it-yourself approach or a fully managed approach with Amazon SageMaker. In this session, explore how to choose the proper instance for ML inference based on latency and throughput requirements, model size and complexity, framework choice, and portability. Join this session to compare and contrast compute-optimized CPU-only instances, such as Amazon EC2 C4 and C5; high-performance GPU instances, such as Amazon EC2 G4 and P3; cost-effective variable-size GPU acceleration with Amazon Elastic Inference; and highest performance/cost with Amazon EC2 Inf1 instances powered by custom-designed AWS Inferentia chips.

Architectural patterns & best practices for workloads on VMware Cloud on AWS

When it comes to architecting your workloads on VMware Cloud on AWS, it is important to understand design patterns and best practices. Come join this session to learn how you can build well-architected cloud-based solutions for your VMware workloads. This session covers infrastructure designs with native AWS service integrations across compute, networking, storage, security, and operations. It also covers the latest announcements for VMware Cloud on AWS and how you can use these new features in your current architecture.

The cutover: Moving your traffic to the cloud

One of the most critical phases of executing a migration is moving traffic from your existing endpoints to your newly deployed resources in the cloud. This session discusses practices and patterns that can be leveraged to ensure a successful cutover to the cloud. The session covers preparation, tools and services, cutover techniques, rollback strategies, and engagement mechanisms to ensure a successful cutover.

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

DeepRacer

AWS DeepRacer is the fastest way to get rolling with machine learning. Developers of all skill levels can get hands-on, learning how to train reinforcement learning models in a cloud based 3D racing simulator. Attend a session to get started, and then test your skills by competing for prizes and glory in an exciting autonomous car racing experience throughout re:Invent!

AWS DeepRacer gives you an interesting and fun way to get started with reinforcement learning (RL). RL is an advanced machine learning (ML) technique that takes a very different approach to training models than other ML methods. Its super power is that it learns very complex behaviors without requiring any labeled training data, and it can make short-term decisions while optimizing for a longer-term goal. AWS DeepRacer makes it fast and easy to build models in Amazon SageMaker and train, test, and iterate quickly and easily on the track in the AWS DeepRacer 3D racing simulator. 

Build cloud-ready apps faster with Red Hat OpenShift Service on AWS (sponsored by Red Hat)
As more organizations are looking to migrate to the cloud, Red Hat OpenShift Service offers a proven, reliable, and consistent platform across the hybrid cloud. Red Hat and AWS recently announced a fully managed joint service that can be deployed directly from the AWS Management Console and can integrate with other AWS Cloud-native services. In this session, you learn about this new service, which delivers production-ready Kubernetes that many enterprises use on premises today, enhancing your ability to shift workloads to the AWS Cloud and making it easier to adopt containers and deploy applications faster. This presentation is brought to you by Red Hat, an AWS Partner.
 

Decoupling serverless workloads with Amazon EventBridge

Event-driven architecture can help you decouple services and simplify dependencies as your applications grow. In this session, you learn how Amazon EventBridge provides new options for developers who are looking to gain the benefits of this approach.

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

Deep dive on Amazon Timestream

Amazon Timestream is a fast, scalable, and serverless time series database service for IoT and operational applications that makes it easy to store and analyze trillions of events per day at as little as one-tenth the cost of relational databases. In this session, dive deep on Amazon Timestream features and capabilities, including its serverless automatic scaling architecture, its storage tiering that simplifies your data lifecycle management, its purpose-built query engine that lets you access and analyze recent and historical data together, and its built-in time series analytics functions that help you identify trends and patterns in your data in near-real time.

Accelerating outcomes and migrations with Savings Plans

Savings Plans is a flexible pricing model that allows you to save up to 72 percent on Amazon EC2, AWS Fargate, and AWS Lambda. Many AWS users have adopted Savings Plans since its launch in November 2019 for the simplicity, savings, ease of use, and flexibility. In this session, learn how many organizations use Savings Plans to drive more migrations and business outcomes. Hear from Comcast on their compute transformation journey to the cloud and how it started with RIs. As their cloud usage evolved, they adopted Savings Plans to drive business outcomes such as new architecture patterns.

Learn how teams at Amazon rapidly release features at scale

The ability to deploy only configuration changes, separate from code, means you do not have to restart the applications or services that use the configuration and changes take effect immediately. In this session, learn best practices used by teams within Amazon to rapidly release features at scale. Learn about a pattern that uses AWS CodePipeline and AWS AppConfig that will allow you to roll out application configurations without taking applications out of service. This will help you ship features faster across complex environments or regions.

 

Top-paying Cloud certifications:

  1. Google Certified Professional Cloud Architect — $175,761/year
  2. AWS Certified Solutions Architect – Associate — $149,446/year
  3. Azure/Microsoft Cloud Solution Architect – $141,748/yr
  4. Google Cloud Associate Engineer – $145,769/yr
  5. AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner — $131,465/year
  6. Microsoft Certified: Azure Fundamentals — $126,653/year
  7. Microsoft Certified: Azure Administrator Associate — $125,993/year
The Cloud is the future: The AWS Certified Solutions Architect – Associate Averge salary is $149,446/year. Get Certified Now with the apps below:

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

2022 AWS CCP CLF-C01 Practice Exam Course  – Top 300 Questions and Detailed Answers – Success Guaranteed – Save 50% with this link

AWS Cloud Practitioner CCP CLF-C01 Certification Exam Prep
AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner CCP CLF-C01 Certification Exam Prep

AWS Cloud Practitioner Breaking News –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 Testimonials – AWS Top Stories


Get it on Apple Books

Get it on Apple Books

I Passed AWS CCP Testimonials

AWS Cloud Practitioner CCP CLF-C01 Certification Exam Prep
I Passed AWS CCP – AWS Cloud Practitioner CCP CLF-C01 Certification Exam Prep
AWS Cloud Practitioner CCP CLF-C01 Certification Exam Prep

I just passed my AWS CCP!!! 

(Source: r/AWSCertifications)

Study Materials and Timeline:

I watched (binged) the A Cloud Guru course in two days and did the 6 practice exams over a week. I originally was only getting 70%’s on the exams, but continued doing them on my free time (to the point where I’d have 15 minutes and knock one out on my phone lol) and started getting 90%’s. – A mix of knowledge vs memorization tbh. Just make sure you read why your answers are wrong.

I don’t really have a huge IT background, although will note I work in a DevOps (1 1/2 years) environment; so I do use AWS to host our infrastructure. However, the exam is very high level compared to what I do/services I use. I’m fairly certain with zero knowledge/experience, someone could pass this within two weeks. AWS is also currently promoting a “get certified” challenge and is offering 50% off.

Best!

Resources:

AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Android –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on iOS –  AWS CCP CLF-C01 on Windows 10/11

2022 AWS CCP CLF-C01 Practice Exam Course  – Top 300 Questions and Detailed Answers – Success Guaranteed – Save 50% with this link

Good Tool For AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Exam Preparation

PASSED AWS CCP (2022)

 
AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner

Went through the entire CloudAcademy course. Most of the info went out the other ear. Got a 67% on their final exam. Took the ExamPro free exam, got 69%.

Was going to take it last Saturday, but I bought TutorialDojo’s exams on Udemy. Did one Friday night, got a 50% and rescheduled it a week later to today Sunday.

Took 4 total TD exams. Got a 50%, 54%, 67%, and 64%. Even up until last night I hated the TD exams with a passion, I thought they were covering way too much stuff that didn’t even pop up in study guides I read. Their wording for some problems were also atrocious. But looking back, the bulk of my “studying” was going through their pretty well written explanations, and their links to the white papers allowed me to know what and where to read.

Not sure what score I got yet on the exam. As someone who always hated testing, I’m pretty proud of myself. I also had to take a dump really bad starting at around question 25. Thanks to TutorialsDojo Jon Bonso for completely destroying my confidence before the exam, forcing me to up my game. It’s better to walk in way over prepared than underprepared.

Just Passed My CCP exam today (within 2 weeks)

I would like to thank this community for recommendations about exam preparation. It was wayyyy easier than I expected (also way easier than TD practice exams scenario-based questions-a lot less wordy on real exam). I felt so unready before the exam that I rescheduled the exam twice. Quick tip: if you have limited time to prepare for this exam, I would recommend scheduling the exam beforehand so that you don’t procrastinate fully.

Resources:

-Stephane’s course on Udemy (I have seen people saying to skip hands-on videos but I found them extremely helpful to understand most of the concepts-so try to not skip those hands-on)

-Tutorials Dojo practice exams (I did only 3.5 practice tests out of 5 and already got 8-10 EXACTLY worded questions on my real exam)

Previous Aws knowledge:

-Very little to no experience (deployed my group’s app to cloud via Elastic beanstalk in college-had 0 clue at the time about what I was doing-had clear guidelines)

Preparation duration: -2 weeks (honestly watched videos for 12 days and then went over summary and practice tests on the last two days)

Links to resources:

https://www.udemy.com/course/aws-certified-cloud-practitioner-new/

https://tutorialsdojo.com/courses/aws-certified-cloud-practitioner-practice-exams/

I passed the AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner

 
AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner

I used Stephane Maarek on Udemy. Purchased his course and the 6 Practice Exams. Also got Neal Davis’ 500 practice questions on Udemy. I took Stephane’s class over 2 days, then spent the next 2 weeks going over the tests (3~4 per day) till I was constantly getting over 80% – passed my exam with a 882.

Passed – CCP CLF-C01

 
 
AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner

What an adventure, I’ve never really gieven though to getting a cert until one day it just dawned on me that it’s one of the few resources that are globally accepted. So you can approach any company and basically prove you know what’s up on AWS 😀

Passed with two weeks of prep (after work and weekends)

Resources Used:

  • https://www.exampro.co/

    • This was just a nice structured presentation that also gives you the powerpoint slides plus cheatsheets and a nice overview of what is said in each video lecture.

  • Udemy – AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Practice Exams, created by Jon Bonso**, Tutorials Dojo**

    • These are some good prep exams, they ask the questions in a way that actually make you think about the related AWS Service. With only a few “Bullshit! That was asked in a confusing way” questions that popped up.

Pass AWS CCP. The score is beyond expected

I took CCP 2 days ago and got the pass notification right after submitting the answers. In about the next 3 hours I got an email from Credly for the badge. This morning I got an official email from AWS congratulating me on passing, the score is much higher than I expected. I took Stephane Maarek’s CCP course and his 6 demo exams, then Neal Davis’ 500 questions also. On all the demo exams, I took 1 fail and all passes with about 700-800. But in the real exam, I got 860. The questions in the real exam are kind of less verbose IMO, but I don’t truly agree with some people I see on this sub saying that they are easier.
Just a little bit of sharing, now I’ll find something to continue ^^

Good luck with your own exams.

Passed the AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner (CLF-C01) Exam!

Passed the exam! Spent 25 minutes answering all the questions. Another 10 to review. I might come back and update this post with my actual score.

Background

– A year of experience working with AWS (e.g., EC2, Elastic Beanstalk, Route 53, and Amplify).

– Cloud development on AWS is not my strong suit. I just Google everything, so my knowledge is very spotty. Less so now since I studied for this exam.

Study stats

– Spent three weeks studying for the exam.

– Studied an hour to two every day.

– Solved 800-1000 practice questions.

– Took 450 screenshots of practice questions and technology/service descriptions as reference notes to quickly swift through on my phone and computer for review. Screenshots were of questions that I either didn’t know, knew but was iffy on, or those I believed I’d easily forget.

– Made 15-20 pages of notes. Chill. Nothing crazy. This is on A4 paper. Free-form note taking. With big diagrams. Around 60-80 words per page.

– I was getting low-to-mid 70%s on Neal Davis’s and Stephane Maarek’s practice exams. Highest score I got was an 80%.

– I got a 67(?)% on one of Stephane Maarek’s exams. The only sub-70% I ever got on any practice test. I got slightly anxious. But given how much harder Maarek’s exams are compared to the actual exam, the anxiety was undue.

– Finishing the practice exams on time was never a problem for me. I would finish all of them comfortably within 35 minutes.

Resources used

– AWS Cloud Practitioner Essentials on the AWS Training and Certification Portal

– AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Practice Tests (Book) by Neal Davis

– 6 Practice Exams | AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner CLF-C01 by Stephane Maarek*

– Certified Cloud Practitioner Course by Exam Pro (Paid Version)**

– One or two free practice exams found by a quick Google search

*Regarding Exam Pro: I went through about 40% of the video lectures. I went through all the videos in the first few sections but felt that watching the lectures was too slow and laborious even at 1.5-2x speed. (The creator, for the most part, reads off of the slides, adding brief comments here and there.) So, I decided to only watch the video lectures for sections I didn’t have a good grasp on. (I believe the video lectures provided in the course are just split versions of the full length course available for free on YouTube under the freeCodeCamp channel, here.) The online course provides five practice exams. I did not take any of them.

**Regarding Stephane Maarek: I only took his practice exams. I did not take his study guide course.

Notes

– My study regimen (i.e., an hour to two every day for three weeks) was overkill.

– The questions on the practice exams created by Neal Davis and Stephane Maarek were significantly harder than those on the actual exam. I believe I could’ve passed without touching any of these resources.

– I retook one or two practice exams out of the 10+ I’ve taken. I don’t think there’s a need to retake the exams as long as you are diligent about studying the questions and underlying concepts you got wrong. I reviewed all the questions I missed on every practice exam the day before.

What would I do differently?

– Focus on practice tests only. No video lectures.

– Focus on the technologies domain. You can intuit your way through questions in the other domains.

– Chill

Passed CLF-CO1!!

I thank you all for helping me through this process! Couldn’t have done it without all of the recommendations and guidance on this page.

Background: I am a back-end developer that works 12 hours a day for corporate America, so no time to study (or do anything) but I made it work.

Could I have probably gone for SAA first? Yeah, but I wanted to prove to myself that I could do it. I studied for about a month. I used Maarek’s Udemy course at 1.5x speed and I couldn’t recommend it more. I also used his practice exams. I’ll be honest, I took 5 practice exams and got somehow managed to fail every single one in the mid 60’s lol. Cleared the exam with an 800. Practice exams WAY harder.

My 2 cents on must knows:

  • AWS Shared Security Model (who owns what)

  • Everything Billing (EC2 instance, S3, different support plans)

  • I had a few ML questions that caught me off guard

  • VPC concepts – i.e. subnets, NACL, Transit Gateway

I passed the AWS CCP today 

I studied solidly for two weeks, starting with Tutorials Dojo (which was recommended somewhere on here). I turned all of their vocabulary words and end of module questions into note cards. I did the same with their final assessment and one free exam.

During my second week, I studied the cards for anywhere from one to two hours a day, and I’d randomly watch videos on common exam questions.

The last thing I did was watch a 3 hr long video this morning that walks you through setting up AWS Instances. The visual of setting things up filled in a lot of holes.

I had some PSI software problems, and ended up getting started late. I was pretty dejected towards the end of the exam, and was honestly (and pleasantly) surprised to see that I passed.

Hopefully this helps someone. Keep studying and pushing through – if you know it, you know it. Even if you have a bad start. Cheers 🍻

  • Research and Engineering Studio on AWS Version 2025.03 now available
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 20, 2025 at 9:10 pm

    Today we’re excited to announce Research and Engineering Studio (RES) on AWS Version 2025.03. This release introduces the RES cost dashboard, supports custom instance lists by software stack, extends hibernation support to Linux virtual desktops, and supports virtual desktops running Windows 10 and 11. Administrators now have access to the RES cost dashboard, which provides an overview of the Virtual Desktop Infrastructure (VDI) costs at a project level. Use the cost dashboard to get an overview of each project’s budget progress and view data related to historical spend. RES 2024.08 introduced the ability to modify the list of allowable VDI instance types at the environment level. This release refines that feature by allowing administrators to assign any subset of allowed instances to specific software stacks. Assigning these software stacks to projects makes it possible to limit the instances available for VDIs at a project level. RES 2025.03 also extends hibernation support to all supported Linux distributions and now supports launching VDIs with Windows 10 and 11. Software stacks now have an additional setting to launch VDIs with either shared, dedicated instance, or dedicated host tenancy to meet licensing requirements. Finally, the ability to create a software stack from a running session has returned. Use this as an alternative to EC2 Image Builder to streamline creation of custom Software Stacks and software images. See the regional availability page for the list of regions where RES is available. Check out additional release notes on Github to get started and deploy RES 2025.03.  

  • Amazon Redshift Serverless is now available in the AWS Mexico (Central) and Asia Pacific (Thailand) Regions
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 20, 2025 at 8:40 pm

    Amazon Redshift Serverless, which allows you to run and scale analytics without having to provision and manage data warehouse clusters, is now generally available in the AWS Mexico (Central) and Asia Pacific (Thailand) regions. With Amazon Redshift Serverless, all users, including data analysts, developers, and data scientists, can use Amazon Redshift to get insights from data in seconds. Amazon Redshift Serverless automatically provisions and intelligently scales data warehouse capacity to deliver high performance for all your analytics. You only pay for the compute used for the duration of the workloads on a per-second basis. You can benefit from this simplicity without making any changes to your existing analytics and business intelligence applications. With a few clicks in the AWS Management Console, you can get started with querying data using the Query Editor V2 or your tool of choice with Amazon Redshift Serverless. There is no need to choose node types, node count, workload management, scaling, and other manual configurations. You can create databases, schemas, and tables, and load your own data from Amazon S3, access data using Amazon Redshift data shares, or restore an existing Amazon Redshift provisioned cluster snapshot. With Amazon Redshift Serverless, you can directly query data in open formats, such as Apache Parquet, in Amazon S3 data lakes. Amazon Redshift Serverless provides unified billing for queries on any of these data sources, helping you efficiently monitor and manage costs. To get started, see the Amazon Redshift Serverless feature page, user documentation, and API Reference.

  • IonQ Forte Enterprise now available on Amazon Braket
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 20, 2025 at 7:00 pm

    Amazon Braket, the quantum computing service from AWS, now offers IonQ's latest 36-qubit Forte Enterprise quantum processing unit (QPU) in the US East (N. Virginia) Region. This new device joins IonQ's existing quantum hardware portfolio on Braket, which includes Forte-1, Aria-1, and Aria-2, providing customers with additional capacity to run their quantum workloads on ion-trapped devices. With this launch, customers can use the familiar Braket SDK and APIs to access Forte Enterprise, which maintains the same capabilities that customers value in Forte-1. The device features IonQ's debiasing and sharpening error mitigation algorithms to enable advanced customers workloads. Forte Enterprise continues to use the native ZZ gate architecture, making it easy for customers to seamlessly migrate workloads between the Forte devices. IonQ Forte Enterprise is physically located in Switzerland, but all customer traffic routes through US East (N. Virginia) region. Customers can access this new device using the ARN: arn:aws:braket:us-east-1::device/qpu/ionq/Forte-Enterprise-1. To get started with IonQ Forte Enterprise, visit the Amazon Braket devices page in the AWS Management Console to explore device specifications and capabilities. For additional guidance, review the Amazon Braket documentation and pricing information to make the most of this new device.

  • AWS Network Firewall introduces new flow management feature
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 20, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Today, AWS announces a new flow management feature for AWS Network Firewall that enables customers to identify and control active network flows. This feature introduces two key functions: Flow Capture, which allows point-in-time snapshots of active flows, and Flow Flush, which enables selective termination of specific connections. With these new capabilities, customers can now view and manage active flows based on criteria such as source/destination IP addresses, ports, and protocols, providing enhanced control over their network traffic. This new feature helps customers maintain consistent security policies when updating firewall rules and enables rapid response during security incidents. Network administrators can now easily validate security configurations and ensure that all traffic is evaluated against current policies. The flow management feature is particularly valuable for troubleshooting network issues and isolating suspicious traffic during security events. By providing granular control over active network flows, AWS Network Firewall enhances customers' ability to maintain a secure and efficient network environment. The new flow management feature is available in all regions where AWS Network Firewall is supported, allowing customers to benefit from these enhanced capabilities across their global infrastructure. Customers can start using Flow Capture and Flow Flush at no additional cost. To get started, visit the AWS Network Firewall documentation, explore the new APIs in the Network Firewall API Reference guide, or learn more about AWS Network Firewall on the product page.  

  • Amazon Bedrock now supports RAG Evaluation (generally available)
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 20, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Amazon Bedrock RAG evaluation is now generally available. You can evaluate your retrieval-augmented generation (RAG) applications, either those built on Amazon Bedrock Knowledge Bases or a custom RAG system. You can evaluate either retrieval or end-to-end generation. Evaluations are powered by an LLM-as-a-judge, with a choice of several judge models. For retrieval, you can select from metrics such as context relevance and coverage. For end-to-end retrieve and generation, you can select from quality metrics such as correctness, completeness, and faithfulness (hallucination detection), and responsible AI metrics such as harmfulness, answer refusal, and stereotyping. You can also compare across evaluation jobs to iterate on your Knowledge Bases or custom RAG applications with different settings like chunking strategy or vector length, rerankers, or different content generating models. *Brand new - more flexibility!* As of today, in addition to Bedrock Knowledge Bases, Amazon Bedrock’s RAG evaluations supports custom RAG pipeline evaluations. Customers evaluating custom RAG pipelines can now bring their input-output pairs and retrieved contexts into the evaluation job directly in their input dataset, enabling them to bypass the call to a Bedrock Knowledge Base ("bring your own inference responses"). We also added citation precision and citation coverage metrics for Bedrock Knowledge Bases evaluation. If you use a Bedrock Knowledge Base as part of your evaluation, you can incorporate Amazon Bedrock Guardrails directly. To learn more, visit the Amazon Bedrock Evaluations page and documentation. To get started, log into the Amazon Bedrock Console or use the Amazon Bedrock APIs.  

  • Amazon Q Business now available in AWS Europe (Ireland) region
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 20, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Starting today, Amazon Q Business is available in AWS Europe region (Ireland). Amazon Q Business revolutionizes the way that employees interact with organizational knowledge and enterprise systems. Q Business customers in this region can get answers from enterprise RAG knowledge bases and uploaded files (e.g. pdf's, images) and run tabular search on small tables. Customers can also get answers from LLM knowledge and generate content using their Q Business assistant. Amazon Q Business connects seamlessly to over 40 popular enterprise systems, including Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3), Microsoft 365, and Salesforce. It ensures that users access content securely with their existing credentials using single sign-on, according to their permissions, and enterprise-level access controls. With this regional expansion, Amazon Q is now available in the following regions: US East (N. Virginia), US West (Oregon) and Europe West (Ireland) AWS Regions. To learn more about the Amazon Q Business features available in this region, go to Q Business service regions. For more information, see Amazon Q Business.

  • Amazon EC2 M7g instances are now available in AWS Israel (Tel Aviv) Region
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 20, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Starting today, Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) M7g instances are available in the AWS Israel (Tel Aviv) region. These instances are powered by AWS Graviton3 processors that provide up to 25% better compute performance compared to AWS Graviton2 processors, and built on top of the the AWS Nitro System, a collection of AWS designed innovations that deliver efficient, flexible, and secure cloud services with isolated multi-tenancy, private networking, and fast local storage. Amazon EC2 Graviton3 instances also use up to 60% less energy to reduce your cloud carbon footprint for the same performance than comparable EC2 instances. For increased scalability, these instances are available in 9 different instance sizes, including bare metal, and offer up to 30 Gbps networking bandwidth and up to 20 Gbps of bandwidth to the Amazon Elastic Block Store (EBS). To learn more, see Amazon EC2 M7g. To explore how to migrate your workloads to Graviton-based instances, see AWS Graviton Fast Start program and Porting Advisor for Graviton. To get started, see the AWS Management Console.  

  • Amazon Bedrock Model Evaluation LLM-as-a-judge is now generally available
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 20, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Amazon Bedrock Model Evaluation’s LLM-as-a-judge capability is now generally available. Amazon Bedrock Model Evaluation allows you to evaluate, compare, and select the right models for your use case. You can choose an LLM as your judge from several available on Bedrock to ensure you have the right combination of evaluator models and models being evaluated. You can select quality metrics such as correctness, completeness, and professional style and tone, as well as responsible AI metrics such as harmfulness and answer refusal. You can evaluate all available models on Amazon Bedrock, including serverless models, Bedrock Marketplace models compatible with Converse API, customized and distilled models, imported models, and model routers. You can also compare results across evaluation jobs. *Brand new - more flexibility!* Today, you can evaluate any model or system hosted anywhere by bringing your own inference responses you already fetched into your input prompt dataset for the evaluation job (“bring your own inference responses“). These responses can be from an Amazon Bedrock model or from any model or application hosted outside of Amazon Bedrock, enabling you to bypass calling an Amazon Bedrock model in the evaluation job, and allowing you to incorporate all the intermediate steps of your application into your final responses. With LLM-as-a-judge, you can get human-like evaluation quality at lower cost, while saving weeks of time. To learn more, visit the Amazon Bedrock Evaluations page and documentation. To get started, sign in to the AWS Console or use Amazon Bedrock APIs.  

  • Amazon EC2 C7g instances are now available in AWS Canada West (Calgary) Region
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 19, 2025 at 10:44 pm

    Starting today, Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) C7g instances are available in the AWS Canada West (Calgary) region. These instances are powered by AWS Graviton3 processors that provide up to 25% better compute performance compared to AWS Graviton2 processors, and built on top of the the AWS Nitro System, a collection of AWS designed innovations that deliver efficient, flexible, and secure cloud services with isolated multi-tenancy, private networking, and fast local storage. Amazon EC2 Graviton3 instances also use up to 60% less energy to reduce your cloud carbon footprint for the same performance than comparable EC2 instances. For increased scalability, these instances are available in 9 different instance sizes, including bare metal, and offer up to 30 Gbps networking bandwidth and up to 20 Gbps of bandwidth to the Amazon Elastic Block Store (EBS). To learn more, see Amazon EC2 C7g. To explore how to migrate your workloads to Graviton-based instances, see AWS Graviton Fast Start program and Porting Advisor for Graviton. To get started, see the AWS Management Console.

  • Amazon EC2 R7g instances are now available in the AWS GovCloud (US-West) Region
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 19, 2025 at 9:45 pm

    Starting today, Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) R7g instances are available in the AWS GovCloud (US-West) region. These instances are powered by AWS Graviton3 processors that provide up to 25% better compute performance compared to AWS Graviton2 processors, and built on top of the the AWS Nitro System, a collection of AWS designed innovations that deliver efficient, flexible, and secure cloud services with isolated multi-tenancy, private networking, and fast local storage. Amazon EC2 Graviton3 instances also use up to 60% less energy to reduce your cloud carbon footprint for the same performance than comparable EC2 instances. For increased scalability, these instances are available in 9 different instance sizes, including bare metal, and offer up to 30 Gbps networking bandwidth and up to 20 Gbps of bandwidth to the Amazon Elastic Block Store (EBS). To learn more, see Amazon EC2 R7g. To explore how to migrate your workloads to Graviton-based instances, see AWS Graviton Fast Start program and Porting Advisor for Graviton. To get started, see the AWS Management Console.

  • Amazon EC2 M7gd instances are now available in Middle East (UAE) Region
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 19, 2025 at 9:27 pm

    Starting today, Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) M7gd instances with up to 3.8 TB of local NVMe-based SSD block-level storage are available in Middle East (UAE) region. These Graviton3-based instances with DDR5 memory are built on the AWS Nitro System and are a great fit for applications that need access to high-speed, low latency local storage, including those that need temporary storage of data for scratch space, temporary files, and caches. They have up to 45% improved real-time NVMe storage performance than comparable Graviton2-based instances. Graviton3-based instances also use up to 60% less energy for the same performance than comparable EC2 instances, enabling you to reduce your carbon footprint in the cloud. M7gd instances are now available in the following AWS regions: US East (N. Virginia, Ohio), US West (Oregon, N. California), Europe (Spain, Stockholm, Ireland, Frankfurt, Paris), Asia Pacific (Tokyo, Mumbai, Singapore, Sydney), South America (São Paulo), and Middle East (UAE). To learn more, see Amazon EC2 M7gd instances. To get started, see the AWS Management Console.

  • Amazon Nova expands Tool Choice options for Converse API
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 19, 2025 at 7:40 pm

    Amazon Nova now supports expanded Tool Choice parameter options in the Converse API, enhancing developers' control over model interactions with tools. Today, developers already use the Converse API to create sophisticated conversational applications, such as customized chat bots to maintain conversations over multiple turns. With this update, Nova adds support for 'Any' and 'Tool' modes in addition to the existing 'Auto' mode support, enabling developers to use all three different modes. Auto leaves tool selection entirely to Nova’s discretion, whether to call a tool or generate text instead. Auto is useful in use cases like chatbots and assistants where you may need to ask the user for more information, and is the current default. Any prompts Nova to return at least one tool call, from the list of tools specified, while allowing it to choose which tool to use. Any is particularly useful in machine to machine interactions where your downstream components may not understand natural language but might be able to parse a schema representation. Tool enable developers to request a specific tool to be returned by Nova. Tool is particularly useful in forcing a structured output by having a tool that has the return type as your desired output schema. To learn about expanded Tool Choice parameter support in Amazon Nova's Converse API, see the Amazon Nova user guide. Learn more about Amazon Nova foundation models at the Amazon Nova product page. You can get started with Amazon Nova foundation models in Amazon Bedrock from the Amazon Bedrock console.

  • Amazon CloudWatch Database Insights available in AWS GovCloud (US) regions
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 18, 2025 at 9:30 pm

    Amazon CloudWatch Database Insights announces support for Amazon Aurora and RDS databases hosted in the AWS GovCloud (US) Regions. Database Insights is a database observability solution that provides a curated experience designed for DevOps engineers, application developers, and database administrators (DBAs) to expedite database troubleshooting and gain a holistic view into their database fleet health. Database Insights consolidates logs and metrics from your applications, your databases, and the operating systems on which they run into a unified view in the console. Using its pre-built dashboards, recommended alarms, and automated telemetry collection, you can monitor the health of your database fleets and use a guided troubleshooting experience to drill down to individual instances for root-cause analysis. Application developers can correlate the impact of database dependencies with the performance and availability of their business-critical applications. This is because they can drill down from the context of their application performance view in Amazon CloudWatch Application Signals to the specific dependent database in Database Insights. You can get started with Database Insights by enabling it on your Aurora and RDS clusters using the service consoles, AWS APIs, and SDKs. Database Insights delivers database health monitoring aggregated at the fleet level, as well as instance-level dashboards for detailed database and SQL query analysis. Database Insights is now available in the AWS GovCloud (US-West) and AWS GovCloud (US-East) Regions, and applies a new vCPU-based pricing – see pricing page for details. For further information, visit the Database Insights documentation.

  • Amazon Bedrock Guardrails announces policy based enforcement for responsible AI
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 18, 2025 at 6:30 pm

    Amazon Bedrock Guardrails announces Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy-based enforcement capabilities to build safe, generative AI applications at scale. This new feature enables customers to apply specific guardrails to model inference calls, ensuring responsible AI policies are applied across all AI interactions. Bedrock Guardrails provides configurable safeguards to detect and filter undesirable content, topic filters to define and disallow specific topics, sensitive information filters to redact personally identifiable information (PII), word filters to block specific words, and detect model hallucinations by detecting grounding and relevance of model responses and identify, correct, and explain factual claims in model responses using Automated Reasoning checks. Guardrails can be applied across any foundation model including those hosted with Amazon Bedrock, self-hosted models, and third-party models outside Bedrock using the ApplyGuardrail API, providing a consistent user experience and standardizing safety and privacy controls. Starting today, Bedrock Guardrails provides a new condition key bedrock:GuardrailIdentifier that can be used in IAM policies to enforce the use of specific guardrails with associated policies. This new condition key can be applied on all Bedrock Invoke and Converse APIs. If the guardrail configured in your IAM policy does not match the specified guardrail, the request will be rejected, ensuring compliance with the responsible AI policies of the organization. IAM policy-based enforcement to comply with responsible AI policies is now available in all AWS regions where Bedrock Guardrails is supported today. To learn more, see the technical documentation and the Bedrock Guardrails product page.

  • AWS WAF now supports URI fragment field matching
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 18, 2025 at 6:00 pm

    AWS WAF now supports URI fragment field matching, enabling customers to match against the URI fragment and along with the already supported URI path. With this feature, customers can create rules that inspect and match against the content of the URI fragment within the URI path. Customers previously could use WAF match conditions to inspect requests and compare their origin against provided criteria. As customers strive to enhance security, they have requested the ability to match against the URI fragment - the part of the URL often after the "#" symbol. URI fragment is often used to identify specific sections or anchors within a web page and is not typically sent to the server during the initial request. For example, if you have a login page with a dynamic fragment like "foo://login.aspx#myFragment", you can create a rule that only allows requests with the "myFragment" fragment and denies all others. This enables targeted security controls, such as blocking access to sensitive areas, detecting unauthorized access attempts, and implementing enhanced bot detection by analyzing fragment patterns used by malicious actors. There is no additional cost, but standard WAF charges still apply. For more information about pricing, visit the AWS WAF Pricing page. The feature is available in all AWS Regions where WAF is available for all supported origins. For more information about URI field for matching, visit the Developer Guide.  

  • AWS Firewall Manager is now available in the AWS Asia Pacific (Thailand) and AWS Mexico (Central) regions
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 18, 2025 at 6:00 pm

    AWS Firewall Manager is now available in the AWS Asia Pacific (Thailand) and AWS Mexico (Central) regions, bringing AWS Firewall Manager to a total of 34 AWS commercial regions, 2 GovCloud regions, and all Amazon CloudFront edge locations. AWS Firewall Manager is a security management service that enables customers to centrally configure and manage firewall rules across their accounts and resources. Using AWS Firewall Manager, customers can manage AWS WAF rules, AWS Shield Advanced protections, AWS Network Firewall, R53 resolver DNS Firewall and VPC security groups across their entire AWS Organizations. AWS Firewall Manager makes it easier for customers to ensure that all firewall rules are consistently enforced and compliant, even as new accounts and resources are created. To get started, see the AWS Firewall Manager documentation for more details and the AWS Region Table for the list of regions where AWS Firewall Manager is currently available. To learn more about AWS Firewall Manager, its features, and its pricing, visit the AWS Firewall Manager website.

  • Amazon CloudWatch RUM now supports monitoring multiple domains with a single App Monitor
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 18, 2025 at 6:00 pm

    Amazon CloudWatch RUM now allows customers to monitor multiple top-level domains (TLDs), and second-level domains (SLDs) using a single App Monitor unifying real user monitoring across multiple domains in CloudWatch RUM. Customers can now specify a list of domains and also use wildcards for TLDs to monitor all their front-end applications together. This enhancement is useful for web applications that need to be accessible from different domains due to various reasons such as user locations, domain migrations, or any other development needs. This enhancement simplifies observability for applications accessed from multiple domains by displaying all real user data of the application on a single RUM dashboard. Customers can now monitor different SLDs, such as example.com and another.com, without creating separate monitors for each domain. They can also track applications deployed across multiple TLDs, such as example.com, and example.co.uk, helping monitoring performance across regions. Wildcard support for TLDs allows customers even more flexibility to monitor all variants of a domain, such as example.* or example.co.*, without manually specifying each one. Additionally, subdomain wildcards, which is already supported, continue to allow monitoring across multiple subdomains like *.example.com. These capabilities simplifies monitoring websites that operate in multiple regions, manage domain transitions during SLD migrations, and other development needs by consolidating data in a single place. This feature is now available in all AWS commercial regions where CloudWatch RUM is available. See documentation to know more about the feature, or see the one observability workshop to learn how to get started with CloudWatch RUM.  

  • AWS announces the next generation of Amazon Connect where powerful AI improves every customer interaction
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 18, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    AWS announces the next generation of Amazon Connect, where powerful AI turns every customer touchpoint into a deeper relationship and better outcome. This comprehensive approach spans self-service, agent assistance, analytics, post-contact evaluation, and automated follow-up boosts sales and delights customers, while learning from every touchpoint. The next generation of Amazon Connect can be enabled with a single click, and includes unlimited use of AI capabilities, so you can focus on making customer experience improvements, not cost-driven compromises. This next generation of Amazon Connect is available in US East (N. Virginia), US West (Oregon), Asia Pacific (Seoul), Asia Pacific (Singapore), Asia Pacific (Sydney), Asia Pacific (Tokyo), Canada (Central), Europe (Frankfurt), and Europe (London). To learn more see our launch blog, documentation, and our pricing page.

  • CloudWatch RUM now supports JavaScript source maps for easier error debugging
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 18, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Amazon CloudWatch RUM, which helps developers monitor real user interactions and diagnose front-end performance issues in web applications, now supports JavaScript source maps, enabling developers to convert minified JavaScript errors in the stack trace into readable formats for faster error resolution. With this feature, front-end developers and DevOps teams can now view searchable, human-readable JS errors and quickly identify the exact location of errors in their original source code. JavaScript errors can be difficult to debug when they are minified in the stack trace, making it hard to pinpoint the source of an issue. Now, if an error occurs in a production environment, RUM leverages customer uploaded source maps to trace it back to the original code. The added ability to search unminified stack traces in RUM events helps developers analyze trends and correlate issues across multiple sessions, enabling faster detection and prioritization of recurring errors. To unminify errors in JavaScript stack traces, customers need to enable it in the App Monitor configuration and provide the S3 URI of the bucket or folder that holds the source maps via the console or RUM APIs. These enhancements are available in all regions where CloudWatch RUM is available. Customer pay cost of storage of their source maps to Amazon S3 and for the API calls to upload and retrieve source maps as per AWS public pricing found here. See documentation to know more about the feature, or see user guide to learn how to get started with CloudWatch RUM.  

  • AWS Client VPN increases authorization rules and route quotas
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 18, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Today, AWS announces increased quotas for AWS Client VPN, expanding routes per target network association to 100 and authorization rules per endpoint to 200. AWS Client VPN allows you to securely manage network routing and access control for your VPN connections. Previously, you were given default quota of 10 routes per association and 50 authorization rules per endpoint. With this quota increase, you can now configure up to 100 routes per association and 200 rules per endpoint. For example, enterprises with distributed architectures can define specific routing paths for multiple subnets across development, staging, and production environments, providing greater flexibility and granular control over network traffic flows. These new quotas are default configurations and can be adjusted to a higher limit as well. These default quotas are automatically applied to all new and existing Client VPN endpoints. This enhancement is available at no additional cost in all AWS Regions where AWS Client VPN is generally available. To learn more about Client VPN: Read the AWS Client VPN quotas page Visit the AWS Client VPN product page Read the AWS Client VPN documentation

  • Amazon EC2 C7i-flex and M7i-flex instances are now available in additional AWS Regions
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 18, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Starting today, Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) Flex (C7i-flex, M7i-flex) instances powered by custom 4th Gen Intel Xeon Scalable processors (code-named Sapphire Rapids) are available in Asia Pacific (Thailand) and Mexico (Central) regions. These custom processors, available only on AWS, offer up to 15% better performance over comparable x86-based Intel processors utilized by other cloud providers. Flex instances are the easiest way for you to get price-performance benefits for a majority of general-purpose and compute intensive workloads. C7i-flex and M7i-flex instances deliver up to 19% better price-performance compared to C6i and M6i instances respectively. These instances offer the most common sizes, from large to 16xlarge, and are a great first choice for applications that don't fully utilize all compute resources such as web and application servers, virtual desktops, batch-processing, microservices, databases, caches, and more. For workloads that need larger instance sizes (up to 192 vCPUs and 768 GiB memory) or continuous high CPU usage, you can leverage C7i and M7i instances. C7i-flex instances are available in the following AWS Regions: US East (N. Virginia, Ohio), US West (N. California, Oregon), Europe (Frankfurt, Ireland, London, Paris, Spain, Stockholm), Canada (Central), Asia Pacific (Malaysia, Mumbai, Seoul, Singapore, Sydney, Thailand, Tokyo), Mexico (Central), South America (São Paulo), and AWS GovCloud (US-West). M7i-flex instances are available in the following AWS Regions: US East (N. Virginia, Ohio), US West (N. California, Oregon), Europe (Frankfurt, Ireland, London, Paris, Spain, Stockholm), Canada (Central), Asia Pacific (Malaysia, Mumbai, Seoul, Singapore, Sydney, Thailand, Tokyo), Mexico (Central), South America (São Paulo), and the AWS GovCloud (US-East, US-West).  

  • AWS PrivateLink cross-region connectivity now available in 6 additional regions
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 18, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    AWS PrivateLink now supports native cross-region connectivity in the following additional Regions: Canada West (Calgary), Europe (Zurich), Middle East (UAE) and Asia Pacific (Hyderabad, Jakarta, Melbourne). This launch enables customers to connect to VPC endpoint services hosted in other AWS Regions in the same AWS partition over Interface endpoints. As a service provider, you can enable access to your VPCE service for customers in all existing and upcoming AWS Regions without the need to setup additional infrastructure in each region. As a service consumer, you can privately connect to VPCE services in other AWS Regions without the need to setup cross-region peering or exposing your data over the public internet. Cross-region enabled VPCE services can be accessed through Interface endpoints at a private IP address in your VPC, enabling simpler and more secure inter-region connectivity. To learn about pricing for this feature, please see the AWS PrivateLink pricing page. To learn more, read our blog and visit AWS PrivateLink in the Amazon VPC Developer Guide.  

  • PySpark available in AWS Clean Rooms
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 18, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Today, AWS announces the general availability of PySpark in AWS Clean Rooms, enabling companies and their partners to run sophisticated analytics across large datasets using PySpark, the Python API for Apache Spark. With this launch, you and your partners can bring PySpark code and libraries to an AWS Clean Rooms collaboration and run advanced analyses without having to share underlying data or proprietary analysis methods. For example, an advertising measurement provider can use PySpark in AWS Clean Rooms to run their custom algorithms across multiple publisher datasets simultaneously to measure ad effectiveness. Similarly, a pharmaceutical company can run their proprietary algorithms and libraries across multiple healthcare provider datasets with appropriate patient consent to evaluate drug adherence across clinical trials, without sharing their proprietary data. AWS Clean Rooms helps companies and their partners to easily analyze and collaborate on their collective datasets without revealing or copying one another’s underlying data. Companies can deploy their own clean rooms without having to build, manage, or maintain their own solutions or move data outside of their AWS environment. PySpark in AWS Clean Rooms is generally available in these AWS Regions. To learn more, visit AWS Clean Rooms.

  • Amazon DynamoDB Accelerator (DAX) SDK for JavaScript version 3 is now available
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 18, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    The Amazon DAX SDK for JavaScript, version 3 (v3) is now available. You can use this new DAX SDK to build JavaScript applications that benefit from accelerated access to DynamoDB with minimal configuration changes. The AWS SDK for JavaScript v3 offers a modular architecture and features that improve developer productivity. DAX is a fully managed, highly available, in-memory cache for DynamoDB that can boost read performance by up to 10 times, even at millions of requests per second. It is API compatible with DynamoDB, so you do not need to change your application logic. Simply provision a DAX cluster, update your client to use the new DAX SDK for JavaScript v3, and direct your existing DynamoDB calls to the DAX endpoint. For information about DAX Regional availability, see the “Service endpoints” section in Amazon DynamoDB endpoints and quotas. To get started with the DAX SDK for JavaScript v3, see Node.js and DAX.

  • Amazon DynamoDB Accelerator (DAX) SDK for Go version 2 is now available
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 18, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    The Amazon DAX SDK for Go, version 2 (v2) is now available and is compatible with the AWS SDK for Go v2. The Amazon DAX SDK for Go v2 offers a modular architecture and features that improve developer productivity. DAX is a fully managed, highly available, in-memory cache for DynamoDB that can boost read performance by up to 10 times, even at millions of requests per second. It is API compatible with DynamoDB, so you do not need to change your application logic. Simply create a DAX cluster, switch to the DAX SDK for Go v2, and point your existing DynamoDB calls to the DAX endpoint. For information about DAX Regional availability, see the “Service endpoints” section in Amazon DynamoDB endpoints and quotas. To get started with the DAX SDK for Go v2, see DAX SDK for Go.

  • Amazon Redshift Serverless now supports Current and Trailing Tracks for release updates
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 17, 2025 at 8:00 pm

    Amazon Redshift Serverless is now available on two different release cycles - Current Track and Trailing Track. With the Current Track you will get the most up-to-date certified release version with the latest features, security updates, and performance enhancements. With the Trailing Track you will be on the previous certified release. With the Trailing Track feature, you now have the option to run a subset of Amazon Redshift Serverless workgroups in the Amazon Redshift Serverless Trailing Track to allow for a few weeks of integration validation in your environment before adopting the release across all your workgroups. Each Amazon Redshift Serverless release undergoes thorough testing by our QA and security teams. By default, all Amazon Redshift Serverless workgroups are created in the Current Track to take advantage of the most up-to-date certified release. Amazon Redshift Serverless Trailing track provides you additional diligence and time needed for testing and development environments to evaluate the Current Track, before adopting the Current Track for your mission-critical workloads in production. The Trailing track ensures maximum stability, making it ideal for mission-critical workloads in production environments. With a few clicks in the Amazon Redshift console, you can choose the Current Track or Trailing Track. Amazon Redshift Serverless Current and Trailing Tracks support is available in all commercial AWS regions and the AWS GovCloud (US) Regions where Amazon Redshift Serverless is available. Refer to this documentation to learn more about the Current and Trailing Tracks in Amazon Redshift Serverless.

  • AWS announces new upgrades to the Amazon Q Business browser extension
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 17, 2025 at 7:55 pm

    Today, AWS announced several upgrades to the Amazon Q Business browser extension to enhance its utility and improve user efficiency when performing browser-based tasks. The upgrades include company knowledge access, in-line PDF support, the ability to delete previous attachments from conversation context, image file attachment support, and an expanded prompt context window. With the new upgrades, browser extension users are now able to access questions from a wide range of data sources that include not only their open web pages and attached documents, but also their company’s indexed data, PDFs they open in their browser, and multimodal file attachments such as charts and images. Users now also gain finer control over their prompt context with the ability to remove previous web pages or attachments that are no longer relevant from their conversation context. With the expanded context window, users can incorporate larger web pages and files alongside more detailed prompts to enhance the helpfulness of responses they receive from Amazon Q. Furthermore, the extension provides a convenient link to continue their work in the Amazon Q Business web experience, where users can access powerful features like Actions and Q Apps. These new features are available on the Amazon Q Business browser extension in all regions where Amazon Q Business is available. To learn more, visit the Amazon Q Business product page or review the documentation for detailed setup instructions and feature descriptions.

  • Amazon Connect Tasks now support durations up to 90 days
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 17, 2025 at 5:20 pm

    Amazon Connect Tasks can now be configured to expire up to 90 days from creation, with a default of 7 days. For example, tasks like auto repairs can take weeks to complete or that have longer follow-up times can stay active for up to 90 days before being escalated to a supervisor, while more time-critical tasks like rescheduling a hotel reservation can be distributed and tracked to completion within minutes. Amazon Connect Tasks empowers you to prioritize, assign, and track all contact center agent tasks to completion, improving agent productivity and ensuring customer issues are quickly resolved. This feature is supported in all AWS regions where Amazon Connect Tasks is offered. To learn more, see our documentation. To learn more about Amazon Connect, the easy-to-use cloud contact center, visit the Amazon Connect website.

  • AWS Transfer Family enhances AS2 certificate management capabilities
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 17, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    AWS Transfer Family enhances certificate management capabilities for Applicability Statement 2 (AS2) with more options to import and monitor your AS2 certificates. This update makes it easier to migrate AS2 trading partner relationships to AWS and ensure uninterrupted communications. AS2 is a widely used business-to-business messaging protocol in industries such as healthcare, retail and supply chain, and uses certificate keys for secure message transmission and signing. You now have an option to import complete certificate information, including the full certificate chain, as a single PEM file. To ensure timely rotation of your certificates, you can check the certificate expiration status using the Transfer Family console or the DescribeCertificate API command. These enhancements make it easier to manage your AS2 certificates within AWS Transfer Family and ensure seamless communications with your trading partners. The new AS2 certificate management capabilities are available in all AWS Regions where the Transfer Family service is available. To learn more, visit the documentation and take the self-paced AS2 workshop.  

  • Amazon OpenSearch Service expands cross-VPC connectivity to the AWS GovCloud (US) Regions
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 17, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Amazon OpenSearch Service now offers support for managed VPC endpoints (powered by AWS PrivateLink) in two additional regions - AWS GovCloud (US-East), and AWS GovCloud (US-West). Managed VPC endpoints allow to connect to your Amazon OpenSearch Service VPC-enabled domain in a Virtual Private Cloud (VPC). With an Amazon OpenSearch Service managed endpoint, you can now privately access your OpenSearch Service domain within your VPC from your client applications in other VPCs, within the same or across AWS accounts, without using public IPs or requiring traffic to traverse the Internet. With this release, OpenSearch Service allows you to create an endpoint to an OpenSearch Service domain from another VPC in the same account or in another AWS account. You can either use the OpenSearch Service console or OpenSearch Service APIs to create an OpenSearch Service managed VPC endpoint. Amazon OpenSearch Service managed VPC endpoints are powered by AWS PrivateLink. If you use OpenSearch Service managed VPC endpoints to access your OpenSearch Service domain from your client applications in another VPC, you will incur standard AWS data transfer charges and the associated cost for the AWS PrivateLink interface endpoint. Please refer to the AWS Region Table for more information about OpenSearch Service availability. For more information, including instructions on getting started with setting up cross-VPC connectivity, please refer the OpenSearch Service documentation.

  • Amazon Redshift Query Editor v2 now supports larger result sets in GovCloud (US)
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 17, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    AWS announces Amazon Redshift Query Editor V2 now supports increased maximum result set and export size to 100MB of your query result sets with no row limit in AWS GovCloud (US) Regions. Prior to this limit of your query result sets was* 5MB or 100,000 rows. This enhancement provides greater flexibility for you and your team to work with large datasets, enabling you to generate, analyze, and export more comprehensive data without previous constraints. If you work with large datasets, such as security logs, gaming data, and other big data workloads, that require in-depth analysis, the previous 5MB or 100,000-row limit on result sets and exports often fell short of your needs, forcing you to piece together insights from multiple queries and downloads. With the new 100MB result set size and export capabilities in Amazon Redshift Query Editor, you can now generate a single, more complete view of your data, export it directly as a CSV or JSON file, and conduct richer analysis to drive better-informed business decisions. The increased 100MB result set and export size capabilities for Amazon Redshift Query Editor V2 are available in AWS GovCloud (US) Regions. For more information about the AWS Regions where Redshift is available, please refer to the AWS Regions table. To learn more, see the Amazon Redshift documentation.  

  • Amazon RDS Custom for SQL Server supports new minor version in February 2025
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 17, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    A new minor version of Microsoft SQL Server is now available on Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) Custom for SQL Server, providing performance enhancements and security fixes. Amazon RDS Custom for SQL Server now supports this latest minor version of SQL Server 2022 across the Developer, Web, Standard, and Enterprise editions. We encourage you to upgrade your Amazon RDS for SQL Server database instances at your convenience. You can upgrade with just a few clicks in the Amazon RDS Management Console or by using the AWS CLI. Learn more about upgrading your database instances from the Amazon RDS User Guide. The new minor version is SQL Server 2022 CU17 16.0.4175.1. This minor version is available in all AWS commercial regions where Amazon RDS Custom for SQL Server databases are available. Amazon RDS Custom for SQL Server makes it simple to set up, operate, and scale SQL Server deployments in the cloud. See Amazon RDS Custom Pricing for pricing details and regional availability.  

  • Salesforce Contact Center with Amazon Connect is now generally available
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 17, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Salesforce Contact Center with Amazon Connect, now generally available, is a groundbreaking offering that integrates native digital and voice capabilities into Salesforce Service Cloud, delivering a unified and streamlined experience for agents. Salesforce users can now unify and route voice, chat, email, and case management across Amazon Connect and Service Cloud capabilities, streamlining operational efficiency and enhancing customer service interactions. With Salesforce Contact Center with Amazon Connect, companies can now seamlessly integrate their Salesforce CRM data and agent experience with Amazon Connect’s leading voice, digital channels, and routing capabilities. Salesforce users can innovate with personalized and responsive service across every touchpoint. Customers receive personalized, AI-powered self-service experiences across Amazon Connect voice and chat, quickly solving issues. For more complex inquiries, the seamless transition from self-service to agent-assistance connects customers to the right agent, who has a unified view of the customer’s data, issue, and interaction history in Salesforce Service Cloud. Integrated data and APIs empower agents with Amazon Connect Contact Lens real-time voice transcripts and supervisors with call monitoring in Salesforce Service Cloud. Salesforce admins can quickly deploy and configure an integrated contact center solution in minutes with Amazon Connect voice, digital channels and routing of Salesforce cases. This feature is available in all AWS Regions where Amazon Connect is available. To learn more and get started, see the Salesforce Contact Center with Amazon Connect documentation. To learn more about Amazon Connect, see Amazon Connect.

  • Manage SLO exclusion time windows using CloudWatch Application Signals
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 17, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Customers can now set exclusion time windows to avoid affecting a service's reliability score during planned downtime. This feature works with service-level objectives (SLOs) that are created and tracked using CloudWatch Application Signals. SLOs help track longer term performance of services against pre-defined thresholds. Customers can now gain control for pausing/resuming their SLOs during planned outages on CloudWatch Application Signals, an application performance monitoring (APM) tool that simplifies health and performance monitoring for applications hosted on AWS. Customers occasionally need to omit specific timeframes from their SLO status and budget calculations due to scheduled maintenance, such as a periodical database maintenance window. This could be a single event, like a one time testing window, or a repeating event, such as off-hours. Using the Application Signals console or the SLO CloudFormation template, they can configure a start date and time, plus a duration or end time, to pause SLO measurements during a specific window. The new feature allows for configuring exclusion windows for multiple SLOs at a time, including existing SLOs. All regions with Application Signals also support SLO time window exclusion. See documentation to learn more about SLOs. Customers may now sign up for the new bundled pricing plan for Application Signals. To learn more, see Amazon CloudWatch pricing.  

  • Configure Amazon Q in Connect directly from Connect Admin Website
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 17, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Amazon Q in Connect, a generative AI-powered assistant for customer service, now makes it easy to create and modify generative AI experiences to improve customer interactions through an intuitive user interface within the Amazon Connect admin website. With this no-code approach, contact center administrators can now configure AI agent behaviors, create or edit custom prompts and set appropriate guardrails directly through the Amazon Connect admin website. For example, users can update AI prompts when launching new products, adjust AI guardrails to filter inappropriate content, or refine AI agents. For region availability, please see the availability of Amazon Connect features by Region. To learn more about Amazon Q in Connect, please visit the website or see the help documentation.  

  • AWS Verified Access achieves FedRAMP High and Moderate authorization
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 14, 2025 at 9:10 pm

    AWS Verified Access is a FedRAMP High authorized service in the AWS GovCloud (US) Regions and a FedRAMP Moderate authorized service in the AWS US East and US West commercial regions. Federal agencies, public sector organizations, and other enterprises with FedRAMP compliance requirements can now leverage AWS Verified Access to enable secure VPN-less access to corporate HTTP, non-HTTP applications, and infrastructure resources. Built based on AWS Zero Trust principles, you can use Verified Access to implement a work-from-anywhere model with added security and scalability. AWS Verified Access allows admins to define fine-grained access policies based upon a user’s identity and device posture. It evaluates access for each and every connection request and continuously monitors active connections, terminating connections when security requirements specified in the access policies aren't met. For example, you can centrally define access policies granting Finance applications access only to authenticated users of the Finance group using compliant and managed devices. Further, you can also use Verified Access to enable access to non-HTTP(S) applications and resources such as databases, and SAP and git-repositories running on EC2 instances. Verified Access simplifies your security operations by allowing you to centrally create, group, and manage access policies for all applications and resources with similar security requirements from a single interface. To learn more about AWS Verified Access, visit the product page.

  • Announcing support of AWS Glue Data Catalog views with AWS Glue 5.0
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 14, 2025 at 7:20 pm

    Today, we announce support for AWS Glue Data Catalog views with AWS Glue 5.0 for Apache Spark jobs. AWS Glue Data Catalog views with AWS Glue 5.0 allows customers to create views from Glue 5.0 Spark jobs that can be queried from multiple engines without requiring access to referenced tables. AWS Glue is a serverless, scalable data integration service that makes it simple to discover, prepare, move, and integrate data from multiple sources. AWS Glue Data Catalog views are virtual tables in which the contents are defined by a SQL query that references one or more tables. These views support multiple SQL query engines, so you can access the same view across different AWS services. Administrators can control underlying data access using the rich SQL dialect provided by AWS Glue 5.0 Spark jobs. Access is managed with AWS Lake Formation permissions, including named resource grants, data filters, and lake formation tags. All requests are logged in AWS CloudTrail. AWS Glue Data Catalog views is generally available on AWS Glue 5.0, in all AWS Glue 5.0 regions. To learn more, visit the AWS Glue product page and our documentation.

  • Amazon RDS for PostgreSQL, MySQL, and MariaDB now supports M8g and R8g database instances in additional AWS Regions
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 14, 2025 at 6:25 pm

    Amazon Relational Database Service (RDS) for PostgreSQL, MySQL, and MariaDB now supports AWS Graviton4-based M8g database instances in the Europe (Spain), Europe (Stockholm), and Europe (London) Regions and R8g database instances in Europe (Ireland), Europe (Spain), Europe (Stockholm), Asia Pacific (Mumbai), Asia Pacific (Sydney), Asia Pacific (Tokyo) regions.  Graviton4-based instances provide up to a 40% performance improvement and up to 29% price/performance improvement for on-demand pricing over Graviton3-based instances of equivalent sizes on Amazon RDS open source databases, depending on database engine, version, and workload. M8g and R8g database instances are available on Amazon RDS for PostgreSQL version 17.1 and higher, 16.1 and higher, 15.2 and higher, 14.5 and higher, and 13.8 and higher. M8g and R8g database instances are available on Amazon RDS for MySQL version 8.0.32 and higher, and Amazon RDS for MariaDB version 11.4.3 and higher, 10.11.7 and higher, 10.6.13 and higher, 10.5.20 and higher, and 10.4.29 and higher. For more details on these instances and supported versions for each region, refer to the Amazon RDS User Guide. Get started by creating a fully managed M8g or R8g database instance using the Amazon RDS Management Console. For complete information on pricing and regional availability, please refer to the Amazon RDS pricing page. For information on specific engine versions that support these DB instance types, please see the Amazon RDS documentation.

  • Amazon Aurora now supports R8g database instances in additional AWS Regions
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 14, 2025 at 6:25 pm

    AWS Graviton4-based R8g database instances are now generally available for Amazon Aurora with PostgreSQL compatibility and Amazon Aurora with MySQL compatibility in Europe (Ireland), Europe (Spain), Europe (Stockholm), Asia Pacific (Mumbai), Asia Pacific (Sydney), Asia Pacific (Tokyo) regions. R8g instances offer larger instance sizes, up to 48xlarge and features an 8:1 ratio of memory to vCPU, and the latest DDR5 memory. Graviton4-based instances provide up to a 40% performance improvement and up to 29% price/performance improvement for on-demand pricing over Graviton3-based instances of equivalent sizes on Amazon Aurora databases, depending on database engine, version, and workload. AWS Graviton4 processors are the latest generation of custom-designed AWS Graviton processors built on the AWS Nitro System. R8g DB instances are available with new 24xlarge and 48xlarge sizes. With these new sizes, R8g DB instances offer up to 192 vCPU, up to 50Gbps enhanced networking bandwidth, and up to 40Gbps of bandwidth to the Amazon Elastic Block Store (Amazon EBS). You can spin up Gravitona4 R8g database instances in the Amazon RDS Management Console or using the AWS CLI. Upgrading a database instance to Graviton4 requires a simple instance type modification. For more details, refer to the Aurora documentation. Amazon Aurora is designed for unparalleled high performance and availability at global scale with full MySQL and PostgreSQL compatibility. It provides built-in security, continuous backups, serverless compute, up to 15 read replicas, automated multi-Region replication, and integrations with other AWS services. To get started with Amazon Aurora, take a look at our getting started page.

  • Meta’s Llama 3.2 models are now available for fine-tuning in Amazon Bedrock
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 14, 2025 at 6:00 pm

    Amazon Bedrock now supports fine-tuning for Meta’s Llama 3.2 models (1B, 3B, 11B, and 90B), enabling businesses to customize these generative AI models with their own data. Llama 3.2 models are available in various sizes, from small (1B and 3B) to medium-sized multimodal models (11B and 90B). Llama 3.2 11B and 90B models are the first in the Llama series to support both text and vision tasks, achieved by integrating image encoder representations into the language model. Fine-tuning allows you to adapt Llama 3.2 models for domain-specific tasks, enhancing performance for specialized use cases. The Llama 3.2 90B model excels in advanced reasoning, long-form text generation, coding, multilingual translation, and image reasoning tasks such as captioning, visual question answering, and document analysis. The Llama 3.2 11B model is designed for content creation, conversational AI, and enterprise applications, with strong performance in text summarization, sentiment analysis, and visual understanding. For resource-constrained scenarios, the lightweight Llama 3.2 1B and 3B models enable on-device applications, excelling in tasks like text summarization, classification, and retrieval while ensuring low latency and enhanced privacy. By fine-tuning Llama 3.2 models in Amazon Bedrock, businesses can further enhance their capabilities for specialized applications, improving accuracy and relevance without needing to build models from scratch. You can fine-tune Llama 3.2 models in Amazon Bedrock in the US West (Oregon) AWS Region. For pricing, visit the Amazon Bedrock pricing page. To get started, see the Amazon Bedrock user guide and visit the Amazon Bedrock console.  

  • AWS CodePipeline introduces CodeBuild and Commands rule for stage level condition
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 14, 2025 at 6:00 pm

    AWS CodePipeline V2 type pipeline introduces CodeBuild rule and Commands rule that customers can use in their stage level condition to gate a pipeline execution. You can use CodeBuild rule to start a CodeBuild build or Commands rule to run simple shell commands before exiting a stage, when all actions in the stage have completed successfully, or when any action in the stage has failed. These new rules will provide more flexibility to your deployment process and enable more release safety controls. With these two rules, you can run integration tests as a stage level condition when your deployment completes and automatically roll back or fail your deployment when the integration tests fail. You can also run custom cleanup scripts using these new rules when the stage execution fails. To learn more about using these rules in stage level conditions in your pipeline, visit our documentation. For more information about AWS CodePipeline, visit our product page. This feature is available in all regions where AWS CodePipeline is supported.  

  • Amazon GuardDuty Extended Threat Detection now available in AWS GovCloud (US) and China Regions
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 14, 2025 at 6:00 pm

    Amazon GuardDuty Extended Threat Detection is now automatically available in AWS GovCloud (US) and China Regions. This capability allows you to identify sophisticated, multi-stage attacks targeting your AWS accounts, workloads, and data. You can now use new attack sequence findings that cover multiple resources and data sources over an extensive time period, allowing you to spend less time on first-level analysis and more time responding to critical-severity threats to minimize business impact. GuardDuty Extended Threat Detection uses artificial intelligence and machine learning algorithms trained at AWS scale and automatically correlates security signals from across AWS services to detect critical threats. It identifies attack sequences, such as credential compromise followed by data exfiltration, and represents them as a single, critical-severity finding. The finding includes an incident summary, a detailed events timeline, mapping to MITRE ATT&CK® tactics and techniques, and remediation recommendations. GuardDuty Extended Threat Detection is also available in all AWS commercial Regions where GuardDuty is available. This capability is automatically enabled for all new and existing GuardDuty customers at no additional cost. You do not need to enable all GuardDuty protection plans. However, enabling additional protection plans such as GuardDuty S3 Protection will increase the breadth of security signals, allowing for more comprehensive threat analysis and coverage of attack scenarios. You can take action on findings directly from the GuardDuty console or via its integrations with AWS Security Hub and Amazon EventBridge. To get started, visit the Amazon GuardDuty product page or try GuardDuty free for 30 days on the AWS Free Tier.  

  • Amazon EMR Serverless Streaming jobs is now available in the AWS GovCloud (US) Regions
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 14, 2025 at 5:55 pm

    Amazon EMR Serverless is a serverless option in Amazon EMR that makes it simple for data engineers and data scientists to run open-source big data analytics frameworks without configuring, managing, and scaling clusters or servers. Today, we are excited to announce that Amazon EMR Serverless Streaming jobs, which enables you to continuously analyze and process streaming data, is now available in the AWS GovCloud (US) Regions. Streaming has become vital for businesses to gain continuous insights from data sources like sensors, IoT devices, and web logs. However, processing streaming data can be challenging due to requirements such as high availability, resilience to failures, and integration with streaming services. Amazon EMR Serverless Streaming jobs has built-in features to addresses these challenges. It offers high availability through multi-AZ (Availability Zone) resiliency by automatically failing over to healthy AZs. It also offers increased resiliency through automatic job retries on failures and log management features like log rotation and compaction, preventing the accumulation of log files that might lead to job failures. In addition, Amazon EMR Serverless Streaming jobs support processing data from streaming services like self-managed Apache Kafka clusters, Amazon Managed Streaming for Apache Kafka, and now is integrated with Amazon Kinesis Data Streams using a new built-in Amazon Kinesis Data Streams Connector, making it easier to build end-to-end streaming pipelines. To get started, visit the Amazon EMR Serverless Streaming jobs page in the Amazon EMR Serverless User Guide.

  • Amazon Kinesis Data Streams now supports Internet Protocol version 6
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 14, 2025 at 5:55 pm

    Amazon Kinesis Data Streams now allows customers to make API requests over Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6). Customers now have the option of using either IPv6 or IPv4 when sending requests over dual-stack public endpoints. Kinesis Data Streams allows users to capture, process, and store data streams in real time at any scale. IPv6 increases the number of available addresses by several orders of magnitude, so customers will no longer need to manage overlapping address spaces. Many devices and networks today already use IPv6, and now they can easily write to and read from data streams. Support for IPv6 with Kinesis Data Streams is available in all Regions where Kinesis Data Streams is available, except for AWS GovCloud (US) and China Regions. See here for a full listing of our Regions. To learn more about Kinesis Data Streams, please refer to our Developer Guide.

  • Amazon EMR Serverless achieves FedRAMP High authorization
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 14, 2025 at 5:30 pm

    Amazon EMR Serverless is now a FedRAMP High authorized service in the AWS GovCloud (US-East) and AWS GovCloud (US-West) Regions. Federal agencies, public sector organizations and other enterprises with FedRAMP High compliance requirements can now leverage EMR Serverless to run Apache Spark and Hive workloads. Amazon EMR Serverless is a serverless option that makes it simple for data analysts and engineers to run open-source big data analytics frameworks without configuring, managing, and scaling clusters or servers. The Federal Risk and Authorization Management Program (FedRAMP) is a US government-wide program that delivers a standard approach to the security assessment, authorization, and continuous monitoring for cloud products and services. To get started with Amazon EMR Serverless, visit the User Guide.  

  • AWS CodeConnections adds support for new condition key
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 14, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    AWS CodeConnections now provides greater control to manage the creation of hosts with a new IAM condition key for self-managed GitLab/GitHub Enterprise Server hosts. The new condition key allows you to set up IAM policies to specify the VPC you want all connections to use when accessing your repositories. With today’s release, AWS CodeConnections has added a condition key that allows you to enforce policies related to creating or updating hosts to use a specified VPC ID. The new condition key (codeconnections:VpcId) allows you to specify the ID of the VPC you want the corresponding host resource to use. This gives greater control to admins to manage traffic through VPCs related to specific use cases. For example, you can now centralize all use of repository access to a single VPC. To learn more about using the new condition key, visit our documentation. To learn more about what connections in AWS CodeConnections are and how they work, visit our documentation.

  • AWS announces new AWS Direct Connect location in Lisbon, Portugal
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 14, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Today, AWS announced the opening of a new AWS Direct Connect location within the Equinix LS1 data center near Lisbon, Portugal. By connecting your network to AWS at the new location, you gain private, direct access to all public AWS Regions (except those in China), AWS GovCloud Regions, and AWS Local Zones. This site is the first AWS Direct Connect location within Portugal. The new Direct Connect location offers dedicated 10 Gbps and 100 Gbps connections with MACsec encryption available. The Direct Connect service enables you to establish a private, physical network connection between AWS and your data center, office, or colocation environment. These private connections can provide a more consistent network experience than those made over the public internet. For more information on the over 145 Direct Connect locations worldwide, visit the locations section of the Direct Connect product detail pages. Or, visit our getting started page to learn more about how to purchase and deploy Direct Connect.

  • Amazon RDS for SQL Server supports new minor version in February 2025
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 14, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    A new minor version of Microsoft SQL Server is now available on Amazon RDS for SQL Server, providing performance enhancements and security fixes. Amazon RDS for SQL Server now supports this latest minor version of SQL Server 2019 across the Express, Web, Standard, and Enterprise editions. We encourage you to upgrade your Amazon RDS for SQL Server database instances at your convenience. You can upgrade with just a few clicks in the Amazon RDS Management Console or by using the AWS CLI. Learn more about upgrading your database instances from the Amazon RDS User Guide. The new minor version is SQL Server 2019 CU31 15.0.4420.2. This minor version is available in all AWS commercial regions where Amazon RDS for SQL Server databases are available, including the AWS GovCloud (US) Regions. Amazon RDS for SQL Server makes it simple to set up, operate, and scale SQL Server deployments in the cloud. See Amazon RDS for SQL Server Pricing for pricing details and regional availability.

  • Amazon S3 Access Grants simplify authentication when using both IAM and Identity Provider permissions
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 14, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Amazon S3 Access Grants now authenticate based on the union of both Identity Provider (IdP) and AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) permissions. This means customers can use AWS machine learning and analytics services such as Amazon SageMaker Unified Studio, Amazon Redshift, and AWS Glue to request access to their S3 data, and S3 Access Grants will grant access to their data after evaluating both their IdP and IAM permissions. Now, S3 Access Grants evaluate both IAM and IdP permissions so you no longer have to choose between identity contexts when requesting access to S3. With just a few clicks in the AWS Management Console or a few lines of code using the AWS SDK, you can map S3 permissions to users and groups in an existing corporate directory, such as Entra ID and Okta, or to an IAM user or role. S3 Access Grants automatically update S3 permissions based on end user group membership as users are added and removed from groups in the IdP. Amazon S3 Access Grants are available in all AWS Regions where AWS IAM Identity Center is available. For pricing details, visit Amazon S3 pricing. To learn more about S3 Access Grants, visit the S3 User Guide.  

  • Amazon Data Firehose now delivers real-time streaming data into Amazon S3 Tables
    by aws@amazon.com (Recent Announcements) on March 14, 2025 at 5:00 pm

    Today, we are excited to announce the general availability of Amazon Data Firehose (Firehose) integration with Amazon S3 Tables, a feature that enables customers to deliver real-time streaming data into Amazon S3 Tables without requiring any code development or multi-step processes. Firehose can acquire streaming data from Amazon Kinesis Data Streams, Amazon MSK, Direct PUT API, and AWS Services such as AWS WAF web ACL logs, Amazon VPC Flow Logs. It can then deliver this data to destinations like Amazon S3, Amazon Redshift, OpenSearch, Splunk, Snowflake, and others for analytics. Now, with the Amazon S3 Table integration, customers can stream data from any of these sources directly into Amazon S3 Tables. As a serverless service, Firehose allows customers to simply setup a stream by configuring the source and destination properties, and pay based on bytes processed. The new feature also enables customers to route records in a data stream to different Amazon S3 tables based on the content of the incoming record. Additionally, customers can automate processing for data correction and right-to-forget scenarios by applying row-level update or delete operations in the destination S3 tables. To get started, visit Amazon Data Firehose documentation and console.  

Top 60 AWS Solution Architect Associate Exam Tips

Top 100 AWS Solutions Architect Associate Certification Exam Questions and Answers Dump SAA-C03

What is Google Workspace?
Google Workspace is a cloud-based productivity suite that helps teams communicate, collaborate and get things done from anywhere and on any device. It's simple to set up, use and manage, so your business can focus on what really matters.

Watch a video or find out more here.

Here are some highlights:
Business email for your domain
Look professional and communicate as you@yourcompany.com. Gmail's simple features help you build your brand while getting more done.

Access from any location or device
Check emails, share files, edit documents, hold video meetings and more, whether you're at work, at home or on the move. You can pick up where you left off from a computer, tablet or phone.

Enterprise-level management tools
Robust admin settings give you total command over users, devices, security and more.

Sign up using my link https://referworkspace.app.goo.gl/Q371 and get a 14-day trial, and message me to get an exclusive discount when you try Google Workspace for your business.

Google Workspace Business Standard Promotion code for the Americas 63F733CLLY7R7MM 63F7D7CPD9XXUVT 63FLKQHWV3AEEE6 63JGLWWK36CP7WM
Email me for more promo codes

Active Hydrating Toner, Anti-Aging Replenishing Advanced Face Moisturizer, with Vitamins A, C, E & Natural Botanicals to Promote Skin Balance & Collagen Production, 6.7 Fl Oz

Age Defying 0.3% Retinol Serum, Anti-Aging Dark Spot Remover for Face, Fine Lines & Wrinkle Pore Minimizer, with Vitamin E & Natural Botanicals

Firming Moisturizer, Advanced Hydrating Facial Replenishing Cream, with Hyaluronic Acid, Resveratrol & Natural Botanicals to Restore Skin's Strength, Radiance, and Resilience, 1.75 Oz

Skin Stem Cell Serum

Smartphone 101 - Pick a smartphone for me - android or iOS - Apple iPhone or Samsung Galaxy or Huawei or Xaomi or Google Pixel

Can AI Really Predict Lottery Results? We Asked an Expert.

Ace the 2023 AWS Solutions Architect Associate SAA-C03 Exam with Confidence Pass the 2023 AWS Certified Machine Learning Specialty MLS-C01 Exam with Flying Colors

List of Freely available programming books - What is the single most influential book every Programmers should read



#BlackOwned #BlackEntrepreneurs #BlackBuniness #AWSCertified #AWSCloudPractitioner #AWSCertification #AWSCLFC02 #CloudComputing #AWSStudyGuide #AWSTraining #AWSCareer #AWSExamPrep #AWSCommunity #AWSEducation #AWSBasics #AWSCertified #AWSMachineLearning #AWSCertification #AWSSpecialty #MachineLearning #AWSStudyGuide #CloudComputing #DataScience #AWSCertified #AWSSolutionsArchitect #AWSArchitectAssociate #AWSCertification #AWSStudyGuide #CloudComputing #AWSArchitecture #AWSTraining #AWSCareer #AWSExamPrep #AWSCommunity #AWSEducation #AzureFundamentals #AZ900 #MicrosoftAzure #ITCertification #CertificationPrep #StudyMaterials #TechLearning #MicrosoftCertified #AzureCertification #TechBooks

Top 1000 Canada Quiz and trivia: CANADA CITIZENSHIP TEST- HISTORY - GEOGRAPHY - GOVERNMENT- CULTURE - PEOPLE - LANGUAGES - TRAVEL - WILDLIFE - HOCKEY - TOURISM - SCENERIES - ARTS - DATA VISUALIZATION
zCanadian Quiz and Trivia, Canadian History, Citizenship Test, Geography, Wildlife, Secenries, Banff, Tourism

Top 1000 Africa Quiz and trivia: HISTORY - GEOGRAPHY - WILDLIFE - CULTURE - PEOPLE - LANGUAGES - TRAVEL - TOURISM - SCENERIES - ARTS - DATA VISUALIZATION
Africa Quiz, Africa Trivia, Quiz, African History, Geography, Wildlife, Culture

Exploring the Pros and Cons of Visiting All Provinces and Territories in Canada.
Exploring the Pros and Cons of Visiting All Provinces and Territories in Canada

Exploring the Advantages and Disadvantages of Visiting All 50 States in the USA
Exploring the Advantages and Disadvantages of Visiting All 50 States in the USA


Health Health, a science-based community to discuss human health

Today I Learned (TIL) You learn something new every day; what did you learn today? Submit interesting and specific facts about something that you just found out here.

Reddit Science This community is a place to share and discuss new scientific research. Read about the latest advances in astronomy, biology, medicine, physics, social science, and more. Find and submit new publications and popular science coverage of current research.

Reddit Sports Sports News and Highlights from the NFL, NBA, NHL, MLB, MLS, and leagues around the world.

Turn your dream into reality with Google Workspace: It’s free for the first 14 days.
Get 20% off Google Google Workspace (Google Meet) Standard Plan with  the following codes:
Get 20% off Google Google Workspace (Google Meet) Standard Plan with  the following codes: 96DRHDRA9J7GTN6 96DRHDRA9J7GTN6
63F733CLLY7R7MM
63F7D7CPD9XXUVT
63FLKQHWV3AEEE6
63JGLWWK36CP7WM
63KKR9EULQRR7VE
63KNY4N7VHCUA9R
63LDXXFYU6VXDG9
63MGNRCKXURAYWC
63NGNDVVXJP4N99
63P4G3ELRPADKQU
With Google Workspace, Get custom email @yourcompany, Work from anywhere; Easily scale up or down
Google gives you the tools you need to run your business like a pro. Set up custom email, share files securely online, video chat from any device, and more.
Google Workspace provides a platform, a common ground, for all our internal teams and operations to collaboratively support our primary business goal, which is to deliver quality information to our readers quickly.
 Get 20% off Google Workspace (Google Meet) Business Plan (AMERICAS): M9HNXHX3WC9H7YE
C37HCAQRVR7JTFK
C3AE76E7WATCTL9
C3C3RGUF9VW6LXE
C3D9LD4L736CALC
C3EQXV674DQ6PXP
C3G9M3JEHXM3XC7
C3GGR3H4TRHUD7L
C3LVUVC3LHKUEQK
C3PVGM4CHHPMWLE
C3QHQ763LWGTW4C
Even if you’re small, you want people to see you as a professional business. If you’re still growing, you need the building blocks to get you where you want to be. I’ve learned so much about business through Google Workspace—I can’t imagine working without it. (Email us for more codes)